For details on how to specify the setting, see the operation manual for the black- and-white printer. Note. The settings that you can change in the FC1 system for ...
For details on how to specify the setting, see the operation manual for the ... To have this output controlled manually, tap the green arrow button and tap Manual on the screen that...
FC1
User Guide
Manufacturer FUJIFILM SonoSite, Inc. 21919 30th Drive SE Bothell, WA 98021 USA T: 1-888-482-9449 or 1-425-951-1200 F: 1-425-951-1201
EC Authorized Representative FUJIFILM SonoSite B.V. Joop Geesinkweg 140 1114 AB Amsterdam, The Netherlands
Australia Sponsor FUJIFILM SonoSite Australasia Pty Ltd 114 Old Pittwater Road BROOKVALE, NSW, 2100 Australia
Caution
United States federal law restricts this device to sale by or on the order of a physician.
SonoSite and the SonoSite logo are registered and unregistered trademarks of FUJIFILM SonoSite, Inc. in various jurisdictions. DICOM is a registered trademark of the National Electrical Manufacturers Association. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. Part Number: P18536-07 Publication Date: June 2019 Copyright © 2019 FUJIFILM SonoSite, Inc. All Rights reserved.
CONTENTS
Chapter 1: Introduction
Conventions .....................................................................................................................1 Customer comments ....................................................................................................1 Open-source software ..................................................................................................2
Chapter 2: Getting Started
About the system ...........................................................................................................3 System controls .....................................................................................................5 Screen layout ..........................................................................................................8 Touch panel .............................................................................................................8
Preparing the system ....................................................................................................9 Installing or removing the battery ............................................................... 10 Using AC power and charging the battery ............................................... 11
Turning the system on or off ................................................................................... 12 Logging in as a user .......................................................................................... 13 Urgent log in ........................................................................................................ 13 Logging out .......................................................................................................... 14 Waking up the system from sleep mode ................................................... 14 Sorting a list ......................................................................................................... 14 Entering text ........................................................................................................ 15 Control panel ....................................................................................................... 16
Preparing transducers ............................................................................................... 16 Connecting and removing transducers ..................................................... 18
Basic operating steps ................................................................................................. 18 Intended uses ............................................................................................................... 19
Abdominal imaging applications ................................................................. 19 Cardiac imaging applications ........................................................................ 20 Gynecology and infertility imaging applications ................................... 20 Interventional imaging applications .......................................................... 20 Pediatric and neonatal imaging applications .......................................... 20 Superficial imaging applications .................................................................. 20 Vascular imaging applications ...................................................................... 20
Chapter 3: System Setup
Security ........................................................................................................................... 21 About login permissions ................................................................................. 21 Adding and managing user accounts ........................................................ 22
iii
CONTENTS
Exporting exam data ........................................................................................ 25 Disposal ................................................................................................................. 25 Specifying notification and Doppler volumes .................................................. 25 Setting the trackball speed ..................................................................................... 26 Display setting .............................................................................................................. 27 Power Setting: Configuring power conservation ............................................ 28 Configuring Store buttons ....................................................................................... 29 Configuring archiving (image export) ................................................................. 32 Assigning functions to function buttons ........................................................... 34 Defining the input of patient information ......................................................... 36 Configuring examination image appearance ................................................... 37 Configuring peripheral devices ............................................................................. 40 Adjusting printer settings ............................................................................... 40 Adjusting foot-switch settings ...................................................................... 41 Barcode reader and magnetic card reader setting ................................ 42 Specifying network settings .................................................................................... 43 Server connection settings ............................................................................. 44 Specifying DICOM settings ............................................................................. 45 DICOM MWL setting .......................................................................................... 46 DICOM storage operation ............................................................................... 48 Setting timing for DICOM network storage .............................................. 50 Calibrating the display .............................................................................................. 50 Enabling automatic image deletion (Data Configuration) ........................... 51 Database optimization .............................................................................................. 52 Output queue (examination/image) operation (Output Manage) ................................................................................................ 53 Positioning the body-mark display ....................................................................... 53 Managing annotation lists ....................................................................................... 54 Managing measurement functions ...................................................................... 56 Configuring measurements for all modes ................................................ 56 Specifying 2D-mode default measurement tools .................................. 57 Specifying the CF-mode or the M-mode default measurement tool .......................................................................................................................... 58 Configuring PW/CW/TDI-mode measurements ..................................... 59 Configuring preset-specific measurements ............................................. 60 Setting Auto IMT (intima-media thickness) measurement (Optional) .............................................................................................................. 61 Defining preset settings for examination types ............................................... 61 Assigning a function to the FREEZE button ............................................. 63 Selecting the default annotation type ....................................................... 63 Selecting ready-made annotation lists ...................................................... 64 Selecting the priority cursor for steer-link priority ................................ 64
iv
CONTENTS
Selecting the area for applying sound-speed compensation ........... 64 Starting the electrocardiogram automatically ........................................ 65 Selecting the standard of acoustic output ............................................... 65 Setting the calculation unit ............................................................................ 66 Setting Priority/Preset for each transducer .............................................. 66 Configuring examination defaults (Exam Type Setting) ...................... 67 Changing examination information display settings (Exam Type Format) .......................................................................................... 68 Changing patient information display settings ...................................... 69 Restart setting (reexamination setting) ..................................................... 70 Backing up and restoring presets ......................................................................... 70 Backing up and restoring presets ................................................................ 71 Backing up and restoring system settings ................................................ 72 Backing up and restoring the Patient Log ................................................ 73 Resetting user configuration .................................................................................. 74 Formatting the USB memory .................................................................................. 75 Using USB memory ..................................................................................................... 76 Inserting a USB memory .................................................................................. 76 Removing a USB memory ............................................................................... 77 Formatting the SSD .................................................................................................... 77 Viewing system information ................................................................................... 77 Changing site information settings ...................................................................... 78 Setting the system date and time ......................................................................... 78 Setting the date and time display formats ........................................................ 79 Setting the language to display ............................................................................. 79 Setting the login method for the FC1 .................................................................. 80 Setting the license ...................................................................................................... 80 Logs .................................................................................................................................. 81 Setting log acquisition ..................................................................................... 81 Setting audit log acquisition .......................................................................... 82
Chapter 4: Imaging
Getting familiar with the examination screen .................................................. 85 Information in the header ............................................................................... 86 Information in the footer ................................................................................. 87
Imaging modes ............................................................................................................ 89 2D mode ................................................................................................................ 89 M mode ................................................................................................................. 96 CD and PD modes .............................................................................................. 99 PW, CW, and TDI modes .................................................................................105
v
CONTENTS
Controlling the image .............................................................................................110 Showing or hiding data on the monitor ..................................................110 Magnifying the image ....................................................................................111 Adjusting the depth and gain of the image ...........................................111 Setting the sound speed ...............................................................................112 Setting the sweep speed ...............................................................................112 Setting the transmission frequency ..........................................................113 Setting the transmission-output level ......................................................113 Raising or lowering the emphasis of edges ...........................................113 Raising or lowering the level of sharpness .............................................114 Adjusting image tone .....................................................................................114 Adjusting persistence .....................................................................................114 Setting the range of contrast .......................................................................114 Setting the focus depth .................................................................................115 Setting the color scale ....................................................................................115 Setting the filter cutoff frequency .............................................................116 Optimizing the image ....................................................................................116 Sizing mode images relative to each other ............................................117
Examination procedures ........................................................................................118 Imaging modes and exams available by transducer ....................................119 Entering patient information ................................................................................124
Patient information fields .............................................................................126 Obtaining patient information by bar code or card reader ..............129 Entering examination information .....................................................................130 Precautions before starting an exam ........................................................131 Opening a patient's existing record from Patient Log ........................132 Opening an existing examination record from USB memory ..........132 Starting an examination from the DICOM work list ............................132 Deleting patient information from the DICOM worklist ....................137 Starting an examination from the Patient Log screen .................................137 Starting an examination from patient information (Optional, Japan only) ....................................................................................137 Starting an examination from orders (Optional, Japan only) ..........139 Restarting an examination ....................................................................................140 Working with the Patient Log screen .................................................................140 Finding patient records in the Patient Log screen ...............................141 Acquiring logs ...................................................................................................142 Deleting logs .....................................................................................................142 Editing patient examination records ........................................................143 Deleting patient examination records .....................................................143 Working with the Examination List screen ......................................................143 Obtaining patient information from USB memory .......................................145
vi
CONTENTS
Selecting the preset .................................................................................................146 Displaying or hiding a preset .......................................................................146 Working with imaging presets ....................................................................147
Selecting a transducer .............................................................................................153 Precautions when connecting or disconnecting a transducer .......153
Viewing in Dual-screen mode ..............................................................................155 Controlling the display of images in Dual-screen mode ...................156 Viewing in Simultaneous Dual-screen mode .........................................158
Using the M or D cursor ..........................................................................................159 Viewing the ECG waveform display ....................................................................160
The ECG waveform and display formats ..................................................160 Displaying and configuring the ECG waveform ....................................161 Performing cine search while the ECG waveform is on-screen .......162 Using triplex mode ...................................................................................................162 Performing a needle procedure ...........................................................................163 Preparing for a needle procedure ..............................................................164 Needle procedure precautions ...................................................................164 Verifying the needle path .............................................................................165 Using the needle guide .................................................................................169 Needle profiling (Optional) ..........................................................................171 Using Cine mode .......................................................................................................172 Cine search .........................................................................................................172 Annotating images ...................................................................................................174 Creating text annotations .............................................................................175 Closing the annotation screen ....................................................................180 Displaying annotations ..................................................................................181 Using body marks .....................................................................................................181 Displaying a body mark .................................................................................181 Selecting body marks registered in a preset ..........................................183 Closing the Body Mark screen .....................................................................183 Switching the TI type ...............................................................................................183 Playing clips back ......................................................................................................184 Displaying a raw-data image ................................................................................184 Deleting raw-data images ............................................................................186 Transferring images via a network ......................................................................186 Printing images ..........................................................................................................187 Working with archived examinations and their images .............................188 The Archive screen and controls ................................................................188 Selecting archived examinations ...............................................................188 Locking archived examinations ..................................................................190 Exporting archived examinations ..............................................................190 Deleting archived exams ...............................................................................190
vii
CONTENTS
Viewing archived exam images ..................................................................191 Deleting an archived raw-data image ......................................................192 Printing archived images ..............................................................................193 Moving archived examinations over a network ...................................194 Storing examination images .................................................................................195 Reviewing examination images .................................................................196 Deleting images ...............................................................................................197 Printing exam images .....................................................................................198 Managing the output queue of examinations and images .......................199 Changing the transfer destination .............................................................200 Changing printers ............................................................................................202 Deleting an examination or image from the queue ...........................202 Exporting examination data .................................................................................203 Importing examination data .................................................................................205 Using a USB keyboard .............................................................................................208 Ending an examination ...........................................................................................209
Chapter 5: Measurements and Calculations
Measurement overview ..........................................................................................211 User interface for measurement .................................................................212
Built-in measurement functions ..........................................................................214 Measurement operation overview ............................................................214 Measuring at points ........................................................................................216 Trace ......................................................................................................................223 Figure ....................................................................................................................226 Line ........................................................................................................................231 Auto Trace ...........................................................................................................233 Measurement using auxiliary lines ............................................................234 Deleting measurement tools .......................................................................236 Setting and using the Set and Next button ...........................................237 Using the Set Default button .......................................................................237 Specifying settings ..........................................................................................238
Basic measurement ..................................................................................................238 Functional overview .......................................................................................238 Measurement results display .......................................................................243 2D mode ..............................................................................................................246 CD mode .............................................................................................................258 M mode ...............................................................................................................260 D mode ................................................................................................................263 Settings ................................................................................................................274
viii
CONTENTS
Calculation formula .........................................................................................274 Abbreviations ....................................................................................................278 Cardiac measurement .............................................................................................279 Functional overview .......................................................................................279 Cross-sectional views for measurement ..................................................284 Built-in measurement functions .................................................................287 Specifying the measures that are visible on CALCS tabs ...................302 All modes: Accessing the cardiac measurement tabs .........................303 All modes: Deleting measurements ..........................................................303 2D (B) mode .......................................................................................................303 M mode ...............................................................................................................315 D mode ................................................................................................................320 Aortic stenosis ...................................................................................................334 Aortic regurgitation ........................................................................................337 Mitral stenosis ...................................................................................................344 Mitral regurgitation .........................................................................................350 Pulmonic regurgitation ..................................................................................355 Tricuspid valve flow .........................................................................................357 Tricuspid regurgitation ..................................................................................359 Qp/Qs ...................................................................................................................360 MPI (Myocardial Performance Index) ........................................................363 Worksheet/Report ...........................................................................................365 Terms and abbreviations ...............................................................................367 Vascular measurement ............................................................................................373 Mode measurement functions ....................................................................374 Built-in mode measurement functions ....................................................375 2D (B) mode .......................................................................................................396 Auto IMT (intima-media thickness) measurement (Optional) .........403 D mode ................................................................................................................405 Measurement of upper and lower extremity artery ............................409 Measurement of upper and lower extremity venous .........................410 Vascular worksheet and report ...................................................................412 Abdominal Measurement ......................................................................................416 Functional Overview .......................................................................................416 Built-in Measurement Functions ................................................................418 2D mode ..............................................................................................................421 D-mode ................................................................................................................431 2D mode ..............................................................................................................436 Worksheet/Report ...........................................................................................437 Terms and Abbreviations ..............................................................................440 Urological Measurement ........................................................................................442 Functional Overview .......................................................................................442
ix
CONTENTS
Built-in Measurement Functions ................................................................443 2D mode ..............................................................................................................444 D-mode ................................................................................................................454 Worksheet/Report ...........................................................................................456 Terms and abbreviations ...............................................................................458
Chapter 6: References for Measurement Accuracy
Measurement accuracy ...........................................................................................461 Sources of measurement errors ...........................................................................463 Measurement publications and terminology .................................................463
Cardiac references ...........................................................................................463 Obstetrical references ....................................................................................473 General references ...........................................................................................474
Chapter 7: Troubleshooting and maintenance
Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................477 System does not turn on ...............................................................................477 System image quality is poor ......................................................................477 There is no CPD image ...................................................................................477 There is no color image ..................................................................................478 There are no measurement selections .....................................................478 Printing does not work ..................................................................................478 System does not recognize the transducer ............................................479 System does not mount the USB memory .............................................479 System does not accept the data imported from USB .......................479 The external video is not working .............................................................479 Patient information cannot be edited during examinations ...........479 Patient information cannot be edited after examinations ...............480 Edited patient information is not reflected to the image .................480 Barcode cannot be read correctly ..............................................................480 Patient information link with C@RNACORE cannot be used ............486 Order link with C@RNACORE cannot be used .......................................486 When using order link with C@RNACORE, the examination cannot be started with the transducer I want to use ..........................487
Software licensing ....................................................................................................487 Maintenance ...............................................................................................................488
x
CONTENTS
Chapter 8: Cleaning and disinfecting
Before getting started .............................................................................................489 Determining the required cleaning and disinfecting level ........................490
Spaulding classifications ...............................................................................490 Clean and disinfect system and transducer to a high level (semi-critical uses) ...........................................................................................491 Clean and disinfect system and transducer to a low level (non-critical uses) .............................................................................................496 Storing the transducer ............................................................................................499 Transporting the transducer .................................................................................499 Accessories ..................................................................................................................501
Chapter 9: Safety
Ergonomic considerations .....................................................................................507 Positioning the system ............................................................................................508 Positioning yourself ..................................................................................................509 Taking breaks, exercising, and varying activities ...........................................510 Electrical safety ..........................................................................................................510
Electrical safety classification ......................................................................514 Equipment safety ......................................................................................................515 Battery safety ..............................................................................................................516 Clinical safety ..............................................................................................................518 Hazardous materials .................................................................................................519 Electromagnetic compatibility .............................................................................519 Electrostatic discharge ............................................................................................521 Separation distance ..................................................................................................522 Compatible accessories and peripherals ..........................................................522 Guidance and manufacturer's declaration .......................................................525 Immunity testing requirements ...........................................................................528 Labeling symbols ......................................................................................................528
The label position on the FC1 system .......................................................532 Specifications ..............................................................................................................532
Dimensions ........................................................................................................532 Environmental limits .......................................................................................533 Electrical specifications ..................................................................................533 Battery specifications .....................................................................................534 Standards .....................................................................................................................534 Electrical safety standards ............................................................................534
xi
CONTENTS
EMC standards classification ........................................................................534 Acoustic standards ..........................................................................................534 Biocompatibility standards ..........................................................................535
Chapter 10: Acoustic Output
ALARA principle .........................................................................................................537 Applying the ALARA principle .....................................................................537 Direct controls ...................................................................................................538 Indirect controls ...............................................................................................539 Receiver controls ..............................................................................................539
Acoustic artifacts .......................................................................................................539 Guidelines for reducing MI and TI .......................................................................539 Output display ............................................................................................................540
MI and TI output display accuracy .............................................................540 Factors that contribute to display uncertainty ...............................................540 Related guidance documents ...............................................................................541 Transducer surface temperature rise .................................................................541 Acoustic output measurement ............................................................................542 In situ, derated, and water value intensities ....................................................542 Tissue models and equipment survey ...............................................................543 Acoustic output tables ............................................................................................544 Terms used in the acoustic output tables ........................................................601 Acoustic measurement precision and uncertainty .......................................602 Terms .............................................................................................................................603 Abbreviations .............................................................................................................605
Chapter 11: IT network
Functions ......................................................................................................................615 Network for connecting the device ....................................................................615 Specification for the connection .........................................................................615
Hardware specification ..................................................................................615 Software specification ....................................................................................615 Security ................................................................................................................616 Data flow ......................................................................................................................616 Measures when failures occur in IT networks .................................................617 Warnings and cautions for IT networks .............................................................618
xii
CHAPTER 1
Chapter 1: Introduction
This user guide provides information on preparing and using the FC1TM ultrasound system and on cleaning and disinfecting the system and transducers. It also provides references for calculations, system specifications, and safety and acoustic output information.
The guide is intended for a reader who is familiar with ultrasound technique and who has received training in sonography an clinical practices. Before using the system, you must receive such training.
See the applicable FUJIFILM SonoSite accessory user guide for information on using accessories and optional items. See the manufacturer's instructions for specific information about peripherals.
Conventions
The document follows these conventions:
A WARNING describes precautions necessary to prevent injury or loss of life. A Caution describes precautions necessary to protect the products. A Note provides supplemental information. Numbered and lettered steps must be performed in a specific order. Single-step procedures begin with this symbol: . Items in bulleted lists do not need to be performed in sequence.
Customer comments
Questions and comments are encouraged. FUJIFILM SonoSite is interested in your feedback regarding the system and the user guide. Please call FUJIFILM SonoSite at 888-482-9449 in the U.S. Outside the U.S., call the nearest FUJIFILM representative. You can also email FUJIFILM SonoSite at comments@sonosite.com.
For technical support, contact FUJIFILM SonoSite as follows.
Phone (U.S. or Canada)
Phone (Outside U.S. or Canada)
877-657-8118 425-951-1330, or call your local representative
Conventions
1
Fax E-mail Web Europe Service Center
425-951-6700 ffss-service@fujifilm.com www.sonosite.com Main: +31 20 751 2020 English support: +44 14 6234 1151 French support: +33 1 8288 0702 German support: +49 69 8088 4030 Italian support: +39 02 9475 3655 Spanish support: +34 91 123 8451
Open-source software
This product uses third party's software that is made available as open source software or free software. This software is provided "as is" with no warranty of any kind as to its merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose. For information on open source software used in this product, please see the attached CD. If you would like to obtain a copy of the source code, please contact FUJIFILM SonoSite Technical Support.
Note
FUJIFILM has successfully performed verification and validation testing on all third party software and has confirmed its suitability to be used in the FC1 system.
2
Open-source software
Chapter 1
CHAPTER 2
Chapter 2: Getting Started
About the system
The FC1 ultrasound system is a portable, software-controlled device using all-digital architecture. The system has multiple configurations and feature sets used to acquire and display high-resolution, real-time ultrasound images. Features available on your system depend on your system configuration, transducer, and exam type.
A license key is required to activate the software. For more information, see "Software licensing" on page 487.
Figure 2-1: System Front Features
1 Control panel 3 USB ports
2 Display 4 Handle
About the system
3
Figure 2-2: System Side Connectors
1 USB port 3 Earphone port
2 ECG
Figure 2-3: System Back Connectors
1 USB port 3 LAN port
2 HDMI port 4 Power connector
4
About the system
Chapter 2
System controls
Figure 2-4: System controls Table 2-1: System controls
Control
Used for
1
POWER button
Turning on/off FC1
FC1 User Guide
About the system
5
Table 2-1: System controls
Control
Used for
2
Menu buttons
PROBE button
Selecting the transducer.
PRESET button
Selecting the preset.
ARCHIVE button Storing the image stored at past examinations.
CURRENT VIEW
button
Viewing any images that have been stored in the current examination.
3
PATIENT button Toggling between the Patient Info screen and the examination screen.
4
F-key (F1, F2, F3) Carrying out a function assigned by the user.
For details on how to assign functions to the function buttons, see "Assigning functions to function buttons" on page 34 .
5
Mode buttons
2D button
Activating 2D mode.
C button
Activating and deactivating the Color Doppler (CD) mode.
D button
Activating and deactivating the Pulsed Wave Doppler (PW) mode.
M button
Activating and deactivating the M mode.
6
CALCS button
Performing measurements that are specific to a preset.
FUNCTION button
Selecting a trackball function from:
M/D cursor motion, Cine Search scroll, Caliper motion, Body Mark motion, Annotation motion, and ROI Zoom motion
FREQUENCY
button
Specifying the transmission frequency of the 2D (B) mode.
In CD, PD, PW, CW, and TDI (PW) modes, this button toggles to the function to change the scale in PRF (pulse repetition frequency).
7
MEASURE button Displaying the dynamic caliper or calculation menu (for frozen images).
Pressing this button twice in succession in the PW mode activates the Auto-Dop Trace function.
CINE button
Activating the Cine mode to perform cine playback.
DELETE button
Correcting measurement results during measurement.
8
Trackball
Moving the cursor, defining the size/position of ROI, positioning the measurement tools, etc.
6
About the system
Chapter 2
Table 2-1: System controls
Control
Used for
9
ANNOTATE button Entering arrows and annotations.
BODY MARK
button
Displaying or hiding the body patterns for the current examination.
SET button
Selecting a function.
10 FREEZE button
Halting active imaging to display a frozen image on the screen.
GAIN dial
Adjusting the gain of each screen mode.
11 Multi dial
Selecting from the following functions: Finely adjusting the Doppler angle in the PW mode. Rotating the transducer mark on each body pattern. Rotating the Arrow annotation mark. Deleting the trace line.
12 Store buttons
Storing or printing the ultrasound image currently displayed. For details on the setting of the STORE buttons, see "To configure Store buttons" on page 30.
13
DEPTH/ZOOM
button
DEPTH: Changing the imaging depth of the display. ZOOM: Magnifying the image.
14 L button/ R button
Activating the Dual screen mode and switching the active image.
F4 button
Selecting a function assigned by the user.
For details on how to assign functions to the function buttons, see "Assigning functions to function buttons" on page 34.
15
AUTO IMAGE
button
Enabling the image (brightness and resolution) optimization function.
16 DGC (Depth Gain Adjusting the gain for each depth of field. Control) keys
17 SYSTEM button Displaying the system configuration on the touch panel.
18 Dial menu buttons
Adjusting certain touch panel menu items.
19 Switch menu buttons
Each button corresponds to a function menu on the touch panel
FC1 User Guide
About the system
7
Screen layout
Following are instructions on how to use and modify elements of the unit such as the touch panel, lists, and changes you can make to keyboard functions.
Touch panel
Activate a function by tapping its button on the touch panel. The way that you operate the button depends on the type of the button.
To select a function, tap the function's button on the touch panel. The display may change to show that the function is active. For instance, some buttons acquire a small orange dot when you select them. When you tap the function again, the display shows that the function is no longer active.
If the function has a submenu, tapping the function's touch-panel button opens the submenu. If the submenu has multiple pages, you can navigate among the pages by tapping switch-menu button 4 (the rocker button under Page).
To make the submenu disappear, tap Cancel.
For details about using a function, see the description of each function.
Note
If a button displayed on the touch panel is gray, the button is disabled--that is, it is unavailable and you cannot select it.
While the submenu screen is visible, only the power button, DGC (depth-gain compensation) key, Store button, and a function button to which the image storage function is assigned are enabled.
Touch panel controls and dial menu buttons
Certain functions are associated with dial buttons. Use the menu dial buttons to change the functions that are associated with dial buttons.
To reset the value of functions with dial buttons
1 If the function that you are interested in is not active, tap it to make it active.
2 To change the function's value, turn the dial button.
Note
If there is no item beside the dial menu buttons on the right side of the touch panel, then none is available to assign to either button.
8
About the system
Chapter 2
Touch panel controls and switch menu buttons
Certain functions are associated with switch menu buttons. The switch menu buttons are numbered, from left to right, 1 through 5. Use the switch menu buttons to change the values of the functions that are associated with them.
To change the value of functions with switch menu buttons
1 If the function that you are interested in is not active, tap it to make it active.
2 To change the function's setting, press the top or bottom of the button.
Note
If there is no item above the switch menu buttons, then none is available to assign to either button.
Common operations on list screens
This section explains operations that are carried out on screens such as the Archive screen.
Table 2-2: What the touch panel buttons do
Touch panel button
What it does
Select All First/Last L/R Scroll Page
Tapping Select All toggles between selecting all the items in the list and clearing all the selections.
Pressing the upper side of switch menu button 1 (under First/Last) displays the first page of the list. Pressing the lower side displays the last page.
Pressing the upper side of switch menu button 2 (under L/R Scroll) scrolls the display to the right. Pressing the lower side scrolls the display to the left.
Pressing the upper side of switch menu button 3 (under Page) displays the previous page. Tapping the lower side displays the next page.
Preparing the system
Caution
To reduce the risk of tripping, do not allow the power cord to intrude into walkways or workspaces.
The FC1 system requires that the battery be installed and charging before you use it.
FC1 User Guide
Preparing the system
9
Installing or removing the battery
WARNING
To avoid injury to the operator and to prevent damage to the ultrasound system, inspect the battery for leaks before installation.
To avoid data loss and to conduct a safe system shutdown, always keep a battery in the system. For more information, see "Battery safety" on page 516.
Caution
Before using the ultrasound system, make sure the battery is installed.
To install the battery 1 Disconnect the power supply from the ultrasound system. 2 Turn the system upside down. 3 Place the battery into the battery compartment, at a slight angle. See Figure 2-5 4 Slide the battery inward until it locks into place.
Figure 2-5: Install the battery To remove the battery 1 Disconnect the power supply from the ultrasound system. 2 Turn the system upside down. 3 Insert your finger into the battery access port. 4 Press the battery release button on the side of the battery. 5 Lift the battery to remove it.
10
Preparing the system
Chapter 2
Using AC power and charging the battery
The battery charges when the system is connected to the AC power supply. A fully discharged battery recharges in fewer than five hours.
The system can run on AC power and charge the battery if AC power is connected to the system (or to the FC series stand to which the system is attached).
The system can run on battery power for up to one hour, depending on the imaging mode and the display brightness. When running on battery power, the system may not restart if the battery is low. To continue working when the battery is low, connect the system to AC power.
When using the system in the United States and running connected to a 240V supply system, connect the equipment using a center-tapped, single-phase supply circuit.
Caution
Verify that the hospital supply voltage corresponds to the power supply voltage range. See "Electrical specifications" on page 533.
During use of the FC1, do not touch the AC adapter, as it becomes and stays very hot, and there is risk of burns.
To operate the system using AC power
Caution
Be sure to keep the battery inserted in the system even if the system is connected to the AC power supply.
Install the FC1 in a place where you can easily connect or disconnect the AC power cord. The equipment is not provided with the AC mains power switch. To disconnect the equipment from mains, use the appliance coupler or mains plug on the power supply cord.
1 Connect the AC adapter to the power connector on the FC1 system. 2 Push the cable in firmly to ensure a secure attachment. 3 Connect the AC power cord from the FC1 power supply to a hospital-grade electrical outlet.
FC1 User Guide
Preparing the system
11
Turning the system on or off
WARNING
When opening or closing the monitor of the FC1, take care to not let your fingers be caught between the monitor and the control panel of the FC1.
Caution
Do not use the system if an error message appears on the display. If you see an error code: 1 Note the error code and turn the system off. 2 Call FUJIFILM SonoSite or your local representative.
The FC1 is powered by either AC or battery power.
The internal battery automatically charges if the AC adapter is connected to the FC1.
Caution
Use only with AC adapter provided by FUJIFILM SonoSite, PN P18011
To start the FC1 1 Make sure that the FC1 system is connected to a hospital-grade power source or that the battery of the FC1
is fully charged. 2 Connect a transducer. 3 Press the power button. 4 Check the screen display of the FC1. During initialization of the system, the opening screen appears on the main monitor and the touch panel, and all the buttons on the control panel are lit up. When initialization has completed:
The system automatically starts up in 2D-mode. A 2D-mode image appears in the image area. The buttons for the 2D-mode appear on the touch panel.
12
Turning the system on or off
Chapter 2
To shut down the FC1
Caution
Before you press the power button, make sure that you hear the sound indicating that the saving of data is complete. If you press the power button before you hear the data-save completion sound, the saved data may be erased.
Pay attention since pressing the power button 10 seconds or longer will forcibly shutdown the FC1. If you force shutdown of the system, data inconsistency may result. Force shutdown should be used only when the FC1 cannot be otherwise shut down.
Press the power button. The Power off indication appears on the main monitor and the touch panel, the operation of FC1 stops, and then the power is turned off.
Logging in as a user
If login settings are configured, login authentication is required when the system is started, restarted, or woken from sleep mode. For more information about user privileges and security settings, see "Security" on page 21 For more information about login settings, see "Setting the login method for the FC1" on page 80. To log in If login settings have been configured, follow this procedure. 1 Start the FC1. 2 On the login screen, type the user name and password and tap OK.
Urgent log in
In an emergency, you can use the urgent login feature to log in quickly as a guest and bypass the normal login procedure.
To perform an urgent login
1 Start the FC1.
2 On the login screen, enter a user name. You are not restricted to specific user names. A password is not required.
FC1 User Guide
Turning the system on or off
13
3 Tap Emergency. Caution
Use the urgent login feature only in emergency situations. As an urgent login guest user, you can perform ultrasound scanning and save images and/or clips, but you cannot search or view patient information, or change security settings.
Logging out
You must log out of the FC1 system before another user can log in. You cannot log out during an examination. By default, during sleep mode, the system will log the current user out after a specified period of time. To stop the system from logging out users during sleep mode, see "To set the sleep and shutdown power settings" on page 28 and turn sleep mode to OFF.
For security reasons, remember to log out before turning the system off so that others cannot use your login privileges.
To log out
1 Tap [Other].
2 Tap [Logout].
3 On the confirmation page, tap OK.
The login screen appears
Waking up the system from sleep mode
The system goes into sleep mode if there is no user activity for a preset time. This conserves battery life while the system is on. To adjust the time for sleep delay, see "Power Setting: Configuring power conservation" on page 28 .
To wake up the system
Press a key or the touch panel.
Sorting a list
Tapping one of the column names in a list sorts the list based on that column name and toggles between the sort orders: from ascending to descending, or vice-versa.
The mark displayed next to the column name indicates that the list is sorted in ascending order.
14
Turning the system on or off
Chapter 2
The mark indicates that the list is sorted in descending order.
Note
You cannot base the sorting of a list on multiple columns.
Entering text
If you have already typed any characters in the text box, those characters also appear in the text box of the virtual keyboard, and the text cursor shows at the end of the text.
To move the text cursor, tap the position where you want the text cursor to move to.
Note
You cannot type more characters than the maximum number of characters allowed for a given field.
To enter data 1 To open the virtual keyboard on the touch panel, do one of the following:
Tap in the text box. Tap Keyboard. The text cursor appears in the text box of the virtual keyboard, and character input becomes available. 2 Type on the virtual keyboard. As you type characters, they appear in the text boxes of the virtual keyboard and the original screen.
The
and
buttons are like the Tab and Alt+Tab keys, respectively, on a physical keyboard: They
move the cursor (and the focus--where your entry will have an effect) from one entry item to the next (or
previous).
To move the focus between items in a screen, tap
or
, according to where you want the focus to go.
Entering the date switches the virtual keyboard to the number or symbol input mode. When entering the date in Japanese format, the date can be entered in the Western calendar format, but also in the Japanese calendar format.
You can enter dates in any of the following three types of date formats (Japanese, American, or European):
Japanese format: year, month, day American format: month, day, year European format: day, month, year
FC1 User Guide
Turning the system on or off
15
To close the virtual keyboard Tap Close.
Control panel
As you work with the control panel, you can use the trackball to do the following:
Move the cursor and specify the region of interest (ROI) and the PW gate in an image. Operate PAN. You can also assign certain functions to the trackball. To change the functions assigned to the trackball, press the FUNCTION button.
Use the mode buttons to switch modes between 2D (B), M, CD, and PW.
For details on each button, see "System controls" on page 5.
For more information on the touch panel, see "Touch panel" on page 8.
Preparing transducers
Acoustic coupling gel is necessary during examinations. Some gels are incompatible with some transducer materials and may cause damage. FUJIFILM SonoSite recommends Aquasonic gel and provides a sample with the system.
WARNING
Some transducer sheaths contain natural rubber latex and talc, which can cause allergic symptoms, such as itching, reddening, hives, swelling, fever, dyspnea, asthma-like symptoms, drop in blood pressure, and anaphylactic reaction or shock. If you observe such symptoms, stop using the product immediately and take appropriate measures.
Some individuals may have an allergic reaction to some gels and sterilants.
To prevent contamination, the use of sterile transducer sheaths and sterile coupling gel is recommended for clinical applications of an invasive or surgical nature. To lessen the risk of contamination, apply the gel and sheath only when you are ready.
16
Preparing transducers
Chapter 2
Caution
To avoid damage to the transducer, use only gels recommended by FUJIFILM SonoSite. Using other gels can damage the transducer and void the warranty. If you have questions about gels, contact FUJIFILM SonoSite or your local representative.
FUJIFILM SonoSite recommends that you clean transducers after each use. For general use, apply a liberal amount of gel between the transducer and the body. For invasive or surgical use, apply a transducer sheath.
If acoustic coupling gel adheres to the FC1, be sure to wipe it off. If the FC1 is operated with a liquid such as acoustic coupling gel adhering to it, it may cause malfunction.
To apply a transducer sheath
Caution
FUJIFILM SonoSite recommends the use of market-cleared, transducer sheaths for surgical applications.
1 Place gel inside the sheath. 2 Insert the transducer into the sheath. 3 Pull the sheath over the transducer and cable until the sheath is fully extended. 4 Secure the sheath using the bands supplied with it. 5 Check for and eliminate bubbles between the face of the transducer elements and the sheath.
Such bubbles between the face of the transducer and the sheath may affect the ultrasound image. 6 Inspect the sheath to ensure that it has no holes or tears.
FC1 User Guide
Preparing transducers
17
Connecting and removing transducers
WARNING
Operate the FC1 system on a FC series stand or on a flat hard surface to allow good airflow below and behind the FC1. Note that the temperature of the FC1 may rise and the system may shut down automatically if no sufficient air intake and evacuation is allowed.
Caution
To avoid damaging the transducer connector, do not allow foreign material to get into the connector.
To connect a transducer 1 Disconnect the power supply from the FC1 ultrasound system. 2 Turn the system upside down after the monitor is closed. 3 Pull the transducer latch up and rotate it clockwise. 4 Insert the transducer connector into the system connector. 5 Turn the latch counterclockwise. 6 Press the latch down, securing the transducer connector to the system.
Figure 2-6: Connect the transducer To remove a transducer 1 Raise the transducer latch and rotate it clockwise. 2 Pull the transducer connector away from the system.
Basic operating steps
1 Install the battery.
18
Basic operating steps
Chapter 2
2 Attach a transducer.
3 Turn the system on after connecting the AC adapter.
For the power switch location, see "System controls" on page 5.
4 Press the PATIENT button, and enter the required information on the Patient Info screen.
5 Press a mode button: 2D (2D mode), M (M mode), C (Color Doppler mode), or D (Pulsed Wave Doppler mode).
Intended uses
The FC1 system is used with a transducer attached and powered by either battery or AC electrical power. The clinician is beside the patient and places the transducer onto (or into, for invasive procedures) the patient's body where needed to obtain the desired ultrasound image.
The system transmits ultrasound energy into the patient's body to obtain ultrasound images, as described below.
For the intended transducer and imaging modes for each exam type, see "Imaging modes and exams available by transducer" on page 119.
FDA clinical indications for use:
Fetal - OB/GYN Abdominal Intra-operative (Abdominal organs and vascular) Pediatric Small Organ (breast, thyroid, testicles, prostate) Neonatal Cephalic Trans-vaginal Musculo-skel. (Convent.) Musculo-skel. (Superfic.) Cardiac Adult Cardiac Pediatric Peripheral Vessel
Abdominal imaging applications
You can transabdominally assess the liver, kidneys, pancreas, spleen, gallbladder, bile ducts, transplanted organs, abdominal vessels, and surrounding anatomical structures for the presence or absence of pathology.
FC1 User Guide
Intended uses
19
Cardiac imaging applications
You can assess the heart, cardiac valves, great vessels, surrounding anatomical structures, overall cardiac performance, and heart size for the presence or absence of pathology.
You can also do the following: Identify the presence and location of fluid around the heart and lungs, or assist in pericardiocentesis or thoracentesis Visualize blood flow through cardiac valves Obtain the patient's electrocardiogram (ECG), for timing cardiac events
WARNING
Do not use an ECG that you obtain by ultrasound to diagnose cardiac arrhythmias. The FC1 is not designed for long-term cardiac-rhythm monitoring.
Gynecology and infertility imaging applications
You can transabdominally assess the uterus, ovaries, adnexa, and surrounding anatomical structures for the presence or absence of pathology.
Interventional imaging applications
You can use the FC1 for ultrasound guidance in biopsy and drainage procedures, vascular line placement, nerve blocks, and puncture during abdominal, breast, and neurological surgery.
Pediatric and neonatal imaging applications
You can assess the pediatric and neonatal abdominal, pelvic, and cardiac anatomy, pediatric hips, neonatal head, and surrounding anatomical structures for the presence or absence of pathology.
Superficial imaging applications
You can assess the breasts, thyroid, testicles, lymph nodes, hernias, musculoskeletal structures, soft-tissue structures, and surrounding anatomical structures for the presence or absence of pathology. You can use the system for ultrasound guidance in biopsy and drainage procedures, vascular line placement, peripheral nerve blocks, and spinal nerve blocks and taps.
Vascular imaging applications
You can assess, for the presence or absence of pathology, the carotid arteries, deep veins and arteries in the arms and legs, superficial veins in the arms and legs, great vessels in the abdomen, and various small vessels that feed organs.
20
Intended uses
Chapter 2
CHAPTER 3
Chapter 3: System Setup
You can configure FC1 system settings (for example, system date and time, power conservation, settings for measurement functions, presets, trackball sensitivity, and defaults such as initial examination types) that affect how you use the system.
Caution
When an examination is being performed (with a patient ID already registered), or when a large amount of data is stored in the output queue, and if you are logged in to the FC1 as a user, some settings are disabled. In addition, note that some settings are not reflected immediately.
Security
Caution
Healthcare providers who maintain or transmit health information are required by the Health Insurance Portability and Accountability Act (HIPAA) of 1996 and the European Union Date Protection Directive (95/46/EC) to implement appropriate procedures: to ensure the integrity and confidentiality of information and to protect against any reasonably anticipated threats or hazards to the security or integrity of the information or unauthorized users or disclosures of the information.
The Security page includes security settings that help you to meet the applicable security requirements listed in the HIPAA standard. Users are ultimately responsible for ensuring the security and protection of all electronic protected health information collected, stored, reviewed, and transmitted on the system.
About login permissions
There are two types of user accounts: Admin and User.
Security
21
Admin - A user that has been given administrator privileges. Admins are allowed access all functionality and patient/examination data without any restriction.
Caution
To protect patient and examination data, only assign Admin privileges to appropriate personnel and according to operational needs.
User - Not allowed to edit or delete patient/examination data. The security settings and system settings that impact application behaviors cannot be accessed.
In addition, there is the default Administrator account that cannot be deleted or changed. Someone logged in to the Administrator account can perform the following tasks: All of the functions of a user Admin. Add users. Change the privilege level of any other user account. Change the password of any other user account. Delete any other user account.
Only the default Administrator account can change the security settings for other users.
Adding and managing user accounts
Access privileges are restricted by the user account type. Before creating or changing user accounts, determine the amount of access you want the user to have.
You can add up to 20 user accounts in the FC1 system (including the default Administrator account).
To add a new user
1 Log in to the default Administrator account.
2 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
3 On page 3/4, tap Security. The Security screen appears. 4 Tap Login User. The Login User Setting List screen appears. 5 Tap a blank list item, and then tap Edit.
22
Security
Chapter 3
6 Enter information in the following fields: User Name User Password User Password (Confirm)
7 If you want this user to have administrative privileges, select Admin.
8 Tap OK to save the settings. Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
Note
To ensure security, choose a password that contains upper case characters (A-Z), lowercase characters (a-z), and numbers (0-9). Passwords are case-sensitive. Change passwords regularly.
User names should be between 3 and 15 characters.
Passwords should be between 6 and 15 characters
To edit user settings 1 Log in to the default Administrator account.
2 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
3 On page 3/4, tap Security. The Security screen appears. 4 Tap Login User. The Login User Setting List screen appears. 5 Tap a user name, and then tap Edit. 6 Change the following information as necessary:
User Name User Password User Password (Confirm) 7 If you want this user to have administrative privileges, select Admin.
FC1 User Guide
Security
23
8 Tap OK to save the settings. Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
To delete a user 1 Log in to the default Administrator account.
2 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
3 On page 3/4, tap Security. The Security screen appears. 4 Tap Login User. The Login User Setting List screen appears. 5 Tap a user name, and then tap Delete. 6 Tap OK to save the settings.
Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen. To change a user password 1 Log in to the default Administrator account.
2 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
3 On page 3/4, tap Security. The Security screen appears. 4 Tap Login User. The Login User Setting List screen appears. 5 Tap a user name, and then tap Edit. 6 Change the following information:
User Password User Password (Confirm)
24
Security
Chapter 3
7 Tap OK to save the settings.
Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
Exporting exam data
You can export examination data saved in the FC1 system internal storage to a USB memory. When exporting exam data, observe the following: USB memory should have data security functionality. Use proper security measures to protect patient information, such as using secure passwords and storing in
a secure location.
When using an unencrypted USB memory to store patient information, do not leave the memory unattended, and erase the data securely when you are finished using it. For more information about exporting exam data, see "Configuring archiving (image export)" on page 32.
Disposal
You are responsible for protecting any patient information stored on the FC1 system before it leaves the custody of your organization. When disposing of the FC1 system, or when transferring ownership, be sure to perform the following operations to delete all internal data: Restore the factory settings. See "Resetting user configuration" on page 74 Delete the audit log. See "Setting audit log acquisition" on page 82 Delete the user logins. See "To delete a user" on page 24
Specifying notification and Doppler volumes
You can set the volume for the following: Beeps (sounds when you save an image) Alarms (sounds when an error occurs or a warning message appears) Doppler
FC1 User Guide
Specifying notification and Doppler volumes
25
To adjust the volume settings
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 1/4, tap Device. The Common Setup screen appears. 3 Tap Volume Setting. The Volume Setting screen appears. 4 To change the beep volume or the alarm volume:
a Tap the green right-arrow virtual button ( ) for either Beep Volume or Alarm Sound. b On the Beep Volume or Alarm Sound screen that appears, do one of the following:
Tap OFF to mute the beep or alarm. Tap Low, Mid, or High to set the volume level of the beep or the alarm. 5 To adjust the Doppler volume, tap the left- or right-arrow virtual buttons ( or ) at the right of Doppler Volume. You can set the Doppler volume from 0 to 100. 6 Tap OK to save the settings. Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
Setting the trackball speed
You can set the following aspects of responsiveness to rotation of the trackball: The vertical and horizontal speed of the cursor The speed of 2D and Strip Cine search movement
To set the trackball speed
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
26
Setting the trackball speed
Chapter 3
2 On page 1/4, tap Device. The Common Setup screen appears. 3 Tap Trackball Config. The Trackball Config screen appears. 4 To increase or decrease the trackball sensitivity, tap the left- or right-arrow virtual buttons ( or ) for
any of the following. The range for each aspect of trackball sensitivity is 1 - 100. Decreasing the value makes the trackball more sensitive to movement. Up/Down
Vertical operation of the trackball. Left/Right
Horizontal operation of the trackball. Cine Search (2D)
Cine loop review of 2D images. For more information on Cine and Cine search, see "Using Cine mode" on page 172. Cine Search (Strip) Cine loop review of strip image. 5 Tap OK to save the settings. Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
Display setting
You can set the brightness level of the monitor and touch panel of the FC1, ECO mode, power settings, and test pattern printing. (ECO mode is a power-saving setting.) To change brightness levels and power and ECO mode settings
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 1/4, tap Device. The Common Setup screen appears.
FC1 User Guide
Display setting
27
3 Tap Display. The Display screen appears.
4 To set the brightness of either the larger monitor or the touch panel, to the right of, respectively, Main Monitor Brightness or Touch Panel Brightness, tap either the right- or left-arrow virtual button ( or ).
You can set the brightness level from 1 to 10.
Note
You can set Main Monitor Brightness and Touch Panel Brightness only when Economy Mode Setting is set to OFF.
5 To enable the ECO mode, make sure that the ON virtual button to the right of Economy Mode Setting is selected (orange). To disable the ECO mode, make sure that the OFF virtual button is selected.
6 To use the AC power supply in the normal power supply connection mode, make sure that the Normal virtual button to the right of External Power Connection is selected. To use AC power supply in the ECO mode, tap Economy.
You can set External Power Connection only when Economy Mode Setting is set to ON.
7 Tap OK to save the settings.
Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
Power Setting: Configuring power conservation
Use the power settings (Sleep Timer with Battery, Sleep Timer with AC Power, Shutdown Timer with Battery, and Shutdown Timer with AC Power) to conserve power by controlling when the system goes into sleep mode (temporary suspension of the system) and/or shuts down entirely. With these settings, you specify, for either battery or AC power:
Whether the system automatically goes into sleep mode and/or shuts down
If you specify automatic power conservation, after how long a period of inactivity it occurs
To set the sleep and shutdown power settings
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 1/4, tap Device. The Common Setup screen appears. 3 Tap Power Setting. The Power Setting screen appears.
28
Power Setting: Configuring power conservation
Chapter 3
4 To configure the Sleep Timer with Battery, Sleep Timer with AC Power, Shutdown Timer with Battery, and Shutdown Timer with AC Power settings: a Make sure that the ON virtual button is selected (orange). b To set the amount of idle time before the FC1 enters the sleep mode or shuts down, tap the right- or leftarrow virtual button ( or ) for the appropriate setting. The possible ranges for these settings are: Sleep Timer with Battery and Sleep Timer with AC Power: 1 to 60 minutes Shutdown Timer with Battery and Shutdown Timer with AC Power: 1 to 120 minutes c To disable sleep mode or automatic system shutdown for a particular source of power, tap OFF.
5 To change the Shutdown Timer with AC Power setting (the shutdown setting when the system is running on AC power): a Press the down arrow on switch menu button 4 (the rocker button beneath Page). b Change settings as for the other power settings.
6 Tap OK to save the settings. Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
Configuring Store buttons
You can assign functions to two Store buttons, including the function that stores or prints images on the FC1 to a Store button.
You can also configure the Store3 button so that its function is assigned to one of the function (F1, F2, F3, and F4) buttons.
For information on assigning functions to the function buttons, see "Assigning functions to function buttons" on page 34.
Caution
Before you try to store images in the DICOM network storage device, make sure that the status icon (network icon) display is valid.
FC1 User Guide
Configuring Store buttons
29
To configure Store buttons
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ).
The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 1/4, tap Store. The Common Setup screen appears.
3 Tap the button to which you want to assign a function:
Store 1 Store 2 Store 3 You can assign functions only for the number of buttons displayed in the Store screen. 4 In the Raw Data row, decide whether you want this button's function to store raw data or not and select the ON or OFF virtual button (orange), accordingly.
5 To specify whether the button captures live stills (single frames) or clips (video sequences), in the Live Capture row, tap one of the following:
Still
When you press the Store button, the system captures a snapshot (a single frame) of the live ultrasound image.
The system either stores the image in the FC1's internal storage media or prints it, according to your settings.
Clip
When you press the Store button, the system captures a real-time sequence (clip) of the live ultrasound image and/or during cine playback and stores it in the FC1's internal storage media. For clips of an ECG display, set the duration with the Beat setting.
Note
The Beat setting is effective only when a live image is displayed. When you store a clip during cine playback, make sure that Beat is set to OFF.
6 To set the duration of captured clips: When using the time other than ECG displays:
30
Configuring Store buttons
Chapter 3
In the Clip Time row, tap the right- or left-arrow virtual button ( or ).
Setting duration is available only when, for Live Capture, you have selected Clip. The valid range is between 2 seconds and 60 seconds.
In the Clip Type row, tap [DICOM] or [AVI] to set the storage format of the clip (except the format of the ECG display).
Caution
Clips in the AVI format exported to USB memory cannot be imported to the FC1.
Clips in the AVI format cannot be stored in the DICOM network storage device. If you select AVI and tap OK, a message appears indicating that the clip cannot be stored.
Even when the AVI format is selected, if a still image is stored while the image is frozen, the still image is stored in DICOM format.
For ECG displays, to select the number of heartbeats to be recorded when the ECG waveform appears:
In the Beat row, tap the right-arrow virtual button ( ).
i In the Beat selection screen, tap a button to select from one to five heartbeats. ii To set the duration of the clip according to the Clip Time setting, tap OFF.
Caution
When storing heartbeat images, do not perform image adjustments. Otherwise the images cannot be stored.
When you specify the number of heartbeats with this setting, the maximum duration of the clip is 5 seconds. For this reason, image data for the specified number of heartbeats cannot be stored.
7 To store ultrasound images on the DICOM server:
a In the Network Output row, tap the right-arrow virtual button ( ). b On the Network Output selection screen, tap DICOM Server.
To store images on the DICOM Server, the system must be connected to it; to not store the images on the DICOM server, tap Disable. 8 To specify whether to use a printer, and whether to print in black-and-white or color:
a In the Use Printer row, tap the right-arrow virtual button ( ). b On the Use Printer selection screen, tap one of the following:
FC1 User Guide
Configuring Store buttons
31
B&W, to use a black-and-white printer Color, to use a color printer Disable, to not print images 9 To set JPEG compression quality: a Tap Store. b Tap AVI.
c Tap the right- or left-arrow virtual button ( or ) to set the image quality of the clip in the AVI format. d Tap OK to save the setting. Note: if you set a smaller value, the compression rate increases, although the
image quality is degraded. 10 Tap OK to save the settings.
Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
Configuring archiving (image export)
You use the archive settings to specify the following for images that you export to a USB memory for archiving: The image file formats and color settings Whether patient information is attached to the image and, if so, how you create the information
Caution
Although you can reduce image file sizes by compressing images, image compression degrades the image quality.
To select file-format and color settings for archived images
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 1/4, tap USB Image Export. The Common Setup screen appears. 3 Tap Export Config. The Export Config screen appears. 4 To select the file format of still images:
32
Configuring archiving (image export)
Chapter 3
a Tap the right-arrow virtual button ( ) to the right of Still Image File Format. b Tap the desired file format: DICOM, TIFF, or JPEG. c With JPEG selected, to set the image quality of JPEG images, tap the right- or left-arrow virtual button
( or ) at the right of JPEG Compression Quality. The range of possible compressions is 80% to 100%. When you specify the TIFF or JPEG file format, the system also stores images in the DICOM format. 5 To specify the image quality for DICOM still images and for DICOM videos (DICOM clip images): a Tap to the right of DICOM Still Image Syntax or DICOM Clip Image Syntax, respectively. b For each, tap one of the following compression levels: Implicit VR Little Endian Explicit VR Little Endian JPEG Lossy RLE Lossless c Tap Close. 6 To access the next page of settings, press switch menu button 4 (the rocker button under Page). 7 To specify the image quality for the secondary capture image: a Tap to the right of DICOM SC Image Syntax. b In the DICOM SC Image Syntax box, tap either of the following: Implicit VR Little Endian Explicit VR Little Endian c Tap Close. 8 To choose a color setting for storing images: a Tap to the right of DICOM Color Setting. b In the DICOM Color Setting box, tap one of the following:
FC1 User Guide
Configuring archiving (image export)
33
RGB (Pixel) RGB (Plane) c Tap Close. 9 Tap OK to save the settings. Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen. To specify patient info to be attached to archived images
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 1/4, tap USB Image Export. The Common Setup screen appears. 3 Tap Export Config. The Export Config screen appears. 4 To access the next page of settings, press switch menu button 4. 5 To de-identify the patient's personal information before exporting images, beside De-identify Patient
Information, tap ON; to keep patient information with the exported images, tap OFF. Note that, to export files to a USB memory, De-identify Patient Information must be set to OFF; patient identity is displayed in the file that results. 6 Tap OK to save the settings. Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
Assigning functions to function buttons
The FC1 has four function buttons. You can assign a function of your choice to each one. To specify the function button settings
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 1/4, tap UI. The Common Setup screen appears.
34
Assigning functions to function buttons
Chapter 3
3 Tap F-key Config. The F-key Config screen appears.
4 On the right end of the row for the function button (F1, F2, F3, or F4) whose assigned function you want to change, tap the right-arrow virtual button ( ).
5 In the F1, F2, F3, or F4 selection screen, tap one of the following functions: None PD-mode CW-mode TDI-mode TH (Tissue Harmonic) CH (Compound Harmonic) SC (Spatial Compound) Hide Pt Bar Remove Data Fields Worklist Pat. Log Exam List The following functions are on page 2 of the screen. To see them, tap switch menu button 4 (the rocker button under Page). End Exam Report M/D Cursor Custom Presets Image Width L/R Invert U/D Invert ECG
FC1 User Guide
Assigning functions to function buttons
35
Store 3 Needle Profiling Update Steer Shallow Steer Steep For information on assigning functions to the Store buttons, see "To configure Store buttons" on page 30. 6 Tap OK to save the settings. Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
Defining the input of patient information
In the Patient Input screen, you can specify the following: The type of patient information that is available for data input when you start a session The maximum length for each character in patient information To specify aspects of patient-information input
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 1/4, tap UI. The Common Setup screen appears. 3 Tap Patient Input. The Patient Input screen appears. 4 To specify the type of data that the user enters first when inputting patient data, tap the right-arrow virtual
button ( ) to the right of Default Focus. 5 In the Default Focus selection screen, tap either Patient ID or Accession No. 6 To force a maximum character length of a single byte for entry of patient information, make sure that the
ON virtual button beside Compulsory input (1-byte char.) is selected (orange). If instead you want to allow a double-byte character length, make sure that the OFF virtual button
beside Compulsory input (1-byte char.) is selected.
36
Defining the input of patient information
Chapter 3
Single-byte characters are characters, numbers, and special characters in the western alphabet, excluding those with diacritical marks such as accents, cedillas, tildes, macrons, circumflexes, and umlauts.
7 Tap OK to save the settings. Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
Configuring examination image appearance
You can specify settings that affect the examination image as it appears on the FC1 system, including the following: The image as related to steer direction in Doppler operation Optimizing of acoustic (imagery) output when AUTO IMAGE is enabled:
Gain (enhancement) Lateral-gain and depth-gain compensation Sound speed compensation Focus correction Electrocardiogram (ECG) waveform settings Probe orientation settings To configure Doppler images
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 1/4, tap Image. The Common Setup screen appears. 3 Tap Doppler. The Doppler screen appears. 4 To link the color region of interest (color ROI) with the steer direction of the PW cursor in the triplex mode,
make sure that the ON virtual button beside Link is selected (orange). To break the link, make sure that the OFF virtual button is selected.
FC1 User Guide
Configuring examination image appearance
37
5 To invert the signs of the velocity scale automatically if the steer direction is changed in the triplex mode, make sure that the ON virtual button beside Auto U/D Invert is selected.
To make inversion of the velocity-scale signs not automatic, make sure that the OFF virtual button is selected.
When automatic inversion of velocity-scale signs is enabled, turning off the linking of the color ROI with the steer direction of the PW cursor in the triplex mode also cancels automatic inversion of the velocity-scale signs.
6 Tap OK to save the settings.
Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
To configure the probe orientation mark
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 1/4, tap Image. The Common Setup screen appears. 3 Tap Probe Orientation. The Probe Orientation Mark screen appears.
4 Tap the right-arrow virtual button ( ) to the right of Probe Orientation Mark, and then tap either Right or Left, as desired.
5 Tap OK to save the settings.
Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
Note
Use the Cardiovascular preset.
To specify optimization function settings
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 1/4, tap Image. The Common Setup screen appears. 3 Tap Optimize. The Optimize screen appears.
38
Configuring examination image appearance
Chapter 3
4 To obtain any of the following adjustments when you press the AUTO IMAGE button, for each of the following, make sure that the ON virtual button is selected (orange) for each of the adjustments. To make the adjustment nonautomatic, tap OFF. Gain: for gain adjustment DGC: Depth-gain compensation LGC: Lateral-gain compensation Sound Speed: Sound speed compensation Auto Focus: Focus correction
5 Tap OK to save the settings. Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
To specify ECG waveform settings
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 1/4, tap Image. The Common Setup screen appears. 3 Tap ECG. The ECG Config screen appears. 4 To adjust the display position of the ECG waveform:
a Tap the right-arrow virtual button ( ) to the right of Position. b Tap either TOP or BOTTOM, as desired. 5 To set the initial gain of the ECG waveform, to the right of Initial Gain, tap either the right- or left-arrow virtual button ( or ). You can set the initial gain between 0 to 100. 6 To adjust the sweep speed of the EGC waveform in the 2D, CD, or PD mode: a Tap to the right of Sweep Speed.
FC1 User Guide
Configuring examination image appearance
39
b On the displayed selection screen, tap the desired speed.
The possible sweep speeds are 1, 2, 3, 4, 6, 8, or 10 seconds).
Note
The sweep speed is set automatically for the M, PW, CW, and TDI modes.
7 Tap OK to save the settings. Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
Configuring peripheral devices
You can adjust settings for printers and foot switches that are connected to the FC1.
Adjusting printer settings
Caution
When printing the image, make sure that the "SIDE" setting on the black-andwhite printer is "STD". If the setting is not "STD", the image may not print correctly. For details on how to specify the setting, see the operation manual for the black-and-white printer.
Note
The settings that you can change in the FC1 system for black-and-white printers and color printers are the same. Therefore, the screens for changing printer settings are identical for either type of printer. The following procedure applies to both types of printers.
If you use a Sony UP-X898MD printer, check "Table A.11 Printers and Devices" in its Service Manual, as some settings must be adjusted.
To specify printer settings
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 1/4, tap Peripheral. The Common Setup screen appears. 3 Do one of the following:
a To change settings for a black and white printer, tap B&W Printer. The B&W Printer screen appears. b To change settings for a color printer, tap Color Printer. The Color Printer screen appears.
40
Configuring peripheral devices
Chapter 3
4 To set the number of copies, to the right of Number of copies, tap either the left- or right-arrow virtual button ( or ). You can select from 1 to 5 copies.
5 To specify how many images you can print on a single sheet and how they're arranged, do the following:
a Tap the right-arrow virtual button ( ) to the right of Print Format. b On the Print Format screen, tap the layout you want for the printed images.
You can print up to four images on a page; the available layouts are 1x1, 1x2, 2x1, and 2x2. 6 To specify whether the paper orientation to the image is vertical (also called "portrait"--taller than it is
wide), horizontal (also called "landscape"--wider than it is tall), or automatically chosen:
a Tap the right-arrow virtual button ( ) to the right of Paper Orientation. b In the Paper Orientation screen, tap the orientation you want: Vertical, Horizontal, or Auto. 7 To print the patient ID and exposure date and time, make sure that the ON virtual button to the right of Caption is selected (orange). To prevent the data from being printed, make sure that the OFF virtual button is selected (orange). 8 Tap OK to save the settings. Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
Adjusting foot-switch settings
To adjust foot-switch settings
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 1/4, tap Peripheral. The Common Setup screen appears. 3 Tap Foot Switch. The Foot Switch screen appears. 4 To assign a function to one of the pedals:
a Tap the right-arrow virtual button ( ) to the right of either Left Pedal or Right Pedal, depending on which you are assigning the function to.
FC1 User Guide
Configuring peripheral devices
41
b On the Left Pedal or Right Pedal selection screen, tap the function that you want to assign to the pedal. You can assign the following functions to a pedal: Freeze Store1, Store2, or Store3 (the function assigned to Store 1, Store 2, or Store 3, respectively). For more information on assigning a function to one of the Store buttons, see "To configure Store buttons" on page 30. None
5 Tap OK to save the settings. Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
Barcode reader and magnetic card reader setting
To set the connection to barcode reader or magnetic card reader
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 1/4, tap Peripheral. The Common Setup screen appears. 3 Tap Peripheral Type. The Peripheral Connection Type screen appears. 4 Tap the right-arrow virtual button ( ) at the right of Select Connection and tap the connection you want.
Select None to not connect any peripheral, Barcode to connect a barcode reader, or Card to connect a magnetic card reader. 5 Tap OK to save the settings. Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen. To specify a barcode reader
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 1/4, tap Peripheral. The Common Setup screen appears.
42
Configuring peripheral devices
Chapter 3
3 Tap Barcode Reader. The Barcode Reader screen appears. 4 To set the start position and length, tap either the right- or left-arrow virtual button ( or ). 5 Tap OK to save the settings.
Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen. To specify a magnetic card reader
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 1/4, tap Peripheral. The Common Setup screen appears. 3 Tap Card Reader. The Card Reader screen appears. 4 To set the start position and length, tap either the right- or left-arrow virtual button ( or ). 5 Tap OK to save the settings.
Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
Specifying network settings
If the FC1 system is connected to a Digital Imaging and Communications in Medicine (DICOM)-format network storage server, you can specify several kinds of settings. To specify network settings
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 1/4, tap Network and DICOM. The Common Setup screen appears. 3 Tap Network. The Network screen appears. 4 Set any of the following for this FC1 system:
IP Address
FC1 User Guide
Specifying network settings
43
Gateway Address Subnet Mask
5 In the Link Speed/Duplex row, from the list that appears when you tap the right-arrow virtual button ( ), tap the communication speed and type that you prefer (Auto, 100MB/Full Duplex, or 100MB/Half Duplex).
6 Tap OK to save the settings. Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
Server connection settings
WARNING
Use our C@RNACORE product only with this function.
The FC1 can operate linked to the FUJIFILM C@RNACORE system to start examinations after obtaining patient information or orders.
C@RNACORE V4.0(B) and later support this function.
For more information about the link with the C@RNACORE system, see "Starting an examination from patient information (Optional, Japan only)" on page 137 and "Starting an examination from orders (Optional, Japan only)" on page 139.
To set the link with the C@RNACORE system (Optional)
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 1/4, tap Network and DICOM. The Common Setup screen appears. 3 Tap C@RNACORE. The C@RNACORE screen appears. 4 Set the following for this FC1 system.
Device Name (the station name of the FC1. 16 characters maximum.) C@RNACORE Network Setting IP Address (IP address of the C@RNACORE server) 5 In the Connection Type (connection with the C@RNACORE server) row, tap the right-arrow virtual button ( ). 6 On the displayed screen:
44
Specifying network settings
Chapter 3
Tap Patient Information Link to use patient information link. The patient information link button ( ) appears at the left of ID on the Patient Info screen on the touch panel.
Tap Order Link (MWL) to use order link. To use order link, DICOM and C@RNACORE's DICOM MWL must be configured. For more information, see "Specifying DICOM settings" on page 45 and "DICOM MWL setting" on page 46. For the procedure to start examinations from C@RNACORE, see the C@RNACORE Reference Guide.
Tap OFF to disable the link to C@RNACORE.
7 Tap Verify to confirm that link to the C@RNACORE system has been established properly.
8 Tap OK to save the settings.
Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
Specifying DICOM settings
If the FC1 system is connected to a Digital Imaging and Communications in Medicine (DICOM)-format network storage server, you can specify its settings.
To specify DICOM settings:
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ).
The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 1/4, tap Network and DICOM. The Common Setup screen appears.
3 Tap DICOM General. The DICOM General screen appears.
4 Set any of the following: Table 3-1: DICOM settings
Setting
AE Title Station Name Port Number TCP Timeout
Description The application title. 16 characters maximum. The Station Name of the FC1. 16 characters maximum. Not used at present The maximum transfer waiting time of the network (in seconds). 600 seconds maximum.
FC1 User Guide
Specifying network settings
45
Table 3-1: DICOM settings
Setting
Keep Alive Timeout
Exams are Restarted Using
Verification
Query on Display
Description The period of time during which DICOM connection is maintained after the last data is transferred. 7,200 seconds maximum. The series of examinations.
Tap . On the screen that appears, tap Prior Series or New Series. Specify the setting at the time of DICOM data transfer. The update timing of the worklist.
To update the worklist automatically when the Worklist screen appears, tap ON.
Maximum Entries Modality
Clear Order Default Character
To update the worklist by using the button in the Worklist screen, tap OFF. The maximum number of worklists that can be used (maintained). 3,000 worklists.
The modality at the time of querying the DICOM MWL. Tap . On the screen that appears, tap the modality (Blank, US [ultrasonic processor], or OT [others]). Clear the worklist orders. The default character code.
Use this setting to update the default character code of the data submitted to DICOM. For more information, see the DICOM conformance statement.
5 Tap OK to save the settings.
Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
DICOM MWL setting
When you press SYSTEM, Network and DICOM, and then DICOM MWL, the following operations are available for the worklist server setting in the selected list.
Table 3-2: DICOM MWL buttons
Button
Edit Delete
Description Allows you to edit the setting. Allows you to delete the setting.
46
Specifying network settings
Chapter 3
Table 3-2: DICOM MWL buttons
Button
Description
Ping Verify
Allows you to check the network condition. Allows you to verify the setting.
To set the DICOM Modality Worklist (MWL) (Optional)
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ).
The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 1/4, tap Network and DICOM. The Common Setup screen appears.
3 Tap DICOM MWL. The DICOM MWL List screen appears.
4 Tap the name of a worklist server or a blank line, and then tap Edit.
The DICOM MWL Server Config screen appears.
5 Set any of the following: Table 3-3: DICOM MWL settings
Setting
Description
Use
To use MWL, tap Use. To not use MWL, tap Not use.
Device Name Type the nickname of the connected worklist server (maximum 16 characters).
AE Title
Type the application title of the connected worklist server (maximum 16 characters).
IP Address
Type the IP address of the connected worklist server.
Port Number Type the port number of the connected worklist server.
Transfer Syntax Tap the green button on the right. On the screen that appears, tap the transfer syntax that you want to use.
Scheduled Proc Tap the green button on the right. On the screen that appears, tap the date of the start of Step Start Date the examination (Today, Last 2 Days, Last 7 Days, or All).
6 Press the Ping button to test the connection with the MWL server.
FC1 User Guide
Specifying network settings
47
7 Press the Verify button to test the communication with the MWL server.
Note
Even when multiple worklist servers are registered, you can use only one of them. When multiple worklist servers are registered, set Use for only one of them.
DICOM storage operation
When you press SYSTEM, Network and DICOM, and then DICOM Storage, the following operations are available for the storage server setting in the selected list.
Table 3-4: DICOM Storage buttons
Button
Edit Delete Ping Verify
Description You can edit the setting. You can delete the setting. You can check the network condition. You can verify the setting.
To set the DICOM storage (Optional)
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 1/4, tap Network and DICOM. The Common Setup screen appears. 3 Tap DICOM Storage.
DICOM Storage List screen is displayed. 4 Select the connected storage server or a blank line, and then tap Edit.
DICOM Storage Server Config screen is displayed.
48
Specifying network settings
Chapter 3
5 Set any of the following. Table 3-5: DICOM Storage settings
Setting
Device Name AE Title
Description Enter nickname of Storage server connected. Enter application title of Storage server connected.
IP Address Port Number Color Model
Single Single Transfer Syntax
Multiple Multiple Transfer Syntax
Secondary
Secondary Transfer Syntax
Maximum of 16 characters can be entered.
Enter IP address of storage server connected.
Enter the port number of the connected storage server.
Tap on the right. On the displayed selection screen, tap the color model to be used. For instance: RGB (Pixel), RGB (Plane), or MONOCHROME2.
Tap ON to use still image store, or tap OFF not to use still image store.
Tap . On the displayed selection screen, tap the desired compression level of the DICOM still image (Implicit VR Little Endian, Explicit VR Little Endian, JPEG Lossy or RLE Lossless). When JPEG Lossy is selected, tap or to set the image quality (80% to 100%).
Tap ON to use clip image store, or tap OFF not to use clip image store.
Tap . On the displayed selection screen, tap the desired compression level of the DICOM clip (Implicit VR Little Endian, Explicit VR Little Endian, JPEG Lossy or RLE Lossless). When JPEG Lossy is selected, tap or to set the image quality (80% to 100%).
Tap ON to use secondary capture image store, or tap OFF not to use secondary capture image store.
Tap . On the displayed selection screen, tap the desired compression level of the secondary capture image (Implicit VR Little Endian or Explicit VR Little Endian).
6 Press the Ping button to test the connection with the DICOM server. 7 Press the Verify button to test the communication with the DICOM server.
FC1 User Guide
Specifying network settings
49
Setting timing for DICOM network storage
If the FC1 system is connected to a Digital Imaging and Communications in Medicine (DICOM)-format network storage server, you can specify the timing for storing images on that server. To specify DICOM network storage timing setting 1 To store images in the DICOM network storage device, make sure that the FC1 is connected to the DICOM
server through Ethernet or that the status icon (network icon) display is valid.
2 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
3 On page 1/4, tap Store. The Common Setup screen appears. 4 Tap Image Transfer. The Image Transfer Setup screen appears. 5 To select the timing of storage of the ultrasound image on the DICOM server, tap the right-arrow virtual
button ( ) on the right side of Image Transfer Setup. 6 On the displayed selection screen:
To store the image on the DICOM server when the Store button is pressed, tap Exam in Progress. To store the image on the DICOM server when the examination is over, tap Exam Completed. 7 Tap OK to save the settings. Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
Calibrating the display
To view display-color test patterns
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 1/4, tap Calibration. The Common Setup screen appears. 3 Tap Test Pattern. The Test Pattern screen appears.
50
Calibrating the display
Chapter 3
4 Tap Start on the right side of the test pattern you want to view (Grayscale, Resolution, White, Black, Red, Green, or blue). The selected test pattern appears on the main monitor.
5 To exit the test pattern, tap Cancel.
To set the lookup table (LUT)
Note
The LUT must be updated whenever the system LCD is replaced. The number selected must match the number on the new LCD installed.
1 Press the SYSTEM button.
The User Setting screen appears. 2 On page 1/4, tap Calibration. The Common Setup screen appears.
3 Tap LCD LUT. The Update screen appears.
4 The following item can be set. Tap the monitor number to be used.
I5 / I6 / J5 / J6 / K5 / K6
5 Tap OK to save the settings.
Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
Enabling automatic image deletion (Data Configuration)
You can enable the system to automatically delete images after a certain period of time, and specify how long that period is.
Note
You can lock examinations you do not want to delete. For the procedure to lock examinations, see "Locking archived examinations" on page 190.
To specify automatic image deletion
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 1/4, tap Data Config. The Data Management screen appears.
FC1 User Guide
Enabling automatic image deletion (Data Configuration)
51
3 Tap Data Config. The Data Configuration screen appears.
4 To activate or deactivate automatic image deletion, make sure that the ON or OFF virtual button is selected (orange).
To set an auto delete time limit, the Auto Delete Image setting must be set to ON. 5 To decrease or increase the age (in months) at which the system automatically deletes an image record (the
Auto Delete Time Limit), tap the right- or left-arrow virtual button ( or ), respectively.
The range for Auto Delete Time Limit is 1 to 36 months.
6 To have network or printer output appear automatically, make sure that Automatic appears in the Print/ Network Output field. To have this output controlled manually, tap the green arrow button and tap Manual on the screen that appears.
7 Tap OK to save the settings. Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
Caution
With automatic image deletion, the images are deleted automatically but the patient logs remain. Up to 8000 patient logs can be recorded. To avoid exceeding the maximum number of logs, delete patient information periodically. To delete patient logs individually, use the Patient Log screen. If you want to delete all patient logs, see "Resetting user configuration" on page 74.
Database optimization
To optimize the database
After using the FC1 for a long time, unnecessary empty spaces may appear in the database and the way data is stored may become more complex, therefore decreasing the system performance. Database optimization is used to resolve this problem.
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 1/4, tap Optimize Database. The Optimize Database screen appears. 3 Tap Start to begin the process.
52
Database optimization
Chapter 3
4 When prompted to confirm optimization, tap OK to confirm this process. At this point, you must restart the unit.
Output queue (examination/image) operation (Output Manage)
1 Press the SYSTEM button. The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 1/4, tap Output Manage. The Output Management screen appears. For more information, see "Managing the output queue of examinations and images" on page 199
Positioning the body-mark display
You can choose where the body mark will appear by default in each mode's display setting. To position the body-mark display
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 2/4, tap Body Mark. The Category/Library screen appears. 3 Tap Position. The Position screen appears.
You can specify body-mark display settings for the following screen modes: Single (for 2D (B), CD, and PD modes) Duplex (for M, PW, CW, and TDI modes) Dual Mode (for Dual-screen modes) Simul Dual Mode (for Simultaneous Dual-screen modes) 4 To specify (in single and duplex displays) the location on the monitor where you want the body mark to appear by default: a Tap the right-arrow virtual button ( ) to the right of either Single or Duplex. Either the Single or Duplex
screen appears.
FC1 User Guide
Positioning the body-mark display
53
b Depending on where you want the body mark's default location to be for this display setting, tap LeftBottom, Left-Top, Right-Top, or Right-Bottom.
5 To specify (in Dual Mode and Simul Dual Mode displays) the location on the monitor where you want the body mark to appear by default:
a Tap the right-arrow virtual button ( ) to the right of either Dual Mode or Simul Dual Mode. Either the Dual Mode or Simul Dual Mode screen appears.
b Depending on which corner of each of the two images you want to show the body mark's default location, tap one of the following: To have the body-mark appear in the same place in both screens, tap Left-Bottom, Left-Top, Right-Top, or Right-Bottom. To configure a different location for each screen, tap LB/RB, RB/RB, LB/LB, LT/RT, RT/RT, or LT/LT.
6 Tap OK to save the settings. Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
Managing annotation lists
You can create, edit, and delete lists of annotations that you can add to examination images. Annotation-list maximums: Number of annotation lists: 100 Number of annotations per list: 30 Number of characters per annotation: 20 To open the Annotation List screen
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 2/4, tap Annotate. The Category/Library screen appears. 3 Tap Annotation List. The Annotation List screen appears, showing any existing annotation lists.
54
Managing annotation lists
Chapter 3
To create an annotation list 1 With the Annotation List screen open, press switch menu button 4 (the rocker button under Page) until you
reach an empty row in the list of existing annotation lists. 2 Tap the empty row, and then tap Edit List. The Annotation Config screen appears. 3 To name the annotation, tap the text box for List Name, type the name, and then tap Close. 4 To add an annotation to the list, tap the text box beside Item n (where n is the number of the item), type the
name, and then tap Close. To navigate among the pages of annotations, press switch menu button 4. 5 Tap OK to save the settings. Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen. To edit an annotation list 1 With the Annotation List screen open, press switch menu button 4 (the rocker button under Page) to navigate to the annotation list that you want to edit. 2 Tap the annotation list that you want to edit, and then tap Edit List. The screen for editing the annotation list appears. 3 Tap the annotation that you want to change, and then correct it. 4 Tap OK to save the settings. Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen. To delete an annotation list 1 With the Annotation List screen open, press switch menu button 4 (the rocker button under Page) to navigate to the annotation list that you want to delete. 2 Tap the annotation list that you want to delete, and then tap Delete. 3 When prompted to confirm the deletion, tap OK. 4 Tap OK to save the settings. Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
FC1 User Guide
Managing annotation lists
55
Managing measurement functions
Of the measurement functions available for FC1, some are common to all display modes, and some are particular to certain display modes. Manage settings for the measurement functions on the Measure screens.
Configuring measurements for all modes
The measurement settings that are common to all display modes are as follows: Continuous Measurement Beat Measure Unit (B,M) (for B and M mode)
The Beat setting determines the default number of heartbeats used as a basis for measurement.
To change common measurement settings
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 2/4, tap Measure. The Measure screen appears. 3 Tap Common. The Common screen appears. 4 To change the control that you use to start the next measurement in continuous measurement, tap the
right-arrow virtual button ( ) to the right of Continuous Measurement Setting. 5 On the Continuous Measurement Setting screen:
To display the next caliper by pressing the SET button when continuous measurement is available, select Set/Set.
To display the next caliper for the next measurement by tapping Next on the touch panel, select Set/Next.
6 To change the default number of heartbeats to use for measurement, tap the Beat.
7 On the Beat screen, select from one to three heartbeats.
button to the right of
56
Managing measurement functions
Chapter 3
8 To change the calculation unit of B and M mode, tap the button to the right of Measure Unit (B,M). 9 At the Measure Unit (B,M) screen, select mm or cm. 10 Tap OK to save the settings.
Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
Specifying 2D-mode default measurement tools
You can change the tool that is the default for several measurements and calculations. To choose default tools for 2D-mode measurements and calculations
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 2/4, tap Measure. The Measure screen appears. 3 Tap B mode. The B mode screen appears.
4 Tap the right-arrow virtual button ( ) on the row of the measurement or calculation for which you want to change the default tool. The settings, the items that they change, and the measurement tools that you can choose from are as follows: Initial Measure
The measurement that first appears when the user presses the MEASURE button ( mode.
) in 2D
The possible measurements are Distance, Trace, Area, Volume, Ratio Distance, Ratio Area, %Steno Dist, %Steno Area, and Angle.
Area
The default measurement tool for area measurements.
The possible measurement tools are Free Trace and Ellipse.
Ratio Area
FC1 User Guide
Managing measurement functions
57
The default combination of measurement tools for calculating an area ratio. The possible measurement tools are 2 Ellipse and Ellipse/Free Trace (Area). %Steno Area The default tool for measuring the stenosis ratio and circumference and area. The possible measurement tools are 2 Ellipse and Ellipse/Free Trace (Area). Angle The default tool for measuring an angle. The possible measurement tools are 2 Line, 3 Line, or 3 Point. 5 In the selection screen for the measurement or calculation, tap the tool that you want to be the default for that measurement. 6 Tap OK to save the settings. Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
Note
When you adjust the image parameter, the spectral trace is updated.
Specifying the CF-mode or the M-mode default measurement tool
You can select the measurement that is the first to appear when the user presses the MEASURE button
(
) in either CF mode or M mode.
To change the default measurement tool for CF mode or M mode
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 2/4, tap Measure. The Measure screen appears. 3 Do one of the following:
a To choose CF mode, tap CF mode. The CF mode screen appears.
58
Managing measurement functions
Chapter 3
b To choose M mode, tap M mode. The M mode screen appears.
4 Tap the right-arrow virtual button ( ) on the Initial Measure row. 5 Depending on the mode whose default measurement tool you are setting, on the Initial Measure selection
screen, choose one of the following: For CF Mode, tap either Point Vel or Area Vel. For M Mode, tap Distance, Time, HR, or Slope. 6 Tap OK to save the settings. Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
Configuring PW/CW/TDI-mode measurements
To change the PW/CW/TDI mode measurement settings
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ).
The User Setting screen appears. 2 On page 2/4, tap Measure. The Measure screen appears.
3 Tap D mode. The D mode screen appears.
4 Tap the right-arrow virtual button ( ) on the row of the measurement or calculation for which you want to change the default tool.
The settings, the items that they change, and the measurement tools that you can choose from are as follows: Initial Measure
The measurement that first appears when the user presses the MEASURE button ( mode.
) in 2D
The possible measurements are Time, HR, Velocity, Trace, Accel, Decel, Velocity Trace, PI, RI, or Vessel Diam.
Trace The default measure tool for tracing the Doppler waveform.
FC1 User Guide
Managing measurement functions
59
The possible measure tools are Free Trace or Auto Trace. Trace Type
The possible types are Max, Average, and Both. trackball
The possible types are Max or Average. Envelope Type
The possible types are Positive, Negative, and Alternative. In the Trace Level row, tap either the right- or left-arrow virtual button ( or ) to set the trace
level between 0% and 100%. 5 Tap OK to save the settings.
Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
Configuring preset-specific measurements
You can change the layout of the touch panel To design application-specific displays on the touch panel 1 Press the SYSTEM button.
The User Setting screen appears. 2 On page 2/4, tap Calculation. The Calculation screen appears. 3 Tap TP Layout. The TP Layout screen appears.
4 On the TP Layout screen, tap the right-arrow virtual button ( ) for the application for which you want to change the layout of the touch panel. The available applications are as follows: Cardiac Ped Heart Carotid
60
Managing measurement functions
Chapter 3
5 On the application's selection screen, tap the layout that you want the touch panel to have. 6 Tap OK to save the settings.
Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
Setting Auto IMT (intima-media thickness) measurement (Optional)
You can customize the Auto IMT measurement menu. For more information about Auto IMT measurement, see "Auto IMT (intima-media thickness) measurement (Optional)" on page 403. To customize the Auto IMT measurement menu
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 2/4, tap Calculation. The Calculation screen appears. 3 Tap Auto IMT. The Carotid screen appears. 4 To set the width of the region of interest, tap the right- or left-arrow virtual button ( or ) at the right
of Width. 5 Tap the right-arrow virtual button ( ) on the right of Priority Tab to configure the tabs which you want to
display prior to others in the initial startup. Tap B-Mode or AutoIMT on the displayed selection screen. 6 Tap OK to save the settings. Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
Defining preset settings for examination types
This section explains the settings that make up the preset used for each examination.
FC1 User Guide
Defining preset settings for examination types
61
To define the preset settings for an examination type
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 2/4, tap Preset Setting. The Exam Setting screen appears. 3 Tap the examination for which you want to define the preset settings.
You can set the preset menu for the following types of examinations (to access Breast and subsequent examination types, press switch menu button 4). Abdomen Small Parts Cardiac OB OB-Twin Fetal Heart Gyn Vascular Carotid Thyroid Breast MSK Ped Ped Heart Nerve Urology Neonate Arterial
62
Defining preset settings for examination types
Chapter 3
Venous The preset-specification screen, which is named for the type of examination that you have selected, appears.
Assigning a function to the FREEZE button
You can select a function to be activated when you press the FREEZE button ( ). To select a freeze-shortcut function 1 To select the examination type for which you are specifying a freeze-shortcut function, see the procedure
in "Defining preset settings for examination types" on page 61.
2 On the examination presets screen, tap the right-arrow virtual button ( ) on the Freeze Shortcut row. 3 On the Freeze Shortcut selection screen, tap the function that you want pressing the FREEZE button to
activate. You can select one of the following: None, Annotation, Body Mark, Measure, and Calculation. To specify that the FREEZE button only freeze the image and not activate a function, select None. 4 Tap OK to save the settings. Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
Selecting the default annotation type
To select arrows or text as the default type of annotation when the user presses the ANNOTATE button 1 To select the preset you want to set, see "Defining preset settings for examination types" on page 61.
The screen that appears shows the current settings for default annotation: text or arrows.
2 To change the default, tap the button on the Annotation Init row, and tap either Arrow or Text. The Annotation Init row now shows your choice.
3 Tap OK to save the settings. Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
FC1 User Guide
Defining preset settings for examination types
63
Selecting ready-made annotation lists
To select annotation lists of predefined annotations for ready use
1 To select the preset you want to set, see "Defining preset settings for examination types" on page 61.
2 On the examination presets screen, tap the List3.
button for Annotation List1, Annotation List1, or Annotation
3 If you do not see the annotation list that you want on page 1 of the Annotation Listn selection screen (where n is 1, 2, or 3), press switch menu button 4 to go to page 2.
4 Tap the annotation list that you want as one of your default lists of annotations.
For more information on using and creating annotation lists, see "Managing annotation lists" on page 54.
5 Tap OK to save the settings.
Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
Selecting the priority cursor for steer-link priority
To select the steer-link priority 1 To select the preset you want to set, see "Defining preset settings for examination types" on page 61. 2 On the examination presets screen, tap the button for Steer Link. 3 On the Steer Link selection screen, tap M priority, CF priority, D priority, or Fix. 4 Tap OK to save the settings.
Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
Selecting the area for applying sound-speed compensation
To select the area for applying sound-speed compensation
1 To select the preset you want to set, see "Defining preset settings for examination types" on page 61.
2 To specify the area where sound speed compensation is applied, in the exam presets screen, tap Sound Speed. To apply it to the overall image, make sure that All is selected (orange).
64
Defining preset settings for examination types
Chapter 3
To apply it only to the ROI, make sure that ROI is selected. 3 Tap OK to save the settings.
Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
Starting the electrocardiogram automatically
To specify that the electrocardiogram starts automatically when an examination is started 1 To select the preset you want to set, see "Defining preset settings for examination types" on page 61. 2 Make sure that the ON button for ECG is selected (orange). 3 Tap OK to save the settings.
Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
Selecting the standard of acoustic output
You can select one of three combinations of acoustic-output indices: MI (mechanical index) and one of the thermal indices: TIS (soft-tissue thermal index) TIB (bone thermal index) TIC (cranial-bone thermal index) To select a standard of acoustic output 1 To select the examination type, see "Defining preset settings for examination types" on page 61. 2 Tap the button for MI/TI. 3 Tap the desired combination of indices from the following:
MI, TIs MI, TIb MI, TIc 4 Tap OK to save the settings.
FC1 User Guide
Defining preset settings for examination types
65
Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
Setting the calculation unit
To set the unit of calculation
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 2/4, tap Preset Setting. The Exam Setting screen appears. 3 Tap Cardiac. The Cardiac screen appears.
4 On page 2/2, in the Calc Unit section, tap the 5 Tap cm or mm to select the unit.
button. The Calc Unit screen appears.
Note
You can choose a calculation unit only when you have selected Cardiac or Ped Heart. However, when area or volume is measured, this setting may not be reflected.
6 Tap OK to save the settings. Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
Setting Priority/Preset for each transducer
You can choose the transducer that the priority preset will launch.
To set the priority preset:
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 2/4, tap Probe/Preset. The Exam Setting screen appears. 3 Tap the transducer for which you want the priority to be set. 4 When that name appears on a new screen, tap the button on the right.
66
Defining preset settings for examination types
Chapter 3
5 On the screen that appears, select the type of examination that the transducer will conduct (which is set by default for the probe you selected in step 4).
6 Tap OK to save the settings. Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
Configuring examination defaults (Exam Type Setting)
You can specify the following for each type of examination: Whether it is available for selection when the user registers a patient The transducer and preset that are selected by default for that type of examination To specify examination settings for patient information registration
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 2/4, tap Exam Type Setting. The Exam Setting screen appears.
3 Tap the type of examination. The Exam Type Setting screen appears, with the examination types that you can choose from. These include ABDOMEN, SMALL PARTS, CARDIAC, OB, OB-TV, GYN-TV, FETAL HEART, GYN, VASCULAR, CAROTID, THYROID, BREAST, MUSC SKEL, PED, PED-HEART, NERVE, URO, NEO HEAD, OB TWIN ARTERIAL, and VENOUS.
To change pages of the Exam Type Setting screen, press switch menu button 4 (the rocker button beneath Page.)
Note
Some examination types may be unavailable.
When you select the examination type, the screen on which you specify its settings opens.
4 To display the examination type and make it available for the user to select during patient registration, on the Valid line, make sure that the Enable virtual button is selected (orange).
5 To select the examination type's default probe (the probe that is by default displayed for the examination type during patient registration):
a Tap the button for Priority Probe.
FC1 User Guide
Defining preset settings for examination types
67
b On the Priority Probe screen that appears, tap a transducer. You can choose among the following transducers: C60xf, P21xp, HFL38xp, C11xp, ICTxp, HFL50xp, C35xp, L25xp, and L38xp.
6 To select the examination type's default preset (the preset that is displayed by default for the examination type during patient registration):
a Tap the button for Priority Preset.
b On the Priority Preset screen, tap a preset. You can choose among the following presets: Abdomen / Small Parts / Cardiac / OB / OB-Twin / Fetal Heart / Gyn / Vascular / Carotid / Thyroid / Breast / MSK / Ped / Ped Heart / Nerve / Urology / Neonate / Arterial/ Venous
To switch among pages of the Priority Preset screen, press switch menu button 4.
7 Tap OK to save the settings.
Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
Changing examination information display settings (Exam Type Format)
You can alter the appearance of the examination name that appears when you are preparing a report--either its full name or an abbreviation, as shown in the following list:
Table 3-6: Examination types
Examination type Abdomen Breast Cardiac Carotid Gynecology Musculoskeletal Nerve Obstetrical Operative Pediatric
Full name Abdominal Breast Cardiac Carotid Gynecology Musculoskeletal Nerve Obstetrical Operative Pediatric
Short name (abbreviation) ABD BREAST CARD CAROTID GYN MSK NERVE OB OPE PED
68
Defining preset settings for examination types
Chapter 3
Table 3-6: Examination types
Examination type Small parts Thyroid Urology Vascular
Full name Small part Thyroid Urology Vascular
To change examination information display settings
Short name (abbreviation) SP THYROID URO VASC
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 2/4, tap Exam Type Format. The Exam Setting screen opens. 3 Tap Exam Info Name. The Exam Information Display Size screen appears. 4 For each examination type whose display size you want to change, tap either Full or Short. Use the Page
button to see other examination types. 5 Tap OK to save the settings.
Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
Changing patient information display settings
You can alter how patient names appear (the order of first and last names) and change the unit used to display height (centimeters or meters). To change patient information display settings
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 2/4, tap Exam Type Format. The Exam Setting screen opens. 3 In the Exam Info section, tap Patient Info. The Patient Information Display Format screen appears.
FC1 User Guide
Defining preset settings for examination types
69
4 If you want to change the middle name setting, in that field, tap the green arrow and tap Last First or Last First Middle.
5 If you want to change the height unit, in that field, tap the green arrow and tap the unit you want: cm (centimeters) or m (meters).
6 Tap OK to save the settings. Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
Restart setting (reexamination setting)
You can change the period in which reexamination is allowed on prior exam data (in the case of another later patient visit). To change the period of reexamination
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page2/4, tap Restart. The Exam Setting screen appears. 3 Tap Restart. The Restart config screen is displayed.
4 To set the Maximum Age Of Restart, tap . On the displayed selection screen, tap the maximum period to be used: 1 Day / 2 Days / 1 Week / 1 Month / Unlimited
5 Tap OK to save the settings. Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
Backing up and restoring presets
You can back up and restore the following: Presets System settings The Patient Information Log
70
Backing up and restoring presets
Chapter 3
When outputting data from the FC1 to a USB memory, the output data are encrypted to prevent the personal information leakage. The following output data are automatically encrypted.
In order to secure patient's health data, the output file used for back/up and restore will be encrypted. The file will not be visible in any systems except for FC1 Ultrasound System.
Backing up and restoring presets
You can save the presets that you have specified as one file in the USB memory.
To protect the data, save the presets in the USB memory periodically.
Caution
Be sure to save presets to the USB memory every time that you change a preset.
Use the USB memory only for purposes mentioned in this User's guide. Using the USB memory for other purposes may damage the FC1.
To back up all user settings, back up both the presets and the system settings.
To restore a preset, connect the USB memory in which the preset is stored and then start FC1.
If necessary, you can restore a configuration immediately by retrieving the presets from the USB memory. To back up presets 1 Connect the USB memory on which you back up presets to the USB connector.
2 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
3 On page 3/4, tap Backup. The Backup screen appears. 4 To the right of Preset Configuration, tap Start. 5 When you are prompted to confirm starting the backup, tap OK. The user presets are saved in the USB
memory. To restore presets 1 Connect the USB memory that holds the backup of the presets to the USB connector.
2 Press the SYSTEM button ( ).
FC1 User Guide
Backing up and restoring presets
71
The User Setting screen appears. 3 On page 3/4, tap Restore. The Restore screen appears. 4 To the right of Preset Configuration, tap Start. 5 When you are prompted to confirm restoration, tap OK.
Based on the data in the USB memory, the user presets are restored as the system restarts.
Backing up and restoring system settings
You can save the system settings (data customized by the user and examination settings) as a single file in the USB memory.
Caution
Be sure to save system settings to the USB memory periodically, and every time you change the user settings, particularly after the first time you change them.
Use the USB memory only for purposes mentioned in this User's guide. Using the USB memory for other purposes may damage the FC1.
To back up all user settings, back up both the presets and the system settings.
To restore a system setting, connect the USB memory in which the setting is stored and then start FC1.
If necessary, you can restore a configuration by retrieving the system settings from the USB memory. To back up system settings 1 Connect the USB memory on which you back up system settings to the USB connector.
2 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
3 On page 3/4, tap Backup. The Backup screen appears. 4 To the right of System Configuration, tap Start. 5 When you are prompted to confirm starting the system backup, tap OK. The system settings are saved in
the USB memory.
72
Backing up and restoring presets
Chapter 3
To restore system settings 1 Connect the USB memory that holds the backup of the system settings to the USB connector.
2 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
3 On page 3/4, tap Restore. The Restore screen appears. 4 To the right of System Configuration, tap Start. When you are prompted to confirm restoration, tap OK. Based on the data in the USB memory, the system settings are restored, and the FC1 restarts.
Backing up and restoring the Patient Log
You can back up patient information (data set by the user) as a file in the USB memory.
By retrieving the patient information log that is stored in the USB memory, you can restore the previous configuration.
Caution
To protect the data set by the user, save the patient information log in the USB memory periodically, as well as every time the data changes.
Do not use the USB memory for purposes other than those mentioned in this User's guide. Using the USB memory for other purposes may cause damage to the FC1.
In order to avoid re-specifying all the patient information settings when replacing the FC1, execute a backup immediately after completing the settings to create backup data in the USB memory.
To restore the patient information log, connect the USB memory in which the log is stored and then start FC1.
If necessary, you can restore a configuration by restoring the patient information log from the USB memory. To back up the patient log 1 Connect the USB memory for backup of patient information log to the USB connector.
2 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
FC1 User Guide
Backing up and restoring presets
73
3 On page 3/4, tap Backup. The Backup screen appears. 4 To the right of Patient Log, tap Start. 5 When you are prompted to confirm starting the backup of the patient log, tap OK.
The patient information log is saved in the USB memory. To restore the patient log 1 Connect the USB memory in which the backup data of patient information log is saved to the USB
connector.
2 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
3 On page 3/4, tap Restore. The Restore screen appears. 4 To the right of Patient Log, tap Start. 5 When you are prompted to confirm starting the restore operation, tap OK. 6 When the confirmation message appears, press the POWER button. Based on the data in the USB memory, the patient information log is restored and the FC1restarts.
Note
Data that are the same both on USB memory and in the Patient Log are not copied.
Resetting user configuration
Use this function to clear any user configuration. You also reset any patient log or image data.
Resetting the configuration with Patient Log/Image Data deletes also the examinations and the patient data. You are advised to make a backup of examination images data in advance while referring to "Exporting examination data" on page 203.
Note
The date, network and monitor settings are not deleted.
74
Resetting user configuration
Chapter 3
To reset user configuration
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 3/4, tap Reset. The Reset screen appears. 3 Do one of the following:
a To delete system information (such as Store) set by the user, tap Start on the User Configuration line. (Date, Network, and Monitor settings are not deleted.)
b To delete examination and patient data (such as patient logs and images and clips obtained during examinations), tap Start on the Patient Log/Image Data line.
4 When a message saying that user configuration will be initialized appears, tap OK. 5 When a message saying that patient information will be initialized appears, tap OK. When the second screen
appears, tap OK again. 6 You must restart the FC1 at this point to proceed.
Formatting the USB memory
When you format the USB memory, all the data on it are deleted. To format the USB memory 1 Connect the USB memory to the USB connector.
2 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
3 On page 3/4, tap Format USB. The Format USB screen appears. 4 Tap Start. 5 When you are prompted to confirm the formatting of the USB memory, tap OK.
The USB memory is formatted, and all the data on it are deleted.
FC1 User Guide
Formatting the USB memory
75
Using USB memory
You can use a USB memory to do the following: Store various logs and setup configurations for import and export Archive images and clips
Images and clips are saved to internal storage and are organized in a sortable patient list.
You can archive the images and clips from the FC1 system to a PC using a USB memory. To view the images and clips stored in a USB memory on the ultrasound system, import them to the ultrasound system.
The system has four USB ports.
WARNING
To avoid damaging the USB memory and losing patient data from it, observe the following: Do not remove the USB memory or turn off the ultrasound system while the
system is exporting.
Do not bump or otherwise apply pressure to the USB memory while it is attached to one of the FC1's USB ports. The connector could break.
Caution
If the USB icon does not appear in the system status area on-screen, the USB memory may be defective or password-protected. Turn the system off and replace the device.
Note
The system does not support password-protected USB memory. Make sure that the USB memory that you use does not have password protection enabled. See also "Troubleshooting" on page 477.
For more information about the device, see "Importing examination data" on page 205.
Inserting a USB memory
To insert a USB memory
Insert the USB memory into any of the FC1 USB ports. For more information about USB locations, see Figure 2-1, "System Front Features" on page 3.
When the USB icon appears, the USB memory is ready.
76
Using USB memory
Chapter 3
Removing a USB memory
Caution
Removing the USB memory while the system is exporting to it may cause the exported files to be corrupted or incomplete.
To remove a USB memory
1 If the system is exporting to the device, wait for the USB animation to stop, and then wait another five seconds.
2 Remove the USB memory from the port.
Formatting the SSD
The SSD is an internal storage device.
Formatting the SDD deletes the examinations and the patient data. You are advised to make a backup of examination images data in advance while referring to "Exporting examination data" on page 203.
To format the SSD
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 3/4, tap Format SSD. The Format SSD screen appears. 3 Tap Start. You are asked to confirm that you want internal memory to be formatted. Tap OK to confirm. 4 The SSD formatting begins. When it is done, you will be asked to restart the system.
Viewing system information
To display the System Information screen
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 3/4, tap System Info. The System Information screen appears.
FC1 User Guide
Formatting the SSD
77
Changing site information settings
You can alter the information that appears about your site name and its address. To change site information
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 3/4, tap Site Info. The System screen appears. 3 Tap Site Info. 4 Tap any of the two fields (Site or Address) to see the keyboard. Enter the information and then press Close to
return to the System screen. 5 Tap OK to save the settings.
Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
Setting the system date and time
Use the DateTime screen to specify the system's date and time. You can also choose whether to receive date and time information from the NTP (Network Time Protocol) server. To set the system's date and time
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 3/4, Tap Date and Language. The Date and Language screen appears. 3 Tap Date Time. The DateTime screen appears. 4 To change the date setting type, select Manual or NTP. If you tap NTP, the available fields are displayed below.
Tap a field (the keyboard appears) and type the IP address of the NTP server. 5 Tap the date and time to be set: YYYY (year), MM (month), DD (day), hh (hour), mm (minute), and ss (second). 6 Tap or to set the selected item.
78
Changing site information settings
Chapter 3
7 Tap OK to save the settings. Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
Setting the date and time display formats
You can specify how to display date and time information. To specify date and time display formats
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 3/4, tap Date and Language. The Date and Language screen appears. 3 Tap Date Time Format. The Date Display Format screen appears. 4 In the Date Format section, tap the green arrow button to see a choice of date formats: YYYY/MM/DD, MM/DD/
YYYY, or DD/MM/YYYY. 5 Tap the date format you want to use. 6 To display the seconds, tap ON in the Second Display section. To hide the seconds, tap OFF. 7 To use the 12-hour format, tap 12H in the Time Format section. To use the 24-hour format, tap 24H. 8 Tap OK to save the settings.
Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
Setting the language to display
To change the language setting
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 3/4, tap Date and Language. The Date and Language screen appears.
FC1 User Guide
Setting the date and time display formats
79
3 Tap Language. The Language screen appears.
4 Tap the right arrow button to change the language.
5 Tap OK to save the settings.
Press the SYSTEM button to return to the examination screen.
Setting the login method for the FC1
On the security settings page, you can configure the system to require users to login and enter passwords. You can also add and delete users and change passwords. The default Administrator login name is Administrator. If you don't have the administrator password, contact FUJIFILM SonoSite. (See "Customer comments" on page 1) Any user with administrative privileges can login as an administrator.
To set the login method:
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 3/4, tap Security. The Security screen appears.
3 Tap Login Common. The Login Common Setting screen appears.
4 Tap ON.
5 Tap OK. At this point, you must restart the unit.
Note
When the login setting is ON, the logout function is enabled. Tap the Others button, at the top right of the panel, to access it.
Setting the license
This part of the software provides instructions on how to obtain a license key, and a place to input that key.
80
Setting the login method for the FC1
Chapter 3
To set the system license
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 4/4, tap System License. The License screen appears. 3 Tap System License, and then follow the instructions to obtain the license key. 4 Once you have obtained the license key, tap the first field to see a keyboard where you can type the
numbers of the license. Type all the numbers. 5 Tap OK.
Logs
You can choose to acquire all logs stored in the FC1 (or specify the range of dates for these logs), and delete all logs.
Note
Logs have limited space and overwrite existing content when full.
Setting log acquisition
To set log acquisition behavior
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 4/4, tap Get Log. The Get Log screen appears. 3 Do one or more of the following:
a if you want to acquire all logs, in the Get All Log row, tap Start. b If you want to limit log acquisition to a certain time range, in the Get Between Log row, tap the date boxes
to specify the range and tap Start. 4 When you are prompted to confirm this action, tap OK (or tap Cancel to cancel it).
FC1 User Guide
Logs
81
To delete all logs
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 4/4, tap Delete Log. The Delete Log screen appears. 3 tap Start.
Setting audit log acquisition
Provides access to personal information, and allows you to save or export the audit log to maintain a record of security feature changes. To set audit log acquisition behavior
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ).
The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 4/4, tap Get Audit Log. The Get Audit Log screen appears.
3 To get specific audit logs, in the Get Between Audit Log row, specify the date or dates of the audit logs you want, and then tap Start.
When you are prompted to confirm this action, tap OK. (or tap Cancel to cancel it).
Note
The audit log is saved as a password-secured ZIP file. The password will be the same as user password that was used to log in to the FC1 system. Software that conforms to RFC3881 can view the exported audit log file.
To delete all audit logs
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 4/4, tap Delete Audit Log. The Delete Audit Log screen appears. 3 Tap Start.
82
Logs
Chapter 3
To view the exported audit log The exported audit log is XML and/or CSV file. Software that conforms to RFC3881 can view XML file.
CSV file can be viewed in the most of generally available software.
CSV format is as follows: Event Time User ID Event Type ID Event Action Event Outcome Audit Enterprise Site ID Audit Source ID Participant Objects Type Participant Objects ID Participant Objects Name Alternative User ID Role ID Network Access Point Details XML
Note
csv file there is a limit to the read size. If the output is large it will be split.
FC1 User Guide
Logs
83
84
Logs
Chapter 3
CHAPTER 4
Chapter 4: Imaging
Getting familiar with the examination screen
This section describes the information that is necessary for ultrasound diagnosis and that is common to all screen modes. On the main monitor, the examination screen includes the following: Header
The strip across the top of the monitor The header displays patient and exam information, current date and time, and facility information. For more, see "Information in the header" on page 86. Grayscale or color scale bar At the top left, to the left of the acoustic output information Acoustic output information Transducer name, MI/TI value, frame rate, etc. Examination image The two parts of the image in the image area Information added by the user Information such as body marks, annotations, and measurement information Above the footer, operation information including: Frame rate Current mode
Getting familiar with the examination screen
85
Operation interface information, such as the functions of the trackball, function buttons, and Store buttons
System information such as the amount of free space on internal storage media
Footer
The strip across the bottom of the monitor
Information in the footer includes functional information, such as magnification ratio, number of heartbeats for ECG function, and cine memory. For more information, see "Information in the footer" on page 87.
In addition, you can show or hide the grayscale or color scale bar, the transducer name, and the AP (acoustic output) value and parameters for each mode.
Information in the header
The header may include information such as the following (depending on the types of information that the user has recorded and has chosen to show or hide):
Patient information
The patient name, and under it, the patient ID, date of birth, and age
If the date of birth is registered in the Japanese calendar format, it is converted to the Western calendar format.
If the age is less than one month, it displays with the number of weeks and the number of days (for example, 2w3d); if the age is one month or more, it displays with the number of months (for example, 1M).
The patient's gender, and under it, the patient's week of pregnancy (if applicable)
Examination information
Examination type and presets
Patient accession number
Preset name
Operator name
System information
86
Getting familiar with the examination screen
Chapter 4
Facility name Current date and time
Information in the footer
The footer may include information such as the following (depending on the information that the user has recorded and has chosen to show or hide): Message display area, which displays status and other messages The function assigned to the trackball The function assigned to the multi dial Functions assigned to the Store buttons 1 and 2
When Store 3 is assigned to a function button, Store 3 also appears. System information The amount of data stored in an examination
This is equal to the count of recorded images, including clips. The count rolls over at 300. Connection status of optional devices This displays the icon for each optional device that is currently connected to the FC1. USB keyboard.
Barcode reader:
Card reader:
Foot switch: USB memory:
The green image of USB memory means that the amount of free space is more than 200MB.
FC1 User Guide
Getting familiar with the examination screen
87
The gray image of USB memory means that the amount of free space becomes 200MB or less.
Printer, black-and-white or color: The following icons represent the print job's status. In each case, to represent a color printer, the icon for a black-and-white printer has the letter "C" superimposed. Printing in progress:
Error: or Queuing:
If you format printing with multi-image output (in which several images may print in one print frame), the number of images in the queue is superimposed on the gray printer icon. Network
Connecting:
Communication in progress:
Error: or When there is no connection, no icon is displayed.
The amount of free space on the internal storage media The display changes in increments of 1%. If it becomes 20% or less, the color of the icon changes.
Table 4-7: Free space icon Amount of free space Icon 81% to 100% 61% to 80% 41% to 60% 21% to 40%
88
Getting familiar with the examination screen
Chapter 4
Table 4-7: Free space icon Amount of free space Icon 1% to 20% 0%
AC power supply connection status
When the AC adapter is connected: When there is no connection, no icon is displayed.
Internal battery charge status The charge of the battery installed in the FC1 is displayed as an icon; the percentage of available power appears inside the battery icon, in increments of 1%.
Table 4-8: Charge status icon Charging or discharging status and percentage of charge available Icon Charge in progress--21% to 100% Discharge in progress--21% to 100% 0% to 20%
Imaging modes
The availability of individual imaging modes depends on the transducer and exam type that you are using. For details, see "Imaging modes and exams available by transducer" on page 119. Each of the modes has a unique combination of controls. It shares some tasks with the other modes and has others that are unique to it. Thus, each of the following sections about modes describes a mode's controls and work procedure for accomplishing its unique tasks, and refers you to the sections that describe how to accomplish tasks that it shares with other modes.
2D mode
2D mode shows an arbitrary cross-section of biomedical tissue in a tomographic view.
FC1 User Guide
Imaging modes
89
Starting an examination or changing a transducer activates the 2D mode.
Note
2D mode may be represented in the touch panel and main monitor as B mode.
The 2D-mode examination screen
In the 2D-mode examination screen, note the following, in particular.
Probe orientation mark
The probe orientation mark indicates the direction of the transducer. The display of the probe orientation mark changes depending on the situation:
Live image or active image in Dual screen mode: Green
Frozen image or inactive image in Dual screen mode: Gray
When the image is inverted vertically or horizontally, the probe orientation mark changes position accordingly.
Mode mark (current mode identifier)
The mode mark (B) in the illustration indicates that the 2D mode image is displayed.
When a live image is displayed, this mark shows in light blue.
When a frozen image is displayed, this mark shows in gray.
Cine memory bar
The cine memory bar shows only when a frozen image is displayed or when you review images in the cine memory.
2D-mode controls
On the touch panel, the 2D-mode controls are on the B screen. Table 4-9: 2D-mode controls
Control
Imaging Preset
What it does
Selects the imaging preset appropriate for your examination, on the touch panel. For information on working with imaging presets, see "Working with imaging presets" on page 147.
90
Imaging modes
Chapter 4
Table 4-9: 2D-mode controls
Control
Image Type
What it does
Selects the image type. The options are: Fundamental Tissue Harmonic: This transmits at one frequency and receives at a higher harmonic frequency to reduce noise and clutter and improve resolution.
Image Width
Compound Harmonic: This image type has a mix of fundamental and harmonic frequencies. It is desirable for linear transducers, because it reduces noise.
Spatial compound: Image with a mix of data obtained by transmitting ultrasound waves multi-directionally
Widens or narrows the image width. Also moves the field of view position.
Trapezoid
L/R
U/D
Simul Dual Optimize M/D Cursor
Changes image to the Trapezoid display mode, in order to extend the field of view when using a linear transducer. Note: You can select the Trapezoid display mode only when a linear transducer is connected.
Inverts the image horizontally. WARNING: When performing a diagnosis based on an inverted image, check the direction of the transducer so as not to misunderstand the direction of scanning and the orientation of the image.
Inverts the image vertically. WARNING: When performing a diagnosis based on an inverted image, check the direction of the transducer so as not to misunderstand the direction of scanning and the orientation of the image.
For details, see "Viewing in Simultaneous Dual-screen mode" on page 158.
For details, see "Optimizing the image" on page 116.
For details, see "Using the M or D cursor" on page 159.
FC1 User Guide
Imaging modes
91
Table 4-9: 2D-mode controls
Control
ECG
What it does
Enables use and configuration of the ECG waveform display. For more information, including setting the sweep speed, see "Displaying and configuring the ECG waveform" on page 161.
Needle Guide
For details, see "Using the needle guide" on page 169.
Needle Profiling
For details, see "Needle profiling (Optional)" on page 171.
The following are controls that combine the touch panel and dial menu buttons:
Table 4-10: 2D-mode combination controls
Control
Sound Speed A Output
B Steer Quick Angle
Cursor Steer
What it does
Sets the sound speed. For details, see "Setting the sound speed" on page 112.
Sets the transmission output level. For details, see "Setting the transmission-output level" on page 113. Note: You cannot change the transmission output level when the image is frozen.
Sets the steering angle on images in the 2D-mode.
Changes the cursor's gate angle. To change the angle to plus or minus 45°, 60°, or 0°, tap Quick Angle, and then turn dial menu button 1 (the dial to the right of Quick Angle). The angles with the upper end of the graphic to the left are positive; the angles with the upper end of the graphic to the right are negative.
Changes the cursor's steering angle. To specify the steering angle, rotate dial menu button 1 (the dial menu button to the right of Cursor Steer). Note:
You can set the Cursor Steer angle only when a linear transducer is connected.
The steer angle can be set to 30 degrees only when the HFL38xp or HFL50xp transducer is connected.
92
Imaging modes
Chapter 4
The following are controls that combine the touch panel and switch menu buttons: Table 4-11: 2D-mode combination controls
Control
Edge
Sharpness
Map
What it does
Sets the level of emphasis of edges. The range of values is 0 to 4. For details, see "Raising or lowering the emphasis of edges" on page 113.
Raises or lowers the level of sharpness. The range of values is 0 to 4. For details, see "Raising or lowering the level of sharpness" on page 114.
Selects the map for adjusting the tone of the 2D mode image. The possible maps are:
Grayscale: G1 to G11
Pseudo color: I1 to I4
Single color: C1 to C3
Persistence DR Focus Depth Speckle Reduct
For details, see "Adjusting image tone" on page 114.
Raises or lowers the persistence value. Persistence is frame correlation, which as it increases tends to suppress noise in the image. As you increase the value, the image becomes smoother. The range of values is 0 to 4. For details, see "Adjusting persistence" on page 114.
Adjusts the dynamic range in the image. The dynamic range is the range of contrast in the image. You can increase or decrease the dynamic range in increments of 5. The range of values is 40 to 100. For details, see "Setting the range of contrast" on page 114.
Sets the focus depth. For details, see "Setting the focus depth" on page 115. Note: You cannot change the focus depth when the image is frozen.
Reduces speckling in the image. Along the bottom of the touch panel, tap Speckle Reduct, if it is not already active, and then press switch menu button 3 (the rocker button beneath Speckle Reduct) to raise or lower the value. The range of values is 0 to 4.
FC1 User Guide
Imaging modes
93
Table 4-11: 2D-mode combination controls
Control
Focus Number
Gate Size
What it does
Defines the number of focuses that you can set. Along the bottom of the touch panel, tap Focus Number, if it is not already active, and then press switch menu button 3 (the rocker button beneath Focus Number) to raise or lower the value. The maximum value is 2. Note: Increasing the number of focuses decreases the frame rate.
Sets the cursor's gate size. 1 At the bottom of the touch panel, tap Gate Size, if it is not already active for switch
menu button 4 (the rocker button beneath it).
2 Press the up- or down-arrow side of the rocker button to increase or decrease the gate size.
Note: You cannot set the gate size when the image is frozen.
The following control is on the control panel:
Table 4-12: 2D-mode combination controls
Control
FREQUENCY
button
What it does
Changes the transmission frequency. To change the transmission frequency, press either the up- or down-arrow side of
the FREQUENCY button ( the examination screen.
). The current frequency is displayed at the bottom of
Notes:
The range of available frequencies depends on the transducer type that you are using.
You cannot change the frequency when the image type is Compound (see "Image Type," in the first table in this section).
In CD, PD, PW, CW, and TDI (PW) modes, this button toggles to the function to change the scale in PRF (pulse repetition frequency).
For more information on working with controls in 2D mode, see the following: "Adjusting the depth and gain of the image" on page 111
94
Imaging modes
Chapter 4
Adjusting gain compensation (depth gain compensation or lateral gain compensation): "Optimizing the image" on page 116.
Using the M or D cursor, including setting its gate size, steering angle, and cursor angle: "Using the M or D cursor" on page 159.
Using Dual and Simultaneous Dual screen modes: "Viewing in Dual-screen mode" on page 155 and "Viewing in Simultaneous Dual-screen mode" on page 158.
Working in 2D mode
To work in 2D mode
1 Press the 2D button (
).
A 2D mode image is displayed on the main monitor, and the 2D button turns orange. The 2D screen appears on the touch panel.
2 To widen or narrow the image width:
a On the touch panel, tap Image Width. The region of interest (ROI) is displayed.
b Use the trackball to adjust the size of the image width.
A green outline showing the width of the image that you are setting the mode to appears slightly before the image changes to that width.
Note
Narrowing the image width increases the frame rate.
c To toggle between the size setting and the position setting, press the SET button (
).
d Use the trackball to adjust the position of the image.
A green outline showing the position of the image that you are setting the mode to appears slightly before the image changes to that position.
3 To set the steering angle of the 2D mode image:
a On the touch panel, tap B Steer.
b To specify the steering angle of the 2D mode image, rotate the dial menu button to the right of B Steer.
FC1 User Guide
Imaging modes
95
You can set the steering angle in increments of 15 degrees.
Caution
You can set the B Steer angle only when a linear transducer is connected.
4 Complete the part of the examination that requires 2D mode.
For information on viewing an ECG (electrocardiogram) during ultrasound examination, see "Viewing the ECG waveform display" on page 160.
For information on performing a needle procedure, see "Performing a needle procedure" on page 163.
5 To freeze the image, press the FREEZE button ( ). 6 As necessary, save the image or perform measurements. For details on saving a frozen image or a cine loop, see "Storing examination images" on page 195.
M mode
The M-mode examination screen
The M mode displays temporal changes (motions) of the region that you specify with the M cursor in the 2D mode image.
The M cursor, which appears on the 2D mode image, indicates the position of the M-mode line in the crosssectional view.
Working in M mode includes configuring the mode's settings.
Caution
When working in M mode, make sure that the M tab is current on the touch panel. If the B tab is current, you are working in 2D mode, and are adjusting 2D-mode image parameters.
96
Imaging modes
Chapter 4
M-mode controls
The following controls are on the touch panel: Table 4-13: M-mode controls
Control
Imaging Preset
Format ECG
What it does
Enables selecting the imaging preset appropriate for your examination, on the touch panel. For information on working with imaging presets, see "Working with imaging presets" on page 147.
Enables changing the display sizes of the 2D-mode and M -mode images relative to each other. For details, see "Sizing mode images relative to each other" on page 117.
Enables use and configuration of the ECG waveform display. For more information, including setting the sweep speed, see "Displaying and configuring the ECG waveform" on page 161.
The following controls combine the touch panel and dial menu buttons: Table 4-14: M-mode combination controls
Control
Sound Speed
A Output
What it does
Sets the sound speed. For details, see "Setting the sound speed" on page 112.
Sets the transmission output level. For details, see "Setting the transmission-output level" on page 113. Note: You cannot change the transmission output level when the image is frozen.
The following controls combine the touch panel and switch menu buttons.
Table 4-15: M-mode combination controls
Control
Edge
What it does
Sets the level of emphasis of edges. The range of values is 0 to 4. For details, see "Raising or lowering the emphasis of edges" on page 113.
FC1 User Guide
Imaging modes
97
Table 4-15: M-mode combination controls
Control
Map
What it does
Selects the map for adjusting the tone of the 2D -mode image. The possible maps are:
Grayscale: G1 to G11
Pseudo color: I1 to I4
Single color: C1 to C3
DR Sweep Speed
For details, see "Adjusting image tone" on page 114.
Adjusts the dynamic range in the image. The dynamic range is the range of contrast in the image. You can increase or decrease the dynamic range in increments of 5. The range of values is 40 to 100. For details, see "Setting the range of contrast" on page 114.
Sets the sweep speed in number of heartbeats per sweep. For details, see "Setting the sweep speed" on page 112.
For more information on adjusting depth and gain in M mode, see "Adjusting the depth and gain of the image" on page 111.
Working in M mode
To work in M mode
1 Press the M button.
Note
To activate the M mode while in another mode (live image), press the M button.
The 2D-mode and M-mode images show on the monitor, and the M button turns orange. 2 To adjust depth gain compensation (DGC), see "Optimizing the image" on page 116.
3 To freeze the image, press the FREEZE button ( ). 4 Save the image or perform measurements, as needed.
For details on saving a frozen image or a cine loop, see "Storing examination images" on page 195.
98
Imaging modes
Chapter 4
CD and PD modes
CD mode provides information regarding the blood-flow velocity within the color region of interest (color ROI).
PD mode provides qualitative Doppler signal power information regarding the blood flow inside the PD region of interest (PD ROI).
The CD- and PD-mode examination screen
Notes
The color-focus mark of the CD/PD mode image is green when the image is live, and white when the image is frozen.
The mode mark indicates that the CD mode or PD mode image is displayed. When a live image is displayed, this mark has a light-blue background. When a frozen image is displayed, this mark has a gray background.
The cine memory bar appears only when a frozen image is on screen or when you review images in the cine memory.
CD- and PD-mode controls
The following controls are on the touch panel.
Table 4-16: CD- and PD-mode controls
Control
Imaging Preset
ECG
What it does
Enables selecting the imaging preset appropriate for your examination, on the touch panel. For information on working with imaging presets, see "Working with imaging presets" on page 147.
Enables use and configuration of the ECG waveform display. For more information, including on setting the sweep speed, see "Displaying and configuring the ECG waveform" on page 161.
Invert
Enables inversion of the color map that indicates the blood-flow direction. The blood-flow direction is relative to the transducer: toward or away from it. Tap Invert.
Simul Dual
For details, see "Viewing in Simultaneous Dual-screen mode" on page 158.
FC1 User Guide
Imaging modes
99
Table 4-16: CD- and PD-mode controls
Control
M/D Cursor
What it does For details, see "Using the M or D cursor" on page 159.
The following controls combine the touch panel and dial menu buttons Table 4-17: CD- and PD-mode combination controls
Control
A Output
ROI Steer
What it does
Sets the transmission output level. For details, see "Setting the transmission-output level" on page 113. Note: You cannot change the transmission output level when the image is frozen.
Sets the steering angle of the color ROI. To specify the steering angle, rotate the dial menu button to the right of ROI Steer. Note: You can set the ROI Steer angle only when a linear transducer is connected.
Scale
The ROI Steer angle can be set to 30 degrees only when the HFL38xp or HFL50xp transducer is connected.
Expands or contracts the color scale. For details, see "Setting the color scale" on page 115. Note: You cannot change the color scale when the image is frozen.
Quick Angle
The color scale can be expanded or contracted also by FREQUENCY button. To change the frequency in 2D (B) mode, press the 2D (B) button to return to 2D (B) mode, and then press the FREQUENCY button.
Changes the cursor's gate angle. To change the angle to plus or minus 45°, 60°, or 0°, tap Quick Angle, and then turn dial menu button 1 (the dial to the right of Quick Angle). The angles with the upper end of the graphic to the left are positive; the angles with the upper end of the graphic to the right are negative.
100 Imaging modes
Chapter 4
Table 4-17: CD- and PD-mode combination controls
Control
What it does
Cursor Steer
Changes the cursor's steering angle. To specify the steering angle, rotate dial menu button 1 (the dial menu button to the right of Cursor Steer).
Note: You can set the Cursor Steer angle only when a linear transducer is connected.
The steer angle can be set to 30 degrees only when the HFL38xp or HFL50xp transducer is connected.
The following controls combine the touch panel and switch menu buttons.
Table 4-18: CD- and PD-mode combination controls
Control
Balance
What it does
Sets the level of display priority of the 2D mode and CD/PD mode images (that is, which type of image displays at the front of the screen). At the bottom of the touch panel, tap Balance, if it is not already active for switch
menu button 1 (the rocker button beneath it).
Press the up- or down-arrow side of switch menu button 1 to raise or lower the value.
Baseline
The range of values is 1 through 7.
Sets the baseline of the color map. At the bottom of the touch panel, tap Baseline, if it is not already active for switch
menu button 1 (the rocker button beneath it).
Press the up- or down-arrow side of switch menu button 1 to raise or lower the value.
Note: When the baseline is changed, the velocity and color assignments change accordingly.
Map
Selects the map for adjusting the tone of the CD or PD mode image.
The possible maps are:
For CD mode, VDn and VEn, where n is 1 to 4
For PD mode, PDn, PVn, and DPDn, where n is 1 to 4, and DPVn, where n is 1 to 5
For details, see "Adjusting image tone" on page 114.
FC1 User Guide
Imaging modes 101
Table 4-18: CD- and PD-mode combination controls
Control
Flash Cancel
What it does
Sets the level of filtering for flash artifacts that are generated as a result of movement of biomedical tissue such as the heart. At the bottom of the touch panel, tap Flash Cancel, if it is not already active for
switch menu button 2 (the rocker button beneath it).
Press the up- or down-arrow side of switch menu button 1 to raise or lower the value.
Persistence Filter DR Focus Depth
The range of values is 0 through 4.
Raises or lowers the persistence value. Persistence is frame correlation, which, as it increases, tends to suppress noise in the image. As you increase the value, the image becomes smoother. The range of values is 0 to 4. For details, see "Adjusting persistence" on page 114.
Sets the cutoff frequency of the filter for removing clutter in the CD- or PD-mode image persistence. The range of values is 1 through 6. The smaller the number, the lower the cutoff frequency, and the less clutter. For details, see "Setting the filter cutoff frequency" on page 116. Note: You cannot change the filter level when the image is frozen.
Adjusts the dynamic range in the image. The dynamic range is the range of contrast in the image. You can increase or decrease the dynamic range in increments of 5. The range of values is 40 to 100. For details, see "Setting the range of contrast" on page 114. Note: You can change the dynamic range only when the system is in PD mode.
Sets the focus depth. For details, see "Setting the focus depth" on page 115. Note: You cannot change the focus depth when the image is frozen.
102 Imaging modes
Chapter 4
Table 4-18: CD- and PD-mode combination controls
Control
CF Frequency
What it does
Sets the transmission frequency of the CD or PD mode image. At the bottom of the touch panel, tap CF Frequency, if it is not already active for
switch menu button 5 (the rocker button beneath it).
Press the up- or down-arrow side of switch menu button 1 to raise or lower the value.
Select the transmission frequency for these images.
Gate Size
Note: You cannot change the transmission frequency when the image is frozen.
Sets the cursor's gate size. 1 At the bottom of the touch panel, tap Gate Size, if it is not already active for switch
menu button 4 (the rocker button beneath it).
2 Press the up- or down-arrow side of the rocker button to increase or decrease the gate size.
Note: You cannot set the gate size when the image is frozen.
The following control is on the control panel
Table 4-19: CD- and PD-mode control panel
Control
C button
What it does
Shows or hides the region of interest (ROI), when either the PD mode or CD mode image is showing and is frozen.
For more information on working with controls in CD and PD modes, see the following:
"Adjusting the depth and gain of the image" on page 111
"Using the M or D cursor" on page 159
The information available for the M or D cursor includes setting its gate size, steering angle, and cursor angle.
"Viewing in Dual-screen mode" on page 155 and "Viewing in Simultaneous Dual-screen mode" on page 158.
FC1 User Guide
Imaging modes 103
Working in CD and PD modes
To work in CD and PD modes 1 To activate the CD mode, press the C button.
The CD mode image appears on the examination screen, and the C button turns orange. 2 To move between CD mode and PD mode while in either, in the touch panel, tap CD or PD in the Mode area
according to which mode you want to view. Or, if you have assigned activation of the PD mode to a function button, press that function button.
Caution
Note that to activate the CD mode while in another mode, you press the C button. To activate the PD mode, you press the function button that you have assigned to activate the PD mode.
3 To change the size or position of the color ROI: a Use the trackball to adjust the size of the image width or the position of the image.
b To toggle between the size setting and the position setting, press the SET button (
).
4 To freeze the image, press the FREEZE button ( ). When the image is frozen, you cannot use the following functions: CF Frequency A Output Filter Scale Focus Depth
5 As necessary, save the image or perform measurements. For details on saving a frozen image or a cine loop, see "Storing examination images" on page 195.
104 Imaging modes
Chapter 4
PW, CW, and TDI modes
Use the PW, CW, and TDI modes to display information on the blood flow in the heart or in blood vessels, and the movement of cardiac muscle tissue.
The PW-, CW-, and TDI-mode examination screen
The scroll display of PW, CW, or TDI mode indicates that the PW/CW/TDI mode strip is displayed. It turns light blue when a live image is displayed, and it turns gray when a frozen image is displayed.
The PW, CW, or TDI cursor appears on the 2D-mode image. It indicates the position of the PW/CW/TDI mode strip. When the PW mode is active, the D button is orange.
PW-, CW-, and TDI-mode controls
The following are controls that operate from the touch panel:
Table 4-20: PW-, CW-, and TDI-mode controls
Control
Imaging Preset
Format ECG
What it does
For selecting the imaging preset appropriate for your examination, on the touch panel. For information on working with imaging presets, see "Working with imaging presets" on page 147.
Enables changing the display sizes of the 2D mode and PW, CW, or TDI mode images relative to each other. For details, see "Sizing mode images relative to each other" on page 117.
Enables using and configuring the ECG waveform display. For more information, including on setting the sweep speed, see "Displaying and configuring the ECG waveform" on page 161.
Invert
For inverting the color map that indicates the blood-flow direction and the strip display direction of the Doppler spectrum. The blood-flow direction is relative to the transducer: toward or away from it. Tap Invert.
FC1 User Guide
Imaging modes 105
Table 4-20: PW-, CW-, and TDI-mode controls
Control
Update area
What it does
Selects an image for updating in real time. Beside Update, tap either B, D, or Simul, according to which image or images you want updated.
B: Update only the live 2D-mode image. The spectral trace of PW, CW, or TDI mode is not updated when the image parameter (for example, cursor steer) is adjusted.
D: Update only the live PW/CW/TDI-mode strip.
Simul: Update both the live 2D-mode image and the live PW-mode strip.
You can specify image updates only in PW mode (not CW or TDI modes). Note: You can specify image updates only when a live image is on screen.
The following are controls that combine the touch panel and dial menu buttons.
Table 4-21: PW-, CW-, and TDI-mode combination controls
Control
Quick Angle
A Output
What it does
Changes the cursor's gate angle. To change the angle to plus or minus 45°, 60°, or 0°, tap Quick Angle, and then turn dial menu button 1 (the dial to the right of Quick Angle). The angles with the upper end of the graphic to the left are positive; the angles with the upper end of the graphic to the right are negative.
Sets the transmission output level. For details, see "Setting the transmission-output level" on page 113. Note: You cannot change the transmission output level when the image is frozen.
106 Imaging modes
Chapter 4
Table 4-21: PW-, CW-, and TDI-mode combination controls
Control
Scale
What it does
Expands or contracts the velocity scale of the PW/CW/TDI mode strip. 1 On the right-hand side of the touch panel, tap Scale, if it is not already active for the
dial menu button to its right.
2 Turn the dial menu button to grow or shrink the color scale.
Cursor Steer
Note: You cannot change the velocity scale when the image is frozen.
The velocity scale can be expanded or contracted also by FREQUENCY button. To change the frequency in 2D (B) mode, press the 2D (B) button to return to 2D (B) mode, and then press the FREQUENCY button.
Changes the cursor's steering angle. To specify the steering angle, rotate dial menu button 1 (the dial menu button to the right of Cursor Steer). Note:
You can set the Cursor Steer angle only when a linear transducer is connected.
Audio Volume
The steer angle can be set to 30 degrees only when the HFL38xp or HFL50xp transducer is connected.
Sets the audio volume level. On the touch panel, tap Audio Volume, and then turn dial menu button 1 (the dial menu button to the right of Audio Volume).
You can set an audio volume from 0 to 100.
Note: This control is not available in TDI mode.
FC1 User Guide
Imaging modes 107
The following are controls that combine the touch panel and switch menu buttons. Table 4-22: PW-, CW-, and TDI-mode combination controls
Control
Baseline
What it does
Moves the baseline for discriminating the blood flow direction (forward or reverse). 1 At the bottom of the touch panel, tap Baseline, if it is not already active for switch
menu button 1 (the rocker button beneath it).
2 Press the up- or down-arrow side of the rocker button to move the baseline.
As you press the rocker button, the baseline moves up or down in the display.
Map
Selects the map for adjusting the tone of the PW, CW, or TDI mode image.
The possible maps are:
Grayscale: G1 to G8
Pseudo color: I1 to I4
Filter Gate Size
For details, see "Adjusting image tone" on page 114.
Sets the cutoff frequency of the filter for removing clutter in the PW, CW, or TDI mode image persistence. The range of values is 1 through 12. The smaller the number, the lower the cutoff frequency, and the less clutter. For details, see "Setting the filter cutoff frequency" on page 116. Note: You cannot change the filter level when the image is frozen.
Sets the cursor's gate size. 1 At the bottom of the touch panel, tap Gate Size, if it is not already active for switch
menu button 4 (the rocker button beneath it).
2 Press the up- or down-arrow side of the rocker button to increase or decrease the gate size.
Note: This control is not available for the CW mode.
You cannot set the gate size when the image is frozen.
DR
Adjusts the dynamic range in the image.
The dynamic range is the range of contrast in the image.
Increase or decrease the dynamic range in increments of 5. The range of values is 40
to 100.
For details, see "Setting the range of contrast" on page 114.
108 Imaging modes
Chapter 4
Table 4-22: PW-, CW-, and TDI-mode combination controls
Control
Sweep Speed
D Frequency
What it does
Sets the sweep speed in number of seconds per sweep. For details, see "Setting the sweep speed" on page 112.
Sets the transmission frequency of the PW-, CW, or TDI-mode strip. 1 At the bottom of the touch panel, tap Gate Size, if it is not already active for switch
menu button 4 (the rocker button beneath it).
2 Press the up- or down-arrow side of the rocker button to increase or decrease the gate size.
Note: You cannot change the transmission frequency when the image is frozen.
For more information on working with controls in CD and PD modes, see the following:
"Adjusting the depth and gain of the image" on page 111
"Using the M or D cursor" on page 159
The information available for the M or D cursor includes setting its gate size, steering angle, and cursor angle.
"Viewing in Dual-screen mode" on page 155 and "Viewing in Simultaneous Dual-screen mode" on page 158
Working in PW, CW, and TDI modes
To work in the PW, CW, and TDI modes
1 To change modes among PW, CW, and TDI, do one of the following:
On the touch panel, beside Mode, tap PW, CW, or TDI, according to which mode you want to activate.
To activate the PW mode, press the D button.
To activate the CW or TDI mode, do one of the following:
If the function for activating CW or TDI mode is not already assigned to a function button, assign it to one of them.
Press the function button assigned to activate CW or TDI mode.
FC1 User Guide
Imaging modes 109
2 To correct the angle of the PW or TDI cursor, rotate the multi dial (
).
You can specify an angle between -88 and +88 degrees.
Caution
When the Doppler angle exceeds 60 degrees, the margin of error progressively increases. Doppler angles greater than 60 degrees are displayed in red.
3 To freeze the image, press the FREEZE button ( ). When the image is frozen, the following functions (virtual buttons) are inactive. D Frequency A Output Filter Gate Size Scale Update
4 As necessary, save the image or perform measurements. For details on saving a frozen image or a cine loop, see "Storing examination images" on page 195.
Controlling the image
Showing or hiding data on the monitor
You can show or hide the following elements on the monitor: Grayscale or color scale bar The transducer name AP (acoustic output) Parameters for each imaging mode
110 Controlling the image
Chapter 4
To show or hide data on the monitor 1 In any mode, tap Others. The Others screen appears. 2 Tap Remove Data Fields.
Magnifying the image
To change the magnification of the image
1 If the DEPTH/ZOOM button ( ) is blue, press it to turn it orange. The initial level of magnification is 1.25 times.
2 To increase or decrease the magnification, press the up- or down-arrow side of the rocker button ( ) below the DEPTH/ZOOM button. The available magnifications range from 1.25 times to 4.0 times. When the image is magnified, the magnification ratio shows at the bottom left of the monitor.
3 To move the magnified image, use the trackball. 4 To return the image to normal size, press the DEPTH/ZOOM button again.
Adjusting the depth and gain of the image
To change the depth of the image
1 If the DEPTH/ZOOM button ( ) is orange, press it to turn it blue. 2 To increase or decrease the depth of the image, press the up- or down-arrow side of the rocker button
(
) below the DEPTH/ZOOM button.
To change gain
Do one of the following:
FC1 User Guide
Controlling the image 111
Turn the outer ring of the FREEZE button ( decrease the gain.
) to the right to increase the gain or to the left to
To increase or decrease gain for a certain depth of field within the image, slide the appropriate DGC key to the right (to increase the gain) or to the left (to decrease the gain).
Figure 4-1: DGC (Depth Gain Control) keys Tap Optimize and specify settings. For more information on specifying gain and sound speed settings, see "Optimizing the image" on page 116
Setting the sound speed
To set the sound speed 1 On the right-hand side of the touch panel, tap Sound Speed, if it is not already active for the dial menu button
to its right. 2 Turn the dial menu button to raise or lower the sound speed. To optimize the sound speed for 2D mode 1 On the B tab, tap Optimize. 2 In the Optimize screen, make sure that Sound Speed is selected (orange). 3 Tap Close.
Setting the sweep speed
You can set the rate at which the waveform progresses. To raise or lower the sweep speed 1 Along the bottom of the touch panel, tap Sweep Speed, if it is not already active.
112 Controlling the image
Chapter 4
2 Press the up- or down-arrow side of switch menu button 1 (the rocker button below Sweep Speed) to raise or lower the speed. The range of values is from 1 to 7, inclusive.
Setting the transmission frequency
The transmission frequency influences resolution and the penetration of the image. To set the transmission frequency
On the FREQUENCY button ( ) on the control panel, press the upward-pointing arrow to raise the frequency, or the downward-pointing arrow to lower it.
Note
In CD, PD, PW, CW, and TDI (PW) modes, this button toggles to the function to change the scale in PRF (pulse repetition frequency).
Setting the transmission-output level
Note
You cannot change the transmission-output level when the image is frozen.
To set the transmission-output level
1 On the right-hand side of the touch panel, tap A Output, if it is not already active for the dial menu button to its right.
2 Turn the dial menu button to raise or lower the transmission output level.
Raising or lowering the emphasis of edges
To raise or lower the emphasis of edges
1 Along the bottom of the touch panel, tap Edge, if it is not already active.
2 Press the up- or down-arrow side of switch menu button 1 (the rocker button below Edge) to raise or lower the value.
The range of values is 0 to 4.
FC1 User Guide
Controlling the image 113
Raising or lowering the level of sharpness
To raise or lower the level of sharpness 1 Along the bottom of the touch panel, tap Sharpness, if it is not already active. 2 Press the up- or down-arrow side of switch menu button 1 (the rocker button below Sharpness) to raise or
lower the value. The range of values is 0 to 4.
Adjusting image tone
To select the map for adjusting the tone of the 2D mode image 1 Along the bottom of the touch panel, tap Map, if it is not already active. 2 Press the up- or down-arrow side of switch menu button 2 (the rocker button below Map) to cycle through
and select the type of tone and its value: Grayscale: G1 to G11 Pseudo color: I1 to I4 Single color: C1 to C3
Adjusting persistence
Persistence is frame correlation, which tends to suppress noise in the image as it increases. As you increase the value, the image becomes smoother. To increase or lower persistence 1 Along the bottom of the touch panel, tap Persistence, if it is not already active. 2 Press the up- or down-arrow side of switch menu button 3 (the rocker button below Persistence) to raise or
lower the value. The range of values is 0 to 4.
Setting the range of contrast
An image's dynamic range is the range of contrast.
114 Controlling the image
Chapter 4
To adjust the dynamic range in the image 1 Along the bottom of the touch panel, tap DR, if it is not already active. 2 Press the up- or down-arrow side of switch menu button 4 (the rocker button below DR) to raise or lower
the value. You can increase or decrease the dynamic range in increments of 5. The range of values is 40 to 100.
Setting the focus depth
Note
You cannot change the focus depth when the image is frozen.
To raise or lower the focus depth
1 At the bottom of the touch panel, tap Focus Depth, if it is not already active.
2 Press the up- or down-arrow side of switch menu button 5 (the rocker button below Focus Depth) to raise or lower the depth of focus.
As you raise or lower the depth of focus, the depth-of-focus marker (a blue triangle on the examination display) rises or falls accordingly.
Setting the color scale
Note
You cannot change the color scale when the image is frozen.
To set the scale
1 On the right-hand side of the touch panel, tap Scale, if it is not already active for the dial menu button to its right.
The color scale can be set also by FREQUENCY button.
2 Turn the dial menu button to grow or shrink the color scale.
As you turn the dial menu button, the change is reflected in the color scale at the upper-left of the main monitor.
FC1 User Guide
Controlling the image 115
Setting the filter cutoff frequency
This filter removes clutter in the CD or PD mode image persistence.
Note
You cannot change the cutoff frequency when the image is frozen.
To set the frequency of the filter cutoff
1 At the bottom of the touch panel, tap Filter, if it is not already active.
2 Press the up- or down-arrow side of switch menu button 3 (the rocker button below Filter) to raise or lower the frequency for eliminating clutter.
For the range of values specific to the mode, see "CD and PD modes" on page 99 and "PW, CW, and TDI modes" on page 105. Lowering the value lowers the cutoff frequency and reduces clutter.
Optimizing the image
This section explains how to control gain, sound speed, and the portions of the image to which they are applied. To optimize the image 1 On the 2D screen (B), tap Optimize.
The Optimize screen appears. 2 To enable the optimization feature, tap Optimize Update. 3 If Optimize Update is disabled (gray and unavailable), the optimization feature is already disabled. 4 To specify that gain be adjusted automatically:
For the entire image, tap Gain. In the direction of depth, tap DGC. In the lateral direction, tap LGC. 5 To specify the calculation position of sound speed correction, in the Sound Speed area, tap either Full Screen or ROI ("region of interest").
116 Controlling the image
Chapter 4
6 To minimize the deterioration of the resolution caused by the offset of the sound velocity, tap Sound Speed or Auto Focus.
Caution
You can select Auto Focus only when you have selected ROI in the Sound Speed area.
The 2D-mode image stops temporarily, and the system adjusts the sound velocity, after compensation.
7 To specify the gain offset value:
a Tap Set Offset.
b To adjust the gain offset precisely, press the up arrow or down arrow side of the rocker button below the Gain Offset box in the bottom-left corner of the touch panel.
8 To cancel the Gain Offset setting, tap Reset Offset.
9 To update the image with the settings that you have just specified, tap Optimize Update.
10 To close the Optimize screen, tap Close.
On the main monitor, the optimized values appear in green.
Caution
If a small ROI is specified, the estimated sound velocity value for image optimization may decrease. For information on sizing the ROI, see "2D mode" on page 89, "CD and PD modes" on page 99, and "PW, CW, and TDI modes" on page 105. When you use the 2D Steer function, the estimated sound velocity value for image optimization may decrease. The estimated sound velocity value is used for optimizing the image quality. Accordingly, it may be different from the sound velocity value of the target of examination. Sound speed compensation is applied only to the live 2D mode image. Button operation and image condition and boot timing of auto image cannot display suitable image. In that case, reboot auto image function by double clicking AUTO IMAGE button to disenable this function and clicking again to enable.
Sizing mode images relative to each other
To change the display sizes of two mode images relative to each other 1 On the touch panel, tap Format.
The Format selection screen appears.
FC1 User Guide
Controlling the image 117
2 Tap the button for the desired relative sizes of the two images:
1:1 ( ): the two mode images occupy equal parts of the screen.
2:1 ( ): the upper mode image occupies twice the vertical screen space as the lower mode image.
1:2 (
): the upper mode image occupies half the vertical screen space as the lower mode image.
The image appears in the selected display format on the main monitor.
Examination procedures
With the FC1, each examination has the following sequence. 1 Enter patient information.
Enter patient information (such as patient ID). When you have selected the examination type, the system displays the most appropriate transducer and preset for the selected examination. For more information on entering patient information, see"Entering patient information" on page 124. 2 Start the examination.
Starting an examination creates a new examination file.
3 End the examination.
For more information on ending an examination, see "Ending an examination" on page 209.
4 Restart the examination.
The examination can be restarted. However, if the set period of reexamination expires, it is not possible to add a new image or data file to the examination. For more information on the period of reexamination, see "Restart setting (reexamination setting)" on page 70.
For more information on restarting an examination, see "Restarting an examination" on page 140.
118 Examination procedures
Chapter 4
Imaging modes and exams available by transducer
WARNING
To prevent misdiagnosis or harm to the patient, understand your system's capabilities before using it. The diagnostic capability differs for each transducer, exam type, and imaging mode. In addition, transducers have been developed to meet specific criteria, depending on their physical application. These criteria include biocompatibility requirements.
The transducer that you use determines the exam types that are available, and the exam type you select determines the imaging modes that are available. The following table relates the imaging modes to the transducer type and exam. The table uses these abbreviations: Abd Abdomen Bre Breast Crd Cardiac Gyn Gynecology Msk Musculoskeletal Neo Neonatal Nrv Nerve OB Obstetrical SmP
FC1 User Guide
Imaging modes and exams available by transducer 119
Small Parts
Vas
Vascular Table 4-23: Imaging modes and exams available by transducer
Imaging mode
Transducer
Exam type
2D M Mode
Color
CPD
C60xf
Abd
PW Doppler
CW Doppler
--
TDI PW Doppler
--
Gyn
--
--
Vas
--
--
Msk
--
--
Nrv
--
--
OB
--
--
HFL38xp
Abd
--
--
Bre
--
--
Msk
--
--
Nrv
--
--
SmP
--
--
Vas
--
--
120 Imaging modes and exams available by transducer
Chapter 4
Table 4-23: Imaging modes and exams available by transducer
Imaging mode
Transducer
Exam type
2D M Mode
Color
CPD
PW
CW
TDI PW
Doppler Doppler Doppler
HFL50xp
Abd
--
--
Bre
--
--
Vas
--
--
MSK
--
--
Nrv
--
--
SmP
--
--
L25xp
Msk
--
--
Abd
--
--
SmP
--
--
Nrv
--
--
Bre
--
--
Vas
--
--
FC1 User Guide
Imaging modes and exams available by transducer 121
Table 4-23: Imaging modes and exams available by transducer
Imaging mode
Transducer
Exam type
2D M Mode
Color
CPD
PW
CW
TDI PW
Doppler Doppler Doppler
P21xp
Abd
Crd
OB
Gyn
Vas
C35xp
Abd
--
--
SmP
--
--
OB
--
--
Gyn
--
--
Vas
--
--
Msk
--
--
Nrv
--
--
122 Imaging modes and exams available by transducer
Chapter 4
Table 4-23: Imaging modes and exams available by transducer
Imaging mode
Transducer
Exam type
2D M Mode
Color
CPD
PW
CW
TDI PW
Doppler Doppler Doppler
C11xp
Abd
--
--
SmP
--
--
Crd
--
--
Gyn
--
--
Vas
--
--
Nrv
--
--
ICTxp
OB
--
--
Gyn
--
--
L38xp
Abd
--
--
SmP
--
--
Vas
--
--
Bre
--
--
Msk
--
--
Nrv
--
--
FC1 User Guide
Imaging modes and exams available by transducer 123
Entering patient information
Patient information may be edited after the exam is ended and before it is exported or archived. Information imported from a worklist cannot be edited.
Caution
During the examination, the patient information cannot be edited while exporting (output/input to USB memory, and/or DICOM storage transfer) and/ or when using a worklist.
After the examination, Edit cannot be used after exported (output/input to USB memory, and/or DICOM storage transfer).
In case you do not want to edit the patient information nor start a new examination, you can tap Modify and press the PATIENT button to cancel the operation.
The Patient Info screen on the touch panel also appears on the monitor. As you enter data on the touch panel, it appears on the monitor. For information on hiding the patient's personal information, see the following procedure.
Caution
You cannot enter Kanji characters in the Name field.
You can obtain the following patient information from the bar-code reader or a card reader: Bar code: Patient ID and Accession No. Card reader: Patient ID, Accession No., DOB, and Gender. For information on how to do so, see "Obtaining
patient information by bar code or card reader" on page 129.
To enter patient information
1 Press the PATIENT button ( ). The Patient Info screen appears.
2 If you do not see the Patient Info screen, tap the Patient Info tab at the upper left of the touch panel. 3 Complete the information for each field of the screen.
For information on the information needed for each field, see "Patient information fields" on page 126. You can type information with either the virtual keyboard on the touch panel or with a USB keyboard.
For information on using the virtual keyboard, see the following procedure.
124 Entering patient information
Chapter 4
To select values from a drop-down list, tap the downward-pointing green arrow ( ). For some fields, such as the DOB (date of birth) fields, the cursor automatically moves from one field to
the next. For more information on completing the fields, see the following:
For all examinations, "Patient information fields" on page 126 "Gynecological examinations" on page 129 "Cardiovascular examinations" on page 129 4 To manually select a different transducer: a Tap transducer; then, on the transducer selection screen that appears, tap the transducer that you will use. b Tap Close.
Caution
The selection screen is displayed even if the transducer is not connected to the FC1. However, you will not be able to change the transducer selection. You also cannot change the transducer selection if there is only one transducer physically attached to the FC1 system.
5 To prevent the patient's personal information from appearing on the monitor, make sure that Hide Info is selected (orange). Or, if you have assigned Hide Pt Bar to a function button, press that button.
6 When you have finished entering all data, on the Patient Info screen, tap OK. The FC1 system is ready to begin the examination.
To type using the virtual keyboard 1 On the Patient Info screen or another -panel screen that requires manual data entry, on the touch panel, tap
one of the following: The Keyboard virtual button The field in which you need to enter data 2 Type the information, using the keyboard-switching virtual buttons as necessary. 3 When you have finished typing the data, tap Close.
FC1 User Guide
Entering patient information 125
Or:
To move to the next field without leaving the keyboard, tap the
key.
To move to the previous field without leaving the keyboard, tap the
key.
Patient information fields
Patient information fields include the following:
General information fields
Those patient information fields common to all examinations Table 4-24: Patient information buttons
Item Patient Info Exam Info Hide Info
Keyboard
Description
Displays the "Patient Info screen". Displays the "Exam Info" screen for entering alphanumeric characters. Displays or hides personal information of patients on the upper side of examination screen. Displays the virtual keyboard.
Patient Log Worklist Exam List
OK
Displays the patient list stored in the FC1. When a patient is selected from the list, information on the patient appears in the "Patient Info screen".
Displays the worklist.
Displays the examination list stored from the USB memory to the FC1. By using the examination data displayed in the list, the patient information can be entered in the "Patient Info screen".
Saves the input data and starts an examination.
General information fields Table 4-25: General patient information fields
Field
ID Accession No.
Data required Patient identification number Patient accession number
126 Entering patient information
Chapter 4
Table 4-25: General patient information fields
Field
Name
YYYY, MM, and DD (to the right of DOB)
AGE
Gender
Data required
Patient name
Year, month, and date of patient's birth If the language setting is set to Japanese, the Japanese calendar date format can be used. The date format can be configured in the System Setup menu.
Patient age This field is automatically completed when you complete the DOB fields. If the patient is less than one year old, the system enters 0 (zero) for the patient's age. You can enter the patient's age manually, before entering his or her birth date.
Patient gender Possible values:
M for male
F for female
O for others U for unknown
Exam Type
Preset Probe
When the patient's gender should not be registered, select U.
Type of examination The available examination types include: ABDOMEN, SMALL PARTS, CARDIAC, OB, FETAL HEART, GYN, VASCULAR, CAROTID, THYROID, BREAST, MUSCSKEL, PED, PED HEART, NERVE, URO, OB TWIN. These examination types are divided into smaller groups that have certain Patient Info screen fields in common. Changing the Exam Type value automatically changes the Preset value to match, and vice-versa. The transducer field automatically changes to display the desired transducer type for the chosen exam type (only when using Triple Transducer Connect (TTC)).
The preset for the examination type. Changing the Preset value automatically changes the Exam Type value to match, and vice-versa. The only time to manually select the preset is when it has been changed for the exam type.
The desired transducer type for the chosen exam type. This field changes automatically to reflect your choice of exam type (only when using Triple Transducer Connect (TTC)). The only time when you manually select the transducer is when it has been changed for the exam type.
FC1 User Guide
Entering patient information 127
Hint
When Gender is not to be registered, tap U: unknown.
Tap Probe only when the probe set in Exam Type is changed to another one.
Tap Preset only when the preset set in Exam Type is changed to another one.
OB, Fetal Heart, or OB Twin examinations
Table 4-26: Patient information fields for OB, Fetal Heart, or OB Twin exams
Field LMP, EGA, or BBT
EDD
MA
Fetuses
G P A E
Data required
LMP (patient's last menstrual period), EGA (date of previous examination and week of pregnancy at that time), or BBT (estimated ovulation date)
To choose, tap , and then complete the YYYY, MM, and DD date boxes. If you have selected EGA, then the EGA MA appears, meaning week of pregnancy at the time of the last exam, with fields w and d.
Estimated date of delivery You can complete this field manually, but entering a date for LMP, EGA, or BBT completes it automatically.
Current week of pregnancy You can complete this field manually, but entering a date for LMP or EGA completes it automatically.
Number of fetuses The system can measure at most five fetuses, regardless of the value that you enter. For an OB Twin examination, this field's value is 2, by default.
The gravidity of the patient
The parity of the patient
The number of abortions that the patient has had
The number of ectopic pregnancies that the patient has had
128 Entering patient information
Chapter 4
Gynecological examinations
Table 4-27: Patient information fields for Gynecological exams
Field LMP or BBT
Day of Cycle
Data required The patient's last menstrual period (LMP) or estimated ovulation date (BBT) To choose, tap , and then complete the YYYY, MM, and DD date boxes. The day of the patient's menstrual cycle
Cardiovascular examinations
For the purposes of completing patient information, cardiovascular examinations include Cardio, Vascular, Carotid, and Thyroid examinations.
Table 4-28: Patient information fields for Cardiovascular exams
Field
H W BSA
BP
Data required
The patient's height Maximum number of digits: 6
The patient's weight Maximum number of digits: 6
The patient's body surface area, automatically calculated from the patient's height, weight, and body classification.
To select the patient's body classification, tap , and then select the body type that most closely matches the patient.
The patient blood pressure. Enter the systolic value and the diastolic value.
Obtaining patient information by bar code or card reader
The patient information that you get from the bar code or card reader is entered automatically in the Patient Info screen.
After you use the barcode reader, be sure that patient information is correct. If it is not correct, you can modify it manually.
WARNING
Adding incorrect patient information could result in potential misdiagnosis / mistreatment, thus potentially harming the patient.
Caution
You cannot enter Kanji characters in the Name field.
FC1 User Guide
Entering patient information 129
Entering examination information
As with the Patient Info screen, changes that you make on the Exam Info screen on the touch panel appear on the main monitor as well.
To enter examination information
1 Press the PATIENT button ( ) and then, on the touch panel, tap the Exam Info tab (or Exam Info (Kanji)) tab.
The Exam Info (Kanji) tab is available only when the language is set to Japanese.
The Exam Info screen appears.
2 In the text boxes, using either the virtual keyboard or a USB keyboard, type the appropriate information, as described in the following table.
Table 4-29: Exam information fields
Field
Study ID Operator Phys Ref. Phys Rep. Phys Req. Phys Department Residence Occupation Patient History Study Description Patient State Comment
Data required The ID number of the study The name of the operator (as shown) The name of the attending physician (as shown) The name of the referring physician (as shown) The name of the reporting physician (as shown) The name of the requesting physician (as shown) The name of the department The residence of the patient The occupation of the patient The medical history of the patient Details of the study The patient's symptoms Comments regarding the patient, with a maximum of 50 characters
3 Tap the downward-pointing green arrow ( ) to the right of Body Part Examined, and then tap one of the following buttons: BREAST, ABDOMEN, PELVIS, HIP, HEAD, HEART, NECK, LEG, or ARM.
130 Entering examination information
Chapter 4
4 To save the data and continue with the examination, tap OK.
5 After entering all the necessary items, to save the information, tap OK or press the FREEZE button ( ).
Caution
If you press the PATIENT button without tapping OK or pressing the FREEZE button, the items entered in the Patient Info screen or Exam Info screen are not stored.
6 Make sure that the correct patient name and preset are displayed on the examination screen. You are ready to start the examination.
Precautions before starting an exam
Before starting a new examination, be sure to register the following:
On the Patient Info screen, the patient information such as the patient ID, attribute data, examination date, and clinical special items
On the Exam Info screen, examination information such as the accession number and the referring physician
These pieces of information are required to correctly start an examination or preset, and to correctly save examination data and images. The identifiers for patient information and examination information registered on the FC1 are patient ID, patient name, and examination date.
With the DICOM connection function (Optional), you can save images to the DICOM network storage device (archive server).
Caution
When examining a new patient, be sure to register and save the patient ID and name, and to check that you have selected the correct examination type and preset. Performing an examination without entering and saving the patient ID and name may result in the data's being mixed with that of another patient, resulting in misdiagnosis.
Saving an image without your having entered and saved the patient ID and name results in a patient ID's being assigned automatically to the image. You cannot then add or edit the patient name and other data afterward.
To ensure correct measurements, be sure to set the correct time before performing an examination.
Once Patient data is entered from Patient and Exam Info screen, the patient and exam data can not be modified. Please make sure that correct Patient an Exam information are entered.
FC1 User Guide
Entering examination information 131
Opening a patient's existing record from Patient Log
To view a patient's record
1 Press the PATIENT button ( ). 2 Tap Patient Log. 3 In the Patient ID column, tap the ID of the patient whose record you want to work with, and then tap Open.
Opening an existing examination record from USB memory
The examination list shows the examination records stored from the USB memory to the FC1. You can use the examination data displayed in the examination list to enter the patient information in the Patient Info screen. To view an examination record
1 Press the PATIENT button ( ). 2 Tap Exam List. 3 To choose the data by which you want to order the list of examinations, to the right of Search Key, tap the
downward-pointing green arrow ( ). 4 Tap either Patient ID, Patient Name, or Accession No.
The touch panel returns to the Exam List screen. 5 Tap the examination record that you want.
Starting an examination from the DICOM work list
You can obtain the patient information for a new examination from the DICOM work list. You select the items of patient information to be used on the Worklist screen.
Caution
MPPS is not supported and cannot be used at present.
132 Entering examination information
Chapter 4
On the Patient Info screen, tap Worklist to display the Worklist screen. The Worklist screen can also be displayed by pressing the F-key to which the function for displaying the Worklist screen is assigned.
Caution
When the F-key to which the function for displaying the Worklist screen is assigned is pressed during an examination, a confirmation message is displayed.
When you tap OK, the current examination ends and the Worklist screen appears.
When the connection with the DICOM worklist is enabled, if the desired patient information is obtained and stored successfully, it is displayed on the Worklist screen.
If the connection with the DICOM worklist is disabled, or if the FC1 has failed to obtain or store the patient information for some reason, the patient information already stored appears, or no patient information appears..
Table 4-30: Worklist fields and controls
Item
Search key
String Sort buttons Examination list
Description
Tap the search key to display a selection screen for "Patient ID", "Patient Name", "Accession No.", "Scheduled Procedure Step Start Date-Time", "Scheduled Procedure Step Description" and "Requested Procedure ID".
Enter the keyword for retrieving the patient information. Enter it using the virtual keyboard.
Displays the examination list in ascending or descending order. The display order changes when the buttons are tapped.
Each item of patient information is displayed. The items to be displayed are as follows. Patient ID
Patient Name
(Displayed in Japanese only when the language setting is set to Japanese.) Accession No.
SPS Start Date-Time
SPS Description
Requested Procedure ID
Select All
Requested Procedure Description All items in the examination list are selected.
FC1 User Guide
Entering examination information 133
Table 4-30: Worklist fields and controls
Item
Find First/Last L/R Scroll Page Open
Query
Delete
Search Close
Description
Updates the worklist.
Displays the first and last pages of the list alternately.
Scrolls the list to display the hidden items. The display can be scrolled horizontally by operating the switch menu button 2.
Displays the next or previous page. The page can also be switched by operating the switch menu button 3. The current page number and the total number of pages of the list are displayed on the lower side.
Displays the Patient Info screen with the selected patient information entered. If DOB is included in the selected information, the patient age is calculated again before displaying it. If no item is selected in the examination list, or if multiple items are selected, this button is disabled.
Displays the search condition setting screen. By setting a search condition, the patient information that meets the specified condition is obtained from the DICOM worklist and stored in the FC1. For details, see "To find patient information in connected DICOM storage" on page 136. If the DICOM MWM is not available, this button is disabled.
Deletes the selected patient information. When this button is tapped, a confirmation message is displayed. Tap OK to delete the selected patient information. Tap Cancel to cancel the deletion. Multiple items in the examination list can be selected and deleted. If no patient information is selected in the examination list, this button is disabled.
Starts retrieving the patient information based on the entries in "Search key" and "String", and displays the search result in the examination list.
Closes the Worklist screen without saving the settings.
Using the DICOM worklist to start an examination
When you have enabled the connection with the DICOM worklist, patient information that is obtained and stored successfully appears on the Worklist screen.
If the connection with the DICOM worklist is disabled, or if the FC1 system cannot obtain or store the patient information, the worklist shows only the patient information that has been stored on the FC1 system.
In the DICOM Worklist screen, there are two ways to find a patient's information that you want to start the examination with.
134 Entering examination information
Chapter 4
To start a new exam from the DICOM Worklist
1 Press the PATIENT button ( ). 2 On the Patient Info screen, tap Worklist.
Or If you have assigned the function for displaying the Worklist screen to a function button, press the button to which it is assigned.
Caution
If you press the button that you have assigned the function for displaying the Worklist screen during an examination, you are prompted to confirm that you want to end the current exam.
3 Select an examination from the list and tap Open. To find patient information in the DICOM database 1 Open the Worklist.
To open the Worklist, see the procedure above "To start a new exam from the DICOM Worklist." 2 To select the field to search on:
a Tap the downward-pointing green arrow ( ) to the right of Search Key. b On the selection screen that appears, tap the field in which you want to search: Patient ID, Patient Name,
Accession No., Start Date, Req Proc ID, Sched Desc, or RP Desc. 3 To search on a string within the selected field:
a In the text box next to String, using the virtual keyboard, type the string (or keyword) of interest. b Tap Close. 4 Tap Search.
Caution
When you obtain patient information from the optional barcode reader or card reader, the patient ID that you have obtained appears in Patient ID on the search condition setting screen.
FC1 User Guide
Entering examination information 135
The patient information is retrieved based on the criteria you have specified in Search key and String, and the search result appears in the examination list.
Finding patient information in connected DICOM storage
Finding patient information in the Worklist Query screen retrieves the patient information from the DICOM worklist and stores it in the FC1.
To find patient information in connected DICOM storage
Note
If you want to display less information from the records you found, you can search by Search Key and String instead of the Query screen.
1 Open the Worklist.
For the procedure for opening the Worklist, see "Starting an examination from the DICOM work list" on page 132.
2 Tap Query.
The Query screen opens.
3 To define a search condition, type data in the following fields, as needed: Table 4-31: Worklist query fields
Field
Patient ID Last Name First Name Middle Name Accession Number Requested Procedure ID Scheduled Station AE Title Find
Close
Action Enter the patient ID. Enter the last name of the patient. Enter the first name of the patient. Enter the middle name of the patient. Enter the accession number. Enter the requested procedure ID.
Enter the scheduled station AE title.
Starts retrieving the patient information based on the above items. The FC1 system obtains the patient information that meets the specified condition from the DICOM worklist, stores it in the FC1 system, and displays it on the Worklist screen. Closes the screen without performing the search, and returns to the Worklist screen.
136 Entering examination information
Chapter 4
Deleting patient information from the DICOM worklist
You can select and delete multiple items in the examination list. To delete patient information from the DICOM worklist 1 Find the patient information that you want to delete.
For more information, see "Starting an examination from the DICOM work list" on page 132. 2 Tap Delete. 3 When you are prompted to confirm the deletion, tap OK to delete the selected patient information. Or, to cancel the deletion, tap Cancel.
Starting an examination from the Patient Log screen
You can start a new examination with the patient information obtained from the archived examinations. You can access these archived exams on the Patient Log screen.
To start a patient exam
1 On the Patient Info screen, tap Patient Log to display the Patient Log screen. You can also display the Patient Log screen by pressing the F-key to which the function for displaying the Patient Log screen is assigned.
Caution
When the F-key to which the function for displaying the Patient Log screen is assigned is pressed during an examination, the confirmation message "Start an examination with a new patient?" appears.
2 When you tap OK, the current examination ends and the Patient Log screen appears.
Hint: After the patient information is selected on the Patient Log screen, a new examination can be started by correcting the displayed patient information and examination information.
Starting an examination from patient information (Optional, Japan only)
You can start a new examination using patient information managed by C@RNACORE. For details about the information that can be obtained from C@RNACORE, see the C@RNACORE Reference Guide.
WARNING
Use our C@RNACORE product only with this function.
FC1 User Guide
Starting an examination from the Patient Log screen 137
To start an examination from patient information
1 Enter the C@RNACORE patient ID in ID at the right of the patient information link button ( ) on the Patient Info screen.
Note
Enter a patient ID managed by C@RNACORE.
2 Tap the patient information link button ( ).
The patient information based on the ID that you have entered is obtained from C@RNACORE and displayed on the Patient Info screen.
After using patient information link, make sure that the patient information is correct. If it is not correct, you can change it manually.
3 Either tap OK or press the FREEZE button ( ).
4 After the examination starts, make sure that the correct patient name, presets, and other items appear in the upper section of the "examination screen".
The examination can now be started.
Hint
This function presumes that patient information entered using C@RNACORE in another location is opened on the FC1.
The link with C@RNACORE must be configured to use patient information link. For more information about the settings, see "Server connection settings" on page 44.
If you tap the patient information link button ( ) without entering an ID, the patient information currently displayed on C@RNACORE is obtained.
138 Starting an examination from the Patient Log screen
Chapter 4
Starting an examination from orders (Optional, Japan only)
You can start an examination on the FC1 by orders created by C@RNACORE. For details about the information that can be obtained from C@RNACORE, see the C@RNACORE Reference Guide.
WARNING
Use our C@RNACORE product only with this function.
To avoid misdiagnosis or erroneously influencing the diagnosis results of the patient, end the examination before using order link. The previous patient's data may be combined with the current patient's data if order link is used without ending the examination. For details on how to end an examination, see "Ending an examination" on page 209.
After using order link, make sure that the patient information is correct. If the patient information is not correct, a misdiagnosis or treatment failure may occur and negatively affect the patient.
IHE multiple hospital patient id (PIX) is not supported and cannot currently be used.
To start an examination from an order
Caution
Because this function uses a work list, patient information cannot be corrected by the FC1.
To start an examination using the correct patient information, enter the patient information manually. For details, see "Entering patient information" on page 124.
1 Start the FC1.
2 Examinations can now be started from order link. Start examinations from C@RNACORE.
3 If an examination is started from C@RNACORE, a confirmation message appears asking whether to start the examination using order content. To start the examination, tap OK.
Note
Make sure that the patient ID and patient name on the message screen are correct.
4 After the examination starts, make sure that the correct patient name, presets, and other items appear in the upper section of the "examination screen". The examination can now be started.
Hint This function presumes that an examination on an FC1 installed nearby is started from C@RNACORE.
FC1 User Guide
Starting an examination from the Patient Log screen 139
The DICOM connection function (Optional) must be activated to use order link. The link with C@RNACORE must also be set. For more information about the settings, see "Server connection settings" on page 44.
It is required to configure the examination if you want to start the examination with a preset and the appropriate transducer selected from multiple transducers when using Triple Transducer Connect (TTC). For more information about the settings, see "Configuring examination defaults (Exam Type Setting)" on page 67.
Restarting an examination
Add new data files in any time before the period of reexamination; files cannot be added when exceeded. For more information on the period of reexamination, see "Restart setting (reexamination setting)" on page 70.
To restart the examination
1 Press the PATIENT button ( ). 2 On the Patient Info screen, tap Patient Log. 3 Navigate to the name of the patient whose examination you want to restart.
For information on searching for a patient's record, see "Opening a patient's existing record from Patient Log" on page 132. 4 Tap the patient's record to select it, and then tap Restart. Restart can be enabled any time before the period of reexamination.
Working with the Patient Log screen
You can find, edit, and delete patient records using this screen.
Caution
With automatic image deletion, the images are deleted automatically but the patient logs remain. Up to 8000 patient logs can be recorded. To avoid exceeding the maximum number of logs, delete patient information periodically. To delete patient logs individually, use the Patient Log screen. If you want to delete all patient logs, see "Resetting user configuration" on page 74.
140 Restarting an examination
Chapter 4
Finding patient records in the Patient Log screen
To work with examinations on the Patient Log screen
1 On the Patient Info screen, tap Patient Log.
Or, press the F-key to which you have assigned the function to display the Patient Log screen.
Caution
When you use the F-key to open the Patient Log screen during an examination, you are prompted to confirm that you want to start a new examination.
2 To end the current examination and open the Patient Log screen, tap OK.
The Patient Log screen appears, showing the following fields:
Lock
Records that are locked appear with a representation of a padlock
Patient ID The patient's identification number
Patient Name If the language setting is Japanese, the name appears in Japanese only.
Size (MB) Data Count (S/L/R/D)
The number of images in the examination. (S stands for still images, L for clips, R for raw data images, and D for setup screens.)
Study Date Time The date and time that the examination started
Study Last Date Time The date and time that the examination completed
Accession Patient accession number
3 Locate the patient examination record of interest by searching and navigating in the examination list.
FC1 User Guide
Working with the Patient Log screen 141
Searching and navigating in the Patient Log is the same as navigating the examination list in the Exam List screen. For information on examination-list searches and navigation, see "Working with the Examination List screen" on page 143. The search results appear in the examination list. 4 To lock or unlock one or more patient records, select the record or records, and then tap Lock.
When you lock a patient record, the record cannot be modified or deleted. The lock icon appears by the Patient ID for the record. For more information, see "Locking archived examinations" on page 190. 5 To close the Patient Log screen, tap Close.
Acquiring logs
You can get logs created between certain dates, or all logs. To acquire logs
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 4/4, tap Get Log. The Get Log screen appears. 3 Tap any part of the dates to see up arrows and down arrows, which you can use to change those values, and
tap Start. You are prompted to confirm your request. To confirm it, tap OK. To cancel it, tap Cancel.
Deleting logs
You can delete all logs in one step. To delete logs
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ). The User Setting screen appears.
2 On page 4/4, tap Delete Log. The Delete Log screen appears.
142 Working with the Patient Log screen
Chapter 4
3 Tap Start. You are prompted to confirm your request. To confirm it, tap OK. To cancel it, tap Cancel.
Editing patient examination records
To edit examination records
1 To open a patient's examination record, in the examination list, tap the patient's record, and then tap the Open button.
With the patient's record open, you can change the information in it.
2 To close the patient's record and return to the Patient Log screen, tap Patient Log.
Deleting patient examination records
Note
By deleting the record here, you also delete it in the Examination List. You cannot delete a record that is locked.
To delete a patient examination record In the examination list, tap the patient's record, and then tap Delete. When you are prompted to confirm that you want to delete the record and its exam and images, tap OK.
Working with the Examination List screen
You can start a new examination by using the patient information stored in the USB memory. You select the examination records of patient information to be used on the Exam List screen.
To view and work with patient information on the Exam List
1 On the Patient Info screen, tap Exam List.
Or, if you have assigned the function for displaying the Exam List screen to an F-key, press that key.
Caution
If an examination is in progress when you press the F-key to display the Exam List screen, you are prompted to confirm that you want to end the exam. To do so, tap OK.
The Exam List screen appears, showing the following fields: Patient ID
FC1 User Guide
Working with the Examination List screen 143
The patient's identification number Patient Name
If the language setting is Japanese, the name appears in Japanese only. Accession
Patient accession number
2 To search the records in the examination list:
a To select the field to search on, tap the downward-pointing green arrow ( ) to the right of Search Key and, in the selection screen that appears, tap the records field on which you want to search.
b To search on a string within the selected field, in the text box next to String, using the virtual keyboard, type the string (or keyword) of interest, and then tap Close.
c Tap the Search virtual button.
The search results appear in the examination list.
3 To sort the records in ascending or descending order on a field, tap the header for the field.
The visual indicator changes between and according to whether the sort order is descending or ascending, respectively.
4 To navigate within the examination list: To go to the first or last page in the list (according to the last sort order), press the up or down arrow on switch menu button 1 (the rocker button underneath First/Last). To view more fields in the patient records (such as Accession) by scrolling to the left or right, press the up or down arrow on switch menu button 2 (the rocker button underneath L/R Scroll). To move from page to page in the examination list, press the up or down arrow on switch menu button 3 (the rocker button underneath Page).
5 To select all the patient records in the examination list, tap Select All.
6 To lock or unlock one or more patient records, select the record or records, and then tap Lock, to either lock or unlock them.
When you lock a patient record, the record cannot be modified or deleted. The lock icon appears by the Patient ID for the record.
144 Working with the Examination List screen
Chapter 4
To delete an examination record 1 Find and select the record or records that you want to delete, as in the above procedure, "To view and work
with patient information on the Exam List." 2 Tap Delete. 3 When you are prompted to confirm that you want to delete the record and its exam and images, tap OK.
Or, to cancel the deletion, tap Cancel.
Note
By deleting the record here, you also delete it in the Patient Log. You cannot delete a record that is locked.
To edit an examination record
1 To open an examination record, in the examination list, select the record by tapping it, and then tap Open.
With the examination record open in the Patient Info screen, you can edit it.
2 To close the examination record and return to the Exam List, tap Exam List.
To start a new examination from the Exam List With the record open for a patient, correct the displayed patient information and examination information. To close the Exam List screen Tap Close.
Note that any settings are not saved.
Obtaining patient information from USB memory
Loading the patient information stored in the USB memory onto the FC1 loads all the patient information and displays it in the examination list.
Caution
When you load the USB memory, any patient information that is already loaded from the USB memory is overwritten.
To load all the patient information from USB memory to the FC1
1 Press the PATIENT button ( ).
FC1 User Guide
Obtaining patient information from USB memory 145
2 Tap Exam List and then, in the Exam List screen, tap Load. If the USB memory is not connected to the FC1, this button is disabled.
Selecting the preset
Selecting a preset for an examination retrieves the optimal examination settings and image quality adjustment values for the intended use and the body part to be examined, which reduces the examination time. Selecting the type of examination on the Patient Info screen selects the transducer and preset most appropriate for the examination, enabling you to automatically obtain optimal examination images. You can change the preset in the middle of an examination. You can also select the desired preset on the Preset Change screen. You cannot change the preset at the following times: While changing system settings When the Patient Info screen is displayed While reviewing examination images (whether current or archived) To select a preset
1 Press the PRESET button (
).
The Preset screen appears.
If a live image is displayed on the main monitor at that time, the image is frozen.
2 Tap the preset that you want to use.
The preset name displayed on the upper side of the main monitor changes to the name of the selected preset.
Displaying or hiding a preset
Use the Touch Panel Layout screen to change the presets that are available on the Preset screen.
146 Selecting the preset
Chapter 4
To show or hide presets on the Preset screen
1 Press the PRESET button (
).
Caution
If you press the PRESET button while the Preset or Touch Panel Layout screen is open, the screen is closed and the settings that you have chosen on it are not saved.
The Preset screen appears. 2 Tap Touch Panel Layout.
The Touch Panel Layout screen appears, with all available presets showing. 3 Make sure that each preset that you want to appear on the Preset screen is selected (orange).
If a preset that you want to appear is black, tap it to make it orange. 4 To save your changes, tap OK.
Or, to close the screen without saving changes, tap Close.
Working with imaging presets
Imaging presets are sets of image-processing parameters. Available imaging presets vary depending on the type of examination and the transducer to be connected. There are two types of imaging presets: Factory imaging presets registered at the factory Imaging presets that the user registers You can add, delete, or modify imaging presets, except for the factory imaging presets. You cannot change imaging presets at the following times: While changing system settings When the Patient Info screen is open When examination images (of the current or an archived examination) are on screen On the Imaging Preset [presetname] screen, you can:
FC1 User Guide
Selecting the preset 147
Modify the imaging preset for a preset and connected transducer
For information on modifying an imaging preset, see "Modifying an imaging preset" on page 150. Create a new imaging preset
For information on creating an imaging preset, see "Creating an imaging preset" on page 149. Set an imaging preset as the default
For information on setting an imaging preset as the default, see "Setting a default imaging preset" on page 150. To access the imaging presets for a preset
1 To change the imaging presets for the current preset when a live image is displayed, tap Imaging Preset, or:
To change the imaging presets for any preset:
a Press the PRESET button (
).
b Select a preset.
c Tap Imaging Preset.
The Imaging Preset screen appears, and the live image displayed on the main monitor is frozen. (Note, however, that Imaging Preset is not available when an image is already frozen.)
Factory imaging presets appear in the top half of the screen, and user-created imaging presets appear in the bottom half.
2 To work with one of the imaging presets for the preset, tap the imaging preset that you want.
3 To access a different imaging preset for the same preset, return to the screen by tapping Imaging Preset.
4 Tap Close at any time to close the imaging preset screen without making any of your changes effective.
5 To return to the Preset screen from the Imaging Preset screen, press the PRESET button.
Renaming an imaging preset
Factory imaging resets cannot be modified, so you can rename only user-created imaging resets.
148 Selecting the preset
Chapter 4
To rename or change the parameters of an imaging preset 1 Tap Imaging Preset on the touch panel.
The Imaging Preset screen appears. 2 Tap Management. 3 Press the switch menu button 1 (the rocker button under Change Category) to display the User screen. 4 Under Imaging Preset Name, tap the name of the imaging preset.
The virtual keyboard appears. 5 Change the name, using the virtual keyboard (or the USB keyboard). 6 Tap Close.
The name is finalized and displayed on the User screen.
Note
You cannot rename an imaging preset with a name that has already been registered. In addition, if you have not entered a name, an error message appears.
Creating an imaging preset
You can create a new imaging preset from the imaging parameters of the current imaging preset. Restrictions on creating an imaging preset: You can create a new imaging preset only when a live image is on-screen. The system supports a maximum of 10 enabled imaging presets. If 10 imaging presets have been enabled,
the Create button is not available, and you cannot open the Create screen. To create a new imaging preset 1 While a live image is on-screen, tap Imaging Preset.
Or, if you have assigned the function of displaying the Create screen to a function button, press that button. The Imaging Preset Change screen appears, and the live image displayed on the main monitor is frozen. 2 On the Create screen, tap the New Imaging Preset Name text box. 3 Type a name for the new imaging preset, using the virtual keyboard or the USB keyboard.
FC1 User Guide
Selecting the preset 149
4 To change the settings of the new or renamed imaging preset, see "Modifying an imaging preset" on page 150.
5 To register the new preset in the system and return to the Imaging Preset [presetname] screen, tap OK. Or, to discard the name you just typed and return to the Imaging Preset [presetname] screen, tap Close.
Modifying an imaging preset
You can change image-processing parameters only for user-created imaging presets; for factory imaging presets, the Modify virtual button is not available. To modify a user-created imaging preset 1 While a live image is on-screen, tap Imaging Preset on the touch panel.
The Imaging Preset screen appears, and the live image displayed on the main monitor is frozen. 2 Tap the user-created imaging preset you want to change.
The touch panel returns to the 2D (B) mode screen. 3 Make changes to the parameters in the 2D (B) mode screen.
Or, to make changes to the imaging preset in other modes, press the C, D, or M button on the control panel, and then make changes on those screens. 4 Tap Imaging Preset on the touch panel. 5 Tap Modify. 6 When you are prompted to confirm that you want to modify the imaging preset, tap OK. The system overwrites the imaging preset that is in use with the changes you have made to the imageprocessing parameters.
Setting a default imaging preset
To set an imaging preset as a default 1 In the Imaging Preset screen, tap the imaging preset that you want to set as the default. 2 Tap Imaging Preset.
In the Imaging Preset screen, a small yellow dot in the upper-left corner of the button for the imaging preset of interest shows that it is selected.
150 Selecting the preset
Chapter 4
3 To make it the default, tap Set Default.
Displaying or hiding an imaging preset
You can specify the imaging presets that appear on the Imaging Preset screen. Press the switch menu button 1 (the rocker button under Change Category) to select factory imaging presets on the Factory screen, or user-created imaging presets on the User screen. The User screen displays user-created imaging presets that are registered in the FC1 system. To specify the imaging presets that appear on the Imaging Preset screen 1 To manage the current imaging preset when a live image is displayed, tap Imaging Preset.
Follow the procedure below if you want to manage a preset different from the current preset.
a Press the PRESET button (
).
b Select a preset.
c Tap Imaging Preset.
The Imaging Preset screen appears, and the live image displayed on the main monitor is frozen.
2 Tap Management.
3 To move up or down a page in the list of imaging presets, press switch menu button 2 (the rocker button under Page).
If you don't see the imaging preset that you want to manage in one of the screens (categories), switch to the other.
4 To switch the Imaging Preset screen category between Factory and User, press switch menu button 1 (the rocker button under Change Category).
The current preset and all the imaging presets for the connected transducers registered in the FC1 are displayed on those two screens.
In the E/D (enable/disable) column, an orange check mark means that the imaging preset is visible (and so available for selecting) in the Imaging Preset screen.
FC1 User Guide
Selecting the preset 151
5 To enable or disable an imaging preset for selection on the Imaging Preset screen for a preset, tap the imaging preset's check box to place or remove the orange check mark.
You can enable no more than ten imaging presets. If more than ten imaging presets are checked and you tap OK, an error message appears. Tap OK, and then decrease the number of selected imaging presets to ten or fewer.
6 To save your settings, close the screen, and return to the Imaging Preset screen, tap OK.
Or, to close the screen without putting your changes into effect, tap Close.
If you have saved your changes, the imaging presets that you have selected appear on the Imaging Preset screen.
Deleting an imaging preset
You can select and delete multiple imaging presets.
You can also delete an imaging preset that is currently in use. If you subsequently restart an examination for which you were using the deleted imaging preset, select the imaging preset General.
To delete an imaging preset
1 To delete the current imaging preset when a live image is displayed, tap Imaging Preset.
Or, to delete an imaging preset for any preset:
a Press the PRESET button (
).
b Select a preset.
c Tap Imaging Preset.
The Imaging Preset screen appears, and the live image displayed on the main monitor is frozen.
2 Tap Management.
3 If the Factory screen is visible, press switch menu button 1 (the rocker button under Change Category) to display the User screen.
4 In the Check column, tap the check box to place a check for the imaging preset that you want to delete.
5 Tap Delete.
6 When you are prompted to confirm that you want to delete the imaging preset, tap OK.
152 Selecting the preset
Chapter 4
Selecting a transducer
Transducers are also called probes; the transducer selection screen displays all the transducers that are currently connected to the FC1 system. You can select one of the connected transducers for use.
When you select a different transducer, you can also select the preset to use.
Precautions when connecting or disconnecting a transducer
If a live image is displayed on the main monitor, disconnecting a transducer from the FC1 or the FC series stand erases the image.
When a transducer is connected, a live 2D-mode image shows on the main monitor, and the 2D-mode menu screen appears on the touch panel.
Caution
Before attaching or removing TTC, turn off the FC1 system.
While the transducer selection screen shows in the touch panel, note the following: When a transducer is connected to an empty transducer port on the FC series stand:
The display content of the transducer selection screen does not change. Closing and then opening the transducer selection screen updates the display content. When a transducer is disconnected from the FC1 or FC series stand: The display content of the transducer selection screen does not change. Tapping the disconnected transducer on the touch panel, however, displays a message and closes the
transducer selection screen. Closing and then opening the transducer selection screen updates the display content. When you connect another transducer to the FC1 or FC series stand: The display content of the transducer selection screen does not change. Tapping the previous transducer on the touch panel, however, displays a message and closes the
transducer selection screen. Closing and then opening the transducer selection screen updates the display content. If you select a transducer not applicable to the current preset, the preset changes to the priority preset of the selected transducer.
FC1 User Guide
Selecting a transducer 153
Note the following: While a transducer or preset is selected on the touch panel, you cannot use the following functions:
Current view Cine Body mark display Annotation display Basic measurement Preset-specific measurement Patient information correction User settings You can display the transducer selection screen even if no transducer is connected to the FC series stand. The image of each transducer on the transducer selection screen varies depending on the transducer type.
Image on button
Transducer type Convex
Linear
Sector
To select a transducer
1 Press the Probe button (
).
The transducer selection screen appears, and the transducer in use is turned on.
If a live image shows on the main monitor, the image is frozen.
154 Selecting a transducer
Chapter 4
2 To specify that the system use the current preset after you change the transducer, make sure that Preset Lock is selected (orange). All the presets displayed below the transducers disappear. Or, to change the preset when the transducer is changed: a Make sure that Preset Lock is not selected (that is, it is black). b Tap the current preset. The Preset change screen appears. For details on changing the Preset, see"Selecting the preset" on page 146. On the Preset change screen, only the presets for the connected and selected transducer are turned on. c Tap the preset that you want to use. The screen returns to the transducer selection screen, and the preset that you selected is displayed under the transducer.
Note
After you change the preset for a transducer that is not in use, if you close the transducer selection screen without selecting the transducer, the settings on the Preset change screen are not saved.
Pressing the Probe button before saving changes closes the transducer selection screen without saving changes.
3 Tap the transducer that you want to use.
Viewing in Dual-screen mode
Dual-screen mode displays two images side by side on the main monitor. There are two types of Dual screen mode:
Normal Dual-screen mode
Simultaneous Dual-screen mode
Both types of Dual-screen modes are enabled in the 2D, CD, and PD modes. They are not enabled for the M or D mode.
FC1 User Guide
Viewing in Dual-screen mode 155
When you are in a Dual-screen mode and press the M button (
) or D button (
mode is terminated and operation switches to the selected screen mode.
), the Dual-screen
In the normal Dual-screen mode:
One of the two images displayed on the screen is active: live, selected, and updated. The index on the active image mark is green, and the functions available for the active image appear on the touch panel.
The other image is inactive: not live, not selected, and not updated. Its probe orientation mark is gray.
In discussion of Dual-screen mode, we refer to the left-hand image as image A and the right-hand image as image B.
Controlling the display of images in Dual-screen mode
Two Dual-screen mode buttons affect the monitor display:
The left-hand button ( )
The right-hand button ( ) To view one or both images in Dual-screen mode 1 To view the left-hand or right-hand image, press the left- or right-hand button, respectively. 2 To return to a single-image display, press either button twice.
The effect of pressing either button varies with the current state of the display. The following table tells the effect on each screen according to: The current state of the display
156 Viewing in Dual-screen mode
Chapter 4
Which Dual-screen mode button you press
In this state
When you press the left button
This happens in the left screen
This happens in the right screen
When you press the right button
This happens in the left screen
This happens in the right screen
Single display with The live image is
a live image
displayed and
becomes active.
Nothing is displayed.
Single display with The frozen image
a frozen image
is displayed and
becomes active.
The frozen image is displayed.
Dual- screen mode Left: Frozen image (active) Right: Non-display
The frozen image is displayed in the single screen mode.
Dual- screen mode Left: Live image (active) Right: Non-display
The live image is displayed in the single screen mode.
Dual- screen mode Left: Non-display Right: Live image (active)
The live image is displayed and becomes active.
The live image is switched to the frozen image.
Dual- screen mode Left: Non-display Right: Frozen image (active)
The same frozen image is displayed and becomes active.
The frozen image is displayed.
Dual- screen mode Left: Frozen image Right: Frozen image (active)
The frozen image becomes active.
The frozen image becomes inactive.
Dual- screen mode Left: Frozen image Right: Live image (active)
The frozen image is switched to the live image and becomes active.
The live image is switched to the frozen image and becomes inactive.
Nothing is displayed.
The frozen image is displayed.
The live image is displayed and becomes active.
Nothing is displayed.
The frozen image is displayed.
The live image is switched to the frozen image.
The same frozen image is displayed and becomes active.
The live image is displayed and becomes active.
The live image is displayed in the singlescreen mode.
The frozen image is displayed in the single-screen mode.
The right-hand frozen image is displayed in the single-screen mode.
The right-hand live image is displayed in the single-screen mode.
FC1 User Guide
Viewing in Dual-screen mode 157
In this state
When you press the left button
This happens in the left screen
This happens in the right screen
Dual- screen mode Left: Live image (active) Right: Frozen image
The left-hand live image is displayed in the single-screen mode.
Dual- screen mode Left: Frozen image (active) Right: Frozen image
The left-hand frozen image is displayed in the single-screen mode.
When you press the right button
This happens in the left screen
This happens in the right screen
The live image is switched to the frozen image and becomes inactive.
The frozen image is switched to the live image and becomes active.
The frozen image The frozen image becomes inactive. becomes active.
Viewing in Simultaneous Dual-screen mode
In Simultaneous Dual-screen mode, both the left-hand (A) and right-hand (B) images are updated. You cannot change the view to Simultaneous Dual-screen mode when: A frozen image is displayed. You are using the Trapezoid function on one of the images in the Dual-screen mode. Any of the following are different between the images in the Dual-screen mode:
Angles of linear steer On or off settings of the spatial compound Magnification ratios Depths To view the examination in Simultaneous Dual-screen mode Tap Simul Dual on the touch panel. To turn off Simultaneous Dual-screen mode, tap Simul Dual.
158 Viewing in Dual-screen mode
Chapter 4
When the Simultaneous Dual-screen mode is activated while in the Dual-screen mode, the active image displayed on the Dual-mode screen also becomes active on the Simultaneous Dual-mode screen. When the Simultaneous Dual-screen mode is activated while in the single-screen mode, the image is displayed on both sides and the left-hand image becomes active.
Tapping Simul Dual again while in the Simultaneous Dual-screen mode does the following:
It terminates the Simultaneous Dual-screen mode and returns to the normal Dual-screen mode.
The active image on the Simultaneous Dual-mode screen becomes the active image on the Dual-mode screen.
Using the M or D cursor
The M and D cursors, which represent a sample volume gate, are available when you are in 2D, CD, or PD mode.
To use the M or D cursor
1 With one of the modes selected for which the M/D cursor is enabled, on the touch panel, tap M/D Cursor.
2 To move the cursor to the right or left or up or down within the region of interest (ROI), roll the trackball.
When the cursor reaches the boundary of the ROI, continuing to roll the trackball moves the ROI in the direction that you roll the trackball.
3 To increase or decrease the width of the sample volume gate, on the 2D, CD, or PD screen in the touch panel:
a If Gate Size is not selected, tap it.
b Press the up or down arrow on switch menu button 4 (the rocker button below Gate Size) until the gate size is what you want.
4 To change the steering angle of the CD/PD mode image for the D cursor, tap Cursor Steer, and then rotate dial menu button 1 (the dial to the right of Cursor Steer).
Caution
You can change the steering angle only when using a linear transducer.
The steering angle can be set to 30 degrees only when the HFL38xp or HFL50xp transducer is connected.
5 To change the angle to plus or minus 45°, 60°, or 0°, tap Quick Angle, and then turn dial menu button 1 (the dial to the right of Quick Angle).
FC1 User Guide
Using the M or D cursor 159
6 To change the angle of the M or D cursor in 1° increments, turn the multi dial (
).
The angles with the upper end of the graphic to the left are positive; the angles with the upper end of the graphic to the right are negative.
Caution
You can change the angle only when the M or D cursor is turned on.
Viewing the ECG waveform display
You can view the ECG (electrocardiogram) waveform in every screen mode and in any display format (singleimage display, Dual-screen mode, or Simultaneous Dual-screen mode). In all the display formats, the ECG waveform is displayed on the live image, not on the frozen image.
WARNING
To prevent misdiagnosis, do not use the ECG waveform display function for the diagnosis of heart rhythms. The optional ECG function of the FUJIFILM SonoSite ultrasound system is not intended for diagnostic use.
To prevent electromagnetic interference with aircraft devices, do not use the ECG cable on aircraft. Electromagnetic interference may affect the safety of aircraft.
Caution
Use only the accessories recommended by FUJIFILM SonoSite, Inc. Connecting any other accessory to the FC1 system may damage the system.
After defibrillation is performed, it may take about 1 minute until the ECG waveform becomes stable.
The ECG waveform and display formats
In single-screen mode or Simultaneous Dual-screen mode, the ECG waveform is updated from the left end to the right end. When the leading end of the ECG waveform reaches the right end, it returns to the left end and continues. When you freeze and then unfreeze an image, the ECG waveform is cleared and then resumes from the left-hand end.
In the Dual-screen mode, the ECG waveform appears for each image active image.
Note
When you switch an active image to the inactive state, the ECG waveform is retained. Making an inactive image active clears the ECG waveform.
To display the heart rate in the ECG waveform On the Worksheet screen, manually input the heart rate.
160 Viewing the ECG waveform display
Chapter 4
Or, perform the HR measurement.
For information on performing the HR measurement, see the "HR" measurement in the M mode and D mode tables under "Basic measurement" on page 238.
Displaying and configuring the ECG waveform
The ECG waveform continuously displays the patient's heartbeat only when the image is live, not frozen. Therefore, you can turn on the ECG waveform display only when a live image is on screen.
To display and configure the ECG waveform
1 To show the ECG waveform and open the ECG screen, in any display mode screen, tap ECG.
Or, if you have assigned the function for displaying the ECG waveform to a function button, press that function button.
On the left side of the ECG waveform, the heart rate appears. (In the Dual-screen mode, the heart rate appears on each live image.)
You can set the sweep speed of the ECG waveform. For details, see "Setting the sweep speed" on page 112.
2 To hide the ECG waveform and close the ECG screen, tap Exit.
Or, to close the ECG screen but leave the ECG waveform visible, tap Close.
You can adjust the settings ECG Position, ECG Gain, and Sweep Speed regardless of whether the image is live or frozen.
3 To raise or lower the ECG waveform in the display, turn the dial menu button to the right of ECG Position.
4 To set the gain for the ECG waveform, turn the dial menu button to the right of ECG Gain.
The setting range is from 0 to 100. The current value appears below the label ECG Gain.
5 To set the scrolling speed of the ECG waveform, press the up or down arrow on switch menu button 2 (the rocker button underneath Sweep Speed).
Sweep speed can range from 1 to 7 seconds.
Caution
In the M, PW, CW, or TDI mode, you can change the sweep speed of the screen mode. The sweep speed of the ECG waveform is synchronized with that of the screen mode. For information on changing the sweep speed for a mode, see "Setting the sweep speed" on page 112.
FC1 User Guide
Viewing the ECG waveform display 161
6 To show or hide the ECG waveform: While the image is frozen, do one of the following: Tap Display, and then press the rocker button under Display. When the ECG waveform is not showing, unfreeze the image.
7 To hide the ECG waveform, do one of the following: Tap Exit on the touch panel. Press the function button to which you have assigned the function for displaying the ECG waveform.
Performing cine search while the ECG waveform is on-screen
To perform a Cine search while the ECG waveform is on-screen
1 Press the CINE button (
).
A cursor indicating the position of the image display appears on the ECG waveform.
2 To move the ECG waveform display area, move the cursor by rotating the trackball.
Changing the position of the image display within the ECG waveform display area does not change the ECG waveform. However, when the cursor indicating the position of the image display is at the left or right end of the ECG waveform display area, moving it farther away from center moves the ECG waveform display area to the other end of the waveform display.
Using triplex mode
You can view the 2D mode image, CD or PD mode image, and the PW or CW mode image simultaneously. This is called the triplex mode. You can also view images of the following modes simultaneously.
2D mode, CD mode and PW mode images: CD/PW mode
2D mode, PD mode and PW mode images: PD/PW mode
Note
The triplex mode is not available in TDI mode.
162 Using triplex mode
Chapter 4
Performing a needle procedure
You can display the needle guideline (a line that guides insertion of the needle into the patient's body) on the 2D mode image, depending on the transducer that is connected to the FC1.
The needle guide assists the placement of the needle. The ultrasonic image of the anatomical region of interest and that of the needle show on the examination screen to help carry out the procedure.
When you connect a transducer with an attached needle guide to the ultrasound system, two guidelines appear on the image, indicating the expected insertion path of the needle. The guidelines and the depth marks assist in the procedure.
The guidelines are not intended for freehand needle procedure.
FC1 User Guide
Performing a needle procedure 163
Preparing for a needle procedure
To avoid injury to the patient: Use only the needle brackets, guides, supplies, components and accessories
specified by FUJIFILM SonoSite, Inc or CIVCO. Other brands may not properly fit on FUJIFILM SonoSite transducers.
WARNING
Use only the bracket compatible with the ultrasound system and transducer that you are using.
Make sure that the bracket is attached properly.
When using a multi-angle bracket, make sure that the angle setting (A, B, or C) of the bracket is the same as that of the ultrasound system.
Caution
You can use the needle guideline display function only with a transducer that is equipped with a single-angle or multi-angle needle guide bracket.
The needle guideline cannot be displayed on a frozen image.
Because this is an optional function that guides the needle, this function is available only for certain types of transducer. For more information, see the "Puncture user guide" or "L25 needle guide kit user guide" issued by FUJIFILM SonoSite, Inc
When you tap Needle Guide on the touch panel on the 2D mode (B tab) screen, the needle guideline appears on the 2D mode image, and the Needle Guide screen appears on the touch panel.
Needle procedure precautions
To avoid damage or reduce the risk of infection to the patient, observe the following:
WARNING
Reusable needle guides must be sterilized after use.
If the bracket needle guide or needle breaks during the procedure, verify that all pieces of the equipment are recovered.
Caution
To avoid damage to the transducer, use only gels recommended by FUJIFILM SonoSite. Using gels other than those that FUJIFILM SonoSite recommends can damage the transducer and void the warranty. If you have questions about gel compatibility, contact FUJIFILM SonoSite or your local representative.
164 Performing a needle procedure
Chapter 4
During the procedure, observe the following precautions:
For proper acoustic coupling, you must use acoustic coupling gel. Apply a liberal amount of gel between the transducer and the body. Although most gels provide suitable acoustic coupling, some gels are incompatible with some transducer materials. FUJIFILM SonoSite recommends Aquasonic gel and provides a sample with the needle guide kit.
Use sterile gel when performing an invasive procedure.
If the needle is not displayed at the target, ensure that you have selected the correct needle guide and have correctly attached the bracket and needle guide.
The guide is intended to provide only an indication of the expected path of the needle. Identify the actual position of the needle with the ultrasound image of the needle on the screen.
Verifying the needle path
Verify the needle path before the procedure to make sure that the relationships between the system, transducer, and needle guide are correct.
WARNING
Before the needle path verification, inspect all the parts to make sure that they are not damaged.
Perform the needle path verification before the procedure to ensure that the bracket, needle guide, and the needle are installed properly.
Use a straight, new needle for each verification procedure to help get an accurate projection of the needle.
Do not use a needle that has been used for any verification procedure.
Do not use the needle guide if the needle is not following the intended path.
To verify the needle path, you need the following devices and instruments. Biopsy transducer Bracket
This is reusable; the type of the bracket varies depending on the transducer you want to use it with. Needle guide kit (single use only)
The following transducers are supported with needle guidance, for the needle guides listed after each transducer type: C60xf (multiple fixed angle)
FC1 User Guide
Performing a needle procedure 165
C35xp (multiple fixed angle, variable angle) ICTxp (fixed angle) HFL50xp (fixed angle, variable angle) HFL38xp (multiple fixed angle, variable angle) L38xp (multiple fixed angle, variable angle) L25xp (variable angle, transverse angle) P21xp (fixed angle) Ultrasound system Tank filled with test object fluid (All World Scientific code 3480)
needle
Needle guide reference point of depth measurement
Depth measurement
HFL38xp transducer Bracket for HFL38xp
Figure 4-2: HFL38xp transducer with needle guide and needle attached
166 Performing a needle procedure
Chapter 4
HFL38xp transducer
Figure 4-3: HFL38xp transducer set up on tank filled with test object fluid. To verify the needle path 1 Attach the bracket to the transducer, and install the appropriate needle guide for the needle gauge.
See the user guide specific to your needle bracket for information on attaching the bracket and needle guide. 2 Set up the tank and transducer, and then insert the needle into the needle guide. 3 Immerse the transducer and needle no more than 1/4 to 1/2 inch (6.35 to 12.7mm) into the tank of test fluid (or distilled water). 4 Connect the transducer and turn on the ultrasound system. 5 Show the needle guideline. For more information, see "Using the needle guide" on page 169. 6 Move the needle into the tank of test fluid until its ultrasound image is visible on the system display.
FC1 User Guide
Performing a needle procedure 167
7 Verify that the needle, as seen on the system display, passes between the two guidelines. The guideline is intended to provide only an indication of the expected path of the needle.
WARNING
To avoid injury to the patient, if the displayed needle is protruding in an unexpected direction, make sure that the bracket and the needle guide are installed properly and that the direction of the transducer is correct.
If the needle does not pass between the two guidelines even after verification, do not use the needle guide. Contact FUJIFILM SonoSite or your local representative.
Transducer Examination type
Needle insertion path
Depth value at depth cursor
Guidelines
Figure 4-4: Example of needle insertion screen
Caution
The depth value at the depth cursor, as labeled in Figure 4-4, "Example of needle insertion screen" on page 168, is the measured distance between the reference point of depth measurement on the needle guide and the tip of the needle.
168 Performing a needle procedure
Chapter 4
Transducer Examination type
Guidelines
Needle insertion path
Depth cursor
Depth value at depth cursor
Figure 4-5: Example of biopsy guideline
Caution
The depth value at the depth cursor is the measured distance between the reference point of depth measurement on the needle guide and the tip of the needle
Using the needle guide
To use the needle guide
1 On the touch panel, with the 2D tab showing, tap Needle Guide.
Caution
You can select the needle guide only when a live image is on screen. (Note, however, that if the needle guide is on screen and you freeze the image, the needle guide remains on screen.)
The Needle Guide screen appears. 2 To select an angle, beside Angle, tap an available angle.
The angles that you can select vary depending on the transducer. Once you select an angle, the guideline and area line of the selected angle appear on the examination display. 3 To select the display method of the needle guideline, beside Line Display, tap Area, Center, or Display OFF.
Note
Display Off is available only when a frozen image is on screen.
FC1 User Guide
Performing a needle procedure 169
In the following step, needle distance is length of the needle from its insertion point to the location of a caliper that you are using for that measurement.
4 To show needle distance in the examination display, start a measurement, as described in "Starting a measurement" on page 214.
The distance measurement caliper appears. You can operate this caliper in the same way as the caliper for one of the measurement functions that measure distance (for details, see "Measurement overview" on page 211).
The start point of the caliper becomes the start point of the guideline on the side of the transducer direction marker.
The starting point of the guideline varies depending on the transducer connected to the FC1.
The color of the guideline and area line varies depending on the status of the image (live or frozen).
When the angle is 90 degrees, the guideline and area line are displayed at the center of the transducer.
Caution
Before inserting the needle, check the position of the insertion pathway relative to the transducer, the needle guide, and the equipment.
Before inserting the needle, ensure that the needle guide that you are using is free from damage.
Insert the needle in a vertical direction to the guide line for the sake of emphasizing the needle position in vivo when using the transverse needle.
When you insert the needle into the body, it may bend.
Check the position of the needle on the ultrasound image
When you are in dual mode, the needle guideline does not appear on the screen.
When using a multi-angle needle guide, to avoid injury, match the angle of ultrasound system with that of the needle guide.
Because the tip of needle inserted into the body is hard to see, check the position by moving the needle or by injecting fluid.
5 To save the current needle guide setting as the default, tap Set Default. The setting is applied the next time that the needle guideline is displayed.
6 To hide the needle guide and return to 2D mode, tap Exit. 7 To close the Needle Guide screen and show the 2D mode screen (B tab) on the touch panel, tap Close.
170 Performing a needle procedure
Chapter 4
Needle profiling (Optional)
If you choose, you can use needle profiling, which makes needle guidance easier during the placement of catheters and during nerve-block procedures. This technology enhances linear structures within an outlined area on the screen. These linear structures are best enhanced when they are perpendicular to the angle guide.
Note
Linear structures are enhanced only in an outlined portion of the image. The area outside the outline remains unchanged.
Needle profiling is available for the following probes and presets:
Probe Nrv Msk SmP HFL38xp
HFL50xp
L25xp
L38xp
To use needle profiling 1 On the touch panel, tap Needle Profiling. 2 On the touch panel, tap Target Depth.
The depth cursor appears on the monitor. 3 Use the trackball to move the depth cursor. The value of the depth at the position of this cursor appears (for
example, Dep:1.9cm). 4 To invert the ROI horizontally, tap Invert on the touch panel. To turn it back, tap Normal. 5 To position the needle and the dashed angled line so that they are facing each other perpendicularly, in the
ROI section, tap Shallow, Medium, or Steep.
FC1 User Guide
Performing a needle procedure 171
6 Tap Close. Caution
Note
Avoid setting the gain too high when you use Needle Profiling, as unnecessarily high gain can cause artifacts in the image. In addition, respiratory and cardiac movement in the image may cause bright pulsating artifacts.
When a live image is displayed, the depth cursor and the angled ROI line appear in green. When a frozen image appears, they appear in light blue.
You can select Normal/Invert and ROI only when a live image is displayed.
Use the Shallow, Medium, and Steep settings to make the needle and dashed angled line perpendicular to each other. The more perpendicular they are to each other, the more the linear structure is enhanced. Likewise, the more parallel the linear structure is to the angled line, the less it is enhanced.
It is recommended to use a 17- to 25-gauge needle. Enhancement results can depend on the type and brand of needle used. For more information, consult the medical literature on needle visibility in ultrasound-guided procedures
You can angle the needle up to 50 degrees from the transducer surface. Beyond 50 degrees, the needle may enhance less. (Needle profiling has little or not benefit in out-of-plane procedures. It is intended to plane procedures only.).
Using Cine mode
You can save raw data in the cine memory for re-accessing and playing back.
Pressing the CINE button (
) after freezing raw data displays the Cine screen on the touch panel, for
playing back raw data. (This status is called Cine mode.)
The CINE button is active only when the image is frozen.
When you terminate Cine mode while playing back raw data, the playback status is retained the next time that the Cine mode is activated.
Cine search
To see frames from earlier in the examination, you can change the play position of raw data.
Raw data obtained from the cine memory is played back, in the range that you specify. When the playback reaches the frame specified as the end position, playback returns to the start position and starts again.
The playback condition varies depending on the display format and the screen mode, as shown below.
172 Using Cine mode
Chapter 4
Dual-screen mode: Only the active raw data is played back. Simultaneous Dual -screen mode: Both sides of raw data are played back. M, PW, CW, or TDI mode: Only the raw data and waveform being updated are played back.
Caution
Note that performing a cine search erases any measurement results or calipers that are displayed on the main monitor.
To perform a cine search
1 Press the CINE button (
).
The Cine screen appears.
Caution
If the playback range is only one frame, you cannot select this item.
2 To set the range of the playback, tap one of the following: All Plays all the frames saved in the cine memory. Last Half The last half of the raw data (the middle frame to the last frame saved in the cine memory) plays back. Or, to set start and end points: a Use the trackball to move the cursor displayed on the cine memory, and then tap Set Start. The cursor position becomes the playback start position. b Use the trackball to move the cursor displayed on the cine memory, and then tap Set End. The cursor position becomes the playback end position.
3 To move the play position: In 2D, CD, or PD mode, rotate the trackball to the right to move the play position forward, and to the left to move the play position backward. When you rotate the trackball left at the first frame, the play position returns to the last frame.
FC1 User Guide
Using Cine mode 173
In the M, PW, CW, or TDI mode, rotate the trackball to the right to move the play position backward, and to the left to move the play position forward.
4 To start playback, tap Play.
5 To pause playback, rotate the trackball any direction. (To restart playback, tap Play again.)
6 To stop playback, tap the Stop button (
).
7 To terminate the Cine mode, do one of the following:
Press the CINE button.
On the touch panel, tap Close.
The Cine screen on the touch panel closes, and the touch panel screen of the current mode reappears.
Annotating images
You can add four types of annotations to live and frozen images of an examination that is in progress:
Freeform text
You can enter text freely, using the virtual keyboard. For more information, see "Creating text annotations" on page 175.
Arrow
You can enter up to 15 arrows on the screen and move and turn them freely. For more information, see "Creating arrow annotations" on page 179.
POT
POT menus are fixed sets of annotations. List item
You can specify terms to enter for each application as list items. You do so by using the List 1, List 2, and List 3 menus.
Note
The names of the list-item menus may change according to the preset. For example, for the Cardiac preset, the names are Card 1, Card 2, and Card 3.
For more information, see, in "Creating text annotations" on page 175, the procedure for entering list items.
174 Annotating images
Chapter 4
Caution
When the examination is terminated, or when the transducer or preset is changed, the input annotations are erased.
Creating text annotations
This section describes the procedures for entering annotations.
Each examination supports a maximum of 15 text blocks.
The maximum number of characters per text block is 64.
Starting an annotation
To start an annotation
1 To enter text-annotation mode, press the ANNOTATE button.
Or, if you are using a USB keyboard, press the SPACE key.
The Annotation Mode screen appears on the touch panel, and a yellow text cursor appears on the main monitor.
If an arrow appears on the main monitor, tap the Text tab to display a yellow text cursor. (The default annotation type, text or arrow, depends on the preset.)
2 Use the trackball to move the text cursor to the desired position, where you can now create an annotation.
Or, to return the text cursor to the home position, tap Home. 3 Tap Keyboard and then, on the virtual keyboard, type to enter text.
By default, capital-letter entry is set for the virtual keyboard. You can also use the USB keyboard to enter text.
4 To fix your text in place as a text block, move the text cursor. The text you have fixed turns white.
Note
When the keyboard appears on the screen, the only actions you can perform are storing images and switching between insert and overwrite mode.
FC1 User Guide
Annotating images 175
Creating an additional text annotation
To enter text at another position In text-annotation mode, use the trackball to move the text cursor to the desired position, type text, and
then complete the procedure in "Starting an annotation" on page 175.
Changing text annotations
To delete characters 1 In text-annotation mode, use the trackball to move the text cursor to the characters to be deleted. 2 Tap Delete Text.
The character on the left side of the text cursor is deleted. To delete a text annotation 1 In text-annotation mode, use the trackball to move the text cursor below the text annotation to be deleted.
2 Tap Delete Word, or press the DELETE button (
).
The word block on which the text cursor is placed is deleted.
Caution
Tapping Delete Word or pressing the DELETE button when the text cursor is not on a text annotation deletes the text annotation on the immediate left in the same line (or, if there is none on the left in the same line, the text annotation at the right end of the line above it).
To correct text 1 In text-annotation mode, use the trackball to move the text cursor to the text block to be corrected.
The text color changes to yellow.
2 To switch the input mode between insert and overwrite, press the SET button (
).
In insert mode, the text cursor is yellow.
In overwrite mode, the text cursor is green.
3 In the text box of the virtual keyboard, tap the point at which you want to start correcting.
176 Annotating images
Chapter 4
4 Use the virtual keyboard to correct the text. 5 To finalize the text correction, move the text cursor.
The corrected text turns white. To move a text block 1 In text-annotation mode, use the trackball to move the text cursor to the text block that you want to move.
2 Press the SET button (
) twice rapidly.
The text turns red.
3 Use the trackball to move the text cursor to the desired position.
4 Press the SET button.
The text appears in yellow, and the position is finalized.
Adding POT menu items or list items to a text annotation
The four POT menus are arrayed along the bottom of the touch panel:
Rt/Lt Indicating orientation: Right or Left
Prx/Mid/Dst Indicating position: Proximal, Mid, or Distal
Long/Trans Indicating Longitudinal or Transverse
Sag/Cor Indicating Sagittal or Coronal
The three list item menus are List1, List2, and List3.
In each text block, you can enter at most:
Four POT items (one for each menu)
Three list items (one for each menu)
After you add a POT item to an annotation, you can change it--until you move the text cursor from the entered-text box, at which point you cannot change it.
FC1 User Guide
Annotating images 177
To add a POT menu item or list item to an annotation
1 In text-annotation mode, use the trackball to move the text cursor to the desired position.
To add a POT menu item or list item:
a Tap the desired POT menu or list (List1, List2, or List3) to select it as required.
b Press the POT menu or list switch menu button to cycle through the POT menu or list items to the one you want to add to the annotation.
If the POT menu item or list item that you want to add already appears, press the down-arrow side of the menu switch menu button.
2 To resume adding text, tap Keyboard.
3 In the text box, the text cursor remains at its position following your last addition of a POT menu or list item.
To correct a POT or list item
1 To change a POT or list item that you have added to an annotation, tap the appropriate switch menu button (below the POT menu or list).
2 To erase a POT or list item, do one of the following: On the touch panel, tap Delete Text. On the virtual keyboard, use the BACK SPACE key.
3 To finalize the annotation, move the text cursor.
Note
When you move the text cursor from the annotation, you can no longer change a POT menu or list item.
Moving the annotation's home position
To move the annotation's home position
1 To move the home position, move the text cursor to the desired location of the new home position, and then tap Set Home.
2 The current text cursor position becomes the new home position.
178 Annotating images
Chapter 4
Deleting all annotations
To delete all the displayed annotations and arrows Tap Delete All.
Note
This action does not delete the body pattern.
Creating arrow annotations
You can add up to 15 arrows to a live or frozen image. When you have created them, you can move them and rotate them freely.
To add arrow annotations
1 Press the ANNOTATE button (
).
On the touch panel, the annotation screen appears.
2 If the Arrow tab is not already selected, tap it.
A green arrow appears at the center of the image area.
Caution
When an arrow is green, switching from the Arrow tab to the Text tab deletes the arrow.
3 Use the trackball to move the arrow to the desired position.
4 Use the multi dial (
) to rotate the arrow to the desired angle.
5 Press the SET button (
) to fix the position of the arrow.
The arrow that you just fixed turns white, and a new arrow appears.
Caution
Pressing the DELETE button erases the fixed arrows in the reverse order from that in which you created them.
Once the arrow is fixed, you cannot change its angle. 6 To enter additional arrows:
FC1 User Guide
Annotating images 179
a Do one of the following, depending on your last action: If you created an arrow, rotate the trackball, to move the new arrow off the location of the arrow you have just fixed, to the location where you want the new arrow to be. Or, to move the arrow to the center of the image area, tap Home. If you created a text annotation, tap the Arrow tab.
b Repeat steps 3 through 5.
Deleting arrow annotations
To delete an arrow annotation To erase the fixed arrows in the reverse order from that in which you created them, press the DELETE button
(
).
To delete all annotations and arrows
Tap Delete All.
All annotations are deleted, the text cursor is returned to the home position, and the arrow is returned to the center of the image area.
Closing the annotation screen
To close the annotation screen Do one of the following:
Press the ANNOTATION button. Tap Close. If the USB keyboard is connected, press the TEXT key. Text that is not yet finalized is finalized, all arrows that are not yet finalized are deleted, and the annotation screen is closed. Finalized annotations remain displayed on the main monitor.
180 Annotating images
Chapter 4
Displaying annotations
To display annotations
If you have assigned the display-annotations function to the FREEZE button ( ), press it.
For details on assigning a function to the FREEZE button, see "Assigning a function to the FREEZE button" on page 63.
Using body marks
Use body marks to record the position and orientation of the transducer to the patient's body during an examination. Control body marks using the buttons on the Body Mark screen on the touch panel and those on the control panel of the FC1.
Ending the examination or changing a transducer or preset deletes the body marks.
Displaying a body mark
When you press the BODY MARK button while a live or frozen image is on the main monitor, the Body Mark screen appears on the touch panel.
You can display a body mark in both images in the Dual-screen mode or in the Simultaneous Dual-screen mode. For information on configuring the display of body marks, see "Positioning the body-mark display" on page 53.
Body marks available for the current examination appear in the touch panel.
To display, change, and move body marks
1 To show the Body Mark screen, press the BODY MARK button.
If you have assigned body-mark display to the FREEZE button ( ), you can display body marks by pressing this button. For details on assigning a function to the FREEZE button, see "Assigning a function to the FREEZE button" on page 63.
By default, the body mark appears in the lower left side of the examination image, with a green transducer mark on the body mark.
FC1 User Guide
Using body marks 181
2 To move the body mark, tap Move. Use the trackball to move the body mark and transducer mark together. In the Dual- or Simultaneous Dual-screen mode, when one body mark is displayed for each image, you can move the body mark only within the area of the active image. When only one body mark is displayed, you can move it across both images.
3 To return the body mark to the home position, tap Home. The home position varies, depending on the screen mode.
4 To finalize the position of the body mark, tap Move again. After you finalize the position of the body mark, the trackball can move only the transducer mark.
To change the body mark that is displayed 1 In the touch panel, on the Body Mark screen, tap the body mark that you want to change the body mark to. To change to a body mark that is not showing in the Body Mark screen: 1 On the Body Mark screen, tap Library. 2 Tap the collection of body marks that contains the one you want to use.
The body-mark collections are as follows: Abdominal, Breast, Cardiac, Gyn/OB, Uro/Genital, Vascular, MSK, Other. In the selected body-mark collection, tap the body mark that you want to show. The selected body mark appears in the image area. To remove a body mark and transducer mark When a body mark is displayed, tap Blank. The displayed body mark and transducer mark are hidden. To rotate a transducer mark
When a body mark is displayed in the image area, rotate the multi dial ( mark to the desired angle.
) to rotate the transducer
182 Using body marks
Chapter 4
Selecting body marks registered in a preset
Body marks are registered for each preset. You can select the body mark to be displayed in the image area from among all the registered body marks. To select from body marks registered in a preset 1 On the Body Mark tab, tap Library. 2 On the Library tab, tap an examination type. 3 Tap the icon of the body mark that you want displayed in the image area. 4 To move the body mark, tap Move, and then move the body mark and transducer mark with the trackball. 5 To return the body mark to its home position on the examination screen, tap Home. 6 To remove the body mark from the examination screen, tap Blank. 7 To return to the Library tab, tap Back.
Or, to return to the display mode screen, press the BODY MARK button (
).
Closing the Body Mark screen
To close the Body Mark screen
Press the BODY MARK button (
).
All displayed body marks are finalized, and the Body Mark screen is closed.
Switching the TI type
The type of thermal index (TI) used as the standard of acoustic output appears on screen. During an examination, you can change the type of thermal index.
Caution
When a new examination is started, or when the transducer, preset or Imaging Preset is changed, the TI type is switched to the default.
FC1 User Guide
Switching the TI type 183
To change the TI type during an examination 1 Tap the Others tab. 2 Press switch menu button 2 (the rocker button below Change TI) to cycle through the thermal-index types.
For more information on TI types, see "Selecting the standard of acoustic output" on page 65.
Playing clips back
Clips can be played back only when the image display format is 1 x 1. However, when the image display format is 2 x 2, tapping an image twice rapidly displays it by itself on-screen (that is, in the 1 x 1 image display format). To play a clip back
1 Press the CURRENT VIEW button (
).
2 Select a clip.
With a clip selected, you can use the trackball to perform a cine search.
3 Press the FREEZE button ( ). The clip is played back.
4 To stop the playback, press the FREEZE button again.
Displaying a raw-data image
You can annotate and measure raw-data images (that is, images played back from raw data). Raw data handled on the FC1 is IQ data.
Note
To add annotations or measure against raw-data images of archived examinations, restart the examination and follow the procedure from step 1. For details on how to restart examinations, see "Restarting an examination" on page 140.
184 Playing clips back
Chapter 4
To display a raw-data image
1 Press the CURRENT VIEW button (
).
2 Select a raw data image.
3 Tap Raw Data Process.
The information that was recorded when you stored the raw-data image appears on the main monitor, and the screen corresponding to the screen mode used when storing the raw image data appears on the touch panel.
When a raw data image is not displayed or when the image display format is 2 x 2, Raw Data Process is not available.
You can use the following functions with a raw-data image:
Cine
For more information, see "To use needle profiling" on page 171.
Body mark display
For more information, see"Using body marks" on page 181.
Annotation entry
For more information, see "Annotating images" on page 174.
Basic measurement
For more information, see "Basic measurement" on page 238.
Preset-specific measurement
Storage (frozen image or clip)
For more information, see "Storing examination images" on page 195.
Print
For more information, see"Printing exam images" on page 198.
Network transfer (frozen image or clip)
FC1 User Guide
Displaying a raw-data image 185
4 To finish working with raw data images, tap Raw Data Process again.
Deleting raw-data images
To delete a raw-data image
1 Press the CURRENT VIEW button (
).
2 Display and then tap the raw data image that you want to delete.
3 Tap Delete Raw.
If you do not select (tap) a raw data image, Delete Raw is not available.
A trash-can icon appears on the image, indicating that the image is to be deleted.
Note
The image deletion settings (marks of trash cans) are retained even when you change pages.
4 To remove the deletion mark from an image, tap Delete.
5 To mark multiple images for deletion, repeat steps 2 and 3.
6 To finish marking examination images for deletion and delete the marked images, press the one of the following buttons, all of which exit review of current images:
CURRENT VIEW 2D PATIENT 7 When you are prompted to confirm deletion of the images that you have marked for deletion, tap OK.
Or, to cancel the deletion and remove the deletion mark (the trash can) from the image, tap Cancel.
What you see on the screen after deleting the image depends on which button you pressed for the exit operation.
If you cancel the deletion, the system still leaves current-image review, but without deleting the image.
Transferring images via a network
You can transfer images via the network only when the image display format is 1 x 1.
186 Transferring images via a network
Chapter 4
For details on how to assign a transfer destination to the Store button, see "Configuring Store buttons" on page 29.
To transfer an image over a network
1 Press the CURRENT VIEW button (
).
2 Display the image that you want to transfer over the network.
3 Press the Store button whose function is to transfer an image to the desired destination.
The system moves the displayed image to the destination assigned to the Store button.
Printing images
Images can be printed on one sheet in 1 x 1, 1 x 2, 2 x 1, or 2 x 2 print formats. However, you can print only when the image display format is 1 x 1.
You can configure the number of images and the orientation of paper with the system setup. For details, see "Adjusting printer settings" on page 40.
For details on how to assign the print function to a Store button, see "Configuring Store buttons" on page 29.
If the printing of some images is suspended, printing starts automatically when the examination is finished.
When you print a frozen image, the time that the image was saved appears both inside and outside the image.
To print an image
1 Connect the printer to the FC1.
2 Press the CURRENT VIEW button (
).
3 Display and select the image you want to print.
4 To select multiple images, repeat Steps 2 and 3.
5 Press the Store button to which the print function is assigned.
6 Press the CURRENT VIEW button again.
7 When you are prompted to confirm printing, tap OK.
FC1 User Guide
Printing images 187
Working with archived examinations and their images
When you end an examination, it is automatically archived, and therefore is accessible on the Archive screen.
The Archive screen and controls
Some of the touch-panel controls are described in the following table. Those that are not listed are covered in the subsequent procedures.
Control Description
Upper: First/Last Lower: First/Last
Upper: L/R Slide Lower: L/R Slide
Upper: Page Lower: Page
Select All
Close
To move to the first or last page of one of the lists, tap Upper: First/Last (for the examination list) or Lower: First/Last (for the image list), if it is not already selected. Then press switch menu button 1 (the rocker button below this control).
To shift the view of one of the lists to the right or left in order to see fields that are off the touch panel, tap Upper: L/R Slide (for the examination list) or Lower: L/R Slide (for the image list), if it is not already selected. Then press switch menu button 2 (the rocker button below this control).
To move to the next or previous page in one of the lists, tap Upper: Page (for the examination list) or Lower: Page (for the image list), if it is not already selected, and then press switch menu button 3 (the rocker button below). The current page number and the total number of pages are displayed on the lower side.
To select all the examinations in the examination list, tap Select All.
Closes the Archive screen.
Selecting archived examinations
To select archived examinations
1 Press the ARCHIVE button (
).
The Archive screen appears.
2 On the Archive screen, select an archived examination.
Or, to narrow the list of exams to review:
a Tap the downward-pointing green arrow ( ) to the right of Search Key.
188 Working with archived examinations and their images
Chapter 4
b In the selection screen that appears, tap the records field in which you want to search.
You can select Patient ID, Patient Name, or Accession No.
c To search on a string within the selected field, in the text box next to String, using the virtual keyboard, type the string (or keyword) of interest, and then tap Close.
d Tap the Search virtual button.
The search results appear in the examination list, the upper box on the Archive screen that contains the list of archived examinations.
Following are the fields for each examination in the examination list:
Lock - If an examination is locked, this field contains a lock icon. You can sort examinations by whether they are locked or not.
Patient ID Patient Name Size (MB) - Image size.
Data Count (S/L/R/D) - The number of images in the examination. The number of images is displayed for each image type: S (Still image), L (Clip), and R (Raw data image).
Study Start Date Time - The start time of the examination.
Study Last Date Time - The time the examination was completed.
Accession No. - The accession number.
Import - Contains an icon indicating that the image is imported from the external memory media. You can sort based on whether an image is imported or not.
Export - Contains an icon indicating that the image has been exported to the external memory media. You can sort based on whether an image is exported or not.
Storage - Contains an icon indicating that the image is stored on the DICOM network storage.
Print - Contains an icon indicating that the image has been printed. You can sort based on whether an image has been printed or not.
3 To sort the listed examinations in ascending or descending order on a field, tap the header for the field.
The visual indicator on that field header toggles between a backward slash (\) and a forward slash (/) according to whether the sort order is descending or ascending, respectively.
FC1 User Guide
Working with archived examinations and their images 189
4 To select one or more examinations, tap the examination(s) of interest.
Locking archived examinations
Locking an examination prevents it from being deleted.
To lock an archived exam
1 Select one or more archived exams, as described in "Selecting archived examinations" on page 188.
2 Tap Lock.
3 To unlock one or more locked examinations, select the examinations you want to unlock, and then tap Lock again.
If your selection of multiple examinations includes both locked and unlocked examinations, tapping Lock locks all the examinations.
If no examination is selected, Lock is unavailable.
Exporting archived examinations
For information on exporting archived examinations, see "Exporting examination data" on page 203.
Deleting archived exams
Caution
You cannot restore deleted examinations.
To delete an archived exam
1 Select one or more archived examinations, as described in "Selecting archived examinations" on page 188.
2 Tap Delete.
3 When prompted to confirm the deletion, tap OK. Or, to cancel the deletion, tap Cancel.
Note
If no examination is selected or if a locked examination is selected, Delete is unavailable.
Only a raw-data image can be deleted from the examination that includes the raw data image.
190 Working with archived examinations and their images
Chapter 4
Viewing archived exam images
When the image of an archived examination is on-screen, the following functions are unavailable: To add annotations or measure against archived exam images, see "Displaying a raw-data image" on page 184 Storage Network transfer Export Body mark operation Annotation entry Basic measurement A preset-specific measurement (except for the report display) To view archived exam images 1 Select an archived examination, as described in "Selecting archived examinations" on page 188.
The examinations are highlighted, and their stored images are listed in the image list under the examination list. The image (or images) taken from the first of the selected examinations appears first in the image list. The images are listed with the following fields: Preset
The type of examination Single/Multiple
The type of image: Still or Clip Size (MB)
The image size Date Time
The date and time that the image was captured 2 To sort based on one of the fields in the image list box, tap the field header.
FC1 User Guide
Working with archived examinations and their images 191
3 To invert the sort order for a field header, tap the header again. 4 To remove the selection of an examination, tap the examination again.
The examination's images are removed from the image list below. 5 With an examination selected in the examinations list, tap Open.
Images stored during the examination selected in the examination list appear on the main monitor. You can tap Open only when a single examination is selected in the examination list. When multiple examinations are selected, Open is unavailable. For details on what you can do with archived images, see the following sections.
6 To finish reviewing the images, tap Back, and then press the ARCHIVE button (
).
A live 2D mode image shows on the screen.
You can also finish reviewing the images of archived examinations by pressing the PATIENT or the 2D button
(
).
Deleting an archived raw-data image
To delete a raw-data image
1 Select one or more archived examinations, as described in "Selecting archived examinations" on page 188
2 Tap Delete Raw.
3 When prompted to confirm the deletion, tap OK.
Or, to cancel the deletion, tap Cancel.
All the raw-data images in the selected examination are deleted. Images other than the raw-data images are not deleted.
Note
If no examination is selected or if an examination including a raw-data image is not selected, Delete Raw cannot be selected.
192 Working with archived examinations and their images
Chapter 4
Printing archived images
When you print an archived image, it is put into the print queue. It prints after you have exited Archive mode.
Note
When you print a cine clip:
You cannot print multiple frames in a clip.
If you start printing an image (including raw-data images) and then try to delete it, the deletion is not carried out until after it has printed.
To print all images in an examination 1 Confirm that the printer you want to use is connected to the FC1. 2 Press the ARCHIVE button.
The Archive screen appears. 3 Select the examination containing the images you want to print and tap Print.
The printer selection screen appears. 4 Select a printer and tap Print. A confirmation message appears. Tap OK.
The printing starts. To select and print images from examinations 1 Assign the printer you want to use to a Store button.
For the procedure for assignment to Store buttons, see "Configuring Store buttons" on page 29. 2 Press the ARCHIVE button.
The Archive screen appears. 3 Select an examination containing images you want to print and tap Open. 4 Press switch menu button 3 (the rocker button under Page) to browse the page until the image you want to
print is displayed. 5 Press the Store button to which the printer has been assigned in step 1.
FC1 User Guide
Working with archived examinations and their images 193
The printer icon appears on the top left corner of the screen and the image is scheduled for printing.
Note
If the Store button to which the printer has been assigned is pressed again, the printer icon disappears, and the print job is cleared.
6 Repeat the steps 4 and 5 to schedule for printing all images you want to print. 7 Press the ARCHIVE button. A confirmation message appears. 8 Tap OK.
The printing of all images scheduled for printing starts.
Moving archived examinations over a network
To move an archived examination over a network 1 Select one or more exams for transfer over the network, as described in "Selecting archived examinations"
on page 188. 2 Tap Store.
The Archive Store screen appears. If you have not selected an examination, Store is unavailable. 3 To re-sort the list of destinations based on any of the column headings in the list: a Tap the header on which you want to sort the list. b To reverse the sort order for that header, tap it again.
Caution
If the IP address or port number is not specified, N/A appears in the appropriate column. For information on setting the transfer destinations to be displayed in this list, contact your local dealer.
4 To view the next page of destinations, press menu switch button 3 (the rocker button under Page). 5 Tap the desired destination in the destination list.
You can select only one destination. 6 To remove the selection, tap the destination again.
194 Working with archived examinations and their images
Chapter 4
7 To transfer the examination(s) to the selected destination, tap Send. If no destination is selected, Send is unavailable.
8 When you are prompted to confirm the transfer, tap OK. Or, to cancel the transfer, tap Cancel.
9 To return to the Archive screen, tap Back.
Importing archived examinations
To import an examination
1 Press the ARCHIVE button (
).
2 Tap Import.
After the system creates the import list, the Exam Import screen appears.
3 Tap the examination or examinations that you want to import, and then tap Import.
4 When you are prompted to confirm that you want to complete the import, tap OK.
Or, to cancel the import, tap Cancel.
5 If you see a message that some images were not imported because they already reside in internal memory, tap OK.
The touch panel returns to the Archive screen.
Storing examination images
When you store an image from the current examination, whether a still image or a cine loop, you are saving it
to a file, which you access through the CURRENT VIEW button (
).
If there are no stored images from the current examination, then when you press CURRENT VIEW button, a message appears, telling you that there is no current view.
The following occurs by default:
The Store 1 button (
) stores still images.
FC1 User Guide
Storing examination images 195
The Store 2 button (
) stores cine loops.
To store an examination image
To store a still image, press the Store 1 button.
Or, to store a cine loop, press the Store 2 button.
Reviewing examination images
You can review images that have been stored during the current examination.
To review examination images
1 Press the CURRENT VIEW button (
).
If there are no stored images, then when you press CURRENT VIEW button, a message appears, telling you that there is no current view.
Images stored during an examination are displayed in the 1 x 1 (a single image on the screen) or 2 x 2 (four images on the screen) image display format. In the 2 x 2 format, the order of images from newest to oldest is left-to-right, top-to-bottom.
The 1 x 1 image display format displays the last image stored during the examination.
2 To switch the image display format between 1 x 1 and 2 x 2, press switch menu button 4 (the rocker button under View).
3 To change the sort order of stored images:
Press switch menu button 2 (the rocker button under Sort), which cycles through the following sort orders:
Stored date time in descending order and then ascending order
Image format in descending order and then ascending order
Image format in ascending order is as follows (descending is the reverse):
Still images
Clips
196 Storing examination images
Chapter 4
Raw images
Within each type of images, the images are sorted with the newest image at the top.
The current display order shows below Sort.
4 To select an image, tap the image on the touch panel.
The frame of the selected image turns green.
5 To finish reviewing examination images, press the CURRENT VIEW button again.
A live image shows on the main monitor, and the screen mode menu appears on the touch panel.
The following table describes other controls on the touch panel that are available when you are viewing stored images.
Table 4-32: Stored image controls
Control
First/Last Sort Page Raw Data Process
Description
To toggle between first and the last stored image, press switch menu button 1 (the rocker button under First/Last).
To change the sort order of examination images, press switch menu button 2 (the rocker button under Sort).
To show the next page of images, press switch menu button 3 (the rocker button under Page).
To display the information recorded when storing the raw-data image, tap Raw Data Process. Raw Data Process is available only when the image display format is 1 x 1.
Deleting images
You can delete images that are stored in the FC1.
Caution
You cannot restore deleted images.
To delete an image 1 Select one or more images, as described in "Reviewing examination images" on page 196.
FC1 User Guide
Storing examination images 197
2 Tap Delete. A trash-can icon appears on the image(s), marking them for deletion.
Note
The deletion marks remain even when you change pages.
In the 1 x 1 image display format, the displayed image is deleted.
In the 2 x 2 image display format, the selected image (the one with a green frame) is deleted.
3 To remove the deletion mark from an image, tap Delete again.
4 To delete the marked images, press the one of the following buttons, all of which exit the review of current images:
CURRENT VIEW (
)
2D (
)
PATIENT (
)
5 When you are prompted to confirm deletion of the images that you have marked for deletion, tap OK to confirm that the images should be deleted.
Or, to cancel the deletion and remove the deletion mark (the trash can) from the image, tap Cancel.
What you see on the screen after deleting the image depends on which button you pressed to exit.
If you cancel the deletion, the system still leaves the current image review, but without deleting the image.
Printing exam images
All the images of the selected examination can be printed.
Access any examination images for printing through the Archive screen, even those you have stored from the current examination. Therefore, for the procedure for printing images, see "Changing printers" on page 202.
198 Storing examination images
Chapter 4
Managing the output queue of examinations and images
You can view and manage examinations and images that you want to print or move over the network. You can also see the status of and information for the examinations and images.
Each image or examination is output to the printer or storage device that you set as the destination for printing or storage. For information on setting printers and storage devices, see "Changing the transfer destination" on page 200 or "Changing printers" on page 202.
To view and manage images and examinations for printing or moving over the network
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ).
The User Setting screen appears. 2 On page 1/4, tap Output Manage. The Output Management screen appears
Caution
To move examinations over the network, there must be at least one destination (DICOM server) in the Destination field. To print images, there must be at least one printer in the Destination field. Servers and printers are represented in the field by the following: Destination storage: S (storage device) Printer: P
3 Use the following controls to manage the queue:
Control
First/Last L/R Scroll Page Select All
Description
To move to the first or last page of the output queue, press switch menu button 1(the rocker button below First/Last).
To scroll the list horizontally, press switch menu button 2 (the rocker button below L/R Scroll).
To move to the next or previous page, press switch menu button 3 (the rocker button below Page).
To select all the examinations in the list, tap Select All.
FC1 User Guide
Managing the output queue of examinations and images 199
Control Description
Close
Closes the Output Management screen.
4 To sort based on one of the fields in the image list box, tap the field header.
Caution
The statuses are Stand by, Suspend (waiting for the end of an examination before starting the examination transfer), Wait, Output, and Error.
5 To invert the sort order for a field header, tap the header again. 6 To delete the image or examination, tap Delete. 7 To start moving examinations over the network or printing the images in the output queue, tap Start.
Examinations are moved and images are printed in the chronological order in which they were added to the list, regardless of the sorting order based on Patient ID or Patient Name. When a transfer or print request is complete, the examination or image is deleted from the output queue.
Note
While you are moving data over the network or while printing, Destination and Delete are unavailable.
If an error has occurred during the transfer or printing of an examination or image, only the transfer or printing of the examination or image is stopped. The transfer or printing of other examinations and images continue.
8 To stop a transfer or print job, tap Start again.
Changing the transfer destination
To change the destination storage device
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ).
The User Setting screen appears. 2 On page 1/4, tap Output Manage. The Output Management screen appears.
3 Check that Start is disabled (gray and unavailable), and then tap one or more examinations for which you want to change the storage destination.
(That is, tap one or more records whose destination has an S prefix in the Destination field.)
200 Managing the output queue of examinations and images
Chapter 4
4 Tap Destination at the upper right of the touch panel.
Note
If multiple records are selected and if they have different destination printers, Destination is unavailable.
The DICOM Destination screen appears.
The following table describes controls in the DICOM Destination screen, in addition to those otherwise described in this procedure.
Area or control
Destination list
Page
Description
Contains the transfer destination of the examination from this list. The list can hold a maximum of 10 destinations. To show the next page of images, press switch menu button 3 (the rocker button under Page).
5 To re-sort the list of destinations based on any of the column headings in the list: a Tap the header on which you want to sort the list. b To reverse the sort order for that header, tap it again.
Caution
If the IP address or port number is not specified, N/A appears in the appropriate column. For information setting the transfer destinations to be displayed in this list, contact your local dealer.
6 In the list of destinations, tap the desired transfer destination.
7 Tap Send.
Any examinations that are selected on the Queue Administration screen are moved to the selected destination.
Or, to close the DICOM Destination screen without saving changes and returning to the Queue Administration screen, tap Back.
When the transfer is complete, the DICOM Destination screen is closed, and the touch panel returns to the Queue Administration screen.
FC1 User Guide
Managing the output queue of examinations and images 201
Changing printers
To change the printer
1 Press the SYSTEM button ( ).
The User Setting screen appears. 2 On page 1/4, tap Output Manage. The Output Management screen appears.
3 Tap one or more images for which you want to change the printer.
That is, tap one or more records whose destination has a P prefix in the Destination field. 4 Tap Destination at the upper right of the touch panel.
Note
If multiple records are selected and if they have different destination printers, Destination is unavailable.
5 In the Printer Destination screen, tap the desired printer. 6 Tap Print.
Or, to close the screen without making any changes effective, tap Back.
Deleting an examination or image from the queue
If you delete an examination or image from the queue, the examination or image remains in the rest of the system. To delete an examination or image from the queue 1 In the queue, tap one or more examinations or images that you want to delete. 2 Tap Delete. 3 When prompted to confirm the deletion, tap OK.
Or, to cancel the deletion, tap Cancel.
202 Managing the output queue of examinations and images
Chapter 4
Exporting examination data
You can export examination image data (still images, clips, and raw-data images) from the FC1 system's internal storage media to external media (USB memory).
Caution
When exporting examination data, consider how much you are exporting. A large amount of examination data may take an extremely long time.
If it is necessary to store the images for a long period, export examination data periodically.
AVI files exported to the USB memory cannot be imported to the FC1.
To export examination data
1 Select an archived examination, as described in "Selecting archived examinations" on page 188.
2 Tap Export.
The Exam Export screen appears, with the existing export queue listed.
In addition to the controls described in this procedure, the Exam Export screen has the following controls Table 4-33: Export exam controls
Control
Select All Page First/Last L/R Scroll
Description
To select all the examinations in the list or (if all the examinations are selected) to cancel all selections in the list, tap Select All.
To move to the next or previous page, press switch menu button 3 (the rocker button below Page).
To move to the first or last page of the output queue, press switch menu button 1 (the rocker button below First/Last).
To scroll the list horizontally, press switch menu button 2 (the rocker button below L/ R Scroll).
The Exam Export screen also displays, beside USB memory, the total memory and available memory (in megabytes) in the external USB memory connected to the FC1. 3 To re-sort the list of examinations based on any of the column headings in the list: a Tap the header according to which you want to sort the list. b To reverse the sort order for that header, tap it again.
FC1 User Guide
Exporting examination data 203
4 To select one or more examinations for exporting to external USB memory, tap the examinations.
Or, to remove the selection from an examination that you have selected, tap the examination again.
5 To modify export settings:
a Tap Export Setting.
The Export Config screen appears.
b To select the file format of still images:
i Tap the right-arrow virtual button ( ) to the right of Still Image File Format. ii In the Still Image File Format selection screen, tap the desired file format: DICOM, TIFF, or JPEG. iii The screen returns to the Export Config screen. iv If you have selected JPEG, then to the right of JPEG Compression Quality, tap the right- or left-arrow
virtual button ( or ) to set the compression rate of JPEG images (80% to 100%). When you specify the TIFF or JPEG file format, the system also stores images in the DICOM format. c To specify the compression level for DICOM still images and for DICOM videos (DICOM clip images):
i Tap the button to the right of DICOM Still Image Syntax. ii On the DICOM Still Image Syntax selection screen, tap Implicit VR Little Endian, Explicit VR Little Endian, or
JPEG Lossy. d To specify the compression level for DICOM videos (DICOM clip images):
i Tap the button to the right of DICOM Clip Image Syntax. ii On the DICOM Clip Image Syntax selection screen, tap Implicit VR Little Endian, Explicit VR Little Endian, or
JPEG Lossy.
Note
You can also use the SYSTEM button ( ) to access export settings for specifying them. For more information, see "Configuring archiving (image export)" on page 32.
6 To export the archived examination, tap Export.
If there is no examination selected or if the external USB memory is not connected to the system, Export is unavailable.
If the examination that you are exporting is not in the DICOM format, a message tells you that the examination data can be exported but it cannot be imported.
204 Exporting examination data
Chapter 4
a Tap OK to continue the export or Cancel to cancel the export. If the examination that you are exporting already exists in the export destination, you are prompted to confirm that you want to overwrite the examination at the destination.
b Tap OK to continue the export or Cancel to cancel the export. If the free space on the selected external USB memory is insufficient, a warning message appears.
c Tap OK to return to the Exam Export screen. d Delete data in the external USB memory to increase the free space. e Resume this procedure. 7 When you are prompted to confirm the export, tap OK. Or, to cancel the export, tap Cancel. The screen displaying the progress of the exporting process appears. When the exporting process is complete, the screen is closed. Disconnecting the external USB memory from the FC1 while the export process is in progress cancels the export. A message appears, telling you that the export process has been canceled. 8 To return to the Archive screen, tap Back.
Importing examination data
You can import examination image data (still images, clips, and raw data images) from external media (USB memory) to the internal storage media of the FC1.
Note the following requirements for importing examinations: The image data must be from examinations performed with the FC1. The examinations must be in the DICOM format.
Caution
When importing examination data, consider how much you are importing. A large amount of examination data may take an extremely long time.
Details on the menu displayed on the touch panel for importing examination data are described below.
FC1 User Guide
Importing examination data 205
To import examination data 1 Connect the external memory media in which the examination data is stored to the system.
2 Press the ARCHIVE button (
).
3 Tap Import.
If no external USB memory is connected to the FC1, Import is unavailable:
After the system creates the import list, the Exam Import screen appears, listing the examinations that reside on the external memory.
In addition to the controls mentioned in this procedure, the Exam Import screen contains the following items Table 4-34: Exam import controls
Item
Select All
Page First/Last
L/R Scroll
Description
Selects all the examinations in the list or, if all the examinations are selected, cancels all selections in the list.
The switch menu button below Page opens the next or previous page.
The switch menu button below First/Last shows the first or last page of the output queue.
The switch menu button below L/R Scroll scrolls the list horizontally.
4 To select the external media, if you have more than one connected to the system: a Tap Source Drive. b On the selection screen that appears, tap the external USB memory from which you want to import examinations.
5 To re-sort the list of examinations based on any of the column headings in the list: a Tap the header on which you want to sort the list. b To reverse the sort order for that header, tap it again.
WARNING
If the date and time that the examination was completed cannot be obtained from the examination data in the external media (USB memory), the Study Last Date Time field is left blank.
206 Importing examination data
Chapter 4
6 To select one or more examinations for importing, tap the examination. Or, to remove the selection from an examination that you have selected, tap the examination again.
7 If you want to delete the examination or examinations that you have selected, tap Delete. Otherwise, skip this step.
8 To import the selected examination, tap Import. Troubleshooting: If there is no examination selected, Import is unavailable. If the examination selected for import is not in the DICOM format or was not performed with the FC1, a message tells you that the examination cannot be imported. Tap OK, and then select another examination on the Exam Import screen. If the free space on the internal storage device of the FC1 is insufficient, a message tells you so. Tap OK to return to the Exam Import screen. Delete data in the FC1 to increase the free space on the internal storage device. If the examination that you want to import already resides in the internal storage device of the FC1, you are prompted to confirm that you want to overwrite the copy in internal storage. Tap OK to overwrite the copy stored in internal storage with the copy that you are importing. Or, to cancel importing the examination, tap Cancel.
9 When you are prompted to confirm the import, tap OK. Or, to cancel the import, tap Cancel.
10 To return to the Archive screen, tap Back. If the external media (USB memory) is disconnected from the FC1while the import process is in progress, a message advises you of what has happened, and the import process is canceled.
FC1 User Guide
Importing examination data 207
Using a USB keyboard
To use the USB keyboard
Caution
When the virtual keyboard is displayed, do not connect the USB keyboard to the FC1.
Table 4-35: USB keyboard mapping
Key F1
Prt Scr PgDn
PgUp
Insert Del
Num Lock Pause Esc
F10 F2 F3 F4 Space
F5
Name
Function
NEW PATIENT
Displays the "Patient Info screen". To return to the examination screen, press this key again.
Current Exam
Exam images of the current examination can be displayed.
Pg Back
When this key is pressed while reviewing exam images, the previous image is displayed. When the first image is displayed, this key does not work.
Pg Fwd
When this key is pressed while reviewing exam images, the next image is displayed. When the last image is displayed, this key does not work.
First/Last
Displays the first and last images of the current examination alternately.
Delete
The function of this key is the same as that of the Delete button on the control panel.
Format
When this button is pressed while reviewing exam images, the display format is switched.
Archive
Exam images of archived examinations can be displayed.
End Exam
When this button is pressed during an examination, the examination ends.
DICOM Queue
Displays the "Queue Administration screen".
Del Word
Deletes the word on the left side of the text cursor.
Del Text
Deletes the character on the left side of the text cursor.
Set Home
Specifies the home position of the text cursor.
SPACE
While entering text, a space is entered. In other cases, an arrow mark or annotation can be entered.
Long/Trans/Sag/ Inputs "Long", "Trans", "Sag," and "Cor" in order. Cor (for POT input)
208 Using a USB keyboard
Chapter 4
Table 4-35: USB keyboard mapping
Key
Name
F6
Rt/Lt (for POT
input)
F7
Prox/Mid/Dst (for
POT input)
F8
List 1
F9
List 2
Tab
Tab
Shift
Shift
F11
Body Mark
F12
Annotation
Scroll Lock
Needle Guideline
Fn
Function
Windows Full width/half
logo
width
Function Inputs "Rt" and "Lt" alternately.
Inputs "Prx", "Mid," and "Dst" in order.
Inputs the items registered in List 1 in order. Inputs the items registered in List 2 in order. Proceeds to the next input item. When a character key is pressed while pressing this key, another character assigned to the character key is entered. When this key is pressed while pressing the Fn key (25), the body marks for the current examination are displayed. When this key is pressed while pressing the Fn key (25), an arrow mark or annotation can be entered. When this key is pressed while pressing the Fn key (25), the needle guideline can be displayed. Regular function key For the Japanese keyboard: toggle between full width and half width
Ending an examination
To end an examination 1 Press the F-key to which you have assigned End Exam or Worklist.
Or, press the PATIENT button ( ).
2 When you are prompted to confirm that you want to end the examination that is in progress, tap New.
Caution
In case you do not want to edit the patient information nor start a new examination, you can tap Modify and press the PATIENT button to cancel the operation.
FC1 User Guide
Ending an examination 209
210 Ending an examination
Chapter 4
CHAPTER 5
Chapter 5: Measurements and Calculations
Measurement overview
Before you can perform measurements, you must freeze the image.
There are two types of measurements:
Basic
Specific to a preset
You can check the results of application-specific measurements on the Report screen, and edit the measurement values on the worksheet.
Note the following:
The numerical data of application-specific measurements can be stored/exported/ imported in image format.
Imported data can be viewed on the FC1.
Measurement results can be displayed/edited with the Report function of the FC1.
To store measurement results in the displayed format, capture the Report screen (in the JPEG/DICOM format) by pressing the STORE button.
To view the numerical data of application-specific measurements with the Report function, use the Restart function or select an examination on the "Archive screen." Assign the Report function to a function button before using the Report function.
Some of the measurement procedures described below are available only for applicationspecific (or preset-specific) measurements. These are accessible if you are working in the
relevant preset, through the CALCS button ( measurements, see the following sections:
"Basic measurement" on page 238
). For more information on particular
Measurement overview 211
"Cardiac measurement" on page 279 "Vascular measurement" on page 373 "Auto IMT (intima-media thickness) measurement (Optional)" on page 403 "Abdominal Measurement" on page 416 "Urological Measurement" on page 442
WARNING
When making measurements, display an appropriate image and use the appropriate measurement function. With regard to the measurement methods and measurement results, exercise proper clinical judgment.
At the time of diagnosis, evaluate the previous examination results described in medical records in addition to the measurement and calculation results for comprehensive judgment.
Caution
You cannot save only the measurement result. To save the measurement result, you must save in addition at least one image used for the measurement.
User interface for measurement
Control panel elements
When working with measurements, use the following buttons on the control panel. Table 5-1: Control panel buttons
Button name D, C, M, and 2D
Image
Function Switch between imaging modes.
MEASURE
Performs basic measurements.
CALCS Trackball
Performs measurements that are specific to a preset. The preset that you choose determines the functionality.
Moves the measurement caliper.
212 Measurement overview
Chapter 5
Table 5-1: Control panel buttons
Button name
SET
Image
Function Fixes the position of the measurement caliper.
Multi dial
Rotates the measurement caliper.
FUNCTION
Function: Changes the function of the trackball.
DELETE
Deletes a measurement result. Holding DELETE down deletes all measurement results.
Touch panel screen elements
The touch panel elements that are common to all the modes have the following uses: The 2D (B), C, M, and D tabs
Switch among modes for the image to be measured Report
Displays reports for measurements that are specific to a preset Next
Application-specific; takes you to the next measurement, depending on the setting Measure tool
Change measurement tools Set Default
Sets the selected Measure tool as the tool that is by default selected when you press the MEASURE button
(
)
Beat Specifies the heart rate for measurement
FC1 User Guide
Measurement overview 213
Result Display Displays or hides measurement results
Result Position Changes the display position of measurement results
Trace Level Adjusts the trace level during the automatic Doppler measurement
Trace Type Switches the trace type during the automatic Doppler measurement
Built-in measurement functions
Measurement operation overview
You can perform various types of measurements with the following operations:
Table 5-2: Measurement operations
Operation Type
Point
Single point
Multiple points
Trace
Free
Figure
Circle
Ellipse
Area length
Disk
Line
Multiple
Auto Trace Range specification
Description Measurement at a single point Measurement at multiple points Measurement with tracing Approximation with a circle or sphere Approximation with an ellipse or spheroid Area-Length method Disk method Measurement with crossed line segments Automatic tracing of Doppler waveform within a specified range
Starting a measurement
The way that you start a measurement depends on what you want to do and the mode that you are working in. The mode screens contain the following measurement items:
214 Built-in measurement functions
Chapter 5
2D (B): Distance, Area, Trace, %Steno Dist, %Steno Area, Volume, Ratio Dist, Ratio Area, Angle
C: Point Vel, Area Vel (both are unavailable when you press the MEASURE button [
])
D: Velocity, Trace, PI, Time, Accel, Decel, RI, Vol Flow (MnV), Velocity Trace, Vessel Diam, HR
M: Distance, Time, Slope, HR
To start a measurement
1 Press one of the following buttons:
To perform basic measurements, press the MEASURE button.
To perform preset-specific measurements, press the CALCS button ( ).
Depending on the preset, you may be able to press the FREEZE button ( ). 2 Tap one of the measurement buttons on the touch panel:
The measurement buttons that appear depend on the mode that you are working in. Or, if you pressed the CALCS button and the default measurement item has not been assigned, change the preset to perform an application-specific measurement.
Continuous measurement
In continuous measurement, fixing one caliper in place simultaneously creates the next caliper. To initiate the next measurement by completing the current measurement
Press the SET button (
).
Caution
You must configure the SET button to display the next caliper. For information on setting this configuration, see "Configuring measurements for all modes" on page 56.
Depending on the measurement item, you may not be able to perform continuous measurement.
FC1 User Guide
Built-in measurement functions 215
Switching modes
In the CD, M, PW or triplex mode, you can use the prepared measurement functions for the displayed image. To change the mode Tap the appropriate tab on the touch panel.
Measuring at points
Measuring at a single point
Single-point measurement measures the value at the position of the caliper. It can evaluate the following: Table 5-3: Image modes and measurements
Image mode
Measurement
2D (B)
---
CF
Flow velocity
M
---
Doppler waveform Flow velocity, time
To measure at a single point
1 To display the start-point caliper, press either the MEASURE(
) or CALCS( ), button,
depending on the context for the measurement (such as whether it is specific to a preset, in which case you
press the CALCS button).
2 Use the trackball to adjust the start point.
3 Press the SET button (
) to fix the start point.
Depending on the setting, you can perform this measurement continuously.
If you are measuring continuously, every time you fix a point, the next-point caliper is superimposed directly on the previous caliper. To set the next point, repeat steps 2 and 3.
216 Built-in measurement functions
Chapter 5
Measuring at multiple points
In multiple-point measurement, you specify multiple calipers, and can evaluate the following values: Table 5-4: Measurements at multiple points
Image mode
Measurement
2D (B)
Length, Angle
CF
---
M
Length, Velocity, Time, HR
Doppler waveform Velocity difference, Time, HR, RI, PG, etc.
For an example, the following procedure is for a basic measurement, in 2D mode, measuring distance. To measure at two points (distance)
1 Press the MEASURE(
) or CALCS( ) button, depending on the context for the measurement
(such as whether it is specific to a preset, in which case you press the CALCS button).
2 To display the start-point caliper, in the mode screen, tap the button (in this case, Distance) for the measurement that you want to take.
3 Use the trackball to adjust the start point.
4 Press the SET button (
) to fix the start point.
The end-point caliper is superimposed directly on the start point.
5 Use the trackball to adjust the end point, and then press the SET button to fix the start point.
Depending on the setting, you can perform this measurement continuously.
Multiple points (distance)
The number of points that you set varies, depending on what you are measuring.
The following procedure is illustrated for 2D mode.
FC1 User Guide
Built-in measurement functions 217
To measure at two points (distance)
1 Press the MEASURE(
) or CALCS( ) button, depending on the context for the measurement
(such as whether it is specific to a preset, in which case you press the CALCS button).
2 To display the start-point caliper, in the mode screen, tap the button (in this case, Distance) for the measurement that you want to take.
3 Use the trackball to adjust the placement of the start point, and then press the SET button (
) to
fix the start point.
The second point is superimposed on the start point.
4 Use the trackball to adjust the second point, and then press the SET button to fix the second point.
The end point is superimposed on the second point.
5 Use the trackball to adjust the end point, and then press the SET button to fix the end point.
Three points (angle)
The following procedure is illustrated for 2D mode.
To measure at three points that form an angle
1 Press the MEASURE(
) or CALCS( ) button, depending on the context for the measurement
(such as whether it is specific to a preset, in which case you press the CALCS button).
2 To display the start-point caliper, in the mode screen, tap the button for the measurement you want to take (in this case, Angle, using the 3 Point Measure tool).
3 Use the trackball to adjust the placement of the start point, and then press the SET button (
) to
fix the start point.
The second point is superimposed on the start point.
4 Use the trackball to adjust the second point, and then press the SET button to fix the second point.
218 Built-in measurement functions
Chapter 5
Figure 5-1: The screen after you set two points The third point is superimposed on the second point.
5 Use the trackball to adjust the third point, and then press the SET button to fix the third point.
Figure 5-2: The screen after you set all three points
Single point (M distance)
The following example is for measuring distance in M mode. To measure in M mode
1 Press the MEASURE(
) or CALCS( ) button, depending on the context for the measurement
(such as whether it is specific to a preset, in which case you press the CALCS button).
2 To display a vertical line and the start-point caliper, in the mode screen, tap the button for the measurement that you want to take (in this case, Distance).
3 Use the trackball to adjust the placement of the start point, and then press the SET button (
) to
fix the start point.
The end point is superimposed directly on the start point.
FC1 User Guide
Built-in measurement functions 219
4 Use the trackball to adjust the end point, and then press the SET button to fix the end point. Note that you are setting two points on the same line.
Multiple points (M distance)
The following example is of cardiac measurement in M mode for LV diastole. To measure at a single point
1 Press the MEASURE(
) CALCS( ) button.
2 To display a vertical line and the start-point caliper, in the mode screen, tap the measurement button of interest.
3 Use the trackball to adjust the placement of the start point, and then press the SET button (
) to
fix the start point.
The second point is superimposed directly on the start point.
4 Use the trackball to adjust the second point, and then press the SET button to fix the second point.
The last point is superimposed directly on the second point.
5 Use the trackball to adjust the third point, and then press the SET button to fix the third point.
Figure 5-3: The screen after you set all three points
Two points (RI)
The following example is for measuring distance for two points in D mode for RI.
220 Built-in measurement functions
Chapter 5
To measure two points in D mode for RI
1 Press the MEASURE(
) or CALCS( ) button, depending on the context for the measurement
(such as whether it is specific to a preset, in which case you press the CALCS button).
2 To display a vertical line and the start-point caliper, in the mode screen, tap the button for the measurement that you want to take (in this case, RI).
3 Use the trackball to adjust the placement of the start point, and then press the SET button (
) to
fix the start point.
The end point is superimposed directly on the start point.
4 Use the trackball to adjust the end point, and then press the SET button to fix the end point.
Figure 5-4: The screen after you set both points
Two points (S/D)
The following example is for measuring distance for two points in D mode for Velocity. To measure two points in D mode for Velocity
1 Press the MEASURE(
) or CALCS( ) button, depending on the context for the measurement
(such as whether it is specific to a preset, in which case you press the CALCS button).
2 To display a horizontal line and the start-point caliper, in the mode screen, tap the button for the measurement that you want to take (in this case, Velocity).
3 Use the trackball to adjust the placement of the start point, and then press the SET button (
) to
fix the start point.
The end point and its horizontal line are superimposed directly on the start point and line.
FC1 User Guide
Built-in measurement functions 221
4 Use the trackball to adjust the end point, and then press the SET button to fix the end point.
Two points (velocity)
The following example is for measuring distance for two points in D mode for Velocity. To measure two points in D mode for Velocity
1 Press the MEASURE(
) or CALCS( ) button, depending on the context for the measurement
(such as whether it is specific to a preset, in which case you press the CALCS button).
2 To display crossed lines (the start point caliper), in the mode screen, tap the button for the measurement that you want to take.
3 Use the trackball to adjust the placement of the start point (the intersection of the crossed lines), and then
press the SET button (
) to fix the start point.
The next set of crossed lines is superimposed directly on the first set.
4 Use the trackball to adjust the second set of crossed lines, and then press the SET button to fix them.
Figure 5-5: The end state of the measurement
Two points (HR)
The following example is for measuring distance for two points in D mode for HR. To measure two points in D mode for HR
1 Press the MEASURE button (
).
The examination screen displays a vertical line and the start-point caliper.
222 Built-in measurement functions
Chapter 5
2 Use the trackball to adjust the placement of the start point, and then press the SET button (
) to
fix the start point.
The second point is superimposed directly on the start point.
3 Use the trackball to adjust the second point and its vertical line, and then press the SET button to fix them.
Trace
Measure a trace by drawing a tracing line from the start point to the end point.
Trace measurements can evaluate the following values:
Table 5-5: Trace measurement values
Image mode
Measurement
2D (B)
Length, area
CF
---
M
---
Doppler waveform PI, VTI, average flow velocity, etc.
There are three kinds of traces: Free trace Trace area Free trace (velocity)
Free trace
The following example is for measuring distance on a free trace in 2D mode. To measure a free trace in 2D mode
1 Press either the MEASURE(
) or CALCS( ) button, depending on the context for the
measurement (such as whether it is specific to a preset, in which case you press the CALCS button).
2 In the mode screen, to display the start-point caliper, tap the button for the measurement you want to make (in this case, Trace).
FC1 User Guide
Built-in measurement functions 223
3 Use the trackball to adjust the placement of the start point, and then press the SET button (
) to
fix the start point.
The end point of the trace is superimposed on the start point.
4 Use the trackball to trace a line, and then press the SET button to fix the end point.
Trace area
The following example is for measuring an area defined by a free trace in 2D (B) mode.
To measure a free trace in 2D (B) mode
1 Press either the MEASURE(
) or CALCS( ) button, depending on the context for the
measurement (such as whether it is specific to a preset, in which case you press the CALCS button).
2 In the mode screen, to display the start-point caliper, tap the button for the measurement you want to make (in this case, Area).
3 Press the switch menu button 2 (the rocker button beneath Measure tool) to select Free.
4 Use the trackball to adjust the placement of the start point, and then press the SET button (
) to
fix the start point.
5 Use the trackball to trace a line.
6 When the end point is where you want it, press the SET button to fix it.
If the start and end points are not at the same location, they are connected with a straight line. When the start and end points are close enough for the system to close it, the start caliper becomes smaller.
Figure 5-6: Completion of the traced area 224 Built-in measurement functions
Chapter 5
Free trace (velocity)
The following example is for measuring Velocity trace in D mode. To measure a free trace in D mode
1 Press either the MEASURE(
) or CALCS( ) button, depending on the context for the
measurement (such as whether it is specific to a preset, in which case you press the CALCS button).
2 In the mode screen, to display the start-point caliper, tap the button for the measurement you want to make (in this case, Velocity Trace).
3 Make sure that in the Measure tool, Free is selected (displayed).
If Free does not appear, press the switch menu button 2 (the rocker button beneath Measure tool).
4 Use the trackball to adjust the placement of the start point, and then press the SET button ( the start point.
5 Use the trackball to trace a line. 6 When the end point is where you want it, press the SET button to fix it.
A caliper appears on the highest and lowest flow velocity values within the traced range.
) to fix
Figure 5-7: The screen with calipers showing highest and lowest flow velocities 7 If necessary, use the trackball to adjust the caliper on the highest flow velocity value, and then fix it. 8 If necessary, repeat with the lowest flow velocity value.
Press the SET button to fix the end point.
FC1 User Guide
Built-in measurement functions 225
Figure 5-8: The screen with highest and lowest flow velocities adjusted
Figure
To carry out the measurement, you trace a line or connect the start point and the end point.
Figure measurements can evaluate the following values:
Table 5-6: Figure measurement values
Image mode
Measurement
2D (B)
Axial length, Area, Volume, Circumference
CF
Average flow velocity, Highest flow velocity
M
---
Doppler waveform ---
226 Built-in measurement functions
Chapter 5
The figures that you can create are as shown here:
Circle
Ellipse
Area-Length
Disk (Simpson)
Figure 5-9: Examples of figures to create
Circle
To create a circle
1 Press either the MEASURE(
) or CALCS( ) button, depending on the context for the
measurement (such as whether it is specific to a preset, in which case you press the CALCS button).
2 In the mode screen, to display the start-point caliper, tap the button for the measurement you want to make (in this case, Area).
3 Make sure that in the Measure tool, Ellipse is selected (displayed).
If Ellipse does not appear, press the switch menu button 2 (the rocker button beneath Measure tool).
4 Use the trackball to adjust the placement of the start point, and then press the SET button ( the start point.
The end point is superimposed on the start point.
) to fix
FC1 User Guide
Built-in measurement functions 227
5 Use the trackball to enlarge or reduce the circle, and to move it. Moving the end point away from the start point enlarges the circle. Moving the trackball also rotates the circle around the start point. The circle always touches the start point.
6 When the end point is where you want it, press the SET button to fix it.
Ellipse
Begin creating an ellipse by creating a circle.
To create an ellipse for measurement purposes
1 To start by creating a circle. Follow the procedure in "Circle" on page 227.
2 Use the trackball to stretch or squeeze the circle into an ellipse (that is, to elongate or reduce the diameter perpendicular to the one that you created in drawing the circle).
3 Press the SET button (
) to fix the ellipse.
Area-length
To measure the area enclosed by a trace
1 Press either the MEASURE(
) CALCS( ) button, depending on the context for the
measurement (such as whether it is specific to a preset).
2 In the mode screen, to display the start-point caliper, tap the button for the measurement that you want to make (in this case, area-length).
3 Use the trackball to adjust the placement of the start point, and then press the SET button (
) to
fix the start point.
The end point of the trace is superimposed on the start point.
4 Use the trackball to trace a line, and then press the SET button to fix the end point.
The start and end points are connected. The start-point caliper is at the midpoint, and the end point is on the traced line farthest from the midpoint.
228 Built-in measurement functions
Chapter 5
Figure 5-10: The completed traced area
5 If necessary, use the trackball to move the end point on the traced line, and then press the SET button to fix the end point.
Figure 5-11: End point with its position adjusted
Disk (Simpson)
To measure the area of a disk (Simpson)
1 Press either the MEASURE(
) or CALCS( ) button, depending on the context for the
measurement (such as whether it is specific to a preset, in which case you press the CALCS button).
2 In the mode screen, to display the start-point caliper, tap the button for the measurement you want to make (in this case, disk area).
3 Use the trackball to adjust the placement of the start point, and then press the SET button ( the start point.
The end point of the trace is superimposed on the start point.
) to fix
FC1 User Guide
Built-in measurement functions 229
4 Use the trackball to trace a line, and then press the SET button to fix the end point. The start and end points are connected. The start-point caliper is at the midpoint, and the end point is on the traced line farthest from the midpoint. The diameter in the perpendicular direction appears.
Figure 5-12: The completed traced area 5 If necessary, use the trackball to move the end point on the traced line, and then press the SET button to fix
the end point.
Figure 5-13: End point with its position adjusted
230 Built-in measurement functions
Chapter 5
Line
You can make this measurement only with the 2D-mode Angle measurement tool.
2 Line (Angle)
3 Line (Angle)
Figure 5-14: Example of line measurement
Two line (angle)
To measure two lines (angle)
1 Press either the MEASURE(
) or CALCS( ) button, depending on the context for the
measurement (such as whether it is specific to a preset, in which case you press the CALCS button).
2 In the mode screen, to display the start-point caliper, tap the button for the measurement that you want to make (in this case, Angle).
3 Make sure that in the Measure tool, 2 Line is selected (displayed).
If 2 Line does not appear, press the switch menu button 2 (the rocker button beneath Measure tool).
The first line is horizontal.
4 Use the trackball to move the first line, and the multi dial (
) to rotate it.
5 Press the SET button (
) to fix the first line.
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the second line.
Allowing for variations in execution, the two lines look something like the following.
FC1 User Guide
Built-in measurement functions 231
Figure 5-15: Two-line angle measurement
Three line (angle)
To measure three lines (angle)
1 Press either the MEASURE(
) or CALCS( ) button, depending on the context for the
measurement (such as whether it is specific to a preset, in which case you press the CALCS button).
2 In the mode screen, to display the start-point caliper, tap the button for the measurement that you want to make (in this case, Angle).
3 Make sure that in the Measure tool, 3 Line is selected (displayed).
If 3 Line does not appear, press the switch menu button 2 (the rocker button beneath Measure tool).
The first line is horizontal.
4 Use the trackball to move the first line, and the multi dial (
) to rotate it.
5 Press the SET button (
) to fix the first line.
6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 for the second line and third lines.
Allowing for variations in execution, the second line looks something like the alpha line in the following.
Allowing for variations in execution, the three lines look something like the following (the third line is the beta line).
232 Built-in measurement functions
Chapter 5
Figure 5-16: Three-line angle measurement
Auto Trace
Table 5-7: Auto Trace measurements
Image mode
Measurement
2D (B)
---
CF
---
M
---
Doppler waveform Velocity, PI
Caution
You can use Auto Trace in one heartbeat period. Do not use it in more than one heartbeat period.
Auto Trace (range specification)
To measure auto trace (range specification)
1 Press either the MEASURE(
) or CALCS( ) button, depending on the context for the
measurement (such as whether it is specific to a preset, in which case you press the CALCS button).
2 In the mode screen, to display the start-point caliper and vertical line, tap the button for the measurement that you want to make, and then use the trackball to adjust their position.
3 Press the SET button (
) to fix the first line.
FC1 User Guide
Built-in measurement functions 233
Figure 5-17: The first auto-trace line 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the end-point caliper and its vertical line.
Automatic tracing of the Doppler waveform is performed within the range specified by the two lines. A caliper appears on each of the maximum and minimum values.
Figure 5-18: Auto-trace with maximum and minimum values marked
Measurement using auxiliary lines
Table 5-8: Image mode measurement
Image mode
Measurement
2D (B)
IMT measurement
CF
---
M
---
Doppler waveform ---
234 Built-in measurement functions
Chapter 5
IMT measurement
To perform IMT measurement
1 Press the CALCS( ) button. (IMT measurements are specific to the Carotid preset.) 2 In the mode screen, to display the start point, tap the button for the measurement that you want to make,
and then use the trackball to adjust its position.
3 Use the multi dial (
) to rotate the start point.
4 Press the SET button (
) to fix the location of the start point.
5 Use the trackball to adjust the placement of the start point, and then press the SET button to fix the start point.
The end point is superimposed on the start point.
6 Use the trackball to adjust the placement of the end point, and then press the SET button to fix the end point.
The start point caliper for the second measurement position appears.
Figure 5-19: The start and end points of the first measurement position and the start point of the second 7 Use the trackball to adjust the start point and press the SET button.
The end point caliper for the second measurement position is superimposed on the start point. 8 Use the trackball to adjust the end point for the second measurement position and press the SET button.
The start-point caliper for the third measurement position appears.
FC1 User Guide
Built-in measurement functions 235
Figure 5-20: The start and end points of the first two measurement positions and the start point of the third The end-point caliper for the third measurement position is superimposed on the start point.
9 Use the trackball to adjust the end point for the third measurement position and press the SET button to fix it. The start-point caliper for measuring the vessel diameter appears.
Figure 5-21: The start-point caliper for measuring the vessel diameter 10 Use the trackball to adjust the start point and press the SET button to fix it. 11 The end-point caliper for measuring the vessel diameter is superimposed on the start point. 12 Use the trackball to adjust the end point and press the SET button to fix it.
Deleting measurement tools
You can delete measurement-tool instances on the examination image. To delete measurement tools one by one
1 Press either the MEASURE(
) or CALCS( ) button, depending on the context for the
measurement (such as whether it is specific to a preset, in which case you press the CALCS button).
236 Built-in measurement functions
Chapter 5
2 In the mode screen, select the measurement tool that you want to delete, and then press the DELETE button
(
).
To delete all measurement tools simultaneously
1 Press either the MEASURE or CALCS button.
2 With the mode screen showing in the touch panel, do one of the following:
Tap Delete All.
On the control panel, press and hold the DELETE button.
On the control panel, press the MEASURE button to end basic measurement.
Setting and using the Set and Next button
To change Set/Next In the Setup menu, select Set/Next for Continuous Measurement Setup.
For details on setting Set/Next for Continuous Measurement Setup, see "Configuring measurements for all modes" on page 56.
Next appears on the lower-left corner of the measurement screen.
To use the Set/Next button
1 When you press the SET button (
), measurement is not terminated. Rather, the start-point
caliper is activated, and you can change its position again.
2 When continuous measurement is available, you can start the next measurement by tapping Next. If there are no subsequent measurements, the measurement result is finalized.
Using the Set Default button
With Set Default, you specify the mode of the measure tool that is active when the user presses the MEASURE
button (
).
FC1 User Guide
Built-in measurement functions 237
Specifying settings
Various settings are available in both basic measurement and preset-specific measurement. Details on the settings for basic measurement are described in "Basic measurement" on page 238. In application-specific measurement, you can select one of the following for the timing for registering measurement data:
When the user taps Enter When one type of measurement is completed By factory default, measurement data is registered when the user taps Enter.
Basic measurement
Functional overview
2D mode
Table 5-9: 2D-mode measurements
Measurement item Measure tool Description
Remarks
Distance Area
Trace
--Ellipse Free Trace
---
Measures the distance between the specified two points
Measures the diameter, circumference, and area by circling the target part
Measures the length of the trace line (the travel distance of the caliper) and the area circled with the trace line
Measures the length of the trace line (the travel distance of the caliper)
238 Basic measurement
Chapter 5
Table 5-9: 2D-mode measurements
Measurement item Measure tool Description
Remarks
%Steno Dist
---
Calculates the stenosis ratio by measuring the original vessel lumen diameter and the residual lumen diameter at the stenosis site with two lines
First line measures the original vessel lumen diameter. Second line measures the residual lumen diameter at the stenosis site.
%Steno Area
2 Ellipse
Calculates the stenosis ratio by measuring the original vessel lumen area and the residual lumen area at the stenosis site with two ellipses
First ellipse measures the original vessel lumen area. Second ellipse measures the residual lumen area at the stenosis site.
Ellipse/Trace
Calculates the stenosis rate by measuring the original vessel lumen area with Ellipse and the residual lumen area with Free Trace
Ellipse measures the original vessel lumen area. Free Trace measures the residual lumen area at the stenosis site.
FC1 User Guide
Basic measurement 239
Table 5-9: 2D-mode measurements
Measurement item Measure tool Description
Volume
---
Calculates the volume of a spheroid by
measuring the diameter in three different
directions (long axis, short axis, and the
longest diameter of cross-section
perpendicular to the long axis) on two
orthogonal cross-sections
Remarks
The following do not cancel the measurement: The screen is
unfrozen.
The Dualscreen mode is activated.
The CF mode is turned on or off.
Ratio Dist Ratio Area
Angle
--2 Ellipse Ellipse/Trace
3 Line
2 Line 3 Point
The measurement value is held in memory until calculation becomes possible.
Calculates the ratio between two lines
Calculates the ratio between two areas measured with two ellipses
Calculates the ratio between the area measured with Ellipse and the one measured with Free Trace
Calculates the angle at the intersection of three lines by adjusting their position and angle
Calculates the angle at the intersection of two lines by adjusting their position and angle
Specifies the starting, middle, and ending points; connects the starting and middle points, and the middle and ending points, with a line; calculates the angle at the middle point
240 Basic measurement
Chapter 5
CF mode
Table 5-10: CF-mode measurements
Measurement item
Measure tool
Description
Remarks
Point Velocity --Area Velocity ---
Measures the flow velocity at the position specified by the caliper
Measures the flow velocity within the range specified by Ellipse
Available only when the image is frozen
Available only when the image is frozen
M mode
Table 5-11: M-mode measurements
Measurement item
Measure tool
Description
Remarks
Distance
---
Calculates the distance between two points by specifying two
calipers on the same time phase
Time
---
Measures the time between the specified two lines
HR
---
Measures the heart rate by specifying two lines and measuring
the time between them
Slope
---
Specifies two calipers; connects the specified two points and
measures the time, amplitude, and velocity based on the
gradient of the line
D mode
Table 5-12: D-mode measurements
Measurement item
Measure tool
Description
Velocity
---
Measures the blood velocity at the two points specified with
calipers and calculates the flow velocity difference and the
flow velocity ratio based on the measured values
Remarks
FC1 User Guide
Basic measurement 241
Table 5-12: D-mode measurements
Measurement item
Measure tool
Description
Remarks
Velocity Trace Free Auto
When a waveform is traced, displays a caliper on the maximum and minimum flow velocity points within the range and then measures each item
Specifies the range of automatic tracing with two lines
Time HR
Displays a caliper on the maximum and minimum flow velocity points within the two lines and then measures each item
---
Measures the time between the specified two lines
---
Specifies the heart rate and two lines
Acceleration ---
Deceleration ---
PI
Free
Auto
Measures the heart rate based on the number of heartbeats and the time between the two lines
Measures the acceleration between the two points specified with calipers
Measures the deceleration between the two points specified with calipers
When a waveform is traced, displays a caliper on the maximum and minimum flow velocity points within the range and then measures the pulsatility index
Specifies the range of automatic tracing with two lines
Displays a caliper on the maximum and minimum flow velocity points within the two lines and then measures the pulsatility index
RI
---
Measures the resistance index by specifying two points with
calipers
242 Basic measurement
Chapter 5
2D/D mode
Table 5-13: 2D/D-mode measurements
Measurement item
Volume Flow (MnV)
Measure tool
Description
Remarks
---
Measures the mean velocity on the D-mode image
Measures the cross-sectional area on the 2D-mode image
Calculates the flow volume, based on the measured values
Measurement results display
By default, the measurements that you obtain appear in the lower left of the examination screen (on the main monitor).
To show or hide the measurement results
1 If the measurement screen for the mode you are in is not already showing, on the control panel, press the
MEASURE button (
).
2 To toggle between showing and hiding measurement results, press the switch menu button 4 (the rocker button under Result Display).
To change the location of the measurement-results display
1 If the measurement screen for the mode you are in is not already showing, on the control panel, press the
MEASURE button (
).
2 To toggle between positions, press the switch menu button 5 (the rocker button under Result Position).
LV mass
When A epi, A endo, and LVL are measured, the following items display
Table 5-14: LV mass measurement items
LV mass t
Measurement item --.-- cm Mean LV myocardial thickness
FC1 User Guide
Basic measurement 243
Table 5-14: LV mass measurement items
LV mass LVM LVMI
Measurement item
g
LV mass
g/ml2 LV mass index
Cardiac measurement (D mode)
Pulmonary vein: When PVS, VTI, and PVD VTI are measured, the following item display
Table 5-15: Pulmonary vein measurement item
Pulmonary vein Pv SYS Frac --.-- %
Measurement item PV systolic filling fraction
Cardiac measurement (aortic regurgitation)
Aortic regurgitant volume: PISA method
When the AR trace has already been measured, the following items display: Table 5-16: AR volume measurement items
AR volume RV (PISA) ERO (PISA) FR (PISA)
Measurement item --.-- ml AR regurgitant volume flow
cm2 AR effective regurgitant orifice area ml/s AR regurgitant fraction
Abdominal measurement (2D mode)
Pancreas size measurement: example of main monitor display)
Table 5-17: Pancreas measurement items
Pancreas
Measurement item
head body tail
--.-- cm Pancreas head diameter cm Pancreas body diameter cm Pancreas tail diameter
244 Basic measurement
Chapter 5
Table 5-17: Pancreas measurement items
Pancreas P-duct
Measurement item cm Pancreas duct diameter
Renal measurement (example of main monitor display)
Table 5-18: Renal measurement item
Rt/ Renal-A
Measurement item
Dist
--.-- mm Renal artery diameter
Abdominal measurement (D mode)
Aorta measurement (example of main monitor display)
Table 5-19: Aorta measurement items
Aorta AP prox.
Measurement item
Peak V Max V Min V MnV PI RI S/D
--.-- cm/s Peak velocity
--.-- cm/s Maximum velocity
--.-- cm/s Minimum velocity
--.-- cm/s Mean velocity
--.--
Pulsatility index
--.--
Resistance index
S/D ratio
Renal artery measurement
Table 5-20: Renal artery measurement items
Rt. Renal Art.
Measurement item
Max V Min V MnV PI
--.-- cm/s Maximum velocity
--.-- cm/s Minimum velocity
--.-- cm/s Mean velocity
--.--
Pulsatility index
FC1 User Guide
Basic measurement 245
Table 5-20: Renal artery measurement items
Rt. Renal Art.
RI
--.--
S/D
Measurement item Resistance index S/D ratio
Abdominal measurement (2D mode)
Hip angle measurement (example of main monitor display)
Table 5-21: Hip angle measurement items
Hip angle right
--.-- °
°
Measurement item Bony roof angle (angle alpha) Cartilage roof angle (angle beta)
Urological measurement (2D mode)
Bladder volume measurement (example of main monitor display)
Table 5-22: Bladder volume measurement items
Void volume
Measurement item
Pre-Post.
--.-- ml Void volume
2D mode
With the factory settings of basic measurement for 2D mode, you can measure distance without tapping Distance on the touch panel.
Distance
To measure the distance between two points
1 On the control panel, press the MEASURE button (
).
2 If Distance is not already selected on the measurement selection screen of the touch panel, tap it.
Distance is the factory default selection for selecting measurements.
246 Basic measurement
Chapter 5
The start-point caliper appears on the screen. 3 Use the trackball to move the start-point caliper (the + mark), and then, to fix it, press the SET button
(
).
The end-point caliper appears, superimposed on the start-point caliper.
4 Use the trackball to move the end point, and then fix it by pressing the SET button.
The distance as measured between the two points appears in the lower left of the main monitor. The distance is measured from the first point to the second, so it is assigned to the first point.
To measure more than one straight-line distance at once, repeat steps 3 and 4.
5 Multiple measurements are listed each below the previous one.
The following illustration shows the examination image with three measurements. Note the display of the measurements in the lower left. Note also that the distance is reported for the starting point of each measurement. The distance is thus reported as the distance from the starting point.
Figure 5-22: Three straight line measurements
Trace
A trace measurement measures the length of the freehand line that you create with the trackball. To create a trace measurement
1 On the control panel, press the MEASURE button (
).
2 Tap Trace.
The start-point caliper (a + mark) appears on the screen.
FC1 User Guide
Basic measurement 247
3 Use the trackball to move the start point, and then, to fix it, press the SET button (
).
4 The end-point caliper appears, superimposed on the start-point caliper.
5 Use the trackball to move the end point.
A line tracing the movements of the trackball appears on the screen.
6 To fix the end point of the trace and the trace, press the SET button.
Figure 5-23: A trace measurement The trace line is also fixed, and the distance between the two points is evaluated. The distance following the trace is measured and appears in the lower left of the main monitor. The distance is measured from the first point to the second, so it is assigned to the first point.
Area
With the factory setting, Ellipse is the default Measure tool. To measure an area with Ellipse 1 Tap Area to display the start-point caliper (the + mark).
2 Use the trackball to move the start point, and then fix it by pressing the SET button (
).
3 The end-point caliper appears, superimposed on the start point.
4 Moving the end point with the trackball, adjust the diameter of the circle, and then fix it by pressing the SET button.
248 Basic measurement
Chapter 5
5 To make the circle an ellipse, do one of the following:
To narrow the circle's width, rotate the trackball upward.
To widen the width of the circle, rotate the trackball downward.
6 When the width of the circle or ellipse is fixed, the area of the circle is evaluated.
To measure an area with Trace
For the procedure, see "Trace" on page 223.
The measurement display looks like the following: Table 5-23: Trace measurement item
Area
Measurement item
Area(1) Circ(1)
__._ cm __._ cm
Measurement result Measurement result
Volume
The volume is calculated by measuring the diameter in three different directions on two orthogonal crosssections.
We recommend that you create two orthogonal cross-sections (long and short axes) on the Dual screen before measuring.
To calculate volume with two orthogonal cross-sections on two screens
1 Use the L/R buttons (
) for the Dual screen to display a long-axis cross-section on one screen and
a short-axis cross-section on the other screen.
2 Press the MEASURE button (
).
3 To display the start-point caliper, tap Volume.
4 To draw the first line (the X axis), use the trackball to move the start point, and then fix it by pressing the SET
button (
).
The end-point caliper appears, superimposed on the start point.
FC1 User Guide
Basic measurement 249
5 Move the end point with the trackball, and then fix it by pressing the SET button. 6 To draw the second line (the Y axis), repeat steps 4 through 5. 7 On the short-axis cross-section, measure the length of the first and second lines (the X and Y axes).
For the procedure to do so, see "Trace" on page 223. 8 On the long-axis cross-section, measure the length of the third line (the Z axis) in the same way. 9 When you have measured the length of the first, second, and third lines, the volume is evaluated.
Figure 5-24: Measurement of three axes To calculate volume with two orthogonal cross-sections on a single screen
1 Press the MEASURE button (
).
2 To display the start-point caliper, tap Volume.
3 On the short-axis cross-section, measure the length of the first and second lines (the X and Y axes).
For the procedure to do so, see "Distance" on page 246.
4 Unfreeze the image.
5 On the long-axis cross-section, measure the length of the third line (the Z axis) in the same way.
6 When you have measured the length of the first, second, and third lines, the volume is evaluated.
250 Basic measurement
Chapter 5
The measurement display looks like the following: Table 5-24: Volume measurement items
Volume x(1) y(1) z(1) vol(1)
Measurement item __._ cm Longest diameter of short-axis cross-section __._ cm Shortest diameter of short-axis cross-section __._ cm Longest diameter of long-axis cross-section __._ cm3 Volume
Ratio
You can calculate the ratio between two measured values (distance or area).
Ratio distance
To calculate the ratio between two distance values
1 Press the MEASURE button (
).
2 To display the start-point caliper, tap Ratio Dist.
3 To measure the distance between the first two points, use the procedure in "Distance" on page 246.
4 Measure the distance between the second two points in the same way.
5 When you have measured the distance between the first two points and that between the second two points, the ratio is evaluated.
Table 5-25: Ratio measurement items
Ratio dist A(1) B(1) A/B(1)
__._ cm __._ cm __._
Measurement item Distance between the first two points Distance between the second two points Ratio (Dist1)/(Dist2)
FC1 User Guide
Basic measurement 251
Ratio area
To calculate the ratio between two area values
1 Press the MEASURE button (
).
2 Tap Ratio Area to display the start-point caliper.
3 Press the switch menu button 2 (the rocker button under Measure tool) to switch to Ellipse/Trace.
With the factory setting, Ellipse/Trace is the default initial setting for the tool.
Figure 5-25: Example of two areas
Or, to measure the area ratio between two ellipses, press the switch menu button 2 to switch Measure tool to 2 Ellipses.
4 Measure the first area by following the procedure described in "Area-length" on page 228.
5 Measure the second area by following the procedure described in"Trace" on page 223.
Or, if you are measuring the areas of two ellipses, repeat step 4.
6 When you have measured the two areas, the ratio is evaluated.
The measurement display looks like the following: Table 5-26: Ratio area measurement items
Ratio Area A(1) B(1)
Measurement item __._ cm2 First area __._ cm2 Second area
252 Basic measurement
Chapter 5
Table 5-26: Ratio area measurement items
Ratio Area
A/B(1)
__._
Measurement item Ratio (Area1)/(Area2)
%Stenosis (Stenosis ratio)
The following two types of methods are available for evaluating the stenosis ratio: Calculation based on diameter: %Steno Dist Calculation based on cross-sectional area: %Steno Area
%Stenosis distance
To obtain the ratio between two stenosis distance measurements
1 Press the MEASURE button (
).
2 Tap %Steno Dist to display the start-point caliper for the original vessel lumen diameter.
3 Use the trackball to move the start point, and then fix it by pressing the SET button (
).
4 The end-point caliper appears, superimposed on the start point.
5 Use the trackball to move the end point, and then fix it by pressing the SET button.
The original vessel lumen diameter is measured.
6 Measure the residual lumen diameter at the stenosis site in the same way.
7 When you have measured both diameters, the stenosis ratio is evaluated.
The measurement display looks like the following:
Table 5-27: Stenosis distance measurement items
%Steno dist
V(1)
__._ cm
R(1)
__._ cm
Measurement item Original vessel lumen diameter Residual lumen diameter at stenosis site
FC1 User Guide
Basic measurement 253
Table 5-27: Stenosis distance measurement items
%Steno dist
Steno(1)
__._ %
Measurement item
Stenosis ratio (V - R)/V x 100
%Stenosis area
To obtain the ratio between two stenosis distance measurements
1 Press the MEASURE button (
).
2 Tap %Steno Area to display the start-point caliper.
With the factory setting, the Measurement tool is by default set to Ellipse/Trace
To evaluate the stenosis ratio between two ellipses, switch the measure tool to 2 Ellipses by pressing the switch menu button 2 (the rocker button under Measure tool).
3 Measure the original vessel lumen area by following the procedure described in "Trace area" on page 224.
4 Measure the residual lumen area at the stenosis site by following the procedure described in "Trace" on page 223.
5 When you have measured the original vessel lumen area and the residual lumen area, the stenosis ratio is evaluated.
Figure 5-26: Measuring the percent stenosis area 254 Basic measurement
Chapter 5
The measurement display looks like the following: Table 5-28: Stenosis area measurement items
%Steno dist
Measurement item
V(1) R(1) Steno(1)
__._ cm2 Original vessel lumen area
__._ cm2 Residual lumen area at stenosis site
__._ %
Stenosis ratio (V - R)/V x 100
Angle
The following three methods are available for angle measurement. Three line (3 Line) Use three lines to calculate two angles. You can use this method for measuring hip dislocation. Two line (2 Line) Use two lines to calculate two angles. Three point (3 Point) Specify three points to calculate an angle.
With the factory setting, 3 Line is the default method.
3 Line
To calculate two angles with three lines
1 Press the MEASURE button (
).
2 Tap Angle.
3 Make sure that under Measure tool, 3 Line shows.
If 3 Line is not on-screen, press the switch menu button 2 (the rocker button under Measure tool) until 3 Line appears.
Three lines appear.
FC1 User Guide
Basic measurement 255
4 Use the trackball to adjust the position of the first line.
5 Rotate the multi dial (
) to adjust the angle of the first line.
6 Press the SET button (
) to fix the first line.
7 Repeat steps 4 through 6 to adjust the second line and then the third line.
The angle between the first and second lines and the angle between the first and third lines are measured.
Figure 5-27: Three lines, defining two angles
Note
The normal values (=60°, =55°) are set as the initial angles for this measurement.
The measurement display looks like the following: Table 5-29: Table. 3-line angle measurement items
Angle
Measurement item
(1)
____ °
Angle between the first and second lines (Bony
roof angle)
(1)
____ °
Angle between the first and third lines (Cartilage
roof angle)
256 Basic measurement
Chapter 5
2 Line
To calculate two angles with two lines
1 Press the MEASURE button (
).
2 Tap Angle.
3 Three lines appear.
4 To switch the measure tool to 2 Line, press the switch menu button 2 (the rocker button under Measure tool).
5 Use the trackball to adjust the position of the first line.
6 Rotate the multi dial (
) to adjust the angle of the first line.
7 Press the SET button (
) to fix the first line.
8 Repeat Steps 5 through 7 to fix the second line.
9 The angle between the first and second lines is measured.
The measurement display looks like the following:
Table 5-30: 2-line angle measurement items
Angle
Measurement item
(1)
____ °
Angle between the first and second lines
(1)
____ °
180 -
3 Point
To calculate an angle with three points
1 Press the MEASURE button (
).
2 Tap Angle.
Three lines appear.
FC1 User Guide
Basic measurement 257
3 To switch the measure tool to 3 Point, press the switch menu button 2 (the rocker button under Measure tool).
4 Use the trackball to move the start-point caliper (the + mark), and then press the SET button (
)
to fix it.
The second point appears, superimposed on the start point.
5 Use the trackball to move the second point, and then fix it by pressing the SET button.
The end point appears, superimposed on the second point.
Use the trackball to move the end point, and then fix it by pressing the SET button.
When you have fixed all three points, the angle between the line connecting the start and middle points and the one connecting the middle and end points is measured.
The measurement display looks like the following: Table 5-31: 3-point angle measurement item
Angle (1)
____ °
Measurement item Angle made by three points
CD mode
The CD mode measurement screen has two measurement tools: Point Vel, for measuring velocity at a point Area Vel, for measuring velocity over an area
Caution
You can use the Point Vel and Area Vel measurement tools only when the displayed image is frozen.
Point velocity
To measure flow velocity at a specified point
1 Press the MEASURE button (
).
258 Basic measurement
Chapter 5
2 Tap Point Vel. The point caliper (the + mark) appears.
3 Use the trackball to move the point caliper, and then press the SET button (
The flow velocity at the specified point is measured.
The measurement display looks like the following: Table 5-32: Point velocity measurement item
Point Vel
Measurement item
1
__._ cm/s Point velocity
Area velocity
To measure flow velocity for an area 1 Make sure that the image is frozen.
) to fix it.
2 Press the MEASURE button (
).
3 Tap Area Vel.
The point caliper (the + mark) appears.
4 To specify the area, use the procedure in "Ellipse" on page 228.
After you have specified the area, the maximum and average values of the color-flow or power Doppler within the area are measured.
The measurement display looks like the following: Table 5-33: Area velocity measurement item
Area Vel maxV ave V
Measurement item __._ cm/s Maximum flow velocity __._ cm/s Average flow velocity
FC1 User Guide
Basic measurement 259
M mode
The CF mode measurement screen has the following measurement tools: Distance Time Slope HR
Distance
This tool measures the distance between two points on the same time phase of the M-mode image. To measure distance between two points
1 Press the MEASURE button (
).
2 Tap Distance.
The start-point caliper appears.
3 Use the trackball to move the start point, and then press the SET button (
) to fix it.
The end-point caliper appears, superimposed on the start point.
4 Use the trackball to move the end point, and then fix it by pressing the SET button.
The distance between the two points is measured.
When a single measurement is performed, the measurement display looks like the following: Table 5-34: Distance measurement item
Distance Dist(1)
__._ cm
Measurement item Measurement result
Time
This tool measures the time between two points on the M-mode image.
260 Basic measurement
Chapter 5
To measure time between two points
1 Press the MEASURE button (
).
2 Tap Time.
The start-point caliper appears on a vertical line.
3 Use the trackball to move the start point and line, and then press the SET button (
) to fix them.
The end-point caliper and line appear, superimposed on the start point and line.
4 Use the trackball to move the end point and line, and then fix them by pressing the SET button.
The time between the first and second lines is measured.
When you perform a single measurement, the measurement display looks like the following Table 5-35: Time measurement item
Time t(1)
Measurement item
_
ms Time between two points
HR (heart rate)
This tool measures the heart rate based on the time between two points on the M-mode image. To measure time between two points
1 Press the MEASURE button (
).
2 Tap HR.
The start-point caliper appears on a vertical line.
3 To change the number heartbeats used for calculating the passage of time, press switch menu 3 (the rocker button under Beat).
The possible number of beats is 1, 2, or 3.
To change the default Beat setting, see "Configuring measurements for all modes" on page 56.
FC1 User Guide
Basic measurement 261
4 Use the trackball to move the start point and line, and then press the SET button (
) to fix them.
The end-point caliper and line appear, superimposed on the start point and line.
5 Use the trackball to move the end point and line, and then fix them by pressing the SET button.
The heart rate is evaluated based on the time between the first and second lines.
When you perform a single measurement, the measurement display looks like the following: Table 5-36: Heart rate measurement items
HR t(1)
HR (1)
Measurement item
_
ms Time between two points (corresponding to
heartbeat(s))
_
bpm Heart rate
_
beat Number of heartbeats
Slope (velocity measurement)
This tool measures the time and velocity between two points on the M-mode image. To measure time between two points
1 Press the MEASURE button (
).
2 Tap Slope.
The start-point caliper appears on a vertical line.
3 Use the trackball to move the start point and line, and then press the SET button (
) to fix them.
The end-point caliper and line appear, superimposed on the start point and line.
4 Use the trackball to move the end point and line, and then fix them by pressing the SET button.
The two points are joined by a dotted line.
The velocity, amplitude, and time are evaluated based on the gradient of the line between the two points.
262 Basic measurement
Chapter 5
When a single measurement is performed, the measurement display looks like the following: Table 5-37: Slope measurement items
Slope
Measurement item
dist(1) t(1) V(1)
_._ ms Distance between two points
__
ms Time difference between two points
_._ cm/s Velocity (Distance between two points)/( t)
D mode
The D-mode measurement screen includes the following measurement tools: Velocity Trace PI Time Accel Decel RI Volume Flow (MnV) Velocity Trace Vessel Diam HR
Velocity
When you specify two points, this tool calculates the blood velocity difference and velocity ratio.
FC1 User Guide
Basic measurement 263
To measure blood velocity difference and ratio
1 Press the MEASURE button (
).
2 Tap Velocity.
The start-point caliper appears on a horizontal line.
3 Use the trackball to move the start point and line, and then press the SET button (
) to fix them.
The end-point caliper and line appear, superimposed on the start point and line.
4 Use the trackball to move the end point and line, and then fix them by pressing the SET button.
The two points are joined by a dotted line.
Figure 5-28: Start and end points for measuring blood-flow velocities and their ratio
The tool measures the blood velocity at the two points and calculates the flow-velocity difference and the flow-velocity ratio between the two points.
When a single measurement is performed, the measurement display looks like the following:
Table 5-38: Velocity measurement items
Velocity
Measurement item
V(1) V(2) V(1) PPG(1)
__._ cm/s __._ cm/s __._ cm/s __._ mmHg
Blood velocity at start point Blood velocity at end point Velocity difference Pressure gap of maximum blood velocity
264 Basic measurement
Chapter 5
Table 5-38: Velocity measurement items
Velocity
Ratio(1)
__._
Measurement item Blood velocity ratio
PI (Pulsatility index)
The PI measurement tool calculates blood-flow information such as PI, RI (resistance index), and S/D (systolicto-diastolic ratio) by tracing the Doppler waveform.
The following two types of tracing methods are available.
Auto
Each value is calculated by automatically tracing the Doppler waveform between two lines.
With the factory setting, Auto is the default. Free
Each value is calculated with free tracing.
To calculate blood-flow information
1 Press the MEASURE button (
).
2 Tap PI.
3 To select a measure tool:
Press the switch menu button 2 (the rocker button under Measure tool) to switch between Auto and Free.
When using Auto, specify a range equivalent to one heartbeat period.
When using Free, you can adjust PSV (peak systolic flow velocity) and EDV (end diastolic velocity).
For details, see "RI (resistance index)" on page 268.
4 Use the trackball to move the first line and fix it by pressing the SET button (
).
The second line appears.
5 Use the trackball to move the second line and fix it by pressing the SET button.
FC1 User Guide
Basic measurement 265
6 When the second line is fixed, the waveform between the first and second lines is traced, and each value is evaluated.
The measurement display looks like the following: Table 5-39: Pulsatility index measurement items
PI
Measurement item
MnV(1) MnPG(1) PSV(1) EDV(1) PI(1) RI(1)
__._ cm/s __._ mmHg __._ cm/s __._ cm/s __._ __._
Mean velocity Mean pressure gap Peak systolic flow velocity End diastolic velocity Pulsatility Index Resistance Index
Time
To measure the time between two points on the Doppler waveform
1 Press the MEASURE button (
).
2 Tap Time.
The start-point caliper appears on a vertical line.
3 Use the trackball to move the start point and line, and then press the SET button (
) to fix them.
The end-point caliper and line appear, superimposed on the start point and line.
4 Use the trackball to move the end point and line, and then fix them by pressing the SET button.
266 Basic measurement
Chapter 5
Figure 5-29: Doppler waveform with the start and end points set
5 The tool measures the time between the first and second lines.
When a single measurement is performed, the measurement display looks like the following:
Table 5-40: Time measurement item
Time t(1)
Measurement item
_
ms Time between two points
Acceleration or deceleration
The tool calculates acceleration or deceleration when you specify two points. To calculate acceleration or deceleration
1 Press the MEASURE button (
).
2 Tap Accel or Decel.
The start-point caliper appears on a vertical line.
3 Use the trackball to move the start point and line, and then press the SET button (
) to fix them.
The end-point caliper and line appear, superimposed on the start point and line.
4 Use the trackball to move the end point and line, and then fix them by pressing the SET button.
FC1 User Guide
Basic measurement 267
Figure 5-30: Start and end points for evaluating acceleration or deceleration
5 The tool evaluates the acceleration or deceleration between the first and second lines.
The measurement display for acceleration looks like the following: Table 5-41: Velocity acceleration measurement items
Velocity
Measurement item
t(1) V(1) ACC(1)
__._ ms Time between two points __._ m/s Velocity difference between two points __._ m/s2 Acceleration
The measurement display for deceleration looks like the following:
Table 5-42: Velocity deceleration measurement items
Velocity t(1) V(1) DEC(1)
Measurement item __._ ms Time between two points __._ m/s Velocity difference between two points __._ m/s2 Deceleration
RI (resistance index)
The tool calculates the resistance index by specifying two points, PSV (peak systolic flow velocity) and EDV (end diastolic velocity).
268 Basic measurement
Chapter 5
To calculate the resistance index
1 Press the MEASURE button (
).
2 Tap RI.
The start-point caliper appears on a vertical line.
3 Use the trackball to move the start point and line, and then press the SET button (
) to fix them.
The end-point caliper and line appear, superimposed on the start point and line.
4 Use the trackball to move the end point and line, and then fix them by pressing the SET button.
5 The RI measurement tool evaluates the resistance index between the first and second points.
The measurement display looks like the following:
Table 5-43: Resistance index measurement items
RI PSV(1) EDV(1) RI(1) S/D(1)
Measurement item
__._ cm/s Peak systolic flow velocity
__._ cm/s End diastolic velocity
__._
Resistance index
__._
Systolic / Diastolic velocity ratio
Velocity trace
This tool traces the Doppler waveform, to calculate information on blood flow, such as: VTI Mean velocity Mean pressure gap
The following two types of tracing methods are available: Auto Each value is calculated by automatically tracing the Doppler waveform between two lines.
FC1 User Guide
Basic measurement 269
In the factory setting, Auto is the default. Free
Each value is calculated with free tracing. To calculate blood-flow information
1 Press the MEASURE button (
).
2 Tap Vessel Diam.
3 In the screen's upper image, draw the blood vessel's diameter, using the technique for drawing the diameter that is described in Figure 5-9, "Examples of figures to create" on page 227.
4 Tap Trace.
5 Press the switch menu button 2 (the rocker button under Measure tool) to select Auto or Free.
Note
When you use Auto, specify a range equivalent to one heartbeat period.
If you use Auto:
a Use the trackball to move the first line, and then press the SET button (
) to fix it.
The second line appears, superimposed on the first.
b Use the trackball to move the second line, and then fix it by pressing the SET button.
Figure 5-31: Doppler waveform with two lines set If you use Free:
270 Basic measurement
Chapter 5
c Use the trackball to trace the waveform.
To trace the waveform, use the technique described in "Trace" on page 247.
d Press the SET button to fix the trace line.
A caliper is displayed on the maximum and minimum flow velocity values within the specified range.
e Use the trackball to move the caliper to the maximum flow velocity value, and then fix it by pressing the SET button.
When you rotate the trackball to the left, the caliper moves toward the start point of the trace line.
When you rotate the trackball to the right, the caliper moves toward the end point.
f Move the caliper to the minimum flow velocity value by repeating step c, and then fix it by pressing the SET button.
When the maximum and minimum flow velocities are fixed, each value is evaluated.
The measurement display looks like the following: Table 5-44: Velocity trace measurement items
Velocity trace
VTI(1)
__._
MnV(1)
__._
MnPG
__._
PSV(1)
__._
EDV(1)
__._
PI(1)
__._
RI(1)
__._
S/D(1)
__._
Measurement item
m
Velocity time integral
cm/s Mean velocity
mmH Mean pressure gap g
cm/s Peak systolic flow velocity
cm/s End diastolic velocity
Pulsatility index
Resistance index
Systolic / diastolic velocity ratio
FC1 User Guide
Basic measurement 271
Volume flow
This tool calculates flow volume based on the mean velocity measured on the Doppler waveform and the cross-sectional area (CSA) measured on the B-mode image.
Caution
Select the Doppler mode before measurement.
Note
You can also measure blood-flow volume by measuring Vessel Diam and then Velocity Trace.
To calculate blood-flow volume
1 Press the MEASURE button (
).
2 Tap Velocity Trace in the Vol Flow (MnV) group to specify the tracing range with two lines.
Auto and Free are available for Velocity Trace. With the factory setting, Auto is the default.
3 To measure the cross-sectional diameter, tap Vessel Diam.
The Circle and Distance measurement tools are available for Vessel Diam. In the factory setting, Distance is the default.
Figure 5-32: Measurement tools for flow volume When you have measured velocity (with Velocity Trace) and vessel diameter, the flow volume is calculated.
272 Basic measurement
Chapter 5
The measurement display looks like the following: Table 5-45: Flow volume measurement items for velocity trace
Velocity trace
Measurement item
TAP(1) PI(1) RI(1) MnV(1)
__._ m/s __._ __._ __._ m/s
Time averaged peak (Only when Trace type is 'Both') Pulsatility index (with TAP or MnV) Resistance index Mean velocity
Volume Flow
CSA(2)
__._
CSD(2)
__._
VF(2)
__._
Measurement item
cm2
Cross-sectional area
cm
Cross-sectional diameter
ml/min Volume Flow (with MnV)
Note
Volume flow is calculated using the MnV value. To set the MnV value with Auto Trace, change Trace Type on the touch panel. To set the default calculation method, change Trace Measure Type on page 57.
When Trace type is 'Both', PI and RI are always calculated from peak trace.
HR (heart rate)
To evaluate the heart rate on the Doppler waveform
1 Press the MEASURE button (
).
2 Tap HR to display the first line.
3 To change the number of heartbeats used for calculating the passage of time, press switch menu 3 (the rocker button under Beat).
The possible number of beats is 1, 2, or 3.
To change the default Beat setting, see "Configuring measurements for all modes" on page 56.
4 Use the trackball to move the first line, and then press the SET button ( The second line appears, superimposed on the first.
) to fix it.
FC1 User Guide
Basic measurement 273
5 Use the trackball to move the second line, and then fix it by pressing the SET button.
Figure 5-33: Doppler waveform with two lines set
The measurement tool evaluates the time between the first and second lines and the heart rate.
When a single measurement is performed, the measurement display looks like the following:
Table 5-46: Time measurement items
Time t(1) HR(1) (1)
Measurement item
_
ms Time between two points
_
bpm Heart rate
_
beat Number of heartbeats
Settings
For details on configuring the measurement settings, see "Managing measurement functions" on page 56.
Calculation formula
2D mode
Table 5-47: Formula for 2D mode calculations
Name Distance
Formula ={(X2-X1)^2+(Y2-Y1)^2}
274 Basic measurement
Chapter 5
Table 5-47: Formula for 2D mode calculations
Name Area Stenosis
Ratio
Volume
Formula =×(LA)×(SA)/4 LA,SA[cm,mm] (Circle: LA=SA) =|(V)-(R)|/(V)*100 Distance: V,R[cm,mm] Area: V,R[cm2,mm2] =(Dist1)/(Dist2) Dist1,Dist2[cm,mm] =(Area1)/(Area2) Area1,Area2[cm2,mm2] =(/6)×(x-ax)×(y-ax)×(z-ax) x-ax,y-ax,z-ax[cm,mm]
M mode
Table 5-48: Formula for M mode calculations
Name M-Distance M-Time M-HR
Slope
Formula =(Y2)-(Y1) =(T2)-(T1) T2,T1[ms] =(60*@)/ t @(Input value)[beat,cycle] t[s] =(dist)/( t) dist[cm,mm], t[ms]
FC1 User Guide
Basic measurement 275
D mode
Table 5-49: Formula for D mode calculations
Name
Formula
D-Time
=(T2)-(T1)
T2,T1[ms]
D-HR
=(60*@)/ t @(Input value)[beat,cycle]
t[s]
Velocity
PG
=4((V1)^2)
V1[m/s]
V
=|(V1)-(V2)|
V1/V2
=|(V1)/(V2)|
V1,V2[cm/s,m/s]
VelocityTrace
VTI
=Vel(t)dt
MnV
=(VTI)/ t
MnPG
=(4/ t)Vel^2(t)dt ( t = Flow duration)
PI
=|((PSV)-(EDV))/(MnV)|
|PSV||EDV|
RI
=|((PSV)-(EDV))/(PSV)|
|PSV||EDV|
S/D
=|(PSV)/(EDV)|
Acceleration,Deceleration
ACC or DEC =|( V)/( t)|
276 Basic measurement
Chapter 5
B/D mode
Table 5-50: Formula for B/D mode calculations
Name
Formula
VolumeFlow VelocityTrace: MnV VesselDiam: CSA CSD FV
=(VTI)/ t
=(/4)×(CSD)^2 :diameter =(MnV)×(CSA)×(60sec)×(Coef ) Coef=1.0
FC1 User Guide
Basic measurement 277
Abbreviations
Table 5-51: Abbreviations used
Abbreviation Full spelling
t V ACC Ave Coef CSA CSD DEC Diam Dist EDV HR Len MnPG MnV PG PI PSV R RI S/D Steno V Vel
Difference in time Difference in velocity Acceleration Average Coefficient Cross-sectional area Cross-sectional diameter Deceleration Diameter Distance End diastolic velocity Heart rate Length Mean pressure gradient Mean velocity Pressure gradient Pulsatility index Peak systolic flow velocity Residual Resistance index Systolic diastolic ratio, SD ratio Stenosis Velocity Velocity
278 Basic measurement
Chapter 5
Table 5-51: Abbreviations used
Abbreviation Full spelling
VF
Volume Flow
Vol
Volume
VTI
Velocity time integral
Cardiac measurement
Functional overview
For terms and abbreviations used in the measuring tools, see "Terms and abbreviations" on page 367.
2D (B) mode
Table 5-52: Descriptions of cardiac 2D-mode measurements
Measurement item Distance/Area measurement
LV volume measurement LA volume measurement
Description
Remarks
Aortic diameter, Aortic annulus diameter, Valsalva diameter, Sinotubular junction diameter, Valve area, Left atrial diameter, Left ventricular outflow tract diameter, Mitral annular distance, Left ventricular dimension, Wall thickness, Wall fractional thickening, Factional shortening, Ejection fraction, Left ventricular volume, Stroke volume, Cardiac output, Myocardial mass, Right / Left atrial longitudinal / transverse dimension, Right ventricular dimension, Right ventricular wall thickness, and Right ventricular fractional area change
Teichholz method Pombo method Gibson method ASE method Penn-Cube method
Left ventricular volume, Left ventricular length, Ejection fraction, Stroke volume, Cardiac output, and Left ventricular length difference
AL method MOD method
Left atrial volume, Left atrial length, Ejection fraction, and Left atrial length difference
AL method MOD method
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 279
Table 5-52: Descriptions of cardiac 2D-mode measurements
Measurement item LV mass measurement
Description Left ventricular mass
Remarks
ASE method Penn-Cube method AL method TE method
M-mode
Table 5-53: Summary of cardiac M-mode measurements
Measurement item AO measurement
MV measurement LV measurement
Description
Remarks
Right ventricular outflow tract diameter, Aortic diameter, Left atrial diameter, Left ventricular pre-ejection period and Left ventricular ejection time
Mitral valve C-E amplitude, C-A amplitude, E-F slope, etc. and E point to septal separation
Left ventricular dimension, Wall thickness, Wall fractional thickening, Factional shortening, Ejection fraction, Stroke volume, Cardiac output and Myocardial mass
Teichholz method Pombo method Gibson method ASE method Penn-Cube method
D mode
Table 5-54: Summary of cardiac D-mode measurements
Measurement item Aortic valve flow Left ventricular outflow tract flow
Aortic regurgitation
Description
Remarks
Peak velocity, Mean velocity, Pressure gradient, and VTI
Peak velocity, Mean velocity, Pressure gradient, VTI, Left ventricular preejection period, Ejection time, and Acceleration time
Peak velocity, VTI, End diastolic pressure gradient, and PHT
280 Cardiac measurement
Chapter 5
Table 5-54: Summary of cardiac D-mode measurements
Measurement item
Description
Remarks
Mitral valve flow
E wave peak velocity, A wave peak velocity, E wave DcT, A wave duration, Peak velocity, Mean velocity, Pressure gradient, VTI, and PHT
Mitral annulus flow
Peak velocity, Mean velocity, Pressure gradient, and VTI
Mitral regurgitation
Peak velocity, Mean velocity, Pressure gradient, VTI, and dP/dt
Pulmonary vein flow
Systolic wave peak velocity, Diastolic
Time interval difference of
wave peak velocity, VTI, A wave velocity, A duration (PV-MV)
and A wave duration
Pulmonary artery flow
Peak velocity, Pressure gradient, Right ventricular pre ejection period, Ejection time, and Acceleration time
Pulmonic regurgitation
Peak velocity, Mean velocity, End diastolic pressure gradient, and VTI
Estimation of pulmonary artery pressure at end diastole
Tricuspid valve flow
E wave peak velocity, A wave peak velocity, E wave DcT, A wave duration, Peak velocity, Mean velocity, Pressure gradient, VTI, and PHT
Tricuspid regurgitation
Peak velocity and Pressure gradient
Estimation of pulmonary artery pressure at systole
MPI
Myocardial Performance Index of right (=Tei Index)
and left ventricles
Disease assessment Table 5-55: Table. Summary of cardiac measurements for disease assessment
Purpose of measurement
Description
Remarks
Aortic stenosis Aortic valve area calculation
Assessment of severity: calculate the aortic valve area and the pressure gradient between the left ventricle and the aorta.
Planimetry method Continuity equation
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 281
Table 5-55: Table. Summary of cardiac measurements for disease assessment
Purpose of measurement
Description
Remarks
Aortic regurgitation Regurgitant volume calculation
With the qualitative assessment, LVEDP is estimated and the regurgitant volume is assessed based on the regurgitation waveform. With the quantitative assessment, the regurgitant volume, effective regurgitant orifice area, regurgitant fraction, etc. are calculated.
PHT method PISA method PW Doppler method (=Volumetric method)
Mitral stenosis Mitral valve area calculation
The severity is assessed by calculating the mitral valve area and the pressure gradient between the left ventricle and the left atrium.
Planimetry method PISA method
Mitral regurgitation Regurgitant volume calculation
With the quantitative assessment, the regurgitant volume, effective regurgitant orifice area, regurgitant fraction, etc. are calculated.
PISA method PW Doppler method (=Volumetric method)
Left ventricular systolic function and volume assessment
The left ventricular fractional shortening and the ejection fraction are calculated based on the left ventricular dimension.
With the left ventricular volume measurement, the left ventricular volume and the ejection fraction are assessed. The dP/dt value is calculated based on the mitral regurgitation waveform. The LV PEP/ET value (pre-ejection period divided by ejection time) decreases based on systolic failure.
Teichholz method Pombo method Gibson method AL method MOD method
Right/Left atrium assessment
Atrial enlargement is assessed by measuring the longitudinal and transverse dimension. With the left atrial volume measurement, the left atrial volume and the ejection fraction are assessed.
AL method MOD method
Left ventricular diastolic function assessment
Mitral valve flow measurement Mitral annular velocity measurment Pulmonary vein flow measurement
TDI method
282 Cardiac measurement
Chapter 5
Table 5-55: Table. Summary of cardiac measurements for disease assessment
Purpose of measurement
Description
Remarks
Right ventricle assessment
The right ventricular overload is assessed based on the measurement of right ventricular wall thickness and/or right ventricular dimension. The systolic function is assessed based on the right ventricle fractional area change and RV PEP/ET measurements.
Estimation of pulmonary artery pressures
The mean pulmonary artery pressure is estimated based on the PR maximum velocity. The pulmonary artery diastolic pressure is estimated by adding the right atrial pressure to the end diastolic pressure gradient. The pressure gradient between the right ventricle and the right atrium and other items are measured for evaluation after the tricuspid annuloplasty or prosthetic valve replacement. The pulmonary artery systolic pressure is estimated by adding the right atrial pressure to the peak pressure gradient of the tricuspid regurgitation.
Manually input the right atrial pressure by observing the IVC.
Qp/Qs MPI
Shunt diseases such as atrial septal defect and ventricular septal defect are assessed by calculating the pulmonic to systemic flow ratio based on the pulmonic circulation volume and the systemic circulation volume.
The systolic and diastolic functions can be assessed with MPI (=Tei Index).
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 283
Cross-sectional views for measurement
2D (B) mode
Table 5-56: Left sternal border approach
Left ventricular long axis view
Short axis view at aortic valve level (Right ventricular outflow tract)
Short axis view at mitral valve level
Table 5-57: Apical approach
Apical four-chamber view
Apical two-chamber view
Apical long axis view
Short axis view at papillary muscle level
M mode
Table 5-58: M-mode trace examples
284 Cardiac measurement
Chapter 5
Table 5-58: M-mode trace examples 1 M-mode image of aortic valve
2 M-mode image of mitral valve
3 M-mode image of left ventricle
D mode
Table 5-59: Examples of cross-sectional views for recording blood-flow waveforms q Mitral valve waveform Mitral annulus waveform Mitral regurgitation waveform w Tricuspid valve waveform Tricuspid regurgitation waveform
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 285
Table 5-59: Examples of cross-sectional views for recording blood-flow waveforms e Pulmonary vein waveform
r Left ventricular outflow tract waveform Aortic valve waveform Aortic regurgitation waveform
t Mitral valve waveform Mitral regurgitation waveform
y Right ventricular outflow tract waveform Pulmonary artery flow waveform Pulmonic regurgitation waveform
u Tricuspid valve waveform Tricuspid regurgitation waveform
286 Cardiac measurement
Chapter 5
Built-in measurement functions
2D (B) mode
AO tab Table 5-60: Measurements on the AO tab
Measurement item AV ann AoD Val STJ LAD LVOT RVOT AVA trace
Display item AV ann AoD Val STJ LAD LVOT RVOT AVA (planimetry)
AVAI (planimetry)
AR radius
radius
Unit cm, mm cm, mm cm, mm cm, mm cm, mm cm, m cm2 cm2/ m2 cm
MV tab Table 5-61: Measurements on the MV tab
Measurement item Display item
MVA trace
MVA (planimetry)
MR radius MS radius MS angle MA distA MA distB
radius radius angle distA distB
Unit cm2 cm cm ° cm, mm cm, mm
Remarks
Used for calculating LVOT SV,
BSA needs to be input Used for AR PISA method
Remarks Used for MR PISA method Used for MS PISA method Used for MS PISA method Used for calculating MVann SV Used for calculating MVann SV
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 287
LV tab Table 5-62: Measurements on the LV tab
Measurement item Display item
LV diastole
IVSd LVDd LVPWd EDV LVM LVMI
LV systole
IVSs LVDs LVPWs ESV FS EF SV CO SI
CI
IVSFT
LVPWFT
RVWd RVDd RVWs RVDs
RVWd RVDd RVWs RVDs
Unit cm, mm cm, mm cm, mm ml g g/m2 cm, mm cm, mm cm, mm ml % % ml l/min ml/m2 l/min/m2 %
%
cm, mm cm, mm cm, mm cm, mm
Remarks Teichholz, Pombo, Gibson
ASE, Penn-Cube BSA needs to be input Teichholz, Pombo, Gibson
Displayed when LV diastole and systole are measured
HR needs to be input BSA needs to be input
Displayed when IVSd and IVSs are measured Displayed when LVPWd and LVPWs are measured
288 Cardiac measurement
Chapter 5
LV Vol tab Table 5-63: Measurements on the LV Vol tab
Measurement item Display item
LV4 diast
EDV4 area, 4d
LV4 sys
L4d ESV4 area, 4s
LV2 diast
L4s EF4 EDV2 area, 2d
LV2 sys
L2d ESV2 area, 2s
L2s EF2
Unit ml cm2 cm, mm ml cm2 cm, mm % ml cm2 cm, mm ml cm2 cm, mm %
Remarks MOD, AL MOD, AL
MOD, AL MOD, AL
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 289
Table 5-63: Measurements on the LV Vol tab
Measurement item Biplane
Display item EDV ESV EF SV CO EDVI
ESVI
SI
CI
Ld diff Ls diff
Unit ml ml % ml l/min ml/m2 ml/m2 ml/m2 l/min/m2 % %
Remarks Displayed when LV4 diast, LV4 sys, LV2 diast, and LV2 sys are measured MOD, AL
HR needs to be input BSA needs to be input
Length difference between 4ch and 2ch
290 Cardiac measurement
Chapter 5
LA Vol tab Table 5-64: Measurements on the LA Vol tab
Measurement item LA4 max LA4 min
LA2 max LA2 min
Biplane
Display item V4 max area, 4max L4 max V4 min area, 4min L4 min EF4 V2 max area, 2max L2 max V2 min area, 2min L2 min EF2 V max V min EF VI max VI min L max diff L min diff
Unit ml cm2 cm, mm ml cm2 cm, mm % ml cm2 cm, mm ml cm2 cm, mm % ml ml % ml/m2 ml/m2 % %
Remarks MOD, AL
MOD, AL
MOD, AL
MOD, AL
Displayed when LA4 max, LA4 min, LA2 max, and LA2 min are measured MOD, AL BSA needs to be input Length difference between 4ch and 2ch
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 291
LV mass tab Table 5-65: Measurements on the LV mass tab
Measurement item LV Mass (AL)
LV Mass (TE)
Display item A epi A end LVL t LVM (AL) LVMI (AL) A epi A end a d t LVM (TE) LVMI (TE)
Unit cm2 cm2 cm, mm cm, mm g g/m2 cm2 cm2 cm, mm cm, mm cm, mm g g/m2
Atrial tab Table 5-66: Measurements on the Atrial tab
Measurement item Atrial dimension
Display item LAL LAT RAL RAT
Unit cm, mm cm, mm cm, mm cm, mm
Remarks
Calculated based on A epi, A end, and LVL BSA needs to be input
Calculated based on A epi, A end, a and d BSA needs to be input
Remarks
292 Cardiac measurement
Chapter 5
RV tab Table 5-67: Measurements on the RV tab
Measurement item Display item
RVD (4ch) RV FAC
RVD (4ch) RVd area
RVs area
RV FAC
Unit cm, mm cm2 cm2 %
Shunt tab Table 5-68: Measurements on the Shunt tab
Measurement item Display item
Systemic diam Pulmonic diam
Sys diam Pulmo diam
Unit cm, mm cm, mm
M mode
AO tab Table 5-69: Measurements on the AO tab
Measurement item RVOT LA/AO
LVPEP/ET
Display item RVOT AoD LAD LA/AO PEP ET PEP/ET
Unit cm, mm cm, mm cm, mm
ms ms
Remarks
Calculated based on RVd area and RVs area Remarks Used for calculating Qp/Qs
Remarks
Calculated based on AoD and LAD Calculated based on LV PEP and LVET
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 293
LV tab Table 5-70: Measurements on the LV tab
Measurement item Display item
LV diastole
IVSd LVDd LVPWd EDV LVM LVMI
LV systole
IVSs LVDs LVPWs ESV FS EF SV CO SI
CI
IVSFT
LVPWFT
RVWd RVDd RVWs RVDs HR
RVWd RVDd RVWs RVDs HR
Unit cm, mm cm, mm cm, mm ml g g/m2 cm, mm cm, mm cm, mm ml % % ml l/min ml/m2 l/min/m2 %
%
cm, mm cm, mm cm, mm cm, mm bpm
Remarks Teichholz, Pombo, Gibson
ASE, Penn-Cube BSA needs to be input Teichholz, Pombo, Gibson
Displayed when LVDd and LVDs are measured
HR needs to be input BSA needs to be input
Displayed when IVSd and IVSs are measured Displayed when LVPWd and LVPWs are measured
294 Cardiac measurement
Chapter 5
MV tab Table 5-71: Table. Measurements on the MV tab
Measurement item Display item
Unit
CE amp CA amp
EF slope EPSS
CE amp CA amp E/A A/E EF slope EPSS
cm, mm cm, mm
cm/s cm, mm
D mode
AO tab Table 5-72: Table. Measurements on the AO tab
Measurement item AoV vel AoV trace
LVOT vel
Display item Vel PG VTI PV PPG MnV MnPG Vel PG
Unit m/s, cm/s mmHg cm m/s, cm/s mmHg m/s, cm/s mmHg m/s, cm/s mmHg
Remarks Calculated based on CE amp and CA amp
Remarks Used for calculating AVA by continuity equation
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 295
Table 5-72: Table. Measurements on the AO tab
Measurement item LVOT trace
LVPEP LVET LV AcT LV PEP/ET LV AcT/ET AR trace
ARed V AR PHT
Display item VTI PV PPG MnV MnPG HR Ratio (VTI) PEP ET AcT PEP/ET AcT/ET VTI PV PPG MnV MnPG V PG PHT DcT Vmax Slope
Unit cm m/s, cm/s mmHg m/s, cm/s mmHg bpm
ms ms ms
cm m/s, cm/s mmHg m/s, cm/s mmHg m/s, cm/s mmHg ms ms m/s cm/s2
Remarks Used for calculating: LVOT SV and CO AVA by continuity equation LVOT/AoV (VTI) Regurgitant volume of AR (PISA), AR (PW Doppler), and MR (PW Doppler)
LVOT VTI to AoV VTI ratio
Based on LVPEP and LVET Based on LV AcT and LVET Used for calculating regurgitant volume of AR (PISA) and AR (PED)
296 Cardiac measurement
Chapter 5
MV tab Table 5-73: Measurements on the MV tab
Measurement item Display item
MV flow MV trace MVA (PHT)
E vel E PG A vel A PG E/A A/E DcT A dur VTI PV PPG MnV MnPG PHT MVA (PHT)
MVann trace
MS Vmax (MVA PISA)
DcT Vmax VTI PV PPG MnV MnPG Vmax PGmax
Unit m/s, cm/s mmHg m/s, cm/s mmHg
ms ms cm m/s, cm/s mmHg m/s, cm/s mmHg ms cm2 ms m/s cm m/s, cm/s mmHg m/s, cm/s mmHg m/s, cm/s mmHg
Remarks
Calculated based on MV E vel and MV A vel Used for calculating Diff A dur
Used for calculating regurgitant volume of AR (PW Doppler), MR (PISA), and MR (PW Doppler) Used for calculating MVA (PISA)
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 297
Table 5-73: Measurements on the MV tab
Measurement item MR trace
MR Vmax MR dP/dt
Display item VTI PV PPG MnV MnPG Vmax PGmax dt Vel 1 Vel 2 dP/dt
Unit cm m/s, cm/s mmHg m/s, cm/s mmHg m/s, cm/s mmHg ms m/s, cm/s m/s, cm/s mmHg
Remarks
298 Cardiac measurement
Chapter 5
PV tab Table 5-74: Measurements on the PV tab
Measurement item Display item
PV flow (vel)
PVS vel PVD vel DcT PVA vel PVA dur S/D
A dur (PV-MV)
PV flow (VTI)
PVS VTI PVS PV PVD VTI PVD PV PV Sys. Frac.
Unit m/s, cm/s m/s, cm/s ms m/s, cm/s ms
ms
cm m/s, cm/s cm m/s, cm/s %
Pulmo tab Table 5-75: Measurements on the Pulmo tab
Measurement item PA vel
RVPEP RVET RV AcT RV PEP/ET
Display item Vmax PGmax PEP ET AcT PEP/ET
Unit m/s, cm/s mmHg ms ms ms
Remarks
Calculated based on PVS vel and PVD vel Calculated based on PVA dur and MV A dur
Calculated based on PVS VTI and PVD VTI
Remarks
Calculated based on RVPEP and RVET
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 299
Table 5-75: Measurements on the Pulmo tab
Measurement item Display item
Unit
RV AcT/ET
AcT/ET
PR Vmax PRed vel RA press
Vmax PGmax vel PG PAP ed RA press
m/s, cm/s mmHg m/s, cm/s mmHg mmHg mmHg
Remarks Calculated based on RV AcT and RVET
RA press needs to be input Estimated right atrial pressure is input manually
300 Cardiac measurement
Chapter 5
TV tab Table 5-76: Measurements on the TV tab
Measurement item Display item
TV flow
TV trace TR Vmax RA press
E vel E PG A vel A PG E/A A/E DcT A dur VTI PV PPG MnV MnPG Vmax PGmax PAP sys RA press
Unit m/s, cm/s mmHg m/s, cm/s mmHg
mmHg ms cm m/s, cm/s mmHg m/s, cm/s mmHg m/s, cm/s mmHg mmHg mmHg
Shunt tab Table 5-77: Measurements on the Shunt tab
Measurement item Display item
Unit
Systemic VTI
Sys VTI
cm
Pulmonic VTI
Pulmo VTI
cm
Remarks
Calculated based on MV E vel and MV A vel
RA press needs to be input Estimated right atrial pressure is input manually Remarks Used for calculating Qp/Qs
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 301
MPI tab Table 5-78: Measurements on the MPI tab
Measurement item MV c-o time LVET
Display item c-o time ET LV MPI
TV c-o time RVET
c-o time ET RV MPI
Table 5-79: TDI
Measurement item e' (Sep) a' (Sep) e' (Lat) a' (Lat) e' (Inf ) a' (Inf) e' (Ant) a' (Ant)
Display item e' (Sep) a' (Sep) e' (Lat) a' (Lat) e' (Inf ) a' (Inf ) e' (Ant) a' (Ant)
Unit ms ms
ms ms
Unit cm/s cm/s cm/s cm/s cm/s cm/s cm/s cm/s
Remarks Used for calculating LV MPI Linked with ET on AO tab Calculated based on above two items Used for calculating RV MPI Linked with ET on Pulmo tab Calculated based on above two items
Remarks Measure by TDI-PW mode
Specifying the measures that are visible on CALCS tabs
To specify the measurement items for the Cardiac preset
1 Display a report, and then switch to the Worksheet. For information on how to do so, see "Worksheet/Report" on page 365.
2 Tap the button whose visible measurement items you want to change. The buttons represent groups of measurement items for the current preset.
302 Cardiac measurement
Chapter 5
3 In the Check column, make sure that a check mark is present for the measurement items that you want to be visible.
If the check mark is not present, tap in the column.
There may be more than one page of measurement items to select.
4 If there is more than one page of measurement items, then to see other pages, press switch menu button 4 (the rocker button under Worksheet Page).
5 When you have finished, tap Close.
All modes: Accessing the cardiac measurement tabs
The procedures in the following sections tell you to select a tab, such as the AO tab, LV tab, etc. To make these tabs appear, use the following procedure.
Note
When you switch modes, such as switching to CW mode when you are in 2D (B) mode, you may have to perform this step again.
To access measurement tabs
In an examination, press the FREEZE button ( button ( ).
) to freeze the image, and then press the CALCS
All modes: Deleting measurements
To delete measurements on the examination display
Press the DELETE button (
).
2D (B) mode
Aorta
You can measure AV ann, AoD val, STJ, or LAD with the following procedure. To measure AV ann, AoD val, STJ, or LAD 1 Press the 2D button, and display the left ventricular long-axis view.
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 303
2 Press the CALCS button, and then the AO tab. 3 On the touch panel, tap the desired measurement (AV ann, AoD val, STJ, or LAD).
4 Use the trackball to move the caliper to the start point and press the SET button (
).
5 Use the trackball to move the next caliper to the end point, and then press the SET button to finalize the measurement.
Note
With regard to LAD, measure the maximum end systolic diameter by selecting an appropriate image in the cine memory.
The measurement display looks like the following: Table 5-80: AV ann measurement item
AV ann
Measurement item
AV ann
_._ cm Aortic annulus diameter
Table 5-81: AoD val measurement item
AoD val
Measurement item
AoD val
_._ cm Valsalva diameter
Table 5-82: STJ measurement item
STJ
Measurement item
STJ
_._ cm Sinotubular junction diameter
Table 5-83: LAD measurement item
LAD
Measurement item
LAD
_._ cm Left atrial diameter
When you measure AoV and LAD, the following result appears:
LA/AO
__._
LAD to AoV ratio
304 Cardiac measurement
Chapter 5
Left ventricular
When you measure IVS, LVD, and LVPW in this order, use the following procedure to select LV diastole and LV systole.
Note
To display SI and CI, you must input BSA.
When you select one of the items, only the selected item is measured. To measure IVS, LVD, and LVPW 1 Display the left ventricular end diastolic or systolic view within the same cardiac cycle. 2 Press the CALCS button, and then the LV tab. 3 Select the LV tab on the touch panel, and tap LV diastole or LV systole.
4 Move the caliper to the start point of IVS measurement and press the SET button (
).
5 Move the displayed calipers to the end point of IVS, left ventricular posterior wall, and the ending point of LVPW, and fix them by pressing the SET button.
The measurement display looks like the following: Table 5-84: LV diastole and systole measurement items
LV diastole
Measurement item
IVSd LVDd LVPWd EDV LVM (ASE)
__._ cm __._ cm __._ cm __._ ml __._ g
Interventricular septum thickness, end diastole LV dimension, end diastole LV posterior wall thickness, end diastole LV end diastolic volume LV mass
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 305
LV systole
Measurement item
IVSs
__._ cm
Interventricular septum thickness, end systole
LVDs
__._ cm
LV dimension, end systole
LVPWs
__._ cm
LV posterior wall thickness, end systole
ESV
__._ ml
LV end systolic volume
When you measure LV diastole and LV systole, the following measurements appear:
FS
_._ %
Fractional shortening
EF
_._ %
LV ejection fraction
Note
The measurements including LVMI, IVSFT, LVPWT, SV, SI, CO, and/or CI are displayed on the Report screen. The formula used is set beforehand. For CO and/or CI, you must input HR. For LVMI, SI, and/or CI, you must input BSA.
LV volume
To complete the procedure 1 Press the 2D button, and display the end diastolic apical four-chamber view. 2 Press the FREEZE button and the CALCS button. 3 Select the LV vol (AL) tab on the touch panel, and tap LV4 vol (AL).
4 Place the caliper on the mitral annulus on one side and press the SET button (
).
Use the trackball to trace the left ventricular endocardium up to the mitral annulus on the other side (end point) and press the SET button.
The tool measures the LV area.
5 A line indicating the left ventricular length is automatically drawn from the midpoint of the line between the two mitral annuluses.
6 Use the trackball to correct the axis and the position of cardiac peak when necessary and press the SET button.
306 Cardiac measurement
Chapter 5
The tool measures LVL. 7 Display the end systolic view within the same cardiac cycle. 8 Press the function button and repeat Steps 4 through 6. 9 Display the end diastolic apical two-chamber view. Select LV2 vol using the touch panel. 10 Repeat Steps 4 through 8.
Note
Exclude papillary muscle or trabeculae carneae from cardiac muscle. Trace the outside of them.
The measurement display looks like the followingg:
Table 5-85: LV4 measurement items
LV4 vol
Measurement item
area, 4d
--.-- cm2 LV area, end diastole, 4ch
L4d
--.-- cm LV length, end diastole, 4ch
EDV4
--.-- ml LV end diastolic volume, 4ch
area, 4s
--.-- cm2 LV area, end systole, 4ch
L4s
--.-- cm LV length, end systole, 4ch
ESV4
--.-- ml LV end systolic volume, 4ch
When LV4 volume is measured, the following item displays:
EF4
--.-- %
LV ejection fraction, 4ch
LV2 vol area, 2d L2d EDV2 area, 2s L2s ESV2
Measurement item --.-- cm2 LV area, end diastole, 2ch --.-- cm LV length, end diastole, 2ch --.-- ml LV end diastolic volume, 2ch --.-- cm2 LV area, end systole, 2ch --.-- cm LV length, end systole, 2ch --.-- ml LV end systolic volume, 2ch
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 307
LV2 vol
Measurement item
When LV2 volume is measured, the following item displays:
EF2
--.-- %
LV ejection fraction, 2ch
When LV4 volume and LV2 volume are measured, the following items are calculated using the Biplane method:
Table 5-86: LV measurement items
Vol
Measurement item
EDV
--.-- ml
LV end diastolic volume
ESV
--.-- ml
LV end systolic volume
EF
--.-- %
LV ejection fraction
Note
You must input BSA in order to display EDVI, ESVI, SI and CI. The measurements including SV, SI, CO, CI, EDVI, ESVI, LVLd diff, and/or LVLs diff are displayed on the Report screen. The formula used is set beforehand. For CO and/or CI, you must input HR.
LA volume
To complete the procedure
1 Press the 2D button, and display a maximum size of left atrium in four-chamber view within the cardiac cycle.
2 Press the FREEZE button and the CALCS button.
3 Select LA Vol (AL) tab on the touch panel, and tap LA4 vol (AL).
4 Place the caliper on the mitral annulus on one side, and then press the SET button (
).
5 Use the trackball to trace the left atrial cavity up to the mitral annulus on the other side (end point) and press the SET button.
The LA area is measured.
A line indicating the left atrial length is automatically drawn from the midpoint of the line between the two mitral annuluses.
308 Cardiac measurement
Chapter 5
6 If necessary, use the trackball to correct the axis and the distance to the superior wall of the left atrial, and then press the SET button.
LAL is measured.
7 Press the function button to switch the trackball function to cine search, and display a minimum size of the left atrium within the same cardiac cycle.
8 Press the function button again, and repeat Steps 4 to 6.
9 Display two-chamber view. On the touch panel, select LA2 vol (AL). 10 Repeat Steps 4 through 8.
Note
When tracing, exclude the pulmonary vein from the left atrial lumen.
Table 5-87: LA4 vol measurement items
LA4 vol
Measurement item
area, 4max
__._ cm2 LA maximum area, 4ch
L4 max
__._ cm LA maximum length, 4ch
V4 max
__._ ml LA maximum volume, 4ch
area, 4min
cm2 LA minimum area, 4ch
L4 min
cm LA minimum length, 4ch
V4 min
ml LA minimum volume, 4ch
When LA4 volume is measured, the following item appears:
EF4
__. %
LV ejection fraction, 4ch
LA2 vol area, 2max L2 max V2 max area, 2min L2 min
Measurement item __._ cm2 LA maximum area, 2ch __._ cm LA maximum length, 2ch __._ ml LA maximum volume, 2ch
cm2 LA minimum area, 2ch cm LA minimum length, 2ch
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 309
LA2 vol
Measurement item
V2 min
ml LA minimum volume, 2ch
When LA2 volume is measured, the following item appears.
EF2
__. %
LV ejection fraction, 2ch
When LA4 volume and LA2 volume are measured, the following items are calculated using the method shown in the table.
To display LAVI max and LAVI min, you must input BSA. Table 5-88: Volume measurement items
LA2 vol V max V min EF
__._ ml __._ ml __._ %
Measurement item LA maximum volume LA minimum volume LA ejection fraction
Note
LAVI max, LAVI min, L max diff and/or LAL min diff are displayed on the Report screen.
To display LAVI, you must input BSA.
LV mass
To complete the procedure using the Area-length (AL) method 1 Press the 2D button, and display the end diastolic left ventricular short-axis view at the papillary muscle
level. 2 Press the FREEZE button and the CALCS button. 3 Select the LV Mass tab on the touch panel, and tap LV Mass (AL).
The A epi measuring tool, a trace-area free trace tool, is automatically selected.
4 Place the caliper on the epicardial surface and press the SET button (
).
5 Trace the epicardial surface up to the end point and press the SET button.
The measuring tool selection automatically changes to A endo, which is also a trace-area free trace tool.
310 Cardiac measurement
Chapter 5
6 Trace the endocardial surface by following the procedure described in Steps 4 and 5. 7 Display the end diastolic four-chamber or two-chamber view. 8 Measure the distance between the mitral annulus level and the cardiac peak using the trackball and press
the SET button. Cardiac apex
To complete the procedure using the Truncated ellipsoid (TE) method 1 Display the end diastolic left ventricular short-axis view at the papillary muscle level. 2 On the touch panel, tap LV Mass (TE). 3 Carry out steps 4 through 7 of the area-length (AL) method. 4 Measure the long-axis distance between the papillary muscle and the cardiac apex (a). 5 Measure the long-axis distance between the papillary muscle and the mitral annulus level (d).
Cardiac apex
WARNING
When tracing the epicardial and endocardial surfaces, exclude trabeculae carneae or papillary muscle.
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 311
Note
Select each button to perform each measurement again.
When measuring A epi or A endo, you can select Free or Ellipse by using the switch menu button 2 (the rocker button under Measure tool) to switch the measure tool.
When measuring the long-axis distance, select the view (four-chamber or twochamber) that displays the long axis longer.
The measurement display looks like the following:
Table 5-89: LV mass measurement items
LV mass (AL)
Measurement item
A epi A endo
__._ cm2 Epicardial area __._ cm2 Endocardial area
LVL
__._ cm LV length
When you measure A epi, A endo, and LVL, the following measurements appear:
t
__._ cm Mean LV myocardial thickness
LVM
__._ g
LV mass
LV mass (TE)
Measurement item
A epi
__._ cm2 Epicardial area
A endo
__._ cm2 Endocardial area
a
__._ cm Left ventricular length (Cardiac apex - Papillary
muscle level)
d
__._ cm Left ventricular length (Papillary muscle - Mitral
annulus level)
When you measure A epi, A endo, a, and d, the following measurements appear:
t
__._ cm Mean LV myocardial thickness
LVM
__._ g
LV mass
To display LVMI, you must input BSA. LVMI is displayed on the Report screen.
312 Cardiac measurement
Chapter 5
Atrial
To complete the procedure
1 Press the 2D button, display the apical four-chamber view and select the time phase in which the atria are fully expanded.
2 Press the FREEZE button and the CALCS button.
3 Select the Atrial tab on the touch panel, and tap Atrial dimension.
By default, the LAL tool is selected.
4 Measure the following distances: From the mitral annulus level to the superior wall
From the left atrial cavity to the interatrial septum on the left atrial side
From the tricuspid annulus level to the superior wall of the right atrium
From the right atrial cavity to the interatrial septum on the right atrial side
The measurement display looks like the following: Table 5-90: Atrial dimension measurement items
Atrial dimension
LAL
__._ cm
LAT
__._ cm
RAL
__._ cm
RAT
__._ cm
Measurement item LA longitudinal dimension LA transverse dimension RA longitudinal dimension RA transverse dimension
Right ventricular
To complete the RVD (4ch) procedure 1 Press the 2D button, and display the end-diastolic apical four-chamber view. 2 Press the FREEZE button and the CALCS button. 3 Select the RV tab on the touch panel, and tap RVD (4ch).
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 313
4 Place the caliper on the right ventricular endocardium and press the SET button (
).
5 Measure the distance to the IVS on the right ventricular side and press the SET button.
To complete the RV FAC procedure
1 Press the 2D button, and display the end diastolic apical four-chamber view.
2 Press the FREEZE button and the CALCS button.
3 On the touch panel, tap RV FAC.
4 Place the caliper on the tricuspid annulus on one side and press the SET button (
).
5 Trace the right ventricular endocardial surface up to the tricuspid annulus on the other side (end point) and press the SET button.
6 Press the function button to switch the trackball function to cine search, and display the end systolic image.
7 To return to measurement, press the function button again.
8 Measure the area in the same way as in steps 4 and 5.
The measurement display looks like the following: Table 5-91: RVD measurement items
RVD (4ch) RVD (4ch)
__._ cm
Measurement item RV transverse dimension, diastole (4ch)
RV FAC
Measurement item
RVd area
__._ cm2 RV area, diastole
RVs area
__._ cm2 RV area, systole
When you measure the RVd area and RVs area, the following measurement appears:
RV FAC
__._ %
RV fractional area change
314 Cardiac measurement
Chapter 5
M mode
Aorta
When you select LA/AO or LV PEP/ET, two measurements are performed continuously. When you select one of the other items (RVOT, AoD, LAD, LVPEP, or LVET), only the measurement that you select is performed. To measure the RVOT 1 Press the M button and record the M-mode image of the aortic valve. 2 Press the FREEZE button and the CALCS button. 3 Select the AO tab on the touch panel, and tap RVOT. 4 Place the caliper on the end-diastolic right ventricular endocardium and press the SET button
(
).
5 Place the caliper on the aortic anterior wall and press the SET button.
To measure the LA/AO
1 Select the AO tab.
2 On the touch panel, tap LA/AO.
3 Measure AoD, and then LAD.
4 Place the caliper on the end-diastolic and aortic anterior wall and press the SET button (
).
5 5Place the caliper on the aortic posterior wall and press the SET button.
6 Move the caliper to the time phase where the left atrium is fully expanded, place it on the left atrial anterior wall, and press the SET button.
7 Place the caliper on the left atrial posterior wall and press the SET button.
To measure the LV PEP/ET
1 Select the AO tab.
2 On the touch panel, tap LV PEP/ET.
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 315
3 Measure LVPEP, and then LVET.
4 Place the caliper on the onset of the ECG Q wave and then press the SET button (
).
5 Place the caliper on the opening point of aortic valve and press the SET button.
6 Place the caliper on the closing point of aortic valve and press the SET button.
The measurement display looks like the following Table 5-92: RVOT measurement items
RVOT RVOT
__._ cm
Measurement item Right ventricular outflow tract diameter
LA/AO
Measurement item
AoD
_._ cm Aortic diameter
LAD
_._ cm Left atrial diameter
When you measure AoV and LAD, the following measurement appears:
LA/AO
__._
LAD to AoV ratio
LV PEP/ET
Measurement item
PEP
_
ms LV pre ejection period
ET
_
ms LV ejection time
When you measure PEP and ET, the following measurement appears:
PEP/ET
__._
PEP to ET ratio
Left ventricular
In the following procedures, when you select one of the items, only the item that you selected is measured.
When you measure IVS, LVD, and LVPW in this order, select LV diastole and LV systole and follow the procedure below.
316 Cardiac measurement
Chapter 5
To complete the RVW/RVD procedure 1 Press the M button and record the M-mode image of the left ventricle. 2 Press the FREEZE button and the CALCS button. 3 On the touch panel, still in M mode, tap the LV tab and select the item from RVWd, RVDd, RVWs and RVDs. 4 Measure the distance which you selected. To complete the LV diastole, LV systole procedure 1 Select the LV tab. 2 On the touch panel, tap LV diastole.
3 Place the caliper on the start point of IVS measurement and press the SET button (
).
4 Place the displayed calipers on the end point of IVS, left ventricular posterior wall, and the end point of LVPW, and fix them by pressing the SET button.
5 On the touch panel, tap LV systole.
6 Use the trackball and the SET button to measure as you did for LV diastole.
The measurement display looks like the following. Table 5-93: Left ventricular measurement items
RVWd RVWd
__._ cm
Measurement item RV wall thickness, diastole
RVDd RVDd
__._ cm
Measurement item RV diameter, diastole
LV diastole IVSd LVDd LVPWd
__._ cm __._ cm __._ cm
Measurement item Interventricular septum thickness, end diastole LV dimension, end diastole LV posterior wall thickness, end diastole
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 317
LV diastole
Measurement item
When you measure IVSd, LVDd and LVPWd, the following measurements appear:
EDV
__._ ml LV end-diastolic volume
LVM
__._ g
LV mass
RVWs RVWs
__._ cm
Measurement item RV wall thickness, systole
RVDs RVDs
__._ cm
Measurement item RV diameter, systole
LV systole
Measurement item
IVSs
__._ cm Interventricular septum thickness, end systole
LVDs
__._ cm LV dimension, end systole
LVPWs
__._ cm LV posterior wall thickness, end systole
When you measure LVDs, the following item appears:
ESV
__._ ml LV end-systolic volume
When you measure LV diastole and LV systole, the following measurements appear:
FS
_._ %
Fractional shortening
EF
_._ %
LV ejection fraction
Note
The measurements including LVMI, IVSFT, LVPWT, SV, SI, CO, and/or CI are displayed on the Report screen. The formula used is set beforehand. For CO and/or CI, you must input HR. For LVIM, SI, and/or CI, you must input BSA.
318 Cardiac measurement
Chapter 5
Mitral valve
Figure 5-34: Reference for CE amp and CA amp To complete the CE amp, CA amp procedure 1 Record the M-mode image of the mitral valve. 2 Press the FREEZE button and the CALCS button. 3 On the touch panel, select the MV tab, then tap CE amp.
In Figure 5-34: q indicates the measurement point.
4 Place the caliper on Point E, and press the SET button (
).
5 Place the caliper level with Point C and press the SET button to measure the C-E amplitude. 6 On the touch panel, tap CA amp and repeat steps as above to measure the C-A amplitude w. To measure the E-F slope e
1 On the touch panel, select the MV tab.
2 On the touch panel, tap EF slope.
3 Place the caliper on Point E in Figure 5-34, and press the SET button (
).
4 Use the trackball to align the displayed line with the E-F slope, and press the SET button.
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 319
To measure the distance between the IVS and Point E r 1 On the touch panel, select the MV tab. 2 On the touch panel, tap EPSS.
3 Place the caliper on the IVS on the left ventricular side and press the SET button (
4 Place the caliper on Point E, and press the SET button.
For these procedures, the measurement display looks like the following:
Table 5-94: Mitral valve measurement items
CE amp
Measurement item
CE amp
__._ cm C-E amplitude
CA amp
Measurement item
CA amp
__._ cm C-A amplitude
When you measure C-E amp and C-A amp, the following measurements appear:
E/A
__._
CE amp to CA amp ratio
A/E
__._
CA amp to CE amp ratio
EF slope EF slope
Measurement item __._ cm/s Mitral valve E-F slope
EPSS EPSS
__._ cm
Measurement item E point to septal separation
D mode
Aortic valve
To measure flow velocity with a caliper: AoV vel and LVOT vel 1 Press the 2D button and display the apical left ventricular long-axis view.
320 Cardiac measurement
). Chapter 5
2 Record each waveform in PW or CW mode, and press the FREEZE button and the CALCS button. 3 Select the AO tab on the touch panel, and tap either AoV vel or LVOT vel.
4 Place the caliper on the peak velocity, and then press the SET button (
).
The measurement display looks like the following: Table 5-95: Aortic valve measurement items
AoV vel
Measurement item
vel
__._ m/s
Aortic valve velocity
PG
__._ mmHg Aortic valve pressure gradient
LVOT vel vel PG
__._ m/s __._ mmHg
Measurement item Left ventricular outflow tract velocity Left ventricular outflow tract pressure gradient
To complete the LV PEP/ET and LV AcT/ET procedure
1 Select the AO tab on the touch panel.
2 On the touch panel, tap either LV PEP, LVET, or LV AcT and use the calipers to measure the time referring to the figure below. For LVPEP, measure the time between the start point of the ECG Q wave and the start point of the waveform. For LVET, measure the time between the start and end points of the waveform. For LV AcT, measure the time between the start point and the peak of the waveform.
Peak
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 321
The measurement display looks like the following: Table 5-96: LV PEP/ET measurement items
LVPEP
Measurement item
PEP
_
ms LV pre ejection period
LVET
Measurement item
ET
_
ms LV ejection time
When you measure LVPEP and LVET, the following measurement appears:
PEP/ET
__._
LV PEP to ET ratio
LVAcT
Measurement item
AcT
_
ms LV acceleration time
When you measure LVET and LV AcT, the following measurement appears.
AcT/ET
__._
LV AcT to ET ratio
Perform the following two procedures. To measure cardiac output with LVOT trace 1 Press the 2D button and display the apical long axis view. 2 Record the left ventricular outflow tract waveform, and press the FREEZE button and the CALCS button.
3 Select the AO tab on the touch panel, and tap LVOT trace. 322 Cardiac measurement
Chapter 5
4 Press the SET button (
) at the starting point of the left ventricular outflow tract flow.
5 Use the trackball to trace the outline of the waveform and press the SET button at the end point.
6 On the touch panel, tap the HR.
7 Place the caliper on the start point of the waveform, press the SET button, and then press the SET button again at the start point of the next waveform.
Note
For HR, any number can be entered on the worksheet.
To complete the LVOT procedure 1 Press the 2D button. 2 Display the systolic left ventricular outflow tract in the left ventricular long-axis view.
To enlarge the image, press the DEPTH/ZOOM button ( rocker button below.
3 Press the FREEZE button and the CALCS button.
4 Select the AO tab on the touch panel, and tap LVOT.
), and then press the up-arrow side of the
5 Measure the left ventricular outflow tract diameter with calipers, and press the SET button (
).
Measure either of these two items first, as necessary.
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 323
The measurement display looks like the following: Table 5-97: LVOT trace measurement items
LVOT trace
Measurement item
VTI PV PPG MnV MnPG
__._ cm
Left ventricular outflow tract flow VTI
__._ m/s
LVOT peak velocity
__._ mmHg LVOT peak pressure gradient
__._ m/s
LVOT mean velocity
__._ mmHg LVOT mean pressure gradient
HR
Measurement item
HR
__ bpm Heart rate
LVOT
Measurement item
LVOT
__._ cm
Left ventricular outflow tract diameter
area
__._ m2
LVOT cross-sectional area
When you measure LVOT VTI, HR, and LVOT, the following items appear
LVOT SV
__._ ml
Stroke volume
Note
The measurements including SI, CO, and/or CI are displayed on the Report screen. To display SI and CI, you must input BSA.
Mitral valve
To complete the MV flow procedure
1 Press the D button, in the apical long-axis view or apical four-chamber view, and record the blood flow at the mitral valve leaflet tips level in the PW mode.
324 Cardiac measurement
Chapter 5
2 Press the FREEZE button and the CALCS button.
3 Select the MV1 tab on the touch panel, and tap MV flow. By default, the MV E vel tool is selected.
4 Place the caliper on the peak of the E wave and press the SET button (
).
5 Use the trackball to align the line that appears with the deceleration slope of the E wave, and press the SET button.
6 Place the caliper on the peak of the A wave, and press the SET button.
7 To measure the A wave duration:
Peak
a Place the caliper on the start point of the A wave, and press the SET button. b Place the caliper on the end point of the A wave, and press the SET button.
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 325
The measurement display looks like the following: Table 5-98: MV flow measurement items
MV flow
Measurement item
E vel
__._ m/s
MV E velocity
E PG
__._ mmHg MV E vel pressure gradient
DcT
__ ms
MV E wave deceleration time
A vel
__._ m/s
MV A velocity
A PG
__._ mmHg MV A vel pressure gradient
A dur
__ ms
MV A wave duration
When you measure MV E vel and MV A vel, the following item appears:
E/A
__._
MV E vel to A vel ratio
Mitral Annulus Velocity (TDI-PW mode)
To calculate the mitral annulus velocity The operation procedure applies to the following calculation:
e' (Sep), a' (Sep), e' (Lat), a' (Lat), e' (Inf), a' (Inf ), e' (Ant), a' (Ant) 1 Press the D button and select the TDI tab on the touch panel. 2 Display the apical four-chamber (4ch) or two-chamber (2ch) view, and select the TDI mode on the touch
panel. And then record the PW wave form. 3 Press the FREEZE button and the CALCS button.
4 Select the TDI tab and then e' (Sep) on the touch panel. 326 Cardiac measurement
Chapter 5
5 Move caliper to top of the e' wave and press SET.
The measurement display looks like the following: Table 5-99: Mitral annulus velocity measurement items
e'(Sep)
Measurement Part
e'(Sep)
__._ cm /s e' velocity (Sep)
When you measure MV E vel, the display looks like the following:
E/e'(Sep)
__._
E vel / e'(Sep) ratio
a'(Sep) a'(Sep)
Measurement Part __._ cm /s a' velocity (Sep)
e'(Lat)
Measurement item
e'(Lat)
__._ cm /s e' velocity (Lat)
When you measure MV E vel, the display looks like following:
E/e'(Lat)
__._
E vel / e'(Lat) ratio
a'(Lat) a'(Lat)
Measurement item __._ cm /s a' velocity (Lat)
e'(Inf )
Measurement item
e'(Inf )
__._ cm /s e' velocity (Inf )
When you measure MV E vel, the display looks like the following:
E/e'(Inf )
__._
E vel / e'(Inf ) ratio
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 327
a'(Inf) a'(Inf )
Mearsurement item __._ cm /s a' velocity (Inf )
e'(Ant)
Measurement item
e'(Ant)
__._ cm /s e' velocity (Ant)
When you measure MV E vel, the display looks like the following:
E/e'(Ant)
__._
E vel / e'(Ant) ratio
a'(Ant) a'(Ant)
Measurement item __._ cm /s a' velocity (Ant)
Pulmonary vein
To complete the PV flow (vel) procedure
1 Press the D button, display the apical four-chamber view, and record the pulmonary vein flow that flows into the left atrium in the PW-mode.
2 Press the FREEZE button and the CALCS button.
3 Select the PV tab on the touch panel, and tap PV flow (vel). By default, the PVS vel tool is selected.
4 Place the caliper on the peak of the PVS wave, and press the SET button ( 5 Place the caliper on the peak of the PVD wave and press the SET button.
328 Cardiac measurement
). Chapter 5
6 Use the trackball to align the line that appears with the deceleration slope of the PVD wave and press the SET button.
7 Place the caliper on the peak of the PVA wave and press the SET button. 8 To measure the PVA wave duration:
a Place the caliper on the start point of the PVA wave, and then press the SET button. b Place the caliper on the end point of the PVA wave, and then press the SET button.
Peak
The measurement display looks like the following: Table 5-100: Pulmonary flow measurement items
PV flow (vel)
Measurement item
PVS vel
__._ m/s PV systolic wave peak velocity
PVD vel
__._ m/s PV diastolic wave peak velocity
PVD DcT PVA vel PVA dur
__
ms PV diastolic wave deceleration time
__._ m/s PV A wave peak velocity
__
ms PV A wave duration
When you measure PVS vel and PVD vel, the following measurement appears:
S/D
__._
PVS velocity to PVD velocity ratio
When you measure MV A dur and PVA dur, the following measurement appears:
A dur (PV-MV)
__._ ms Time interval difference of A duration (PVA - MV A)
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 329
To complete the PV flow (VTI) procedure 1 Press the D button. 2 Display the apical four-chamber view and record the pulmonary vein flow that flows into the left atrium in
the PW-mode. 3 Select the PV tab on the touch panel, and tap PV flow (VTI).
4 Place the caliper on the starting point of the PVS wave, and press the SET button (
).
5 Trace the outline of the PVS wave and press the SET button at the ending point.
You can trace with either Free Trace or Auto Trace.
To switch to either Free Trace or Auto Trace, press the switch menu button 2 (the rocker button under Measure tool).
6 Place the caliper on the starting point of the PVD wave, and press the SET button.
Trace the outline of the PVD wave and press the SET button at the end point.
The measurement display looks like the following: Table 5-101: PV flow (VTI) measurement items
PV flow (VTI)
Measurement item
PVS VTI
__._ cm PV systolic wave VTI
PVS PV PVD VTI PVD PV
__._ m/s PV systolic wave peak velocity __._ cm PV diastolic wave VTI __._ m/s PV diastolic wave peak velocity
When PVS VTI and PVD VTI are measured, the following measurement shows:
PV Sys.Frac. __._ %
PV systolic filling fraction
Pulmonic artery
Measuring flow velocity with a caliper
To complete the PA vel procedure
1 Press the D button, display the right ventricular outflow tract view and record the waveform in the PW or CW mode.
330 Cardiac measurement
Chapter 5
2 Press the FREEZE button and the CALCS button.
3 Select the Pulmo tab on the touch panel, and tap PA vel.
4 Place the caliper on the peak velocity, and press the SET button (
).
The measurement display looks like the following:
Table 5-102: PA vel measurement items
PA vel Vmax PGmax
Measurement item __._ m/s PA velocity __._ mmHg PA pressure gradient
RV PEP/ET and RV AcT/ET
To complete an RVPEP, RVET, or RV AcT measurement
1 Press the D button.
2 On the touch panel, tap the item that you want to measure (RVPEP, RVET, or RV AcT), and use the calipers to measure the times labeled in the figure below:
For RVPEP, measure the time between the starting point of the ECG Q wave and the start point of the waveform.
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 331
For RVET, measure the time between the start and end points of the waveform. For RV AcT, measure the time between the start point and the peak of the waveform.
Peak
The measurement display looks like the following:
Table 5-103: RVPEP, RVET, and R AcT measurement items
RVPEP PEP
Measurement item __ ms RV pre ejection period
RVET
Measurement item
ET
__ ms RV ejection time
When you measure RVPEP and RVET, the following measurement appears:
PEP/ET
_.__
RV PEP to ET ratio
RVAcT
Measurement item
AcT
__ ms RV acceleration time
When you measure RVET and RV AcT, the following measurement appears:
AcT/ET
_.__
RV AcT to ET ratio
Tricuspid valve
To complete the TV flow procedure
1 Press the D button, display the apical four-chamber view, and record the blood flow at the tricuspid valve leaflet tips level in the PW-mode.
332 Cardiac measurement
Chapter 5
2 Press the FREEZE button and the CALCS button.
3 Select the TV tab on the touch panel, and tap TV flow. By default, the TV E vel tool is selected.
4 Place the caliper on the peak of the E wave, and press the SET button (
).
5 Use the trackball to align the displayed line with the deceleration slope of the E wave and press the SET button.
6 Place the caliper on the peak of the A wave, and press the SET button.
7 To measure the A wave duration:
a Place the caliper on the start point of the A wave, and then press the SET button.
b Place the caliper on the end point of the A wave, and press the SET button.
Peak
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 333
The measurement display looks like the following: Table 5-104: TV flow measurement items
TV flow
Measurement item
E vel
__._ m/s
TV E wave peak velocity
E PG
__._ mmHg TV E vel pressure gradient
DcT
__ ms
TV E wave deceleration time
A vel
__._ m/s
TV A wave peak velocity
A PG
__._ mmHg TV A vel pressure gradient
TA dur
__ ms
TV A wave duration
When TV E vel and TV A vel are measured, the following measurements show:
E/A
__._
TV E vel to A vel ratio
A/E
__._
TV A vel to E vel ratio
Aortic stenosis
Aortic valve area: Planimetry method
Display the stenotic valve orifice and trace it to measure the aortic valve area. To measure the aortic valve area by planimetry 1 Press the 2D button. 2 Display the aortic valve level short axis view.
3 To enlarge the image of the most widely opened valve orifice at systole, press the DEPTH/ZOOM button ( ), and then press the up-arrow side of the rocker button below.
334 Cardiac measurement
Chapter 5
4 Press the FREEZE button and the CALCS button, select the AO tab On the touch panel, and tap AVA trace.
5 Place the caliper on the inner side of the valve orifice, and then press the SET button (
).
6 Trace the lumen, place the caliper on the end point, and then press the SET button.
The measurement display looks like the following: Table 5-105: AVA trace measurement items
AVA trace AVA
__._ cm2
Measurement item Aortic valve area (Planimetry method)
To display AVAI, you must input BSA. AVAI is displayed on the Report screen.
Continuity equation
The aortic valve stenosis area is calculated based on the principle of conservation of flow (the amount of blood flowing into a lumen is equal to that flowing out of the lumen).
To calculate the aortic valve area (AVA), measure the following items. AoV trace
For information on measuring the AoV trace, see the following procedure. LVOT SV
For information on LVOT procedures, see "To measure cardiac output with LVOT trace" on page 322.
To calculate the AVA
1 Press the D button, display the apical long axis view, etc., and record the trans aortic valve flow in the CW-mode.
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 335
2 Press the FREEZE button and the CALCS button.
3 Select the AO tab on the touch panel, and tap AoV trace.
4 Place the caliper on the start point of the waveform, and press the SET button (
).
5 Use the trackball to trace the outline of the waveform.
You can trace with either the Free Trace or the Auto Trace measure tool.
To switch to either Free Trace or Auto Trace, press the switch menu button 2 (the rocker button under Measure tool).
6 Place the caliper on the end point of the blood flow waveform, and press the SET button.
The measurement display looks like the following: Table 5-106: AoV trace measurement items
AoV trace
Measurement item
VTI
__._ cm
Aortic valve flow VTI
PV
__._ m/s
AoV peak velocity
336 Cardiac measurement
Chapter 5
Table 5-106: AoV trace measurement items
AoV trace
Measurement item
PPG
__._ mmHg AoV peak pressure gradient
MnV
__._ m/s
AoV mean velocity
MnPG
__._ mmHg AoV mean pressure gradient
When you measure AoV VTI, AoV PV, LVOT VTI, LVOT PV, and LVOT, the following measurements appear:
Table 5-107: AA (continuity) measurement item
AVA (continuity)
AVA VTI
__._
AVA PV
__._
AVAI VTI
__._
AVAI PV
__._
Ratio (VTI)
__._
cm2 cm2 cm2/m2 cm2/m2
Measurement item AVA by continuity equation by VTI AVA by continuity equation by peak velocity AVA index by continuity equation by VTI AVA index by continuity equation by peak velocity LVOT VTI to AoV VTI ratio
Note
To check items that are not displayed on the main monitor, place a check on the worksheet to check it on a report.
Aortic regurgitation
Aortic regurgitation waveform measurement
Aortic regurgitation waveform
Trace the waveform to measure each item. The regurgitant volume is calculated.
To measure the aortic-regurgitation waveform with AR trace
1 Press the D button, display the apical long axis view, etc., and record the aortic regurgitation waveform in the CW-mode.
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 337
2 Press the FREEZE button and the CALCS button.
3 Select the AO tab on the touch panel, and tap AR trace.
4 Place the caliper on the start point of the waveform and press the SET button (
).
5 Use the trackball to trace the outline of the waveform.
6 Place the caliper on the end point of the blood flow waveform and press the SET button.
The measurement display looks like the following:
Table 5-108: AR trace measurement items
AR trace
Measurement item
VTI PV PPG MnV MnPG
__._ cm __._ m/s __._ mmHg __._ m/s __._ mmHg
Aortic regurgitation VTI AR peak velocity AR peak pressure gradient AR mean velocity AR mean pressure gradient
338 Cardiac measurement
Chapter 5
AR PHT (Pressure Half Time)
Measure the time interval for the peak pressure gradient of the aortic regurgitation decreases by half. To measure the aortic-regurgitation waveform with AR PHT 1 Press the CALCS button. 2 Select the AO tab on the touch panel, and tap AR PHT.
3 Place the caliper on the peak of the waveform, and press the SET button (
).
4 Use the trackball to align the displayed line with the deceleration slope of the waveform, and press the SET button.
The measurement display looks like the following: Table 5-109: AR PHT measurement items
AR PHT PHT DcT Vmax Slope
__
ms
__
ms
_._ m/s
_._
cm/s2
Measurement item AR pressure half time AR deceleration time AR maximum velocity AR slope
End-diastolic pressure gradient between left ventricle and aorta
Measure the pressure gradient between the left ventricle and the aorta based on the aortic regurgitation waveform.
To measure the aortic-regurgitation waveform with ARed V
1 Press the CALCS button.
2 Select the AO tab on the touch panel, and tap ARed V.
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 339
3 Place the caliper on the end diastole (peak of the ECG R wave), and press the SET button (
).
The measurement display looks like the following:
Table 5-110: ARed V measurement items
ARed V V PG
__._ m/s __._ mmHg
Measurement item AR end-diastolic velocity AR end-diastolic pressure gradient
Aortic regurgitant volume: PISA method
At the upstream side of the regurgitant orifice, hemispherical suction flow is formed with accelerated blood flow. Proximal isovelocity surface area (PISA) is the surface area of the hemisphere. The effective regurgitant orifice area and the regurgitant volume are calculated by measuring the color aliasing radius and the regurgitant blood flow.
Measure the following two items and manually input Alias vel.
AR trace
For information on measuring the AR trace, see "Aortic regurgitation waveform measurement" on page 337.
AR radius (PISA)
To measure the aortic-regurgitant volume with AR radius (PISA)
1 Press the 2D button and C button
340 Cardiac measurement
Chapter 5
2 Display AR in the apical long axis view, etc.
3 Decrease the color scale to around 40cm/s to make the display PISA larger.
4 To enlarge PISA further, press the DEPTH/ZOOM button ( rocker button below.
), and then press the up-arrow side of the
5 Press the CALCS button, select the AO tab on the touch panel, and tap AR radius.
6 Place the caliper on the center of PISA (the coaptation point of valve cusps) and press the SET button
(
).
7 Use the trackball to measure the PISA radius, and press the SET button.
8 Manually input the velocity value of the color bar in Alias vel. on the worksheet. See "Worksheet/Report" on page 365.
The measurement display looks like the following: Table 5-111: AR volume measurement items
AR (PISA)
Measurement item
radius
__._ cm AR PISA radius
When you have measured AR trace, the following items appear:
RV
__._ ml AR regurgitant volume flow
ERO
__._ cm2 AR effective regurgitant orifice area
FR
__._ ml/s AR flow rate
When you have measured LVOT SV, the following item appears:
RF
__._ %
AR regurgitant fraction
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 341
Note
Depending on the measurement order, results may not be displayed on the main monitor; you can verify them on the Report screen.
Aortic regurgitant volume: PW Doppler method
The ejection flow volume at LVOT is the sum of the aortic regurgitant volume (AR RV) and the original stroke volume. Accordingly, the aortic regurgitant volume is measured by subtracting MVann SV from LVOT SV.
Measure the following items in the desired order to calculate the aortic regurgitant volume. LVOT SV, in D mode
For information on completing the procedure, see "To measure cardiac output with LVOT trace" on page 322.
MVann trace, in D mode, on the MV 2 tab
For information, see the following procedure. MA distA and MA distB, in 2D (B) mode, on the MV tab
For information, see the following procedure.
To perform the MVann trace
1 For the MVann SV measurement, press the D button.
2 Display the apical four-chamber or two-chamber view, and record the inflow waveform at the mitral annulus level in the PW-mode.
3 Press the CALCS button, select the MV 2 tab on the touch panel, and tap MVann trace.
4 Place the caliper on the start point of the waveform, and press the SET button (
).
You can trace with either the Free Trace or the Auto Trace measure tool.
342 Cardiac measurement
Chapter 5
To switch to either Free Trace or Auto Trace, press the switch menu button 2 (the rocker button under Measure tool).
5 Use the trackball to trace the outline of the waveform, place the end point at the end of the waveform, and press the SET button.
To perform the MA distA and MA distB measurement
1 Press the 2D button, and then display the apical four-chamber or two-chamber view.
2 Press the CALCS button, select the MV tab, and then MA distA or MA distB on the touch panel and measure the annulus diameter.
You can measure A and B in the desired order.
The measurement display looks like the following: Table 5-112: MA distA and MA distB measurement items
MV ann trace
Measurement item
VTI PV PPG MnV MnPG
__._ cm __._ m/s __._ mmHg __._ m/s __._ mmHg
Mitral annulus flow VTI MVann peak velocity MVann peak pressure gradient MVann mean velocity MVann mean pressure gradient
MA distA distA
__._ cm
Measurement item Mitral annular distance A
MA distB distB
__._ cm
Measurement item Mitral annular distance B
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 343
When you have measured MVann VTI, MA distA and MA distB, MVann SV is calculated. When you have measured LVOT SV, the following items show.
AR (PWD) RV RF
__._ ml __._ ml
Measurement item Aortic regurgitant volume Aortic regurgitant fraction
Mitral stenosis
Mitral valve area: Planimetry method
Display the stenotic valve orifice and trace it to measure the mitral valve area. To measure the mitral-valve area by planimetry 1 Press the 2D button. 2 Display the mitral valve level short axis view.
To enlarge the image of the most widely opened valve orifice at diastole, press the DEPTH/ZOOM button
( ), and then press the up-arrow side of the rocker button below.
Note
The distance between the anterior and posterior leaflets of the opened mitral valve should be the same on both the left ventricular long axis view and the left ventricular short axis view. If the short axis view is positioned closer to the left atrium, it may result in overestimation of the valve area.
3 Press the CALCS button, select the MV tab on the touch panel, and tap MVA trace.
344 Cardiac measurement
Chapter 5
4 Place the caliper on the inner side of the valve orifice, and then press the SET button (
).
You can trace with either the Free Trace or the Ellipse measure tool.
To switch to Free Trace or Ellipse, press the switch menu button 2 (the rocker button under Measure tool).
5 Trace the lumen, place the caliper on the end point, and then press the SET button.
The measurement display looks like the following: Table 5-113: MVA trace measurement item
MVA trace MVA
Measurement item __._ cm2 Mitral valve area (Planimetry method)
Mitral stenosis waveform measurement
The waveform of accelerated stenotic blood flow is recorded to calculate the items for stenotic severity assessment. Select the proper view including apical four-chamber view or apical long axis view on which the blood flow can be recorded at an appropriate angle.
Mitral stenosis waveform
Trace the waveform to calculate each item.
To complete the mitral stenosis waveform MV trace procedure
1 Press the D button, display the apical four-chamber view or long axis view, and record the trans mitral valve flow in the CW-mode.
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 345
2 Press the FREEZE button and the CALCS button.
3 Select the MV 2 tab, and then MV trace on the touch panel.
4 Place the caliper on the start point of the waveform, and then press the SET button (
).
5 Use the trackball to trace the outline of the waveform.
You can trace with either the Free or the Auto measure tool.
To switch to either Free Trace or Auto Trace, press the switch menu button 2 (the rocker button under Measure tool).
6 Place the caliper on the end point of the blood flow waveform, and then press the SET button.
The measurement display looks like the following: Table 5-114: MV trace measurement items
MV trace VTI PV
__._ cm __._ m/s
Measurement item Mitral valve flow VTI MV peak velocity
346 Cardiac measurement
Chapter 5
Table 5-114: MV trace measurement items
MV trace PPG MnV MnPG
__._ mmHg __._ m/s __._ mmHg
Measurement item MV peak pressure gradient MV mean velocity MV mean pressure gradient
Mitral valve area: PHT
Measure the time interval for the peak pressure gradient of the mitral stenosis flow decreases by half. Based on the measured value, MVA is estimated.
To complete the MVA PHT procedure
1 Press the D button and the CALCS button.
2 Select the MV 2 tab on the touch panel, and tap MVA (PHT).
3 Place the caliper on the peak of the waveform, and press the SET button (
).
4 Use the trackball to align the displayed line with the deceleration slope, and then press the SET button.
The measurement display looks like the following:
Table 5-115: MVA (PHT) measurement items
MVA (PHT) PHT MVA (PHT) DcT Vmax
Measurement item
__
ms Mitral valve pressure half time
__._ cm2 Mitral valve area (PHT)
__
ms Mitral valve E wave deceleration time
__._ m/s Mitral valve peak velocity
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 347
Mitral valve area: PISA method
At the upstream side of the regurgitant orifice, hemispherical suction flow is formed with accelerated blood flow. Proximal isovelocity surface area (PISA) is the surface area of the hemisphere. The valve area is calculated by measuring the color aliasing radius and measuring the blood flow waveforms in stenotic, etc. Measure the following three items in the desired order and manually input Alias vel.
MS radius and MS angle 2D (B) mode, on the MV tab
MS Vmax D mode, on the MV2 tab
To measure the mitral valve area, using the PISA method 1 To measure MS radius and MS angle:
a Press the C button. b Display the MS flow in the Color Doppler mode. c To enlarge the display of PISA, decrease the color scale to about 40cm/s.
d To enlarge PISA further, press the DEPTH/ZOOM button ( rocker button below.
), and then press the up-arrow side of the
e Select the MV tab on the touch panel, and tap MS radius. f Place the caliper on the center of PISA (the coaptation point of valve cusps), and press the SET button
(
).
g Use the trackball to measure the PISA radius, and press the SET button.
348 Cardiac measurement
Chapter 5
h Manually input the velocity value of the color bar in Arias vel. See "Worksheet/Report" on page 365. i Turn off the color to change to (2D) B mode, and then tap MS angle. j Measure the angle between the anterior and posterior leaflets of the mitral valve.
2 To measure MS Vmax: a Change to CW mode, record the MS flow, and press the FREEZE button and the CALCS button. b On the touch panel, tap MS Vmax, and measure the peak velocity with the caliper.
The measurement display looks like the following: Table 5-116: MV measurement items
MS radius radius
__._ cm
Measurement item Mitral stenosis flow PISA radius
PMS angle
angle
_
°
Measurement item Mitral leaflet opening angle
MS Vmax (PISA)
Vmax
__._ m/s
Measurement item Mitral stenosis maximum velocity
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 349
MS Vmax (PISA)
Measurement item
PGmax
__._ mmHg Mitral stenosis maximum pressure gradient
When you measure the above four measurements, the following result shows.
MS PISA MVA
__._ cm2
Measurement item Mitral valve area
Note
To check result that is not displayed on the main monitor, check it on a report.
Mitral regurgitation
Measuring the mitral regurgitation waveform
To complete the MR Vmax procedure
1 Press the D button.
2 Record the mitral regurgitation waveform in the CW mode, and press the FREEZE button and the CALCS button.
3 On the touch panel, tap the MV 2 tab, and then tap MR Vmax. 350 Cardiac measurement
Chapter 5
4 Place the caliper on the peak of the waveform, and press the SET button (
).
The measurement display looks like the following:
Table 5-117: MR Vmax measurement items
MR Vmax
Measurement item
Vmax PGmax
__._ m/s __._ mmHg
MR maximum velocity MR maximum pressure gradient
Mitral regurgitant volume: PISA method
At the upstream side of the regurgitant orifice, hemispherical suction flow is formed with accelerated blood flow. Proximal isovelocity surface area (PISA) is the surface area of the hemisphere. The effective regurgitant orifice area and the regurgitant volume are calculated by measuring the color aliasing radius and tracing the regurgitant blood flow.
Measure the following two items in the desired order, and then manually input Alias vel. MR radius
In 2D (B) mode, use the MV tab. MR trace
In D mode, use the MV 2 tab.
For information on measuring MVann SV, see "Aortic regurgitant volume: PW Doppler method" on page 342.
To measure MR radius
1 Press the 2D button.
2 Display the MR in the Color Doppler mode.
3 Decrease the color scale to around 40cm/s to expand the PISA in view.
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 351
4 To enlarge PISA further, press the DEPTH/ZOOM button ( rocker button below.
), and then press the up-arrow side of the
5 Select the MV tab on the touch panel, and tap MR radius.
6 Place the caliper on the center of the PISA (the coaptation point of the valve cusps) and press the SET button
(
).
7 Use the trackball to measure the PISA radius, and then press the SET button.
8 Manually input the velocity value of the color bar in Arias vel. See "Worksheet and report" on page 413. To measure using an MR trace 1 Select CW mode, record the mitral regurgitation waveform, and press the FREEZE button and the CALCS
button. 2 On the touch panel, tap the MV 2 tab, and then tap MR trace.
3 Place the caliper on the start point of the waveform and press the SET button (
).
4 Use the trackball to trace the outline of the waveform.
You can trace with either the Free or the Auto measure tool.
To switch to either Free Trace or Auto Trace, press the switch menu button 2 (the rocker button under Measure tool).
5 Place the caliper on the end point of the blood flow waveform and press the SET button.
352 Cardiac measurement
Chapter 5
The measurement display looks like the following:
Table 5-118: MR measurement items
MR radius radius
__._ cm
Measurement item MR PISA radius
MR trace VTI PV PPG MnV MnPG
__._ cm __._ m/s __._ mmHg __._ m/s __._ mmHg
Measurement item Mitral regurgitation VTI MR peak velocity MR peak pressure gradient MR mean velocity MR mean pressure gradient
MR PISA
Measurement item
RV
__._ ml
MR regurgitant volume
ERO
__._ cm2
MR effective regurgitant orifice area
FR
__._ ml/s
MR flow rate
When you have measured MVann SV, the following measurement shows. For measuring MVann SV, see the next section.
RF
__._ %
MR regurgitant fraction
Note
Depending on the measurement order, results may not be displayed on the main monitor; you can verify them on the Report screen.
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 353
Mitral regurgitant volume: PW Doppler method
The ejection flow volume at the mitral valve is the sum of the MR regurgitant volume (MR RV) and the original stroke volume. Accordingly, the MR regurgitant volume is measured by subtracting LVOT SV from MVann SV.
Measure the following items in the desired order to calculate the MR regurgitant volume.
LVOT SV
For the procedure, see "To measure cardiac output with LVOT trace" on page 322.
MVann SV
For the procedure, see "Aortic regurgitant volume: PW Doppler method" on page 342.
The measurement display looks like the following:
Table 5-119: MR (PWD) measurement items
MR (PWD)
Measurement item
RV
__._ ml MR regurgitant volume
RF
__._ %
MR regurgitant fraction
MR dP/dt
The mitral regurgitation waveform reflects the pressure gradient between the left ventricle and the left atrium. If the left ventricular systolic function deteriorates, the left ventricular pressure increases gradually and this value decreases.
To measure the MR dP/dt
1 In the CW mode, and record the mitral regurgitation waveform.
It is recommended that you set the scale of the waveform to around 4m/s and extend Sweep Speed to the maximum.
2 On the touch panel, tap the MV 2 tab, and then tap MR dP/dt.
3 Place the caliper at about 1m/s (Vel 1) on the outline of the MR flow, and press the SET button
(
).
354 Cardiac measurement
Chapter 5
4 Place the caliper at about 3m/s (Vel 2) on the outline of the MR flow, and press the SET button.
The measurement display looks like the following: Table 5-120: MR dP/dt measurement items
MR d/dt
Measurement item
dt
Vel 1 Vel 2 dP/dt
__._ ms
__._ m/s __._ m/s __._ mmHg
Time between Vel 1 and Vel 2 Velocity at the first point Velocity at the second point Left ventricular pressure increase rate
Pulmonic regurgitation
Estimating pulmonary artery mean pressure
It is reported that there is a good correlation between the maximum pressure gradient of the pulmonic regurgitation and the pulmonary artery mean pressure.
To obtain PR Vmax
1 Press the D button and then switch to CW mode.
2 Record the pulmonic regurgitation waveform in the CW mode, and press the FREEZE button and the CALCS button.
3 On the touch panel, tap the Pulmo tab, and then tap PR Vmax.
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 355
4 Place the caliper on the peak of PR flow, and press the SET button (
).
The measurement display looks like the following:
Table 5-121: PR Vmax measurement items
PR Vmax Vmax PGmax
Measurement item
_._ m/s
Pulmonic regurgitation maximum velocity
_._ mmHg Pulmonic regurgitation maximum pressure gradient
Estimating pulmonary artery pressure at end diastole
It is reported that there is a good correlation between the pulmonary artery pressure at end diastole (calculated by adding the right atrial pressure to the end diastolic pressure gradient of the pulmonic regurgitation) and the pulmonary artery wedge pressure. Enter the estimated right atrial pressure manually onto the Worksheet (see "Worksheet/Report" on page 365).
To complete the procedure
1 Select D mode, and then switch to CW mode.
2 Record the pulmonic regurgitation waveform in the CW mode, and press the FREEZE button and the CALCS button.
3 On the touch panel, tap the Pulmo tab, and then tap PRed vel.
356 Cardiac measurement
Chapter 5
4 Place the caliper on the end diastole of the PR flow, and press the SET button (
).
5 On the Worksheet, in the RA Press column, manually input the estimated right atrial pressure.
The measurement display looks like the following:
Table 5-122: Pulmonary artery pressure measurement items
PRed vel
Measurement item
vel
__._ m/s
PR end diastolic velocity
PG
__._ mmHg PR end diastolic pressure gradient
When you have entered PRed PG and RA press, the following measurement appears.
PAP ed PAP ed
__._ mmHg
Measurement item Estimated PA pressure at end diastole
Note
If results are not displayed on the main monitor, you can verify them on the Report screen.
Tricuspid valve flow
Measuring tricuspid valve flow velocity
Measure the high-velocity blood flow after tricuspid annuloplasty or due to tricuspid stenosis, a prosthetic valve, etc.
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 357
To measure tricuspid valve flow 1 Record the trans tricuspid valve flow in the CW-mode, and press the FREEZE button and the CALCS button.
2 On the touch panel, tap the TV tab, and then TV trace.
You can trace with either the Free or the Auto measure tool.
To switch to either Free Trace or Auto Trace, press the switch menu button 2 (the rocker button under Measure tool).
3 Place the caliper on the start point of the waveform and press the SET button (
).
4 Use the trackball to trace the outline of the waveform.
5 Place the caliper on the end point of the waveform and press the SET button.
The measurement display looks like the following: Table 5-123: TV trace measurement items
TV trace
Measurement item
VTI
__._ cm
Tricuspid valve flow VTI
PV
__._ m/s
TV peak velocity
358 Cardiac measurement
Chapter 5
Table 5-123: TV trace measurement items
TV trace PPG MnV MnPG
__._ mmHg __._ m/s __._ mmHg
Measurement item TV peak pressure gradient TV mean velocity TV mean pressure gradient
Tricuspid regurgitation
Estimating pulmonary artery pressure at systole
The pulmonary artery pressure at systole is estimated by adding the estimated right atrial pressure to the maximum pressure gradient between the right ventricle and the right atrium, measured with the waveform of tricuspid regurgitation. You manually enter the estimated right atrial pressure onto the Worksheet (see "Worksheet/Report" on page 365).
To measure tricuspid valve flow
1 Record the tricuspid regurgitation waveform in the CW-mode, and press the FREEZE button and the CALCS button.
2 On the touch panel, tap the TV tab, and then TR Vmax.
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 359
3 Place the caliper on the peak of the TR flow and press the SET button (
).
4 Press RA press, and manually input the estimated right atrial pressure in the RA Press column on the Worksheet.
The measurement display looks like the following: Table 5-124: TR Vmax and PAP sys measurement items
TR Vmax Vmax PGmax
__._ m/s __._ mmHg
Measurement item TR maximum velocity TR maximum pressure gradient
When you have entered TR PGmax and RA press, the following measurement appears.
PAP sys PAP sys
__._ mmHg
Measurement item Estimated PA pressure at systole
Note
If results are not displayed on the main monitor, you can verify them on the Report screen.
Qp/Qs
The ratio between the pulmonic flow and the systemic flow is calculated in the case of shunt diseases such as atrial septal defect and ventricular septal defect. Measure the following items in order:
1 Systemic flow
a Systemic diam
b Systemic VTI
360 Cardiac measurement
Chapter 5
2 Pulmonic flow a Pulmonic diam b Pulmo VTI
To measure systemic flow 1 Press the 2D button, display the left ventricular long axis view and enlarge the systolic left ventricular
outflow tract. 2 Press the FREEZE button and the CALCS button. 3 On the touch panel, tap the Shunt tab, and then Systemic Diam. 4 Use the calipers to measure the outflow tract diameter. 5 Press the D button, display the apical long axis view and record the left ventricular outflow tract flow, in the
PW mode.
6 Press the FREEZE button and the CALCS button.
7 On the touch panel, tap the Shunt tab, and then tap Systemic VTI. You can trace with either the Free or the Auto measure tool. To switch to either Free Trace or Auto Trace, press the switch menu button 2 (the rocker button under Measure tool).
8 Place the caliper on the start point of the waveform and press the SET button (
).
9 Use the trackball to trace the outline of the waveform.
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 361
10 Place the caliper on the end point of the waveform and press the SET button.
To measure pulmonic flow 1 Press the 2D button. 2 Display the right ventricular outflow tract and enlarge the systolic right ventricular outflow tract. 3 On the touch panel, tap the Shunt tab, and then Pulmonic diam. 4 Use the calipers to measure the outflow tract diameter. 5 Press the D button and record the right ventricular outflow tract flow, in the PW mode.
6 Press the FREEZE button and the CALCS button.
7 On the touch panel, tap the Shunt tab, and then tap Pulmonic VTI. You can trace with either the Free or the Auto measure tool. To switch to either Free Trace or Auto Trace, press the switch menu button 2 (the rocker button under Measure tool).
8 Place the caliper on the starting point of the waveform, and press the SET button (
).
9 Use the trackball to trace the outline of the waveform.
362 Cardiac measurement
Chapter 5
10 Place the caliper on the ending point of the waveform, and press the SET button.
The measurement display looks like the following: Table 5-125: Systemic and pulmonic measurement items
Systemic diam
Measurement item
Sys diam
__._ cm
Systemic diameter
Systemic VTI
Sys VTI Sys Vmax
__._ cm __._ m/s
Measurement item Systemic flow VTI Systemic flow maximum velocity
Pulmonic diam Pulmo diam __._ cm
Measurement item Pulmonic flow diameter
Pulmonic VTI
Measurement item
Pulmo VTI
__._ cm
Pulmonic flow VTI
Pulmo Vmax __._ m/s
Pulmonicic flow maximum velocity
When you have measured the above items, the following results appear:
Qp/Qs
__._
Pulmonic to Systemic flow ratio
MPI (Myocardial Performance Index)
It is said that the MPI value increases in the case of cardiac failure. To calculate the MPI of right and left heart, measure the following items.
1 LV MPI: MV c-o time (the mitral valve closing to opening time), LVET
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 363
2 RV MPI: TV c-o time (tricuspid valve closing to opening time), RVET To complete the procedure 1 Press the D button, and record the atrioventricular valve flow of left or right heart. 2 Press the FREEZE button and the CALCS button. 3 Select the MPI button on the touch panel, and tap MV c-o time or TV c-o time.
To see the MPI tab, tap the button. 4 Use the calipers to measure the time between MVC/TVC to MVO/TVO (the interval from closing to opening
of the atrioventricular valve).
5 Record the ejection flow of left or right heart, and press the FREEZE button and the CALCS button. 6 On the touch panel, tap LVET or RVET. 7 Use the calipers to measure each ejection time.
The measurement display looks like the following:
Table 5-126: MPI measurement items
MV c-o time
c-o time
__
Measurement item ms MV closing to opening time
364 Cardiac measurement
Chapter 5
LVET
Measurement item
ET
__
ms LV ejection time
When you measure the above two items, the following item show.
LV MPI
LV MPI
__._
Measurement item LV myocardial performance index
TV c-o time
c-o time
__
Measurement item ms Tricuspid valve closing to opening time
RVET ET
Measurement item
__
ms RV ejection time
When you measure the above two items, the following item show.
RV MPI
RV MPI
__._
Measurement item RV myocardial performance index
Worksheet/Report
To display the Report screen of the cardiac measurement, press the FREEZE button to freeze the image and then operate the switch menu button.
Figure 5-35: Study Information screen
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 365
Figure 5-36: Exam Information screen
Figure 5-37: Cardiac_Report screen
Switching the page of Report screen
If the report results cannot be displayed within one page, the number of the report pages is displayed at the lower side of the touch panel.
To switch the page, operate the paddle button under the Report Page.
Switching to the Worksheet
Select the Worksheet button at the right side of the touch panel.
Switching between Multiple Reports
Tap a report displayed on the touch panel.
Editing Values on Worksheet
Tap the category you want to edit to display the Worksheet edition screen for cardiac measurement.
On the Worksheet screen, the measurement values (measurement results) of the cardiac measurement are displayed. The displayed values can also be corrected or deleted.
In addition, measurement items to be used and displayed can be specified on the Worksheet screen.
Specifying information items on the Study / Exam Information screen
Information items to be displayed on the screens such as the Report screen can be specified by placing a check mark in the check box on the left-hand side of each information item on the worksheet.
Specifying measurement items for the Cardiac measurement
The measurement items for the Cardiac measurement can be specified by placing a check mark in the check box on the left-hand side of each measurement item on the worksheet.
Editing and saving the content of Worksheet
While editing, characters are indicated in red and an asterisk is displayed.
366 Cardiac measurement
Chapter 5
After the content is edited, tap Update and then operate the switch menu button 2.
When the changes are reflected, characters are indicated in white.
Switching the page of Worksheet
If the content of the worksheet cannot be displayed within one page, the number of the worksheet pages is displayed at the lower side of the touch panel.
To switch the page, operate the paddle switch under Worksheet Page. To switch the block in the Worksheet, tap Select Edit Block and then operate the switch menu button 3.
Setting the value to be displayed at the time of continuous measurement
Tap Value and then operate the switch menu button 2 to select the measurement value to be displayed on the Worksheet from among the following.
Average value of the continuous measurement
Value of the last measurement
Switching to the Report screen
Select the Report button at the right side of the touch panel.
Terms and abbreviations
Table 5-127: Terms and abbreviations expanded
Abbreviation
Definition
2ch 4ch a A dur A dur(PV-MV) A endo A epi A vel A/E AcT
apical two-chamber view apical four-chamber view Left Ventricular Length (Apical-Papillary Muscle) A wave duration Time interval difference of A duration (PVA - MV A) Endocardial Area Epicardial Area A velocity A vel to E vel ratio Acceleration time
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 367
Table 5-127: Terms and abbreviations expanded
Abbreviation AcT/ET Alias vel AoD AoD val AR AR FR AR radius AR RF AR RV ARed V AV ann AVA (Planimetry) AVA PV AVA VTI AVAI VTI AVAI AVAI PV BSA CA amp. CE amp. CI CO d DcT diast
Definition AcT to ET ratio Aliasing velocity Aortic diameter Valsalva diameter Aortic regurgitation AR flow rate AR PISA radius AR regurgitant fraction AR regurgitant volume AR end-diastolic velocity Aortic annulus diameter Aortic valve area by planimetry AVA by continuity equation by peak velocity AVA by continuity equation by VTI AVA index by continuity equation by VTI Aortic valve area index AVA index by continuity equation by peak velocity Body surface area C-A amplitude C-E amplitude Cardiac index Cardiac output Left ventricular length (PM-MVA) Deceleration time diastole
368 Cardiac measurement
Chapter 5
Table 5-127: Terms and abbreviations expanded
Abbreviation E vel E/A EF EF slope EPSS ERO ET FS HR IVSd IVSs LA LA area, max LA area, min LA/AO LAD LAL LAL max LAL max diff LAL min LAL min diff LAT LAV max LAV min LAVI max
Definition E velocity E vel to A vel ratio Ejection fraction Mitral valve E-F slope E point to septal separation Effective regurgitant orifice area Ejection time Factional shortening Heart rate Interventricular septum thickness, end diastole Interventricular septum thickness, end systole Left atrial LA area, maximum LA area, minimum LAD to AoD ratio LA diameter LA longitudinal dimension LA maximum length LA length difference, maximum LA minimum length LA length difference, minimum LA transverse dimension LA maximum volume LA minimum volume LA maximum volume index
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 369
Table 5-127: Terms and abbreviations expanded
Abbreviation LAVI min LV LV area, d LV area, s LVDd LVDs LVEDV LVEDVI LVESV LVESVI LVLd LVLd diff LVLs LVLs diff LVM LVMI LVOT LVOT vel LVPWd LPWFT LVPWs MA distA MA distB MnPG MnV
Definition LA minimum volume index Left ventricular LV area, end diastole LV area, end systole LV dimension, end diastole LV dimension, end systole LV end-diastolic volume LV end-diastolic volume index LV end-systolic volume LV end-systolic volume index LV length, end diastole LV length difference, end diastole LV length, end systole LV length difference, end systole LV mass LV mass index LV outflow tract LVOT velocity LV posterior wall thickness, end diastole LV posterior fractional thickening LV posterior wall thickness, end systole Mitral annular distance A Mitral annular distance B Mean pressure gradient Mean velocity
370 Cardiac measurement
Chapter 5
Table 5-127: Terms and abbreviations expanded
Abbreviation MPI MR MR FR MR PV MR radius MR RF MR RV MR Vmax MS angle MS PGmax MS radius MS Vmax MV MV c-o time MVA MVann MVann SV PA PA PGmax PA Vmax PAP ed PAP sys PEP PEP/ET PG
Definition Myocardial performance index Mitral regurgitation MR flow rate MR peak velocity MR PISA radius MR regurgitant fraction MR regurgitant volume MR maximum velocity Mitral leaflet opening angle Mitral stenosis maximum pressure gradient Mitral stenosis flow PISA radius Mitral stenosis maximum velocity Mitral valve MV closing to opening time Mitral valve area Mitral annulus Stroke volume by MVann Pulmonary artery PA maximum pressure gradient PA maximum velocity PA pressure at end diastole PA pressure at systole Pre ejection period PEP to ET ratio Pressure gradient
FC1 User Guide
Cardiac measurement 371
Table 5-127: Terms and abbreviations expanded
Abbreviation PHT PPG PR PR PGmax PR Vmax PRed PG PRed vel Pulmonic diam Pulmonic VTI PV PV Sys. Frac. PVA PVA dur PVD PVS Qp/Qs RA RA press RAL RAT RV RV FAC RVD RVd area RVDd
Definition Pressure half time Peak pressure gradient Pulmonic regurgitation PR maximum pressure gradient PR maximum velocity PR end-diastolic pressure gradient PR end-diastolic velocity Pulmonic diameter Pulmonic flow VTI Pulmonary vein PV systolic filling fraction PV A wave PVA duration PV diastolic wave PV systolic wave Pulmonic to Systemic flow ratio Right atrial Estimated right atrial pressure RA longitudinal dimension RA transverse dimension Right ventricular RV fractional area change RV dimension, end diastole (4ch) RV area, end diastole RV diameter, diastole
372 Cardiac measurement
Chapter 5
Table 5-127: Terms and abbreviations expanded
Abbreviation RVOT RVs area S/D SI SV sys Systemic diam Systemic VTI t TR TR PGmax TR Vmax TV TV c-o time VTI
Definition RV outflow tract RV area, end systole PVS velocity to PVD velocity ratio Stroke index Stroke volume systole Systemic diameter Systemic flow VTI Mean LV myocardial thickness Tricuspid regurgitation TR maximum pressure gradient TR maximum velocity Tricuspid valve TV closing to opening time Velocity time integral
Vascular measurement
Vascular measurement has several categories: Carotid Artery Measurement, Upper Extremity Arterial, Upper Extremity Venous, Lower Extremity Arterial, and Lower Extremity Venous.
Auto IMT (intima-media thickness) measurement (Optional) is included in Carotid Artery Measurement.
FC1 User Guide
Vascular measurement 373
Mode measurement functions
The following tables describe the measurement functions of each mode. Table 5-128: B mode measurement functions
Measurement item
Description
Carotid artery measurement Upper and lower extremity vascular measurement
Distance Area %Steno Dist %Steno Area IMT Auto IMT
Distance Area %Steno Dist %Steno Area
Table 5-129: D mode measurement functions
Measurement item Carotid artery measurement
Description
PSV, EDV MnV PI ,RI
PSV, EDV MnV PI, RI
Remarks (Right · Left)
(Right · Left) (prox. · mid. · dist.)
Remarks (Right · Left) (Right · Left) (prox. · mid. · dist.)
374 Vascular measurement
Chapter 5
Built-in mode measurement functions
Table 5-130: B mode, carotid artery measurement
Measurement item CCA (Right · Left) -prox. -mid. -dist.
ECA (Right · Left) -prox. -mid. -dist.
Display item
Dist Area
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
IMT1 IMT2 IMT3
Max Mean Len
Dist Area
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
IMT1 IMT2 IMT3 Max Mean Len
Unit
mm mm2
% mm mm
% mm2 mm2
mm mm mm mm mm mm
mm mm2
% mm mm
% mm2 mm2
mm mm mm mm mm mm
Remarks CCA (Common Carotid Artery) (Based on Dist1 and Dist2)
(Based on Area1 and Area2)
(Based on IMT1 to 3) (Based on IMT1 to 3) Vessel diameter ECA (External Carotid Artery) (Based on Dist1 and Dist2)
(Based on Area1 and Area2)
(Based on IMT1 to 3) (Based on IMT1 to 3) Vessel diameter
FC1 User Guide
Vascular measurement 375
Table 5-130: B mode, carotid artery measurement
Measurement item ICA (Right · Left) -prox. -mid. -dist.
Vert A (Right · Left) -prox. -mid. -dist.
Display item
Dist Area
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
IMT1 IMT2 IMT3
Max Mean Len
Dist Area
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
IMT1 IMT2 IMT3
Max Mean Len
Unit
mm mm2
% mm mm
% mm2 mm2
mm mm mm mm mm mm
mm mm2
% mm mm
% mm2 mm2
mm mm mm mm mm mm
Remarks ICA (Internal Carotid Artery) (Based on Dist1 and Dist2)
(Based on Area1 and Area2)
(Based on IMT1 to 3) (Based on IMT1 to 3) Vessel diameter Vert A (Vertebral Artery) (Based on Dist1 and Dist2)
(Based on Area1 and Area2)
(Based on IMT1 to 3) (Based on IMT1 to 3) Vessel diameter
376 Vascular measurement
Chapter 5
Table 5-130: B mode, carotid artery measurement
Measurement item Subclav A (Right · Left) -prox. -mid. -dist.
Innom A (Right · Left) -prox. -mid. -dist.
Display item
Dist Area
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
IMT1 IMT2 IMT3
Max Mean Len
Dist Area
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
IMT1 IMT2 IMT3
Max Mean Len
Unit
mm mm2
% mm mm
% mm2 mm2
mm mm mm mm mm mm
mm mm2
% mm mm
% mm2 mm2
mm mm mm mm mm mm
Remarks Subclav A (Subclavian Artery) (Based on Dist1 and Dist2)
(Based on Area1 and Area2)
(Based on IMT1 to 3) (Based on IMT1 to 3) Vessel diameter Innom A (Innominate Artery) (Based on Dist1 and Dist2)
(Based on Area1 and Area2)
(Based on IMT1 to 3) (Based on IMT1 to 3) Vessel diameter
FC1 User Guide
Vascular measurement 377
Table 5-130: B mode, carotid artery measurement
Measurement item
Display item
Unit Remarks
BIF (Right · Left)
Dist
mm
BIF (Bifurcation)
Area
mm2
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
%
(Based on Dist1 and Dist2)
mm
mm
Auto IMT (Right · Left) Far Near
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
Max Mean Width
% mm2 mm2
mm mm mm
(Based on Area1 and Area2)
Plaque (Right · Left)
Dist
mm
Table 5-131: B mode, upper extremity artery measurement
Measurement item
AA (Right · Left)
Result
Dist Area
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
Unit
mm mm2
%mm m mm
% mm2 mm2
Remarks Axilllary artery (Based on Dist1 and Dist2)
(Based on Area1 and Area2)
378 Vascular measurement
Chapter 5
Table 5-131: B mode, upper extremity artery measurement
Measurement item BA (Right · Left)
DBA (Right · Left)
Bas A (Right · Left)
RA (Right · Left)
Result
Dist Area
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
Dist Area
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
Dist Area
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
Dist Area
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
Unit
mm mm2
% mm mm
% mm2 mm2
mm mm2
% mm mm
% mm2 mm2
mm mm2
% mm mm
% mm2 mm2
mm mm2
% mm mm
% mm2 mm2
Remarks Brachial artery (Based on Dist1 and Dist2) (Based on Area1 and Area2)
Brachial artery (Based on Dist1 and Dist2) (Based on Area1 and Area2)
Basilic artery (Based on Dist1 and Dist2) (Based on Area1 and Area2)
Radial artery (Based on Dist1 and Dist2) (Based on Area1 and Area2)
FC1 User Guide
Vascular measurement 379
Table 5-131: B mode, upper extremity artery measurement
Measurement item UA (Right · Left)
SPA (Right · Left)
Graft (Right · Left)
Result
Dist Area
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
Dist Area
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
Dist Area
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
Unit
mm mm2
% mm mm
% mm2 mm2
mm mm2
% mm mm
% mm2 mm2
mm mm2
% mm mm
% mm2 mm2
Remarks Ulnar artery (Based on Dist1 and Dist2) (Based on Area1 and Area2)
Superficial Palmar Arches artery (Based on Dist1 and Dist2) (Based on Area1 and Area2)
Graft (Based on Dist1 and Dist2) (Based on Area1 and Area2)
380 Vascular measurement
Chapter 5
Table 5-132: B mode, upper extremity venous measurement
Measurement item IJV (Right · Left)
ScV (Right · Left)
AV (Right · Left)
BV (Right · Left)
Result
Dist Area
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
Dist Area
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
Dist Area
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
Dist Area
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
Unit
mm mm2
%mm m mm
% mm2 mm2
mm mm2
% mm mm
% mm2 mm2
mm mm2
% mm mm
% mm2 mm2
mm mm2
% mm mm
% mm2 mm2
Remarks Internal Jugular vein (Based on Dist1 and Dist2) (Based on Area1 and Area2)
Subclavian vein (Based on Dist1 and Dist2) (Based on Area1 and Area2)
Axillary vein (Based on Dist1 and Dist2) (Based on Area1 and Area2)
Brachial vein (Based on Dist1 and Dist2) (Based on Area1 and Area2)
FC1 User Guide
Vascular measurement 381
Table 5-132: B mode, upper extremity venous measurement
Measurement item RV (Right · Left)
UV (Right · Left)
UCV (Right · Left) -prox. -mid. -dist.
FCV (Right · Left) -prox. -mid. -dist.
Result
Dist Area
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
Dist Area
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
Dist Area
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
Dist Area
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
Unit
mm mm2
% mm mm
% mm2 mm2
mm mm2
% mm mm
% mm2 mm2
mm mm2
% mm mm
% mm2 mm2
mm mm2
% mm mm
% mm2 mm2
Remarks Radial vein (Based on Dist1 and Dist2) (Based on Area1 and Area2)
Ulnar vein (Based on Dist1 and Dist2) (Based on Area1 and Area2)
Upper Cephalic vein (Based on Dist1 and Dist2) (Based on Area1 and Area2)
Forearm Cephalic vein (Based on Dist1 and Dist2) (Based on Area1 and Area2)
382 Vascular measurement
Chapter 5
Table 5-132: B mode, upper extremity venous measurement
Measurement item
Result
Unit Remarks
UBasV (Right · Left) -prox. -mid. -dist.
Dist Area
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
mm mm2
% mm mm
Upper Basilic vein (Based on Dist1 and Dist2)
FBasV (Right · Left) -prox. -mid. -dist.
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
Dist Area
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
% mm2 mm2
mm mm2
% mm mm
(Based on Area1 and Area2) Forearm Basilic vein (Based on Dist1 and Dist2)
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
% mm2 mm2
(Based on Area1 and Area2)
Table 5-133: B mode, lower extremity artery measurement
Measurement item
CIA (Right · Left)
Result
Dist Area
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
Unit
mm mm2
%mm m mm
% mm2 mm2
Remarks Common Iliac artery (Based on Dist1 and Dist2)
(Based on Area1 and Area2)
FC1 User Guide
Vascular measurement 383
Table 5-133: B mode, lower extremity artery measurement
Measurement item EIA (Right · Left)
CFA (Right · Left)
DFA (Right · Left)
SFA (Right · Left) -prox. -mid. -dist.
Result
Dist Area
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
Dist Area
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
Dist Area
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
Dist Area
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
Unit
mm mm2
% mm mm
% mm2 mm2
mm mm2
% mm mm
% mm2 mm2
mm mm2
% mm mm
% mm2 mm2
mm mm2
% mm mm
% mm2 mm2
Remarks External Iliac artery (Based on Dist1 and Dist2) (Based on Area1 and Area2)
Common Femoral artery (Based on Dist1 and Dist2) (Based on Area1 and Area2)
Deep Femoral artery (Based on Dist1 and Dist2) (Based on Area1 and Area2)
Superficial Femoral artery (Based on Dist1 and Dist2) (Based on Area1 and Area2)
384 Vascular measurement
Chapter 5
Table 5-133: B mode, lower extremity artery measurement
Measurement item PopA (Right · Left)
ATA (Right · Left)
PerA (Right · Left)
PTA (Right · Left)
Result
Dist Area
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
Dist Area
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
Dist Area
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
Dist Area
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
Unit
mm mm2
% mm mm
% mm2 mm2
mm mm2
% mm mm
% mm2 mm2
mm mm2
% mm mm
% mm2 mm2
mm mm2
% mm mm
% mm2 mm2
Remarks Popliteal artery (Based on Dist1 and Dist2) (Based on Area1 and Area2)
Anterior Tibial artery (Based on Dist1 and Dist2) (Based on Area1 and Area2)
Perineal artery (Based on Dist1 and Dist2) (Based on Area1 and Area2)
Posterior Tibial artery (Based on Dist1 and Dist2) (Based on Area1 and Area2)
FC1 User Guide
Vascular measurement 385
Table 5-133: B mode, lower extremity artery measurement
Measurement item
Result
Unit Remarks
DPA (Right · Left)
Dist
mm
Dorsalis Pedis artery
Area
mm2
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
%
(Based on Dist1 and Dist2)
mm
mm
IIA (Right · Left)
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
Dist Area
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
% mm2 mm2
mm mm2
% mm mm
(Based on Area1 and Area2) Internal Iliac artery (Based on Dist1 and Dist2)
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
% mm2 mm2
(Based on Area1 and Area2)
Table 5-134: B mode, lower extremity venous measurement
Measurement item
CIV (Right · Left)
Result
Dist Area
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
Unit
mm mm2
%mm m mm
% mm2 mm2
Remarks Common Iliac vein (Based on Dist1 and Dist2)
(Based on Area1 and Area2)
386 Vascular measurement
Chapter 5
Table 5-134: B mode, lower extremity venous measurement
Measurement item EIV (Right · Left)
CFV (Right · Left)
PopV (Right · Left)
ATV (Right · Left)
Result
Dist Area
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
Dist Area
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
Dist Area
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
Dist Area
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
Unit
mm mm2
% mm mm
% mm2 mm2
mm mm2
% mm mm
% mm2 mm2
mm mm2
% mm mm
% mm2 mm2
mm mm2
% mm mm
% mm2 mm2
Remarks External Iliac vein (Based on Dist1 and Dist2) (Based on Area1 and Area2)
Common Femoral vein (Based on Dist1 and Dist2) (Based on Area1 and Area2)
Popliteal vein (Based on Dist1 and Dist2) (Based on Area1 and Area2)
Anterior Tibial vein (Based on Dist1 and Dist2) (Based on Area1 and Area2)
FC1 User Guide
Vascular measurement 387
Table 5-134: B mode, lower extremity venous measurement
Measurement item PerV (Right · Left)
PTV (Right · Left)
DFV (Right · Left)
IIV (Right · Left)
Result
Dist Area
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
Dist Area
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
Dist Area
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
Dist Area
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
Unit
mm mm2
% mm mm
% mm2 mm2
mm mm2
% mm mm
% mm2 mm2
mm mm2
% mm mm
% mm2 mm2
mm mm2
% mm mm
% mm2 mm2
Remarks Perineal vein (Based on Dist1 and Dist2) (Based on Area1 and Area2)
Posterior Tibial artery (Based on Dist1 and Dist2) (Based on Area1 and Area2)
Deep Femoris vein (Based on Dist1 and Dist2) (Based on Area1 and Area2)
Internal Iliac vein (Based on Dist1 and Dist2) (Based on Area1 and Area2)
388 Vascular measurement
Chapter 5
Table 5-134: B mode, lower extremity venous measurement
Measurement item
Result
Unit
GSV (Right · Left) -prox. -mid. -dist.
LSV (Right · Left) -prox. -mid. -dist.
SFV (Right · Left) -prox. -mid. -dist.
Dist Area
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
Dist Area
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
Dist Area
%Steno-Dist Dist1 Dist2
%Steno-Area Area1 Area2
mm mm2
% mm mm
% mm2 mm2
mm mm2
% mm mm
% mm2 mm2
mm mm2
% mm mm
% mm2 mm2
Table 5-135: D mode, carotid artery measurement
Remarks Great Saphenous vein (Based on Dist1 and Dist2) (Based on Area1 and Area2)
Lesser Saphenous vein (Based on Dist1 and Dist2) (Based on Area1 and Area2)
Superficial Femoral vein (Based on Dist1 and Dist2) (Based on Area1 and Area2)
Measurement item
CCA (Right · Left) -prox. -mid. -dist.
Display item
PSV EDV MnV PI RI S/D
Unit
cm/s cm/s cm/s ----
Remarks Common Carotid Artery
FC1 User Guide
Vascular measurement 389
Table 5-135: D mode, carotid artery measurement
Measurement item ECA (Right · Left) -prox. -mid. -dist.
ICA (Right · Left) -prox. -mid. -dist.
Vert A (Right · Left) -prox. -mid. -dist.
Subclav A
Innom A (Right · Left)
BIF (Right · Left)
Display item
PSV EDV MnV PI RI S/D
PSV EDV MnV PI RI S/D
PSV EDV MnV PI RI S/D
PSV EDV MnV PI RI S/D
PSV EDV MnV PI RI S/D
PSV EDV MnV PI RI S/D
Unit
cm/s cm/s cm/s ----
cm/s cm/s cm/s ----
cm/s cm/s cm/s ----
cm/s cm/s cm/s ----
cm/s cm/s cm/s ----
cm/s cm/s cm/s ----
Remarks External Carotid Artery Internal Carotid Artery Vertebral Artery Subclavian Artery Innominate Artery BIF (Bifurcation)
390 Vascular measurement
Chapter 5
Table 5-136: D mode, upper extremity artery measurement
Measurement item ScA (Right · Left)
AA (Right · Left)
BA (Right · Left)
DBA (Right · Left)
Bas A (Right · Left)
RA
Display item
PSV EDV MnV PI RI S/D
PSV EDV MnV PI RI S/D
PSV EDV MnV PI RI S/D
PSV EDV MnV PI RI S/D
PSV EDV MnV PI RI S/D
PSV EDV MnV PI RI S/D
Unit
cm/s cm/s cm/s ----
cm/s cm/s cm/s ----
cm/s cm/s cm/s ----
cm/s cm/s cm/s ----
cm/s cm/s cm/s ----
cm/s cm/s cm/s ----
Remarks Subclavian Artery Axillary artery Brachial artery Deep Brachial artery Basilic artery Radial artery
FC1 User Guide
Vascular measurement 391
Table 5-136: D mode, upper extremity artery measurement
Measurement item UA (Right · Left)
SPA (Right · Left)
Display item
PSV EDV MnV PI RI S/D
PSV EDV MnV PI RI S/D
Unit
cm/s cm/s cm/s ----
cm/s cm/s cm/s ----
Remarks Ulnar artery
Superficial Palmar Arches artery
Graft (Right · Left) -prox. -mid. -dist. -outflow -inflow
PSV
cm/s
Graft
EDV
cm/s
MnV
cm/s
PI
--
RI
--
S/D
--
Table 5-137: D mode, upper extremity venous measurement
Measurement item
Display item
Unit
Remarks
UCV (Right · Left) -prox. -mid. -dist.
FCV (Right · Left) -prox. -mid. -dist.
UBasV (Right · Left) -prox. -mid. -dist.
MnV
cm/s
Upper Cephalic vein
MnV
cm/s
Forearm Cephalic vein
MnV
cm/s
Upper Basilic vein
392 Vascular measurement
Chapter 5
Table 5-137: D mode, upper extremity venous measurement
Measurement item
Display item
Unit
FBasV (Right · Left) -prox. -mid. -dist.
MnV
cm/s
IJV (Right · Left)
MnV
cm/s
SCV (Right · Left)
MnV
cm/s
AV (Right · Left)
MnV
cm/s
BV (Right · Left)
MnV
cm/s
RV (Right · Left)
MnV
cm/s
UV (Right · Left)
MnV
cm/s
Table 5-138: Lower extremity artery measurement
Remarks Forearm Basilic vein
Internal Jugular vein Subclavian vein Axillary vein Brachial vein Radial vein Ulnar vein
Measurement item
Display item
Unit
Remarks
CIA (Right · Left)
EIA (Right · Left)
PSV
cm/s
Common Iliac artery
EDV
cm/s
MnV
cm/s
PI
--
RI
--
S/D
--
PSV
cm/s
External Iliac Artery
EDV
cm/s
MnV
cm/s
PI
--
RI
--
S/D
--
FC1 User Guide
Vascular measurement 393
Table 5-138: Lower extremity artery measurement
Measurement item CFA (Right · Left) -prox. -mid. -dist.
DFA (Right · Left) -prox. -mid. -dist.
SFA (Right · Left) -prox. -mid. -dist.
PopA (Right · Left)
ATA (Right · Left)
PerA (Right · Left)
Display item
PSV EDV MnV PI RI S/D
PSV EDV MnV PI RI S/D
PSV EDV MnV PI RI S/D
PSV EDV MnV PI RI S/D
PSV EDV MnV PI RI S/D
PSV EDV MnV PI RI S/D
Unit
cm/s cm/s cm/s ----
cm/s cm/s cm/s ----
cm/s cm/s cm/s ----
cm/s cm/s cm/s ----
cm/s cm/s cm/s ----
cm/s cm/s cm/s ----
Remarks Common Femoral artery Deep Femoral artery Superficial Femoral artery Popliteal artery Anterior Tibial artery Perineal artery
394 Vascular measurement
Chapter 5
Table 5-138: Lower extremity artery measurement
Measurement item
Display item
Unit
PTA (Right · Left)
PSV
cm/s
EDV
cm/s
MnV
cm/s
PI
--
RI
--
S/D
--
DPA (Right · Left)
PSV
cm/s
EDV
cm/s
MnV
cm/s
PI
--
RI
--
S/D
--
IIA (Right · Left)
PSV
cm/s
EDV
cm/s
MnV
cm/s
PI
--
RI
--
S/D
--
Table 5-139: Lower extremity venous measurement
Measurement item
CIV (Right · Left)
EIV (Right · Left)
CFV (Right · Left)
PopV (Right · Left)
PTV (Right · Left)
PerV (Right · Left)
ATV (Right · Left)
Display item MnV MnV MnV MnV MnV MnV MnV
Unit cm/s cm/s cm/s cm/s cm/s cm/s cm/s
Remarks Posterial Tibial artery
Dorsalis Pedis artery
Internal Iliac artery
Remarks Common Iliac vein External Iliac vein Common Femoralcvein Popliteal vein Posterior Tibial vein Perineal vein Anterior Tibial vein
FC1 User Guide
Vascular measurement 395
Table 5-139: Lower extremity venous measurement
Measurement item
IIV (Right · Left)
DFV (Right · Left)
GSV (Right · Left) -prox. -mid. -dist.
LSV (Right · Left) -prox. -mid. -dist.
SFV (Right · Left) -prox. -mid. -dist.
Display item MnV MnV MnV
Unit cm/s cm/s cm/s
MnV
cm/s
MnV
cm/s
Remarks Internal Iliac vein Deep Femoral vein Great Saphenous vein
Lesser Saphenous vein
Superficial Femoral vein
2D (B) mode
Vascular measurement on a B-mode image
This section explains how to use the measurement functions listed in "Built-in mode measurement functions" on page 375 for B mode. In B mode, you can measure the following:
Vessel diameter (Distance) Area (Area) Stenosis ratio (%Steno Distance and %Steno Area) For the carotid artery, you can also measure intima-media thickness (IMT).
396 Vascular measurement
Chapter 5
For each vessel, you measure regions such as right/left (Rt./Lt.), and proximal/middle/distal (prox/mid/dist). The displayed measurement menu varies, depending on the selected vessel.
Measuring distance
This section explains the procedure for measuring distance. As an example, the procedure uses the right common carotid artery measurement (Rt.CCA). Note that you must have the Carotid preset selected to see the Rt. CCA measurement.
To measure distance
1 In 2D (B) mode, on the touch panel, tap the Rt.CCA button of CCA.
2 Display the longitudinal section of Rt.CCA.
3 On the touch panel, tap Distance.
A caliper mark (+) appears on the monitor.
4 When the measurement regions such as prox, mid, and dist show on the measurement menu, tap the button for the desired region.
You do not need to measure all the regions.
5 Measure the diameter of the right common carotid artery.
6 Press the SET button (
).
The Rt.CCA distance measurement is finalized.
FC1 User Guide
Vascular measurement 397
The measurement display looks like the following: Table 5-140: Rt.CCA distance measurement item
Rt.CCA
Measurement item
Dist
__._ mm
Measuring area
This section explains the procedure for measuring area. As an example, the procedure uses the right common carotid artery measurement (Rt.CCA). Note that you must have the Carotid preset selected to see the Rt. CCA measurement.
To measure area
1 On the touch panel, tap the 2D (B) tab.
2 Select the Rt.CCA button of CCA.
3 Display the transverse section of Rt.CCA.
4 On the touch panel, tap the Area button.
A caliper mark (+) appears on the monitor.
5 When the measurement regions such as prox, mid, and dist show on the measurement menu, tap the button for the desired region.
You do not need to measure all the regions.
6 Trace the lumen of the right common carotid artery.
You can trace with either the Free trace (manual tracing) or the Ellipse measure tool. To switch to Free or Ellipse, press the switch menu button 2 (the rocker button under Measure tool).
398 Vascular measurement
Chapter 5
For information on using these tools, see "Trace" on page 223 and "Ellipse" on page 228.
7 Press the SET button (
).
The area measurement of Rt.CCA is finalized.
The measurement display looks like the following: Table 5-141: Rt.CCA area measurement item
Rt.CCA
Measurement item
Area
__._ mm
Measuring %Stenosis (stenosis ratio)
You can calculate the stenosis ratio based on either of the following: Diameter (%Steno Dist) Cross-sectional area (%Steno Area)
Calculating stenosis ration based on %Steno Distance
The following procedure uses Rt.CCA as an example. Note that you must have the Carotid preset selected to see the Rt. CCA measurement. To measure the stenosis ratio based on diameter 1 On the touch panel, tap the 2D (B) tab. 2 Select the Rt.CCA button of CCA.
The touch panel screen switches. 3 Display the longitudinal section of Rt.CCA. 4 On the touch panel, tap %Steno Distance.
For more information on measuring distance for a stenosis ratio, see "%Stenosis (Stenosis ratio)" on page 253. A caliper mark (+) appears on the monitor.
FC1 User Guide
Vascular measurement 399
5 When the measurement regions such as prox, mid, and dist show on the measurement menu, tap the button for the desired region. You do not need to measure all the regions.
6 Measure the diameter of the right common carotid artery. 7 Measure the diameter of the stenotic segment.
8 Press the SET button (
).
The %Steno Distance measurement of Rt.CCA is finalized.
The measurement display looks like the following:
Table 5-142: Rt.CCA steno distance measurement items
Rt.CCA Dist1 Dist2 Steno
Measurement item __._ mm __._ mm __._ %
Calculating stenosis ratio based on %Steno Area
The following procedure uses Rt.CCA as an example. Note that you must have the Carotid preset selected to see the Rt. CCA measurement.
To measure the stenosis ratio based on area
1 On the touch panel, tap the 2D (B) tab.
2 Select the Rt.CCA button of CCA.
3 Display the transverse section of Rt.CCA.
4 On the touch panel, tap %Steno Area.
For more information on measuring area for a stenosis ratio, see "Calculating stenosis ratio based on %Steno Area" on page 400.
A caliper mark (+) appears on the monitor.
400 Vascular measurement
Chapter 5
5 When the measurement regions such as prox, mid, and dist show on the measurement menu, tap the button for the desired region.
You do not need to measure all the regions.
6 Trace the lumen of the right common carotid artery.
7 Trace the area of the stenotic segment.
You can trace with either the Free trace (manual tracing) or the Ellipse measure tool. To switch to Free or Ellipse, press the switch menu button 2 (the rocker button under Measure tool). For information on using these tools, see "Trace" on page 223 and "Ellipse" on page 228.
8 Press the SET button (
).
The %Steno Area measurement of Rt.CCA is finalized.
The measurement display looks like the following:
Table 5-143: Rt.CCA steno area measurement items
Rt.CCA Area1 Area2
Measurement item __._ mm2 __._ mm2
FC1 User Guide
Vascular measurement 401
Table 5-143: Rt.CCA steno area measurement items
Rt.CCA Steno
__._ %
Measurement item
Measuring IMT
This section explains the procedure for measuring the IMT (intima-media thickness). As an example, the procedure uses the right common carotid artery measurement (Rt.CCA). Note that you must have the Carotid preset selected to see the Rt. CCA measurement.
To measure IMT
1 On the touch panel, tap the B tab.
2 Select the Rt.CCA button of CCA.
3 Display the longitudinal section of Rt.CCA.
4 On the touch panel, tap IMT. An auxiliary line appears.
5 With the trackball, move the line, and then, with the multi dial (
), adjust its angle.
6 Press the Set button
.
A caliper mark (+) appears on the monitor.
7 Measure the most-thickened part of the right common carotid artery.
This measurement is IMT1.
8 Measure the thickness of the right common carotid artery at the peripheral side.
This measurement is IMT2.
9 Measure the thickness of the right common carotid artery at the center side.
This measurement is IMT3.
10 Measure the vessel diameter.
402 Vascular measurement
Chapter 5
All measurements are finalized. Table 5-144: Rt.CCA IMT measurement items
Rt.CCA
Measurement item
IMT1 IMT2 IMT3 Max Mean Diam Width
__._ mm IMT at most thickened part
__._ mm IMT at periphery side
__._ mm IMT at center side
__._ mm Maximum IMT value
__._ mm Mean IMT value
__
mm Vessel diameter
__
mm Width of auxiliary line
Auto IMT (intima-media thickness) measurement (Optional)
WARNING
To ensure high quality images, all patient images must be obtained by qualified and trained individuals.
To avoid patient injury, IMT results should not be used as a sole diagnostic tool. All IMT results should be interpreted in conjunction with other clinical information or risk factors.
To avoid measurement errors, all measurements must be of the common carotid artery (CCA). This tool is not intended for measuring the bulb or the internal carotid artery (ICA).
To avoid incorrect calculations, verify that the patient information, date, and time settings are accurate.
To avoid misdiagnosis or erroneously influencing the results of patient examination, start a new patient information form before starting a new patient examination and performing calculations. Starting a new patient information form clears the previous patient's data. The previous patient's data will be combined with the current patient if calculations and examinations are performed without creating a new patient information form. For the procedure to create a new patient information form, see "Entering patient information" on page 124.
FC1 User Guide
Vascular measurement 403
The transducers and presets that can be used with Auto IMT (intima-media thickness) measurement (Optional) are as follows.
Probe Carotid HFL38xp
HFL50xp
L25xp
L38xp
To automatically measure IMT
1 Freeze the B-mode image and press the CALCS button.
Note
In order to perform correct measurement, an image with the direction of the common carotid artery (CCA) parallel to the body surface must be obtained before freezing the image.
2 Select the Rt.IMT Far1 button.
3 Use the trackball to place the IMT tool on top of the region of interest.
4 Adjust the tool and edit it as necessary. For more information about the IMT tool, see "IMT tool menu" on page 405.
5 Press the SET button (
).
Rt.IMT Far1 measurement is confirmed.
The measurement values are as shown in the table below. Table 5-145: Rt.IMT Far1 measurement items
Rt.IMT Far1 (right intimamedia thickness far 1)
Max
__._ mm
Measurement item Max. IMT value
404 Vascular measurement
Chapter 5
Table 5-145: Rt.IMT Far1 measurement items
Rt.IMT Far1 (right intimamedia thickness far 1)
Mean
__._ mm
Width
__._ mm
Measurement item
Mean IMT value Measured width
Note
Because of ultrasound characteristics, normally IMT measurement of posterior wall is more accurate than IMT measurement of anterior wall. Anterior wall IMT measures the distance between the adventitia and the posterior edge of the lumen, while posterior wall IMT measures the distance between the lumen and the anterior edge of the adventitia. IMT Far: Measures the posterior wall IMT. IMT Near: Measures the anterior wall IMT.
IMT tool menu
You can select the following menu items while using the IMT tool.
Table 5-146: Description of menu items
Menu item Width Adven Lumen
Description
Adjusts the tool width in 1 mm increments. Rotate the multi dial to the right to increase the width, or to the left to decrease the width.
Adjusts the adventitia-media line. Rotate the dial menu button to the right to raise the line, or to the left to lower the line.
Adjusts the lumen-intima line. Rotate the dial menu button to the right to raise the line, or to the left to lower the line.
Note
Adven and Lumen IMT lines can be adjusted individually.
D mode
Measuring blood flow
As an example of the procedure for measuring blood flow, the procedure uses the right common carotid artery measurement (Rt.CCA; note that you must have the Carotid preset selected to see the Rt. CCA measurement). You can measure other vessels and regions in the same way. With this measurement item, you can measure the blood flow of CCA, ECA, ICA, VertA, Subclav A, Rt. Innom A, etc.
FC1 User Guide
Vascular measurement 405
The measurement regions of each vessel are as follows: Right (rt.) and left (lt.). Anterior (pre), proximal (prox), middle (mid), distal (dist), etc.
D mode displays the Doppler image of the common carotid artery. To measure blood flow 1 On the touch panel, tap the D tab. 2 Select the Rt.CCA button of CCA.
The touch panel screen switches.
3 Display the longitudinal section of Rt.CCA. 4 To measure PSV and EDV:
a Tap the PSV, EDV button.
b Place the caliper on the PSV point, and then press the SET button (
).
c Place the next caliper on the EDV point, and then press the SET button to finalize the measurement.
] 5 To measure MnV:
406 Vascular measurement
Chapter 5
a Tap the MnV button. b Use the caliper to trace the target waveform.
For measuring MnV, PI or RI, you can trace with either the Velocity Trace (manual tracing) or Auto Velocity Trace measure tool. To change to either Velocity Trace or Auto Velocity Trace, press the switch menu button 2 (the rocker button under Measure tool). For details on the procedure of each method, see "Velocity trace" on page 269. c Press the SET button. The waveform is displayed automatically, and the MnV value is calculated.
6 To measure PI or RI: a Tap the PI or RI button. b Use the caliper to trace the target waveform. c Press the SET button. The measurement is finalized, and the MnV, PI, RI and S/D values are calculated.
FC1 User Guide
Vascular measurement 407
The measurement display looks like the following: Table 5-147: Rt.CCA measurement items
Rt.CCA
Measurement item (PSV, EDV)
PSV
__._ m/s Peak systolic velocity
EDV
__._ m/s End-diastolic velocity
S/D
S/D
Rt.CCA t t (ET) HR MaxV MinV MnV S/D
Measurement item (MnV)
__._ ms Time between two points
__._ ms Ejection time
__._ bpm Heart rate
__._ m/s Maximum velocity
__._ m/s Minimum velocity
__._
Mean velocity
S/D ratio
beat Number of heartbeats
Rt.CCA t t (ET) HR MaxV MinV MnV PI RI S/D
Measurement item (PI, RI)
__._ ms Time between two points
__._ ms Ejection time
__._ bpm Heart rate
__._ m/s Maximum velocity
__._ m/s Minimum velocity
__._
Mean velocity
Pulsatility Index
Resistance Index
S/D ratio beat Number of heartbeats
408 Vascular measurement
Chapter 5
Measurement of upper and lower extremity artery
In this measurement, measure upper and lower extremity artery. Upper Extremity Artery
ScA , AA , BA , DBA , BasA , RA , UA , SPA , Graft Lower Extremity Artery
CIA , EIA , CFA , DFA , SFA , PopA , ATA , PreA , PTA , DPA , IIA Each vein has the parts which are Rt/Lt, pre , prox. , mid , dist, inflow and outflow to measure the blood flow. In this section, there is example of examination to measure Rt.Sca. However, you can use same operating procedure for each parts and veins. To measure Upper and lower extremity artery 1 Display the Doppler image of Subclavian Artery.
2 Tap the Rt. UEA tab. If there is no Rt. UEA tab, tap
or
3 Tap Rt ScA. An image similar to the following appears:
to display the tab.
4 Select the PSV and EDV button. 5 Move the caliper to PSV and press SET. 6 Next, move the caliper to the EDV and press SET.
FC1 User Guide
Vascular measurement 409
7 Select the MnV button. 8 Trace the waveform you want to measure by using the caliper.
9 Press SET and the calculated value of MnV appears. 10 Select PI, RI. 11 Trace the waveform you want to measure by using the caliper.
12 Press SET and the calculated values of MnV, PI,RI, and S/D appear. There are two ways to trace Doppler: Velocity Trace which traces Doppler manually Auto Velocity Each measurement has different operating procedure to trace the wave form.
Measurement of upper and lower extremity venous
In this measurement item, measure the upper extremery venous and lower extremity venous. Upper Extremity Artery/VENOUS
UCV , FCV , UBaV , FBaV , IJV , ScV , AV , BV , RV , UV Lower Extremity Artery/VENOUS
410 Vascular measurement
Chapter 5
GSV , LSV , CIV , SFV , PopV , PTV , PreV , ATV , IIV , DFV Each vein has the parts which are Rt/Lt, pre, prox , mid, and dist to measure the blood flow. In this section, there is example of examination to measure Lt.ScV. However, you can use same operating procedure for each veins and parts. 1 Display the Doppler image of subclavian vein.
2 Select the Lt. UEV2 tab on the touch panel. If there is no Lt. UEV2 tab, tap
or
to display the tab.
3 Tap Lt. ScV. An image similar to the following appears:
4 Select the Peak V button 5 Move caliper to Peak V point and Press the SET.
6 Select MnV button. 7 Trace the wave form which you want to measure by using caliper 8 Press SET and the caluculated value of MnV appears.
FC1 User Guide
Vascular measurement 411
There are two ways to trace Doppler: Velocity Trace which traces Doppler manually Auto Velocity Each measurement has different operating procedure to trace the wave form.
Vascular worksheet and report
In addition to Study Information and Exam Information, the Vascular report screen has these categories: Carotid Artery, IMT, Upper Extremity Arterial, Upper Extremity Venous, Lower Extremity Arterial, and Lower Extremity Venous.
For more information on working with the report and worksheet, see the following:
"Vascular worksheet and report" on page 412 "Displaying a report" on page 413 "Editing values on a worksheet" on page 414 "Saving changes on a worksheet" on page 415 "Specifying the worksheet's continuous-measurement calculation" on page 415 Table 5-148: Terms and abbreviations, carotid artery
Name CCA BIF ECA ICA IMT Vert. A
Formal nomenclature Common carotid artery Bifurcation External carotid artery Internal carotid artery Intimal medial thickness Vertebral artery
412 Vascular measurement
Chapter 5
Table 5-148: Terms and abbreviations, carotid artery
Name Subclav A
Formal nomenclature Subclavian artery
Worksheet and report
Displaying a report
To display application-specific measurement data for a current examination
1 Press the FREEZE button ( ) to freeze the image, and then press the CALCS button ( ). 2 Press either arrow on the switch menu button 1(the rocker button beneath Report).
Report screens appear. To display application-specific measurement data for an archived examination: 1 Press the SYSTEM button
The User Setting screen appears. 2 On page 1/1, tap UI. The UI screen appears. 3 Tap F-Key Config. Assign the report function to any function button. 4 Tap Archive screen. 5 Tap an examination and press the function button to which the report function has been assigned.
Changing pages on the Report screen or worksheet
If the report results cannot be displayed within one page, the number of the report pages is displayed at the lower side of the touch panel. To switch the page
Press switch menu button 4 (the rocker button under Page).
Switching between the report and the worksheet
To switch between the Report and the Worksheet At the right side of the touch panel, tap Report or Worksheet, as appropriate.
FC1 User Guide
Vascular measurement 413
Editing values on a worksheet
The Worksheet screen displays the measurement values (measurement results) of the cardiac or vascular measurement.
You can also specify the measurement items to be used and displayed on the Worksheet screen.
To correct or delete the displayed values Place the cursor in the value's text box and either correct or delete the value.
Making information items visible on the Study or Exam Information screen
To specify the information items to be displayed on screens such as the Report screen
1 Tap the Study Info or Exam Info button, depending on whose visible items you want to change.
2 In the Check column, make sure a check mark is present for the measurement items that you want to be visible.
If the check mark is not present, tap in the column.
There may be more than one page of measurement items to select.
3 If there is more than one page of measurement items, then to see other pages, press switch menu button 4 (the rocker button under Worksheet Page).
4 When you have finished, tap Close.
5 Place a check mark in the check box on the left-hand side of each information item on the worksheet.
Specifying measurement items for the Cardiac measurement
To specify the measurement items for the Cardiac measurement
1 Tap the button whose visible measurement items you want to change.
The buttons represent groups of measurement items for the current preset.
2 In the Check column, make sure that a check mark is present for the measurement items that you want to be visible.
If the check mark is not present, tap in the column.
There may be more than one page of measurement items to select.
3 If there is more than one page of measurement items, then to see other pages, press switch menu button 4 (the rocker button under Worksheet Page).
414 Vascular measurement
Chapter 5
4 When you have finished, tap Close.
Saving changes on a worksheet
As you edit, content that you change turns red, and an asterisk appears. To save the content After you have edited the content, tap Update, and then operate the switch menu button 2.
Saved changes turn white.
Specifying the worksheet's continuous-measurement calculation
To specify calculation of the Worksheet value during continuous measurement 1 On the touch panel, tap Value. 2 Press the switch menu button to select the measurement value to be displayed on the Worksheet.
The possible values are: Average value of the continuous measurement Value of the last measurement
FC1 User Guide
Vascular measurement 415
Abdominal Measurement
Functional Overview
Table 5-149: 2D mode Measurement item Liver/Spleen Measurement
Bile duct/Shunt measurement Gall bladder measurement Pancreas measurement Aorta measurement Bowel measurement Liver measurement Hip dislocation measurement Table 5-150: D-mode Measurement item Liver/Spleen Measurement
Bile duct/Shunt measurement
Aorta measurement (prox · mid · dist)
Description
Distance Area SI (Spleen Index)
Distance
Distance Wall Thickness
Distance
Distance
Distance Wall Thickness
Distance Volume
Angle
Description
Peak Velocity Mean Velocity
Peak Velocity Mean Velocity
Peak Velocity PSV , EDV Mean Velocity PI, RI, S/D
416 Abdominal Measurement
Chapter 5
Table 5-150: D-mode
Measurement item
Renal artery measurement (Right · Left)
Description
PSV, EDV Mean Velocity PI, RI, S/D
FC1 User Guide
Abdominal Measurement 417
Built-in Measurement Functions
Table 5-151: 2D mode
Measurement item
Display item Unit
Liver (Right · Left)
L1
cm
L2
cm
Spleen SI=a x b
a
cm
b
cm
SI
--
Hepatic Vein
Dist
mm
SMV (Superior mesenteric vein) Dist
mm
Splenic Vein
Dist
mm
PS Confince (Confluence)
Dist
mm
Main PV
Dist
mm
PV (Right · Left)
Dist
mm
Dist
mm
Shunt
Shunt
mm
GB
GB L
cm
GB W
cm
GB Wall
cm
CBD
prox.
mm
mid.
mm
dist.
mm
Pancreas
head
cm
body
cm
tail
cm
P-Duct
cm
Renal (Right · Left)
L
cm
W
cm
A-P
cm
Vol.
cm3
Renal Artery (Right · Left)
Renal A
cm
418 Abdominal Measurement
Chapter 5
Table 5-151: 2D mode
Measurement item Adrenal (Right · Left)
Aorta (AP · Trans) AP and Trans for each item CIA (Right · Left) Right and Left for each item Appendix
Pylorus
Display item Unit
L
cm
W
cm
A-P
cm
prox.
cm
mid.
cm
dist.
cm
prox.
cm
mid.
cm
dist.
cm
Appendix
cm
Appendix
mm
Wall
Pylorus
cm
Pylorus Wall mm
Table 5-152: 2D Mode (Hip Angle)
Measurement item Hip Angle (Right · Left)
Display item
Unit
°(degree) °(degree)
Table 5-153: D-Mode
Measurement item
Display item Unit
Aorta -prox. -mid. -dist.
Peak V PSV EDV MnV PI RI S/D
cm/s cm/s cm/s cm/s ----
FC1 User Guide
Abdominal Measurement 419
Table 5-153: D-Mode Measurement item CIA (Right · Left) -prox. -mid. -dist.
Celiac Art. -1 -2
SMA -1 -2 -3
Hepatic A -Common -Rt. -Lt.
Splenic A
Display item
Peak V PSV EDV MnV PI RI S/D
Peak V
Unit
cm/s cm/s cm/s cm/s ----
cm/s
PSV EDV MnV PI RI S/D
Peak V
PSV EDV MnV PI RI S/D
Peak V PSV EDV MnV PI RI S/D
Peak V PSV EDV MnV PI RI S/D
cm/s cm/s cm/s ----
cm/s
cm/s cm/s cm/s ----
cm/s cm/s cm/s cm/s ----
cm/s cm/s cm/s cm/s ----
420 Abdominal Measurement
Chapter 5
Table 5-153: D-Mode Measurement item IMA
Hepatic Vein
SMV
Splenic Vein
PS Conflnce (Confluence) PV -Main PV -Rt. -Lt. Shunt -pre. -prox. -mid. -dist.
Display item Unit
Peak V PSV EDV MnV PI RI S/D
Peak V MnV
Peak V MnV
Peak V MnV
Peak V MnV
Peak V
cm/s cm/s cm/s cm/s ----
cm/s cm/s
cm/s cm/s
cm/s cm/s
cm/s cm/s
cm/s
MnV
cm/s
Peak V MnV
cm/s cm/s
2D mode
Liver Size Measurement
This section explains the procedure for measuring the size of the right or left lobe of liver. Both the right and left lobes are measured with the same procedure. To measure liver size 1 On a frozen 2D image of the right or left lobe of a liver, select the Liver/Spleen tab on the touch panel.
FC1 User Guide
Abdominal Measurement 421
2 Select the LiverSize button. The touch panel is switched to the sequence screen. 3 To measure the right lobe:
a The Rt.L1 button is lit. Measure the L1 diameter on the right lobe image. b The Rt.L2 button is lit. Measure the L2 diameter on the right lobe image.
4 To measure the left lobe: a The Lt.L1 button is lit. Measure the L1 diameter on the left lobe image. b The Lt.L2 button is lit. Measure the L2 diameter of the left lobe image.
5 Press the SET button. The Liver Size measurement is finalized.
When measuring the left lobe first, start measurement by selecting the Lt.L1 button directly. Table 5-154: Liver size measurement items
Liver Size
Measurement item
Rt.L1 Rt.L2 Lt.L1 Lt.L2
__._ cm __._ cm __._ cm __._ cm
Right lobe diameter (L1) Right lobe diameter (L2) Left lobe diameter (L1) Left lobe diameter (L2)
422 Abdominal Measurement
Chapter 5
Spleen Size Measurement
The section explains the procedure for measuring the size of the spleen to calculate Spleen Index. To measure spleen size 1 On a frozen 2D image of the spleen, select the Liver/Spleen tab on the touch panel. 2 Select the SpleenSize button. The touch panel is switched to the sequence screen. 3 The a button is lit. Measure the length of the spleen (a). 4 The b button is lit. Measure the thickness of the spleen (b). 5 Press the SET button. The Spleen Size measurement is finalized and Spleen Index (SI a x b) is calculated.
Table 5-155: Spleen size measurement items
Spleen Size a b SI(axb)
Measurement item __._ cm Spleen length (a) __._ cm Spleen thickness (b) __._ cm3 Spleen Index (SI = a x b)
Hepatic Vein Measurement
The diameter of the vessels such as Hepatic Vein, SMV, Splenic Vein, PS Confluence, Main PV, PV, etc. is measured.
This section explains the procedure for measuring Hepatic Vein as an example. Other vessels can also be measured in the same way.
FC1 User Guide
Abdominal Measurement 423
To measure the hepatic vein
1 On a frozen 2D image of the hepatic vein, select the Liver/Spleen tab on the touch panel.
2 Select the HepaticVein button.
3 The touch panel screen is switched and a caliper mark (+) is displayed.
4 Measure the diameter of the hepatic vein and press the SET button. The Hepatic Vein measurement is finalized.
Table 5-156: Hepatic vein measurement items
Hepatic Vein
Dist
__._ cm
Measurement item Hepatic vein diameter
GB (Gall Bladder) Size Measurement
The section explains the procedure for measuring the size of the gall bladder and the thickness of the gallbladder wall. To measure gall bladder size 1 On a frozen 2d cross-sectional image of the gall bladder, press the GB tab on the touch panel. 2 Select the GB Size button. The touch panel is switched to the sequence screen. 3 The GB L button is lit. Measure the length of the gall bladder. 4 The GB W button is lit. Measure the width of the gall bladder. 5 Press the SET button. The GB Size measurement is finalized.
To measure gall bladder wall thickness 1 On a frozen 2D cross-sectional image of the gall bladder, select the GB Wall button.
424 Abdominal Measurement
Chapter 5
2 The touch panel is switched and a caliper mark (+) is displayed.
3 Measure the thickness of the gallbladder wall and press the SET button. The GB Wall measurement is finalized.
Table 5-157: GB wall thickness measurement items
GB
Measurement item
GB L GB W GB Wall
__._ cm __._ cm __._ cm
Length Width Gallbladder wall thickness
Pancreas Size Measurement
This section explains the procedure for measuring the size of the pancreas and the diameter of the pancreas duct. Not all the measurement regions are displayed on the same screen. Switch to an appropriate sectional view as necessary. To measure pancreas size 1 On a frozen 2D, cross-sectional image of the pancreas, select the Pancreas tab on the touch panel. 2 Select the Pancreas Size button. The touch panel is switched to the sequence screen. 3 The head button is lit. Measure the pancreas head. 4 The body button is lit. Measure the pancreas body. 5 The tail button is lit. Measure the pancreas tail. 6 Press the SET button. The Pancreas Size measurement is finalized.
FC1 User Guide
Abdominal Measurement 425
To measure pancreas duct diameter
1 On a frozen 2D, cross-sectional image of the pancreas, select the Panc Duct button. 2 A caliper mark (+) is displayed on the monitor.
3 Measure the diameter of the pancreas duct and press the SET button. The Panc Duct measurement is finalized.
Table 5-158: Pancreas measurement items
Pancreas
Measurement item
Head Body Tail P-Duct
__._ cm __._ cm __._ cm __._ cm
Pancreas head diameter Pancreas body diameter Pancreas tail diameter Pancreas duct diameter
Renal Measurement
The size of the liver and the diameter of the renal artery are measured. This section explains the procedure for measuring the right liver as an example.
426 Abdominal Measurement
Chapter 5
Both the right and left livers are measured with the same procedure. To measure liver size 1 On a frozen 2D image of the liver (longitudinal or transverse), select the Renal tab on the touch panel. 2 Select the Rt.Renal Vol button. The touch panel is switched to the sequence screen. 3 The L button is lit. Measure the length on the image of the longitudinal section. 4 The W button is lit. Measure the width on the image of the transverse section. 5 The AP button is lit. Measure the anteroposterior diameter on the image of the transverse section. 6 Press the SET button. The Rt.Renal measurement is finalized and the volume is calculated.
To measure renal artery diameter
1 On a frozen 2D image of the liver (longitudinal or transverse), select the Rt.Renal Art button.
2 The touch panel is switched and a caliper mark (+) is displayed on the monitor.
3 Measure the diameter of the renal artery and press the SET button. The Rt.Renal Art measurement is finalized.
Note
Perform measurement so that L, W, and AP are crossed at right angles
FC1 User Guide
Abdominal Measurement 427
.
Table 5-159: Renal measurement items
Rt. Renal Vol
Measurement item
L
__._ cm Length
W
__._ cm Width
AP
__._ cm Anteroposterior diameter
Vol.
__._ cm3 Renal volume
Rt. RenalArt
Measurement item
Dist
__._ mm Renal artery diameter
Adrenal Size Measurement
The size of the adrenal is measured. This section explains the procedure for measuring the right adrenal as an example. Both the right and left adrenals are measured with the same procedure. To measure adrenal size 1 On a frozen 2D image of the adrenal, select the Renal tab on the touch panel. 2 Select the Rt.Adrenal Size button. The touch panel is switched to the sequence screen. 3 The L button is lit. Measure the length on the image of the longitudinal section. 4 The W button is lit. Measure the width on the image of the transverse section. 5 The AP button is lit. Measure the anteroposterior diameter on the image of the transverse section.
428 Abdominal Measurement
Chapter 5
6 Press the SET button. The Adrenal Size measurement is finalized.
Note
Perform measurement so that L, W, and AP are crossed at right angles
Table 5-160: Adrenal measurement items
Rt Adrenal Size
L
__._ cm
W
__._ cm
AP
__._ cm
Measurement item Length Width Anteroposterior diameter
Aorta Measurement
The blood vessel diameter of the aorta and CIA is measured. This section explains the procedure for measuring Aorta AP prox. as an example. Other vessels and regions such as AP/trans and prox./mid/dist are measured with the same procedure. To measure the aorta 1 On a frozen 2D image of the aorta, select the Aorta on the touch panel. 2 Select the prox. of Aorta AP and measure the proximal region (prox) of the aorta.
FC1 User Guide
Abdominal Measurement 429
3 Select the mid button to measure the middle region (mid.) of the aorta. 4 Select the dist button to measure the distal region (dist.) of the aorta. 5 Press the SET button. The Aorta AP prox. measurement is finalized.
Note
Not all the regions (prox., mid. and dist.) need to be measured. When performing the measurement only at a target region, select the corresponding button directly.
Table 5-161: Aorta measurement items
Aorta AP
Measurement item
prox
__._ mm Proximal region
mid
__._ mm Middle region
dist
__._ mm Distal region
Bowel Measurement
The diameter and wall thickness of the appendix and pylorus are measured. This section explains the procedure for measuring the appendix as an example. Each region is measured with the same procedure. To measure the bowel 1 On a frozen 2D image of the appendix, select the Bowel tab on the touch panel. 2 Select the Appendix button. 3 The touch panel is switched and a caliper mark (+) is displayed on the monitor.
430 Abdominal Measurement
Chapter 5
4 Measure the appendix diameter and press the SET button. The Appendix measurement is finalized.
Table 5-162: Bowel measurement items
Appendix
Measurement item
Dist
__._ cm Appendix diameter
D-mode
Aorta Measurement
The blood flow of Aorta, CIA, Celiac Art, SMA, Hepatic Art, Splenic Art, IMA, etc. is measured.
The measurement regions of each vessel are right/left (Rt./Lt.), longitudinal/transverse section (AP/trans), proximal/middle/distal (prox/mid/dist), etc.
This section explains the procedure for measuring Aorta AP prox. as an example. Other vessels and regions are measured with the same procedure.
To measure the aorta
1 On a frozen Doppler trace of the aorta, select the Aorta 1 tab on the touch panel.
2 Select the prox. of Aorta AP. The touch panel screen is switched.
3 To measure peak V: a Select the Peak V button. b Place the caliper on the Peak V point and press the SET button to finalize the measurement.
FC1 User Guide
Abdominal Measurement 431
4 To measure PI and RI: a Select the PI,RI button. b Use the caliper to trace the target waveform. c Press the SET button. The measurement is finalized and the MnV, PI, RI and S/D values are calculated.
As the methods for tracing the Doppler waveform, Velocity Trace (manual tracing) or Auto Velocity Trace can be selected. For details on the procedure of each method, see "Velocity trace" on page 269".
Table 5-163: Aorta measurement items
Aorta AP prox.
Peak V
__._
Max V
__._
Min V
__._
MnV
__._
PI
__._
RI
__._
Measurement item
cm/s Peak velocity
cm/s Maximum velocity
cm/s cm/s
Minimum velocity Mean velocity Pulsatility index Resistance index
432 Abdominal Measurement
Chapter 5
Table 5-163: Aorta measurement items
Aorta AP prox.
S/D
__._
Measurement item S/D ratio
Renal Art (Renal Artery) Measurement
The blood flow of the liver is measured.
This section explains the procedure for measuring the right renal artery as an example.
Both the right and left renal arteries are measured with the same procedure.
To measure the renal artery
1 On a frozen Doppler image of the right renal artery, select the Renal Art tab on the touch panel.
2 Select the Rt.Renal-A button of Renal Art. The touch panel screen is switched.
3 To measure PI and RI:
a Select the PI,RI button. b Use the caliper to trace the target waveform.
4 Press the SET button. The measurement is finalized and the PSV, EDV, MnV, PI, RI and S/D values are calculated.
FC1 User Guide
Abdominal Measurement 433
As the methods for tracing the Doppler waveform, Velocity Trace (manual tracing) or Auto Velocity Trace can be selected. For details on the procedure of each method, see "Velocity trace" on page 269".
Table 5-164: Renal artery measurement items
Rt. Renal Art.
Measurement item
Max V Min V MnV PI RI S/D
__._ cm/s Maximum velocity
__._ cm/s Minimum velocity
__._ cm/s Mean velocity
__._
Pulsatility index
__._
Resistance index
__._
S/D ratio
Vein Measurement
The blood flow of Hepatic Vein, PS Confluence, SMV, Splenic Vein, PV, Shunt is measured.
The measurement regions of each vessel are right/left (Rt./Lt.), anterior/proximal/middle/distal (pre/prox/mid/ dist), etc.
This section explains the procedure for measuring Hepatic V. as an example. Other vessels and regions are measured with the same procedure.
To measure veins
1 On a frozen Doppler image of the hepatic vein, select the Vein tab on the touch panel.
2 Select the Hepatic Vein button. The touch panel screen is switched.
434 Abdominal Measurement
Chapter 5
3 To measure peak V: a Select the Peak V button. b Place the caliper on the Peak V point and press the SET button to finalize the measurement.
4 To measure MnV: a Select the MnV button. b Use the caliper to trace the target waveform. c Press the SET button. The measurement is finalized and the MnV value is calculated.
FC1 User Guide
Abdominal Measurement 435
As the methods for tracing the Doppler waveform, Velocity Trace (manual tracing) or Auto Velocity Trace can be selected. For details on the procedure of each method, see "Velocity trace" on page 269".
Table 5-165: Hepatic vein measurement items
Hepatic Vein
Peak V
__._
MnV
__._
Measurement item cm/s Peak velocity cm/s Mean velocity
2D mode
Hip Angle Measurement
The hip angle of neonate/infant is measured with the lateral approach. This section explains the procedure for measuring the angle of the right hip as an example. Both the right and left hips are measured with the same procedure. To measure hip angle 1 On a frozen 2D image of the hip with the lateral approach, select the Hip tab on the touch panel. 2 Select the HipAngleRight button. Three lines are displayed on the monitor.
3 Use the trackball to adjust the vertical position of the baseline, and rotate the multi dial to adjust the angle of the baseline.
4 Press the SET button. Line 2 for measuring the angle can be adjusted. 436 Abdominal Measurement
Chapter 5
5 Use the trackball to adjust the vertical position of Line 2, and rotate the multi dial to adjust the angle of Line 2.
6 Press the SET button. Adjust Line 3 in the same way as Line 2 to measure the angle .
7 Press the SET button. The Hip Angle measurement is finalized.
Line 2 is displayed with the angle set to 60 degrees, and Line 3 is displayed with the angle set to 55 degrees. Both angles can be measured based on these normal angles.
Table 5-166: Hip angle measurement items
Rt.Angle
Measurement item
___ °
Bony roof angle (Angle )
___ °
Cartilage roof angle (Angle )
Worksheet/Report
Report Display
This section explains the Report screen of the abdominal measurement.
The Abdominal report screen is divided into eight categories (Aorta, Bowel, GB, Liver/Spleen, PV/Shunt, Pancreas, Renal and Hip Angle) in addition to Study Information and Exam Information.
FC1 User Guide
Abdominal Measurement 437
Figure 5-38: Study Information screen Figure 5-39: Exam Information screen
Figure 5-40: Abdominal Report screen <Report Screen (Category_Aorta (B)>
Switching the page of Report screen
If the report results cannot be displayed within one page, the number of the report pages is displayed at the lower side of the touch panel.
To switch the page, operate the switch menu button under Report Page.
Switching to the Worksheet
Select the Worksheet at the right side of the touch panel.
Editing Values on Worksheet
This section explains the Abdominal Worksheet screen.
On the Worksheet screen, the measurement values (measurement results) of the abdominal measurement are displayed. The displayed values can also be corrected or deleted.
In addition, measurement items to be used and displayed can be specified on the Worksheet screen.
Specifying information items on the Study / Exam Information screen
Information items to be displayed on the screens such as the Report screen can be specified by placing a check mark in the check box on the left-hand side of each information item (e.g. Refering Phys) on the worksheet.
438 Abdominal Measurement
Chapter 5
Specifying measurement items for the Abdominal measurement
The measurement items for the Abdominal measurement can be specified by placing a check mark in the check box on the left-hand side of each measurement item (e.g. Aorta (B)_Aorta AP_prox) on the worksheet.
Switching the page of Worksheet
If the content of the worksheet cannot be displayed within one page, the number of the worksheet pages is displayed at the lower side of the touch panel.
To switch the page, operate the switch menu button under Worksheet Page.
Switching to the Report screen
Select the Report button at the right side of the touch panel.
FC1 User Guide
Abdominal Measurement 439
Terms and Abbreviations
Table 5-167: Liver/Spleen
Name Liver Spleen Hepatic Vein SMV Splenic Vein PV PS Conflnce Table 5-168: Bile duct/Shunt
Formal Nomenclature Liver Spleen Hepatic Vein Superior Mesenteric Vein Splenic Vein Portal Vein PS Confluence
Name CBD Shunt Table 5-169: Gall bladder
Formal Nomenclature Common Bile Duct Shunt
Name GB Table 5-170: Pancreas
Formal Nomenclature Gall Bladder
Name Pancreas Pancreas Duct Table 5-171: Artery
Formal Nomenclature Pancreas Pancreas Duct
Name Aorta CIA
Formal Nomenclature Abdominal Aorta Common Iliac Artery
440 Abdominal Measurement
Chapter 5
Table 5-171: Artery Name Celiac Art SMA Hepatic A Splenic A IMA Renal Artery
Table 5-172: Kidney Name Kidney Adrenal
Table 5-173: Bowel Name Appendix Appendix Wall Pylorus Pylorus Wall
Table 5-174: Hip joint Name Bony roof line Cartilage roof line
Formal Nomenclature Celiac Artery Superior Mesenteric Artery Hepatic Artery Splenic Artery Inferior Mesenteric Artery Renal Artery
Formal Nomenclature Kidney Adrenal
Formal Nomenclature Appendix Appendix Wall Pylorus Pylorus Wall
Formal Nomenclature Bony roof line Cartilage roof line
FC1 User Guide
Abdominal Measurement 441
Urological Measurement
Functional Overview
Table 5-175: 2D mode
Measurement item
Description
Seminal vesicles measurement Testicular measurement Bladder measurement (prox · mid · dist)
Renal measurement Renal cortex measurement Adrenal measurement Table 5-176: D-mode
Distance
Distance Volume
Distance Volume Void Volume
Distance (Ureter)
Distance Volume
Distance
Distance
Measurement item
Description
Renal artery measurement (Right · Left) (prox · mid · dist)
Interlobular arteries measurement (Right · Left) (prox · mid · dist)
Arcuate artery measurement (Right · Left) (prox · mid · dist)
Peak Velocity PSV , EDV Mean Velocity PI ,RI , S/D
Peak Velocity PSV , EDV Mean Velocity PI ,RI , S/D
Peak Velocity PSV , EDV Mean Velocity PI ,RI , S/D
442 Urological Measurement
Chapter 5
Built-in Measurement Functions
Table 5-177: 2D mode
Measurement item SV (Seminal Vesicles) (Right · Left) Tst (Testis) (Right · Left)
Bladder
Pre-Bladder
Display item Unit
AP
cm
RL
cm
SI
cm
L
cm
W
cm
AP
cm
Vol.
cm3
L
cm
W
cm
AP
cm
Vol.
ml
L
cm
W
cm
AP
cm
Vol.
ml
Post-Bladder
L
cm
W
cm
AP
cm
Vol.
ml
Pre-Post Bl Vol.
Vol.
ml
Ureter (Right · Left)
Renal (Right · Left)
Cortex (Right · Left)
prox.
mm
mid.
mm
dist.
mm
L
cm
W
cm
AP
cm
Vol.
cm3
T1
mm
T2
mm
T3
mm
FC1 User Guide
Urological Measurement 443
Table 5-177: 2D mode
Measurement item
Adrenal (Right · Left)
Table 5-178: D-mode
Measurement item
Renal (Right · Left) -org. -prox. -mid. -dist.
InterLob Art. (Right · Left) -org. -prox. -mid. -dist.
Arcuate Art. (Right · Left) -org. -prox. -mid. -dist.
Display item Unit
L
mm
W
mm
AP
mm
Display item Unit
PSV
m/s
EDV
m/s
MnV
m/s
PI
--
RI
--
S/D
--
PSV
m/s
EDV
m/s
MnV
m/s
PI
--
RI
--
S/D
--
PSV
m/s
EDV
m/s
MnV
m/s
PI
--
RI
--
S/D
--
2D mode
SV (Seminal Vesicles) Size Measurement
The size of the seminal vesicles is measured. This section explains the procedure for measuring the right seminal vesicle as an example. Both the right and left seminal vesicles are measured with the same procedure.
444 Urological Measurement
Chapter 5
To measure seminal vesicles size 1 On a frozen 2D image of the seminal vesicle (longitudinal and transverse sections), select the SV/Testis tab
on the touch panel. 2 Press the Rt.SV button. The touch panel is switched to the sequence screen. 3 The Rt.SV-RL button is lit. Measure the right-left diameter on the image of the transverse section. 4 The Rt.SV-SI button is lit. Measure the supero-inferior diameter on the image of the longitudinal section. 5 The Rt.SV-AP button is lit. Measure the anteroposterior diameter on the image of the transverse section. 6 Press the SET button. The measurement of Rt.SV is finalized.
Note
Perform measurement so that RL, AP and SI are crossed at right angles.
Table 5-179: Seminal vesicles measurement items
Rt. SV RL SI
__._ cm __._ cm
Measurement item Right-left diameter Supero-inferior diameter
FC1 User Guide
Urological Measurement 445
Table 5-179: Seminal vesicles measurement items
Rt. SV AP
__._ cm
Measurement item Anteroposterior diameter
Testicular Volume Measurement
The volume of the testis is measured.
This section explains the procedure for measuring the right testis as an example.
Both the right and left testes are measured with the same procedure.
To measure testicular volume
1 On a frozen 2D image of the seminal vesicle (longitudinal and transverse sections), Select the SV/Testis tab on the touch panel.
2 Select the Rt.Testis button. The touch panel is switched to the sequence screen.
3 The L button is lit. Measure the length on the image of the longitudinal section.
4 The W button is lit. Measure the width on the image of the transverse section.
5 The AP button is lit. Measure the anteroposterior diameter on the image of the transverse section.
6 Press the SET button. The measurement of Rt.Testis is finalized and the volume is calculated.
446 Urological Measurement
Chapter 5
Note
Perform measurement so that L, W and AP are crossed at right angles.
Table 5-180: Testicular volume measurement items
Testicular Volume
Measurement item
L
__._ cm Length
W
__._ cm Width
AP
__._ cm Anteroposterior diameter
Vlo
__._ cm3 Testicular volume
Bladder Size Measurement
This section explains the procedure for measuring the size of the bladder. 1 On a frozen 2D image of the bladder (longitudinal and transverse sections), press the Bladder tab on the
touch panel. 2 Select the Bladder Size button. The touch panel is switched to the sequence screen. 3 The L button is lit. Measure the length on the image of the longitudinal section. 4 The W button is lit. Measure the width on the image of the transverse section. 5 The AP button is lit. Measure the anteroposterior diameter on the image of the transverse section. 6 Press the SET button. The Bladder Size measurement is finalized.
FC1 User Guide
Urological Measurement 447
Note
Perform measurement so that L, W and AP are crossed at right angles.
Table 5-181: Bladder size measurement items
Bladder Size
L
__._ cm
W
__._ cm
AP
__._ cm
Measurement item Length Width Anteroposterior diameter
Bladder Volume Measurement
The void volume is measured by calculating the difference between the bladder volumes before and after urination.
To measure bladder volume before urination
1 On a frozen 2D image of the bladder (longitudinal and transverse sections) before urination, select the Bladder tab on the touch panel.
2 Select the Pre.BladderVol. button. The touch panel is switched to the sequence screen.
3 Measure L, W and AP in the same way as the Bladder Size measurement.
4 Press the SET button. The measurement of Pre.BladderVol. is finalized and the volume is calculated.
448 Urological Measurement
Chapter 5
To measure bladder volume after urination 1 On a frozen 2D image of the bladder (longitudinal and transverse sections) after urination, measure L, W and
AP in the same way as the Pre.BladderVol. measurement. 2 Press the SET button. The measurement of Post.BladderVol. is finalized and the volume is measured.
At the same time, the Void Volume is calculated.
Note
Perform measurement so that L, W and AP are crossed at right angles.
Table 5-182: Bladder volume measurement items
Pre.Bladder Vol.
Measurement item
L
__._ mm Length
W
__._ mm Width
AP
__._ mm Anteroposterior diameter
Vol.
__._ ml Bladder volume
Post.Bladder Vol.
Measurement item
L
__._ mm Length
FC1 User Guide
Urological Measurement 449
Post.Bladder Vol.
Measurement item
W
__._ mm Width
AP
__._ mm Anteroposterior diameter
Vol.
__._ ml Bladder volume
Void Vol. Pre-Post
__._ ml
Measurement item Void volume
Ureter Distance Measurement
The diameter of the ureter is measured.
This section explains the procedure for measuring the size of the right ureter as an example.
Both the right and left ureters are measured with the same procedure.
To measure ureter diameter
1 On a frozen 2D image of the ureter, select the Bladder tab on the touch panel.
2 Press the prox button of Rt.Ureter Distance and measure the proximal region (prox.) of the ureter.
3 Select the mid button and measure the middle region (mid.) of the ureter.
4 Select the dist and measure the distal region (dist.) of the ureter.
5 Press the SET button. The Ureter measurement is finalized.
Not all the regions (prox., mid. and dist.) need to be measured. When performing the measurement only at a target region, select the corresponding button directly.
Table 5-183: Ureter distance measurement items
Rt.Ureter prox mid dist
Measurement item __._ mm Proximal region __._ mm Middle region __._ mm Distal region
Renal Volume Measurement
450 Urological Measurement
Chapter 5
The volume of the kidney is measured. This section explains the procedure for measuring the right kidney as an example. Both the right and left kidneys are measured with the same procedure. To measure renal volume 1 On a frozen 2D image of the kidney (longitudinal and transverse sections), select the Renal tab on the touch
panel. 2 Select the Rt.Renal button. The touch panel is switched to the sequence screen. 3 The L button is lit. Measure the length on the image of the longitudinal section. 4 The W button is lit. Measure the width on the image of the transverse section. 5 The AP button is lit. Measure the anteroposterior diameter on the image of the transverse section. 6 Press the SET button. The measurement of Rt.Renal is finalized and the volume is calculated
Note
Perform measurement so that L, W and AP are crossed at right angles.
FC1 User Guide
Urological Measurement 451
Table 5-184: Renal volume measurement items
Rt. Renal L W AP Vol.
Measurement item __._ cm Length __._ cm Width __._ cm Anteroposterior diameter __._ cm3 Renal volume
Cortex Thickness Measurement
The thickness of the renal cortex is measured.
This section explains the procedure for measuring the right cortex as an example.
Both the right and left cortices are measured with the same procedure.
To measure the thickness of the renal cortex
1 On a frozen 2D image of the cortex, select the Renal tab on the touch panel.
2 Select the Rt.Cortex. button. The touch panel is switched to the sequence screen.
3 The T1 button is lit. Measure the first position.
4 The T2 button is lit. Measure the second position.
5 The T3 button is lit. Measure the third position.
6 Press the SET button. The Cortex measurement is finalized.
Not all the positions (T1, T2 and T3) need to be measured. When performing the measurement only at a target position, select the corresponding button directly.
Table 5-185: Cortex thickness measurement items
Rt.Cortex T1 T2 T3
Measurement item __._ mm Thickness1 __._ mm Thickness2 __._ mm Thickness3
452 Urological Measurement
Chapter 5
Adrenal Size Measurement
The size of the adrenal gland is measured. This section explains the procedure for measuring the right adrenal gland as an example. Both the right and left adrenal glands are measured with the same procedure. To measure adrenal gland size 1 On a frozen2 D image of the adrenal gland, select the Renal tab on the touch panel. 2 Select the Rt.Adrenal button. The touch panel is switched to the sequence screen. 3 The L button is lit. Measure the length on the image of the longitudinal section. 4 The W button is lit. Measure the width on the image of the transverse section. 5 The AP button is lit. Measure the anteroposterior diameter on the image of the transverse section. 6 Press the SET button. The Adrenal Size measurement is finalized.
Note
Perform measurement so that L, W and AP are crossed at right angles.
FC1 User Guide
Urological Measurement 453
Table 5-186: Adrenal size measurement items
Adrenal Size
Measurement item
L
__._ mm Length
W
__._ mm Width
AP
__._ mm Anteroposterior diameter
D-mode
Renal Art (Renal Artery) Measurement
The blood flow of the kidney is measured. This section explains the procedure for measuring the right renal artery as an example. Both the right and left renal arteries are measured with the same procedure. Other items are also measured in the same way. To measure the renal artery 1 On a frozen Doppler image of the right renal artery, Select the Renal Art tab on the touch panel. 2 Select the org. button of Rt.Renal. The touch panel is switched.
3 To measure PSV and EDV: a Select the PSV,EDV button. b Place the caliper on each point and press the SET button to finalize the measurement.
454 Urological Measurement
Chapter 5
4 To measure PI and RI: a Select the PI,RI button. b Use the caliper to trace the target waveform. c Press the SET button. The measurement is finalized and the MnV, PI, RI and S/D values are calculated.
As the methods for tracing the Doppler waveform, Velocity Trace (manual tracing) or Auto Velocity Trace can be selected.
For details on the procedure of each method, see "4.18.5 Velocity Trace". Table 5-187: Renal artery measurement items
Rt. Renal Art
t (ET)
__._
HR
__._
MaxV
__._
MinV
__._
MnV
__._
Measurement item ms Ejection time bpm Heart rate m/s Maximum velocity m/s Minimum velocity
Mean velocity
FC1 User Guide
Urological Measurement 455
Table 5-187: Renal artery measurement items
Rt. Renal Art
Measurement item
t
__._
Time between two points
PI
Pulsatility Index
RI
Resistance Index
S/D
S/D ratio
beat Number of heartbeats
Worksheet/Report
Report Display
This section explains the Report screen of the urological measurement.
The URO report screen is divided into four categories (SV, Testis, Bladder and Renal) in addition to Study Information and Exam Information.
Figure 5-41: Study Information screen
Figure 5-42: Exam Information screen
Figure 5-43: URO_Report screen <Report Screen (Category_SV> 456 Urological Measurement
Chapter 5
Switching the page of Report screen
If the report results cannot be displayed within one page, the number of the report pages is displayed at the lower side of the touch panel.
To switch the page, operate the switch menu button under Report Page.
Switching to the Worksheet
Select the Worksheet at the right side of the touch panel.
Editing Values on Worksheet
This section explains the URO Worksheet screen.
On the Worksheet screen, the measurement values (measurement results) of the urological measurement are displayed. The displayed values can also be corrected or deleted.
In addition, measurement items to be used and displayed can be specified on the Worksheet screen.
Specifying information items on the Study / Exam Information screen
Information items to be displayed on the screens such as the Report screen can be specified by placing a check mark in the check box on the left-hand side of each information item (e.g. Refering Phys) on the worksheet.
Specifying measurement items for the Urological measurement
The measurement items for the Urological measurement can be specified by placing a check mark in the check box on the left-hand side of each measurement item (e.g. URO_SV-AP_Rt.) on the worksheet.
Switching the page of Worksheet
If the content of the worksheet cannot be displayed within one page, the number of the worksheet pages is displayed at the lower side of the touch panel.
To switch the page, operate the switch menu button under Worksheet Page.
Switching to the Report screen
Select the Report button at the right side of the touch panel.
FC1 User Guide
Urological Measurement 457
Terms and abbreviations
Table 5-188: Measurement terms and abbreviations
Term/Abbreviation
Formal Nomenclature
Adrenal AP Arcuate BIF Bladder Cortex dist. EDV InterLob L Lt. mid. PI Post Bladder Vol. Pre Bladder Vol. prox. PSV Renal Renal Art RI RL Rt. S/D SI
Adrenal Antero posterior diameter Arcuate Artery Bifurcation Bladder Renal cortex distal end diastolic velocity Interlobular Arteries Length Left mid pulsatility index Post Bladder Volume Pre Bladder Volume proximal peak systolic flow velocity Renal Renal Artery resistance index Right-Left diameter Right systolic diastolic ratio, SD ratio Supero inferior diameter
458 Urological Measurement
Chapter 5
Table 5-188: Measurement terms and abbreviations
Term/Abbreviation SV T1 T2 T3 Testis Vol. Ureter Void Vol. Vol. W
Formal Nomenclature Seminal Vesicles Cortex Thickness 1 Cortex Thickness 2 Cortex Thickness 3 Testicular Volume Ureter Void Bladder Volume Volume Width
FC1 User Guide
Urological Measurement 459
460 Urological Measurement
Chapter 5
CHAPTER 6
Chapter 6: References for Measurement Accuracy
Measurement accuracy
The measurements provided by the system do not define a specific physiological or anatomical parameter. Rather, the measurements are of a physical property, such as distance, for the clinician to evaluate. The accuracy values require that you can place the calipers over one pixel. The values do not include acoustic anomalies of the body. The linear distance measurement components have the accuracy and range shown in the following tables.
Measurement accuracy 461
Table 6-1: 2D measurement, calculation accuracy, and range
2D mode measurement accuracy and range
System tolerance1
Accuracy by
Test method2
Range (cm)
Axial distance
< ±2% plus 1% of full scale
Acquisition Phantom
0-26 cm
Lateral distance
< ±2% plus 1% of full scale
Acquisition Phantom
0-35 cm
Diagonal distance
< ±2% plus 1% of full scale
Acquisition Phantom
0-44 cm
Area3
< ±4% plus (2% of full scale/ smallest dimension) * 100 plus 0.5%
Acquisition
Phantom
0.01-720 cm2
Circumference4
< ±3% plus (1.4% of full scale/ smallest dimension) * 100 plus 0.5%
Acquisition
Phantom
0.01-96 cm
1. Full scale for distance implies the maximum depth of the image. 2. An RMI 413a model phantom with 0.7 dB/cm MHz attenuation was used. 3. The area accuracy is defined using the following equation:% tolerance = ((1 + lateral error) * (1 + axial error) 1) * 100 +
0.5%. 4. The circumference accuracy is defined as the greater of the lateral or axial accuracy and by the following equation: %
tolerance = ( (maximum of 2 errors) * 100) + 0.5%.
Table 6-2: M- mode measurement, calculation accuracy, and range
M mode measurement accuracy and range
System tolerance
Accuracy by
Test method Range
Distance
< +/- 2% plus 1% of full scale1
Acquisition Phantom2
Time
< +/- 2% plus 1% of full scale3
Acquisition Phantom4
Heart Rate
< +/- 2% plus (Full Scale3 * Heart Rate/100) %
Acquisition Phantom4
1. Full scale for distance implies the maximum depth of the image. 2. An RMI 413a model phantom with 0.7 dB/cm MHz attenuation was used. 3. Full scale for time implies the total time displayed on the scrolling graphic image. 4. FUJIFILM SonoSite special test equipment was used.
Table 6-3: PW Doppler mode measurement, calculation accuracy, and range
0-26 cm
0.01-10 sec
5-923 bpm
Doppler mode measurement accuracy and range
System tolerance
Velocity cursor
< +/- 2% plus 1% of full scale2
Accuracy by
Test method1
Acquisition Phantom
Range
0.01 cm/sec 550 cm/sec
462 Measurement accuracy
Chapter 6
Table 6-3: PW Doppler mode measurement, calculation accuracy, and range
Doppler mode measurement accuracy and range
System tolerance
Accuracy by
Test method1
Range
Time
< +/- 2% plus 1% of full scale3
Acquisition Phantom
0.01 - 10 sec
1. FUJIFILM SonoSite special text equipment was used. 2. Full scale for frequency or velocity implies the total frequency or velocity magnitude, displayed on the scrolling graphic
image. 3. Full scale for time implies the total time displayed on the scrolling graphic image.
Sources of measurement errors
In general, two types of errors can be introduced into the measurement:
Acquisition Error
This includes errors introduced by the ultrasound system electronics relating to signal acquisition, signal conversion, and signal processing for display. Additionally, computational and display errors are introduced by the generation of the pixel scale factor, application of that factor to the caliper positions on the screen, and the measurement display. Algorithmic Error
The error introduced by measurements, which are input to higher order calculations. This error is associated with floating-point versus integer-type math, which is subject to errors introduced by rounding versus truncating results for display of a given level of significant digit in the calculation.
Measurement publications and terminology
The following topics list the publications and terminology used for each calculation result. Terminology and measurements comply with AIUM published standards.
Cardiac references
Acceleration (ACC) in cm/s2
Zwiebel, W.J. Introduction to vascular ultrasonography. 4th ed., W.B. Saunders Company, (2000), 52. ACC = abs (delta velocity/delta time)
FC1 User Guide
Sources of measurement errors 463
Acceleration time (AT) in msec
Oh, J.K., J.B. Seward, A.J. Tajik. The echo manual. 2nd ed., Lippincott, Williams, and Wilkins, (1999), 219.
Aortic valve area (AVA) by continuity equation in cm2
Reynolds, Terry. The echocardiographer's pocket reference. 2nd ed., School of Cardiac Ultrasound, Arizona Heart Institute, (2000), 393, 442.
A2 = A1 * V1/V2
where: A2 = Ao valve area A1 = LVOT area; V1 = LVOT velocity; V2 = Ao valve velocity LVOT = Left Ventricular Outflow Tract AVA (PVLVOT/PVAO) * CSALVOT
AVA (VTILVOT/VTIAO) * CSALVOT
Body surface area (BSA) in m2
Grossman, W. Cardiac catheterization and angiography. Philadelphia: Lea and Febiger, (1980), 90.
BSA = 0.007184 * Weight0.425 * Height0.725
Weight = kilograms
Height = centimeters
Cardiac index (CI) in l/min/m2
Oh, J.K., J.B. Seward, A.J. Tajik. The echo manual. 2nd ed., Lippincott, Williams, and Wilkins, (1999), 59.
CI = CO/BSA
where: CO = Cardiac Output BSA = Body Surface Area
Cardiac output (CO) in l/min
Oh, J.K., J.B. Seward, A.J. Tajik The echo manual. 2nd ed., Lippincott, Williams, and Wilkins, (1999), 59.
464 Measurement publications and terminology
Chapter 6
CO = (SV * HR)/1000
where: CO = Cardiac Output SV = Stroke Volume HR = Heart Rate
Cross sectional area (CSA) in cm2
Reynolds, Terry. The echocardiographer's pocket reference. 2nd ed., School of Cardiac Ultrasound, Arizona Heart Institute, (2000), 383.
CSA = 0.785 * D2
where: D = diameter of the anatomy of interest
Deceleration time in msec
Reynolds, Terry. The echocardiographer's pocket reference. 2nd ed., School of Cardiac Ultrasound, Arizona Heart Institute, (2000), 453.
|time a - time b|
Delta pressure: delta time (dP:dT) in mmHg/s
Otto, C.M. Textbook of clinical echocardiography. 2nd ed., W.B. Saunders Company, (2000), 117, 118.
32 mmHg/time interval in seconds
E:A ratio in cm/sec
E:A = velocity E/velocity A
E/Ea ratio
Reynolds, Terry. The echocardiographer's pocket reference. 2nd ed., School of Cardiac Ultrasound, Arizona Heart Institute, (2000), 225.
E Velocity/Ea velocity
where: E velocity = Mitral Valve E velocity
FC1 User Guide
Measurement publications and terminology 465
Ea = annular E velocity, also known as: E prime
Effective regurgitant orifice (ERO) in mm2
Reynolds, Terry. The echocardiographer's pocket reference. 2nd ed., School of Cardiac Ultrasound, Arizona Heart Institute, (2000), 455. ERO = 6.28 (r2) * Va/MR Vel where:
r = radius Va = aliasing velocity
Ejection fraction (EF), percent
Oh, J.K., J.B. Seward, A.J. Tajik. The echo manual. 2nd ed., Lippincott, Williams, and Wilkins, (1999), 40. EF = ((LVEDV LVESV)/LVEDV) * 100% where:
EF = Ejection Fraction LVEDV = Left Ventricular End Diastolic Volume LVESV = Left Ventricular End Systolic Volume
Elapsed time (ET) in msec
ET = time between velocity cursors in milliseconds
Heart rate (HR) in bpm
HR = 3-digit value input by user or measured on M Mode and Doppler image in one heart cycle
Interventricular septum (IVS) fractional thickening, percent
Laurenceau, J. L., M.C. Malergue. The essentials of echocardiography. Le Hague: Martinus Nijhoff, (1981), 71. IVSFT = ((IVSS IVSD)/IVSD) * 100% where:
IVSS = Interventricular septum thickness, end systole IVSD = Interventricular septum thickness, end diastole
466 Measurement publications and terminology
Chapter 6
Isovolumic relaxation time (IVRT) in msec
Reynolds, Terry. The echocardiographer's pocket reference. School of Cardiac Ultrasound, Arizona Heart Institute, (1993), 146.
|time a - time b|
Left atrium/aorta (LA/Ao)
Feigenbaum, H. Echocardiography. Philadelphia: Lea and Febiger, (1994), 206, Figure 4-49.
Left ventricular end volumes (Teichholz) in ml
Teichholz, L.E., T. Kreulen, M.V. Herman, et. al. "Problems in echocardiographic volume determinations: Echocardiographic-angiographic correlations in the presence or absence of asynergy." American Journal of Cardiology (1976), 37:7.
LVESV = (7.0 * LVDS3)/(2.4 + LVDS)
where:
LVESV = Left Ventricular End Systolic Volume LVDS = Left Ventricular Dimension at Systole LVEDV = (7.0 * LVDD3)/(2.4 + LVDD) where:
LVEDV = Left Ventricular End Diastolic Volume LVDD = Left Ventricular Dimension at Diastole
Left ventricular mass in gm
Oh, J.K., J.B. Seward, A.J. Tajik. The echo manual. 2nd ed., Lippincott, Williams, and Wilkins, (1999), 39.
LV Mass = 1.04 [(LVID + PWT + IVST)3 LVID3] * 0.8 + 0.6
where:
LVID = Internal Dimension PWT = Posterior Wall Thickness IVST = Interventricular Septal Thickness 1.04 = Specific gravity of the myocardium 0.8 = Correction factor
FC1 User Guide
Measurement publications and terminology 467
Left ventricular volume: biplane method in ml
Schiller, N.B., P.M. Shah, M. Crawford, et.al. "Recommendations for quantitation of the left ventricle by twodimensional echocardiography," Journal of American Society of Echocardiography September-October 1989, 2:362.
where:
V = Volume in ml a = Diameter b = Diameter n = Number of segments (n=20) L = Length i = Segment
Left ventricular volume: single plane method in ml
Schiller, N.B., P.M. Shah, M. Crawford, et.al. "Recommendations for quantitation of the left ventricle by twodimensional echocardiography," Journal of American Society of Echocardiography September-October 1989, 2:362.
where:
V = Volume a = Diameter n = Number of segments (n=20) L = Length i = Segment
Left ventricular dimension (LVD) fractional shortening, percent
Oh, J.K., J.B. Seward, A.J. Tajik. The echo manual 2nd ed., Lippincott, Williams, and Wilkins, (1994), 43-44.
LVDFS = ((LVDD LVDS)/LVDD) * 100%
468 Measurement publications and terminology
Chapter 6
where:
LVDD = Left Ventricle Dimension at Diastole LVDS = Left Ventricle Dimension at Systole
Left ventricular posterior wall fractional thickening (LVPWFT), percent
Laurenceau, J. L., M.C. Malergue. The essentials of echocardiography. Le Hague: Martinus Nijhoff, (1981), 71.
LVPWFT = ((LVPWS LVPWD)/LVPWD) * 100%
where:
LVPWS = LV posterior wall thickness, end systole LVPWD = LV posterior wall thickness, end diastole
Mean velocity (Vmean) in cm/s
Vmean = mean velocity
Mitral valve area (MVA) in cm2
Reynolds, Terry. The echocardiographer's pocket reference. 2nd ed., School of Cardiac Ultrasound, Arizona Heart Institute, (2000), 391, 452.
MVA = 220/PHT
where:
PHT = pressure half time
Note
220 is an empirical derived constant and may not accurately predict mitral valve area in mitral prosthetic heart valves. The mitral valve area continuity equation may be used in mitral prosthetic heart valves to predict the effective orifice area.
MV flow rate in cc/sec
Reynolds, Terry. The echocardiographer's pocket reference. 2nd ed., School of Cardiac Ultrasound, Arizona Heart Institute, (2000), 396.
Flow = 6.28 (r2) * Va
where: r = radius
FC1 User Guide
Measurement publications and terminology 469
Va = aliasing Velocity
Pressure gradient (PGr) in mmHG
Oh, J.K., J.B. Seward, A.J. Tajik. The echo manual. 2nd ed., Lippincott, Williams, and Wilkins, (1999), 64. PGr = 4 * (Velocity)2 Peak E Pressure Gradient (E PG) E PG = 4 * PE2 Peak A Pressure Gradient (A PG) A PG = 4 * PA2 Peak Pressure Gradient (PGmax) PGmax = 4 * PV2 Mean Pressure Gradient (PGmean) PGmean = Average of pressure gradients/Duration of flow
Pressure half time (PHT) in msec
Reynolds, Terry. The echocardiographer's pocket reference. 2nd ed., School of Cardiac Ultrasound, Arizona Heart Institute, (2000), 391. PHT = DT * 0.29 where:
DT = deceleration time
Proximal isovelocity surface area (PISA) in cm2
Oh, J.K., J.B. Seward, A.J. Tajik. The echo manual. 2nd ed., Lippincott, Williams, and Wilkins, (1999), 125. PISA = 2r2 where:
2 = 6.28 r = aliasing radius
470 Measurement publications and terminology
Chapter 6
Qp/Qs
Reynolds, Terry. The echocardiographer's pocket reference. 2nd ed., School of Cardiac Ultrasound, Arizona Heart Institute, (2000), 400.
Qp/Qs = SV Qp site/SV Qs site
SV sites vary depending upon the location of the shunt.
Regurgitant fraction (RF) in percent
Oh, J.K., J.B. Seward, A.J. Tajik. The echo manual. 2nd ed., Lippincott, Williams, and Wilkins, (1999), 125.
RF = RV/ MV SV
where: RV = Regurgitant Volume MV SV = Mitral Stroke Volume
Regurgitant volume (RV) in cc
Reynolds, Terry. The echocardiographer's pocket reference. School of Cardiac Ultrasound, Arizona Heart Institute, (2000), 396, 455.
RV = ERO * MR VTI
Right ventricular systolic pressure (RVSP) in mmHg
Reynolds, Terry. The echocardiographer's pocket reference. School of Cardiac Ultrasound, Arizona Heart Institute, (1993), 152.
RVSP = 4 * (Vmax TR)2 + RAP
where: RAP = Right Atrial Pressure
S/D
Reynolds, Terry. The echocardiographer's pocket reference. 2nd ed., School of Cardiac Ultrasound, Arizona Heart Institute, (2000), 217.
S velocity/ D velocity
where:
FC1 User Guide
Measurement publications and terminology 471
S velocity = Pulmonary vein S wave D velocity= Pulmonary vein D wave
Stroke index (SI) in cc/m2
Mosby's medical, nursing, & allied health dictionary, 4th ed. (1994), 1492.
SI = SV/BSA
where: SV = Stroke Volume BSA = Body Surface Area
Stroke volume (SV) Doppler in ml
Oh, J.K., J.B. Seward, A.J. Tajik. The echo manual. 2nd ed. Lippincott, Williams, and Wilkins, (1999), 40, 59, 62.
SV = (CSA * VTI)
where: CSA = Cross-Sectional Area of the orifice (LVOT area) VTI = Velocity Time Integral of the aortic valve
Stroke volume (SV) 2D and M mode in ml
Oh, J.K., J.B. Seward, A.J. Tajik. The echo manual. 2nd ed. Lippincott, Williams, and Wilkins, (1994), 44.
SV = (LVEDV LVESV)
where: SV = Stroke Volume LVEDV = End Diastolic Volume LVEDSV = End Systolic Volume
Velocity time integral (VTI) in cm
Reynolds, Terry. The echocardiographer's pocket reference. 2nd ed. School of Cardiac Ultrasound, Arizona Heart Institute, (2000), 383.
VTI = sum of abs (velocities [n])
472 Measurement publications and terminology
Chapter 6
where: Auto Trace = distance (cm) blood travels with each ejection period. Velocities are absolute values.
Obstetrical references
Estimated date of delivery (EDD) by last menstrual period (LMP)
The date entered into the patient information for LMP must precede the current date. Results are displayed as month/day/year. EDD = LMP date + 280 days.
Gestational age (GA) by last menstrual period (LMP)
The gestational age derived from the LMP date entered on the patient information form. Result is displayed in weeks and days, and is calculated as follows: GA(LMP) = System date LMP date
Gestational age (GA) by last menstrual period (LMPd) derived from established due date (Estab. DD)
Same as GA by Estab. DD. The gestational age derived from the system derived LMP using the Established Due Date entered on the patient information form. Result is displayed in weeks and days, and is calculated as follows: GA(LMPd) = System Date LMPd
Last menstrual period derived (LMPd) by established due date (Estab. DD)
Result is displayed as month/day/year. LMPd(Estab. DD) = Estab. DD 280 days
FC1 User Guide
Measurement publications and terminology 473
General references
+/x or S/D ratio
+/x = abs (Velocity A/Velocity B)
where:
A = velocity cursor + B = velocity cursor x
Acceleration index (ACC)
Zwiebel, W.J. Introduction to vascular ultrasonography, 4th ed., W.B. Saunders Company, (2000), 52.
ACC = abs (delta velocity/delta time)
Elapsed time (ET)
ET = time between velocity cursors in milliseconds
Hip angle/d:D ratio
Graf, R. "Fundamentals of sonographic diagnosis of infant hip dysplasia," Journal of Pediatric Orthopedics Vol. 4, No. 6: 735-740, 1984.
Morin, C., Harcke, H., MacEwen, G. "The infant hip: Real-time US assessment of acetabular development," Radiology 177: 673-677, December 1985.
Intima media thickness (IMT)
Howard G, Sharrett AR, Heiss G, Evans GW, Chambless LE, Riley WA, et al. "Carotid artery intima-medial thickness distribution in general populations as evaluated by B-mode ultrasound." ARIC Investigators. Atherosclerosis Risk in Communities. Stroke (1993), 24:1297-1304.
O'Leary, Daniel H., MD and Polak, Joseph, F., MD, et al. "Use of sonography to evaluate carotid atherosclerosis in the elderly. The Cardiovascular Health study," Stroke (September 1991), 22,1155-1163.
Redberg, Rita F., MD and Vogel, Robert A., MD, et al. "Task force #3--What is the spectrum of current and emerging techniques for the noninvasive measurement of atherosclerosis?" Journal of the American College of Cardiology (June 4, 2003), 41:11, 1886-1898.
Percent area reduction
Taylor K.J.W., P.N. Burns, P. Breslau. Clinical applications of Doppler ultrasound, Raven Press, N.Y., (1988), 130-136.
474 Measurement publications and terminology
Chapter 6
Zwiebel W.J., J.A. Zagzebski, A.B. Crummy, et al. "Correlation of peak Doppler frequency with lumen narrowing in carotid stenosis," Stroke 3: (1982), 386-391. % Area Reduction = (1 - A2(cm2)/A1(cm2)) * 100 where:
A1 = original area of the vessel in square cm A2 = reduced area of the vessel in square cm
Percent diameter reduction
Handa, Nobuo et al., "Echo-Doppler velocimeter in the diagnosis of hypertensive patients: The renal artery Doppler technique," Ultrasound in Medicine and Biology 12:12 (1986), 945-952. % Diameter Reduction = (1 - D2(cm)/D1(cm)) * 100 where:
D1 = original diameter of the vessel in cm D2 = reduced diameter of the vessel in cm
Pressure gradient (PGr) in mmHG
Oh, J.K., J.B. Seward, A.J. Tajik. The echo manual. 2nd ed., Lippincott, Williams, and Wilkins, (1999), 64. 4 * (Velocity)2 Peak E Pressure Gradient (E PG) E PG = 4 * PE2 Peak A Pressure Gradient (A PG) A PG = 4 * PA2 Peak Pressure Gradient (PGmax) PGmax = 4 * PV2 Mean Pressure Gradient (PGmean) PGmean = 4 * Vmax2
FC1 User Guide
Measurement publications and terminology 475
Pulsatility index (PI)
Kurtz, A.B., W.D. Middleton. Ultrasound--the requisites. Mosby Year Book, Inc., (1996), 469. PI = (PSV EDV)/V where:
PSV = peak systolic velocity EDV = end diastolic velocity V = mean flow velocity throughout the entire cardiac cycle
Resistance index (RI)
Kurtz, A.B., W.D. Middleton. Ultrasound--the requisites. Mosby Year Book, Inc., (1996), 467. RI = abs ((Velocity A Velocity B)/Velocity A) in measurements where:
A = velocity cursor + B = velocity cursor x
Time averaged mean (TAM) in cm/s
TAM = mean (mean Trace)
Time averaged peak (TAP) in cm/s
TAP = peak (peak Trace)
Volume (Vol)
Beyer, W.H. Standard mathematical tables, 28th ed., CRC Press, Boca Raton, FL, (1987), 131.
Volume flow (VF) in ml/min
Allan, Paul L. et al. Clinical Doppler ultrasound, 4th ed. Harcourt Publishers Limited. (2000), 36-38. One of the following, depending on the Live Trace setting: VF = CSA * TAM * .06 VF = CSA * TAP * .06
476 Measurement publications and terminology
Chapter 6
CHAPTER 7
Chapter 7: Troubleshooting and maintenance
This chapter contains information that will help you correct problems with system operation, enter a software license, and take proper care of the system, transducer, and accessories.
Troubleshooting
If you encounter difficulty with the system, check whether your problem and its solution are in the following list. If they are not, or if the problem persists, contact FUJIFILM SonoSite Technical Support.
System does not turn on
1 Check all power connections. 2 Remove the AC adapter and battery, wait for 10 seconds, and then reinstall the battery
and reconnect the AC adapter. 3 Ensure that the battery is charged.
System image quality is poor
1 Adjust the viewing angle of the display. 2 Adjust the brightness. 3 Adjust the gain.
For details on how to adjust the gain, see "Adjusting the depth and gain of the image" on page 111.
There is no CPD image
Adjust the gain.
Troubleshooting 477
For details on how to adjust the gain, see "Adjusting the depth and gain of the image" on page 111.
There is no color image
Adjust the gain or the PRF scale. For details on how to adjust the gain, see "Adjusting the depth and gain of the image" on page 111. For more information on the PRF scale, see "Indirect controls" on page 539.
There are no measurement selections
Ensure the desired exam type has been selected and that the image is frozen. Press the CALCS button.
Printing does not work
1 Set Start in Output Management to ON. For the detailed procedure, see "Managing the output queue of examinations and images" on page 199.
2 Select the printer on the Store Button setup page.
For more information on assigning functions to Store buttons, see "Configuring Store buttons" on page 29.
3 Check the printer connections.
4 Ensure that the printer is turned on and set up properly.
5 Review the printer manufacturer's instructions.
Printing does not work with UP-X898MD
Caution
After installation of the UP-X898MD printer, you must configure the printer to emulate the DRV: 897 driver.
If you do not switch to the appropriate printer driver, the printer will not work.
1 On the printer, press the joystick (menu lever) to display the menu. 2 Using the joystick, scroll to DIGITAL, and then press the joystick to select. 3 Using the joystick, scroll to DRIVER, and then press the joystick to start. 4 Using the joystick, scroll to DRV: 897, and then press the joystick to select.
478 Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
System does not recognize the transducer
Disconnect and reconnect the transducer.
System does not mount the USB memory
1 Make sure that: Password protection is not enabled for the USB memory. The USB memory is not defective.
2 Use the USB memory included with the system.
System does not accept the data imported from USB
1 Make sure that the data are present in the DICOM format on the USB memory. 2 Re-export the original data in the DICOM format onto the USB memory. 3 Contact your system administrator.
The external video is not working
1 Make sure that the system is securely attached to the DVD Recorder. Note that the system does not work with the Image Store function.
2 Delete any unwanted images or clips from the patient exam. See "Deleting images" on page 197.
Patient information cannot be edited during examinations
Images transferred to DICOM Storage exist. The work list is in use. In the cases above, the patient information cannot be edited. If Exam in Progress is selected in the "Setting timing for DICOM network storage" on page 50, the patient information can also be edited by selecting OFF for Start on the Output Management screen while there is no transferred image. For details, see "Managing the output queue of examinations and images" on page 199.
FC1 User Guide
Troubleshooting 479
Patient information cannot be edited after examinations
Images transferred to DICOM Storage exist. The work list is in use. An examination has been output or input to the USB drive. Images have accumulated in the output queue. In the cases above, the Edit button is unavailable.
Edited patient information is not reflected to the image
Information in the header of the saved image has not been updated.
Information in the header is reflected only to the DICOM tag information.
Barcode cannot be read correctly
1 Set the peripheral used to a barcode.
See "Barcode reader and magnetic card reader setting" on page 42.
If the above procedures cannot solve problems, it is necessary to specify a barcode reader correctly. See the following examples for reference to set correctly.
Barcode reader can read the following three types.
Code128, NW-7(CODABAR), and/or Code39
Patient ID Reading by Barcode [CODE128]
1 Specify a barcode reader.
See "To specify a barcode reader" on page 42. Table 7-1: Barcode reader parameter
Item
Patient ID Start Position Patient ID Length Accession No. Start Position Accession No. Length
Parameter (DataLogic)
0 8 9 1
Parameter (Jadak)
0 8 9 1
480 Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
2 Press the PATIENT button.
3 Read the following Table 7-2 barcode by means of barcode reader. Table 7-2: Barcode value
Item
Value
Barcode
ID
ABCabc01
Patient ID Reading by Barcode [NW-7(CODABAR)]
1 Specify a barcode reader.
See "To specify a barcode reader" on page 42.
Table 7-3: Barcode reader parameter
Item
Patient ID Start Position Patient ID Length Accession No. Start Position Accession No. Length
Parameter (DataLogic)
1 5 7 1
Parameter (Jadak)
0 5 7 1
2 Press the PATIENT button.
3 Read the following Table 7-4 barcode by means of barcode reader. Table 7-4: Barcode value
Item
Value
Barcode
ID
00123
Patient ID Reading by Barcode [CODE39]
1 Specify a barcode reader.
FC1 User Guide
Troubleshooting 481
See "To specify a barcode reader" on page 42. Table 7-5: Barcode reader parameter
Item
Parameter (DataLogic)
Patient ID Start Position
0
Patient ID Length
8
Accession No. Start Position
9
Accession No. Length
1
Parameter (Jadak)
0 8 9 1
2 Press the PATIENT button.
3 Read the following Table 7-6 barcode by means of barcode reader.
Table 7-6: Barcode value
Item
Value
Barcode
ID
ABC01234
Receipt Number Reading by Barcode [CODE128]
1 Specify a barcode reader.
See "To specify a barcode reader" on page 42.
Table 7-7: Barcode reader parameter
Item
Patient ID Start Position Patient ID Length Accession No. Start Position Accession No. Length
Parameter (DataLogic)
9 1 0 8
Parameter (Jadak)
9 1 0 8
2 Press the PATIENT button.
482 Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
3 Read the following Table 7-8 barcode by means of barcode reader.
Table 7-8: Barcode value
Item
Value
Barcode
Receipt number ABCabc01
Receipt Number Reading by Barcode [NW-7(CODABAR)]
1 Specify a barcode reader.
See "To specify a barcode reader" on page 42. Table 7-9: Barcode reader parameter
Item
Parameter (DataLogic)
Parameter (Jadak)
Patient ID Start Position
7
7
Patient ID Length
1
1
Accession No. Start Position
1
0
Accession No. Length
5
5
2 Press the PATIENT button.
3 Read the following Table 7-10 barcode by means of barcode reader. Table 7-10: Barcode value
Item
Value
Barcode
Receipt number 00123
Receipt Number Reading by Barcode [CODE39]
1 Specify a barcode reader.
FC1 User Guide
Troubleshooting 483
See "To specify a barcode reader" on page 42. Table 7-11: Barcode reader parameter
Item
Parameter (DataLogic)
Patient ID Start Position
9
Patient ID Length
1
Accession No. Start Position
0
Accession No. Length
8
Parameter (Jadak)
9 1 0 8
2 Press the PATIENT button.
3 Read the following Table 7-12 barcode by means of barcode reader.
Table 7-12: Barcode value
Item
Value
Barcode
Receipt number ABC01234
Patient ID and Receipt Number Reading by Barcode [CODE128]
1 Specify a barcode reader.
See "To specify a barcode reader" on page 42.
Table 7-13: Barcode reader parameter
Item
Patient ID Start Position Patient ID Length Accession No. Start Position Accession No. Length
Parameter (DataLogic)
0 5 5 7
Parameter (Jadak)
0 5 5 7
2 Press the PATIENT button.
484 Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
3 Read the following Table 7-14 barcode by means of barcode reader.
Table 7-14: Barcode value
Item ID
Value ID123
Barcode
Receipt number AN12345
Patient ID and Receipt Number Reading by Barcode [NW-7(CODABAR)]
1 Specify a barcode reader.
See "To specify a barcode reader" on page 42. Table 7-15: Barcode reader parameter
Item
Parameter (DataLogic)
Parameter (Jadak)
Patient ID Start Position
1
0
Patient ID Length
5
5
Accession No. Start Position
6
5
Accession No. Length
7
7
2 Press the PATIENT button.
3 Read the following Table 7-16 barcode by means of barcode reader. Table 7-16: Barcode value
Item ID
Value 00123
Barcode
Receipt number 1234567
Patient ID and Receipt Number Reading by Barcode [CODE39]
1 Specify a barcode reader.
FC1 User Guide
Troubleshooting 485
See "To specify a barcode reader" on page 42. Table 7-17: Barcode reader parameter
Item
Parameter (DataLogic)
Patient ID Start Position
0
Patient ID Length
5
Accession No. Start Position
5
Accession No. Length
7
Parameter (Jadak)
0 5 5 7
2 Press the PATIENT button.
3 Read the following Table 7-18 barcode by means of barcode reader.
Table 7-18: Barcode value
Item
Value
Barcode
ID
ID123
Receipt number AN12345
Patient information link with C@RNACORE cannot be used
Check that the patient ID entered on the FC1 Patient Info screen is correct. Check that the LAN cable is connected. Check that the C@RNACORE version support patient information link. See "Server connection settings" on
page 44. Check that a device name compatible with C@RNACORE has been entered. For more information, see
"Server connection settings" on page 44.
Order link with C@RNACORE cannot be used
Check that the FC1 is turned on. Check that the LAN cable is connected. Check that the examination screen or Patient Info screen is displayed. Check that the DICOM and DICOM MWL settings are correct. See "Specifying DICOM settings" on page 45
and "DICOM MWL setting" on page 46.
486 Troubleshooting
Chapter 7
Check that the C@RNACORE version support order link. See "Server connection settings" on page 44. Check that a device name compatible with C@RNACORE has been entered. For more information, see
"Server connection settings" on page 44.
When using order link with C@RNACORE, the examination cannot be started with the transducer I want to use
Check that the transducer is connected. Check that the examination type setting is appropriate. For more information about the settings, see
"Configuring examination defaults (Exam Type Setting)" on page 67.
Software licensing
FUJIFILM SonoSite software is controlled by a license key. After you install new software, the system prompts you for a license key. You must obtain one key for each system or transducer that uses the software.
The software will operate for a short time (the grace period) without a license key. During the grace period, all system functions are available. After the grace period, you cannot use the system until you enter a valid license key
Caution
After the grace period expires, all system functions except licensing are unavailable until a valid license key is entered.
To obtain a license key for your software, contact FUJIFILM SonoSite Technical Support. You will need to provide the following information. For the steps to obtain this information, see "Viewing system information" on page 77.
The following information is required to obtain a license key:
ARM version PCBA serial number Name of person installing the upgrade System serial number (can be found on the bottom of the system) After you obtain a license key, enter it into the system.
To enter a license key
1 Turn on the system.
The license update screen appears.
FC1 User Guide
Software licensing 487
2 Type the license key in the Enter license number field. 3 Select OK on-screen. 4 If you entered a valid license key but the license update screen appears, verify that you entered the license
key correctly. If the license update screen still appears, contact FUJIFILM SonoSite Technical Support.
5 When you are prompted to restart the system, press the POWER button ( then press it again to turn it back on.
) to turn the system off, and
Maintenance
WARNING
Do not modify the FC1 ultrasound system.
No periodic or preventive maintenance is required for the system, transducer, or accessories other than cleaning and disinfecting the transducer after every use (see "Cleaning and disinfecting" on page 489). There are no internal components that require periodic testing or calibration. All maintenance requirements are described in this User guide. Performing maintenance procedures not described in this User guide may void the product warranty.
Contact FUJIFILM SonoSite Technical Support for any maintenance questions.
488 Maintenance
Chapter 7
CHAPTER 8
Chapter 8: Cleaning and disinfecting
This section updates the instructions for cleaning and disinfecting the ultrasound system, transducers, and accessories.
Use the FUJIFILM SonoSite recommendations when cleaning or disinfecting your ultrasound system, transducer, and accessories. Use the cleaning recommendations in the peripheral manufacturer's instructions when cleaning or disinfecting your peripherals.
The system and transducers must becleaned and disinfected after each exam. It is important to follow these cleaning and disinfecting instructions without skipping any steps.
See www.sonosite.com/transducers, for transducer images.
Before getting started
Follow the disinfectant manufacturer's recommendations regarding appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE), such as protective eyewear and gloves.
Inspect the system to determine that it is free of any unacceptable deterioration, such as corrosion, discoloration, pitting, or cracked seals. If damage is evident, discontinue use, and contact FUJIFILM SonoSite or your local representative.
Confirm that cleaning and disinfecting materials are appropriate for your facility's use. FUJIFILM SonoSite tests cleaners and disinfectants for use with the FUJIFILM SonoSite systems and transducers.
Disinfectants and cleaning methods listed in this chapter are recommended by FUJIFILM SonoSite for efficacy and material compatibility with the products.
Ensure that the disinfectant type and the solution strength and duration are appropriate for the equipment and application.
Follow manufacturer recommendations and local regulations, when preparing, using and disposing of chemicals.
WARNING
Ensure that cleaning and disinfecting solutions and wipes are not expired.
Some cleaners and disinfectants can cause an allergic reaction to some individuals.
Before getting started 489
Caution
Do not allow cleaning solution or disinfectant into the system connectors, or transducer connector.
Do not use strong solvents such as thinner or benzene, or abrasive cleansers, since these will damage the exterior surfaces. Use only FUJIFILM SonoSite recommended cleaners or disinfectants.
Determining the required cleaning and disinfecting level
WARNING
The cleaning instructions contained in this chapter are based on requirements mandated by the American Food and Drug Administration (FDA). Failure to follow these instructions may result in cross contamination and patient infection.
The level of cleaning and disinfecting required for the system is dictated by the type of tissue it contacts during use. Use Table 8-1 to determine the level of cleaning and disinfecting required.
Table 8-1: Choosing a cleaning and disinfecting method
Did any part of the system or transducer come in contact with broken skin, blood, mucosal membranes, or bodily fluids?
YES
Came in contact with broken skin, blood, mucosal membranes, or bodily fluids.
OR
Option A
Go to "Clean and disinfect system and transducer to a high level (semi-critical uses)" on page 491
NO
Did not come in contact with broken skin, blood, mucosal membranes, or bodily fluids.
Option B
Go to "Clean and disinfect system and transducer to a low level (non-critical uses)" on page 496
Spaulding classifications
Spaulding classifications (non-critical, semi-critical) determine the approach for cleaning and disinfecting medical equipment based on the device, the way it has been used, and the risk of infection. The system and transducers are designed for use within the Spaulding classifications of non-critical and semi-critical uses.
490 Determining the required cleaning and disinfecting level
Chapter 8
Option A Clean and disinfect system and transducer to a
high level (semi-critical uses)
Use this procedure to clean and high-level disinfect the ultrasound system and transducer whenever it has come into contact with blood, broken skin, mucosal membranes, or bodily fluids.
Follow the manufacturer's instructions when using cleaners and disinfectants. The cleaners and disinfectants listed in the procedure are both chemically compatible and have been tested for efficacy with the system and transducers. Confirm that the cleaners and disinfectants are appropriate for your facility's use.
WARNING
To avoid electrical shock, before cleaning, disconnect the system from the power supply.
Wear the appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) recommended by the chemical manufacturer, such as eyewear and gloves.
Caution
Do not skip any steps or abbreviate the cleaning and disinfecting process in any way.
Do not spray cleaners or disinfectants directly on the system surfaces or on system and transducer connectors. Doing so may cause solution to leak into the system, damaging it and voiding the warranty.
Do not attempt to disinfect a transducer or transducer cable using a method or chemical that is not included here. This can damage the transducer and void the warranty.
Use only FUJIFILM SonoSite recommended cleaners and disinfectants. Using a non- recommended disinfecting solution or incorrect solution strength can damage the System and transducer and void the warranty. Follow the disinfectant manufacturer's recommendations for solutions strengths.
Note
You must clean and disinfect both the ultrasound system and the transducer after each use, but only the transducer can be disinfected to a high level.
To clean and disinfect the system and transducer 1 Turn off the system by pressing the Power button. 2 Unplug the power cord from the outlet. 3 Remove the disposable transducer sheath, if applicable. 4 Disconnect the transducer from the system. Temporarily place it where it will not cross-contaminate clean
equipment or surfaces while you clean the ultrasound system.
FC1 User Guide
Determining the required cleaning and disinfecting level 491
5 Clean the exterior surfaces of the ULTRASOUND SYSTEM to remove any debris or bodily fluids. Use the following procedure:
a Use either a pre-moistened wipe or a soft cloth dampened with cleaner or disinfectant. Choose a cleaner from the list of approved cleaners.
Approved cleaners/disinfectants for the ultrasound system:
Cleaner/disinfectant
Minimum wet contact timea
SaniCloth AF3b
3 minutes
SaniCloth Plus PI-Spray II
3 minutes 10 minutes
a For maximum effectiveness, the component being cleaned must remain wet with disinfectant for a minimum period of time. b Qualified for use as an intermediate-level disinfectant for mycobacteria. Refer to the cleaners and disinfection document available at www.sonosite.com for a complete list of the most current cleaners and disinfectants.
b Remove all gel, debris, and bodily fluids from the system.
c With a new wipe, clean the system, including the display, by wiping from clean areas to the soiled areas. This method helps to avoid cross-contamination.
d Observe the minimum wet contact time and refer to manufacturer's instructions. Monitor the system for wet appearance. Re-apply with a new wipe if no longer wet.
e Allow the ultrasound system to air dry in a clean, well-ventilated space.
6 Clean the ultrasound system STAND to remove any debris or bodily fluids.
7 Clean the TRANSDUCER CABLE AND BODY to remove any debris or bodily fluids. Use the following procedure:
492 Determining the required cleaning and disinfecting level
Chapter 8
a Use either a premoistened wipe or a soft cloth dampened with cleaner or disinfectant. Choose a cleaner from the list of approved cleaners.
Approved cleaners/disinfectants for the transducer:
Product
Compatible Transducer
Minimum wet contact timea
SaniCloth AF3b SaniCloth Plus
C11xp, C35xp, C60xf, HFL38xp, HFL50xp, ICTxp, L25xp, L38xp, P21xp
HFL38xp, HFL50xp, ICTxp
3 minutes 3 minutes
PI-Spray II
C11xp, C60xf, HFL38xp, HFL50xp, ICTxp, L25xp, L38xp, P21xp
10 minutes
a For maximum effectiveness, the component being cleaned must remain wet with disinfectant for a minimum period of time. b Qualified for use as an intermediate-level disinfectant for mycobacteria. Refer to the cleaners and disinfection document available at www.sonosite.com for a complete list of the most current cleaners and disinfectants.
b Remove all gel, debris, and bodily fluids from the transducer.
c With a new wipe, clean the cable and transducer, starting from the cable, wiping toward the scanhead. This method helps to avoid cross-contamination.
Caution
Do not allow moisture near the electronic components of the connector.
d Observe the minimum wet contact time and refer to manufacturer's instructions. Monitor the transducer for wet appearance. Re-apply with a new wipe if no longer wet.
8 Verify that all gel, debris, and bodily fluids have been removed from the system and transducer. If necessary, repeat steps 5, 6, and 7 with a new wipe.
WARNING
Failure to remove all gel, debris, and bodily fluid could leave contaminants on the probe.
9 Prepare the disinfectant for use.
FC1 User Guide
Determining the required cleaning and disinfecting level 493
a Choose a high-level disinfectant from the list of approved disinfectants. High-level disinfectants compatible with FC1 transducers:
Disinfectanta
Compatible transducers
Temperature Disinfectant soak duration
Cidex
C11xp, C35xp, C60xf, HFL38xp, HFL50xp, ICTxp, L25xp, L38xp, P21xp
25oC, 77oF
45 minutes
Cidex OPA
C11xp, C60xf, HFL38xp, HFL50xp, ICTxp, L25xp, L38xp, P21xp
20oC, 68oF
12 minutes
Revital-Ox RESERT C35xp
20oC, 68oF
8 minutes
Refer to the cleaners and disinfection document available at www.sonosite.com for a complete list of the most current cleaners and disinfectants.
b Check the expiration date on the bottle to ensure the disinfectant has not expired. c Mix or check that the disinfection chemicals have the concentration recommended by the manufacturer
(for example, a chemical strip test). d Check that the temperature of the disinfectant is within the manufacturer's recommended limits. 10 Perform a high-level disinfection of the transducer. Use the following procedure:
a Immerse the transducer in a high-level disinfectant solution.
WARNING
High-level disinfectants can cause harm to the patient if not completely removed from the transducer. Follow the manufacturer's rinse instructions to remove chemical residue.
Caution
Do not soak the transducer longer than recommended by the chemical manufacturer.
Do not immerse the transducer connector in any disinfectant solution.
Use only FUJIFILM SonoSite recommended cleaners and disinfectants. Using a non- recommended disinfecting solution or incorrect solution strength can damage or discolor the transducer and void the warranty.
494 Determining the required cleaning and disinfecting level
Chapter 8
b Ensure that the connector and most of the cable remain out of the fluid. You may submerge 2 inches (5 cm) of the cable proximal to the transducer scanhead.
Cable
Connector Do not submerge
Maximum 5 cm (2 inches)
Scan head
Figure 8-1: Transducer component names
11 Rinse the transducer 3 separate times using the following procedure:
a Rinse the transducer in clean, running water according to the disinfectant manufacturer's instructions (at least 1 minute).
b Ensure that the connector and at least 12-18 inches (31-46 cm) of the cable from the connector remain out of the fluid.
c Replace the rinse water before beginning the next rinse. 12 Dry the transducer with a sterile lint-free cloth.
13 Dispose of the disinfectant according to the manufacturer's guidelines.
14 Examine the transducer and cable for damage, such as cracks or splitting where fluid can enter.
If damage is evident, discontinue use of the transducer, and contact FUJIFILM SonoSite or your local representative.
FC1 User Guide
Determining the required cleaning and disinfecting level 495
Option B Clean and disinfect system and transducer to a
low level (non-critical uses)
Use the following procedure to clean and disinfect the ultrasound system and transducer if it has not come into contact with blood, broken skin, mucosal membranes, or bodily fluids.
WARNING
If the system or transducer has come into contact with any of the following, use the high-level cleaning and disinfection procedure. See "Clean and disinfect system and transducer to a high level (semi-critical uses)" on page 491. Blood Broken skin Mucosal membranes Bodily fluids
Follow the manufacturer's instructions when using cleaners and disinfectants. The materials listed in the table below are chemically compatible with the system and transducers. Confirm that the cleaners and disinfectants are appropriate for your facility's use.
WARNING
To avoid electrical shock, before cleaning, disconnect the system from the power supply.
Wear the appropriate personal protective equipment (PPE) recommended by the chemical manufacturer, such as eyewear and gloves.
Caution
Do not spray cleaners or disinfectants directly on the system surfaces or on system and transducer connectors. Doing so may cause solution to leak into the system, damaging it and voiding the warranty.
Use only FUJIFILM SonoSite-recommended cleaners and disinfectants. Using a non- recommended disinfecting solution or incorrect solution strength can damage the System and transducer and void the warranty. Follow the disinfectant manufacturer's recommendations for solutions strengths.
Do not attempt to disinfect a transducer or transducer cable using a method or chemical that is not included here. Doing so can damager the transducer and void the warranty.
To clean and disinfect the system and transducer 1 Turn off the system by pressing the Power button. 2 Unplug the power cord from the outlet. 3 Remove the transducer sheath, if applicable.
496 Determining the required cleaning and disinfecting level
Chapter 8
4 Disconnect the transducer from the system. Temporarily place it where it will not cross-contaminate clean equipment or surfaces while you clean the ultrasound system.
5 Clean the exterior surfaces of the ULTRASOUND SYSTEM to remove any debris or bodily fluids. Use the following procedure:
a Use either a pre-moistened wipe or a soft cloth dampened with cleaner and disinfectant. Choose a cleaner from the list of approved cleaners.
Approved cleaners/disinfectants for the ultrasound system:
Cleaner/disinfectant
Minimum wet contact timea
SaniCloth AF3b
3 minutes
SaniCloth Plus PI-Spray II
3 minutes 10 minutes
a For maximum effectiveness, the component being cleaned must remain wet with disinfectant for a minimum period of time. b Qualified for use as an intermediate-level disinfectant for mycobacteria. Refer to the cleaners and disinfection document available at www.sonosite.com for a complete list of the most current cleaners and disinfectants.
b Remove all gel, debris, and bodily fluids from the system.
c With a new wipe, clean the system, including the display, by wiping from clean areas to the soiled areas. This method helps to avoid cross-contamination.
d Observe the minimum wet contact time and refer to manufacturer's instructions. Monitor the system for wet appearance. Re-apply with a new wipe if no longer wet.
6 Clean the ultrasound system STAND to remove any debris or bodily fluids.
7 Clean the TRANSDUCER CABLE AND BODY to remove any debris or bodily fluids. Use the following procedure:
FC1 User Guide
Determining the required cleaning and disinfecting level 497
a Use either a pre-moistened wipe or a soft cloth dampened with cleaner or disinfectant. Choose a cleaner from the list of approved cleaners.
Approved cleaners/disinfectants for the transducer:
Product
Compatible Transducer
Minimum wet contact timea
SaniCloth AF3b SaniCloth Plus
C11xp, C35xp, C60xf, HFL38xp, HFL50xp, ICTxp, L25xp, L38xp, P21xp
HFL38xp, HFL50xp, ICTxp
3 minutes 3 minutes
PI-Spray II
C11xp, C60xf, HFL38xp, HFL50xp, ICTxp, L25xp, L38xp, P21xp
10 minutes
a For maximum effectiveness, the component being cleaned must remain wet with disinfectant for a minimum period of time. b Qualified for use as an intermediate-level disinfectant for mycobacteria. Refer to the cleaners and disinfection document available at www.sonosite.com for a complete list of the most current cleaners and disinfectants.
b Remove all gel, debris, and bodily fluids from the transducer.
c With a new wipe, clean the cable and transducer, starting from the cable, wiping toward the scanhead. This method helps to avoid cross-contamination.
Caution
Do not allow moisture near the electronic components of the connector.
d Observe the required wet contact time and refer to manufacturer's instructions. Monitor the transducer for wet appearance. Re-apply with a new wipe if no longer wet.
8 Verify that all gel, debris, and bodily fluids have been removed from the system and transducer. If necessary, repeat steps 5, 6, and 7 with a new wipe.
9 Allow the ultrasound system, including the console and transducer, to air dry in a clean, well-ventilated space.
498 Determining the required cleaning and disinfecting level
Chapter 8
10 Examine the system, transducer and cable for damage, such as cracks or splitting where fluid can enter.
If damage is evident, do not use the transducer. Instead, contact FUJIFILM SonoSite or your local representative.
Storing the transducer
To store the transducer
1 Make sure the transducer has been cleaned and disinfected as detailed in the previous section.
2 Store the transducer so that it hangs freely and vertically, and observe the following precautions: Store the transducer away from any contaminated transducers. Store the transducer in an environment that is safe and has good airflow. Do not store the transducer in closed containers or where condensation may occur. Avoid direct sunlight and exposure to x-rays. Recommended storage temperature range is between 0o C (32o F) and +45o C (113o F). If using a wall-mounted rack for storage, ensure that: It is securely mounted. The storage slots do not mar the transducer or cause damage to the cable. The rack is sized and positioned to prevent the transducer from inadvertently falling. Make sure the connector is supported and secure.
Transporting the transducer
When transporting the transducer, you must take precautions to protect the transducer from damage and avoid cross-contamination. Be sure to use a container approved by your organization.
To transport a soiled transducer for cleaning
A soiled transducer is one that has been contaminated and must be cleaned before using it in an exam.
FC1 User Guide
Storing the transducer 499
1 Place the transducer in a clean, approved container.
WARNING
To prevent cross-contamination or unprotected exposure of personnel to biological material, containers used to transport contaminated transducers should carry an ISO biohazard label similar to the following:
Caution
Ensure the transducer is dry before placing it in a closed container. Condensation from a damp transducer can damage the connector.
2 Transport the transducer in the container to the point of processing. Do not open the container until the transducer is ready to be cleaned.
Caution
Do not leave the transducer in a sealed container for long periods of time.
To transport a clean transducer
A clean transducer is one that has completed the cleaning and disinfection process, has been stored properly, and is ready to be used in an examination.
1 Place the transducer in a clean, approved container. To identify the transducer as clean, containers used to transport clean transducers should carry a cleanliness verification sticker or certificate.
2 Transport the transducer in the container to the point of use. Do not open the container until the transducer is ready to be used.
To ship a transducer
WARNING
Whenever possible, avoid shipping a contaminated transducer. Before shipping, ensure the transducer has been cleaned and disinfected using the steps detailed in this chapter or according to special instructions received from FUJIFILM SonoSite. If you are returning the transducer to FUJIFILM SonoSite, document the disinfection on a "Declaration of Cleanliness," and attach it to the packing list.
1 Place the transducer in the shipping container and seal it. Do not allow any part of the transducer to protrude from the container.
2 Ship the transducer using the following precautions:
Clearly label the container as fragile.
500 Transporting the transducer
Chapter 8
Do not stack items on top of the shipping container. Do not exceed the shipping temperature range: -35o C (-31o F) to +65o C (149o F). Do not open the shipping container until it reaches its final destination. After arrival, the transducer must be cleaned and disinfected before it can be used in an exam.
Accessories
To clean and disinfectant the stand or Triple Transducer Connect, (TTC), see "Cleaning and disinfecting the stand or Triple Transducer Connect (TTC)" on page 502.
To clean the footswitch see "Cleaning the footswitch" on page 502.
To clean ECG cables, see "Cleaning ECG cables" on page 503.
To clean the ECG slave cable, refer to the ECG Slave Cable & Adapter Kit User Guide.
To clean the battery, see "Cleaning and disinfecting the battery" on page 504.
To clean the trackball, see "Cleaning the trackball" on page 504.
Use the cleaning and disinfecting recommendations in the peripheral manufacturer's instructions when cleaning or disinfecting peripherals.
Cleaning and disinfecting accessories
Clean accessories prior to disinfecting. You can disinfect the exterior surface of accessories using a recommended disinfectant. Refer to the cleaners and disinfection document available at www.sonosite.com.
WARNING
To avoid electrical shock, always disconnect the power supply before cleaning the PowerPark.
To clean and disinfect accessories
1 If necessary, unplug the power supply, and detach any cables.
2 Clean the exterior surfaces of the accessory using a soft cloth lightly dampened in a mild soap or detergent cleaning solution to remove any particulate matter or body fluids.
Apply the solution to the cloth rather than the surface. 3 Mix the disinfectant solution compatible with the accessory, following disinfectant label instructions for
solution strengths and disinfectant contact duration. Refer to the cleaners and disinfection document available at www.sonosite.com.
FC1 User Guide
Accessories 501
4 Wipe surfaces with the disinfectant solution. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the disinfecting solution, including exposure time and temperature for effective disinfection.
5 Air dry or towel dry with a clean cloth.
Cleaning and disinfecting the stand or Triple Transducer Connect (TTC)
To clean and disinfect the stand or TTC
You can clean and disinfect the exterior surface of the stand or TTC using a recommended cleaner or disinfectant.
1 Do one of the following:
If cleaning the stand, unplug the power supply, detach any cables from the system, and remove the system.
If cleaning the TTC, remove it from the system platform.
2 Clean the surfaces using a soft cloth lightly dampened in a mild soap or detergent cleaning solution.
Apply the solution to the cloth rather than the surface.
3 Wipe the surfaces with the disinfecting solution. Follow the manufacturer's instructions for the disinfecting solution, including exposure time and temperature for effective disinfection.
4 Air dry or towel dry with a clean cloth.
Cleaning the footswitch
Caution
To avoid damaging the footswitch, do not sterilize. It is not intended for use in a sterile environment.
To clean the footswitch Use the disinfecting recommendations in the peripheral manufacturer's instructions when disinfecting the footswitch. 1 Dampen a non-abrasive cloth with a recommended cleaner or disinfectant. 2 Wring out cloth until slightly wet and then gently rub soiled area until clean.
502 Accessories
Chapter 8
Cleaning ECG cables
Note
ECG cables are reusable, and are non-sterile when provided.
To clean ECG cables WARNING
Do not immerse ECG cables in any liquid.
You may clean ECG cables as many as 15 times using the following procedure:
1 Remove the cables from the system.
2 Clean the surface using a soft cloth or gauze pad lightly dampened with one of the following agents: Green soap Green soap tincture (US Pharmacopoeia) or alcohol free hand soap 2% glutaraldehyde solution (e.g. Cidex) Sodium hypochlorite (10% bleach solution) Apply the solution to the cloth rather than the surface.
3 Wipe all exposed surfaces with the dampened cloth.
4 Repeat step 2 and 3 with a clean cloth or gauze pad.
5 Dry all exposed surfaces with a clean, dry cloth or gauze pad.
To sterilize the ECG cable
Caution
Do not use an autoclave, gamma radiation, or steam to sterilize the ECG cable.
To avoid damage, sterilize ECG cables only when necessary. Replace cables after 10 sterilization cycles. 1 Sterilize ECG cables using ethylene oxide (EtO) sterilization methods. 2 To dissipate the ethylene oxide, aerate the cables. Follow all necessary safety precautions.
FC1 User Guide
Accessories 503
Cleaning and disinfecting the battery
Caution
To avoid damaging the battery, do not allow cleaning solution or disinfectant to come in contact with the battery terminals.
To clean and disinfect a battery (wipe method)
1 Remove the battery from the system.
2 Clean the surface using a soft cloth lightly dampened in a mild soap or detergent cleaning solution.
Note
Apply the solution to the cloth rather than the surface.
3 Wipe the surfaces with the disinfection solution. Sani-Cloth HB, Sani-Cloth Wipes, or 70% isopropyl alcohol is recommended.
4 Air dry.
Cleaning the trackball
If any foreign matter (such as dust) gets under the trackball, remove the trackball (following the procedure below) and then clean the inside of the device. To clean the trackball itself, see the User's Guide.
To remove the trackball
1 Remove the trackball retainer by rotating it counterclockwise and lifting it out.
Figure 8-2: Removing the trackball retainer 504 Accessories
Chapter 8
At this point the trackball is exposed.
Figure 8-3: Trackball retainer removed 2 Remove the trackball.
Figure 8-4: Trackball removed
FC1 User Guide
Accessories 505
506 Accessories
Chapter 8
CHAPTER 9
Chapter 9: Safety
This chapter contains ergonomic, electrical, and clinical safety information required by regulatory agencies. The information applies to the ultrasound system, transducer, accessories, and peripherals. This chapter also defines labeling symbols, specifications, and standards. For safety information regarding the "As low as reasonably achievable" (ALARA) principle and acoustic output, see "Acoustic Output" on page 537.
Ergonomic considerations
These guidelines for healthy scanning are intended to assist you in the comfortable and effective use of your ultrasound system.
Ergonomic considerations 507
WARNING
Use of an ultrasound system may be linked to musculoskeletal disorders (MSDs)1,2,3. Use of an ultrasound system is defined as the physical interaction between the operator, the ultrasound system, and the transducer.
To prevent musculoskeletal disorders, follow the guidelines in this section:
When using an ultrasound system, as with many similar physical activities, you may experience occasional discomfort in your hands, fingers, arms, shoulders, eyes, back, or other parts of your body. However, if you experience symptoms such as constant or recurring discomfort, pain, throbbing, aching, tingling, numbness, burning sensations, or stiffness, do not ignore these warning signs. Promptly see a qualified health professional. Symptoms such as these can be linked with MSDs. MSDs can be painful and may result in potentially disabling injuries to the nerves, muscles, tendons, or other parts of the body. Examples of MSDs include carpal tunnel syndrome and tendonitis.
While researchers are not able to definitively answer many questions about MSDs, there is a general agreement that certain factors are associated with their occurrence, including preexisting medical and physical conditions, overall health, equipment and body position while doing work, frequency of work, duration of work, and other physical activities 4. This chapter provides guidelines that may help you work more comfortably and may reduce your risk of MSDs5,6.
1. Magnavita, N., L. Bevilacqua, P. Mirk, A. Fileni, and N. Castellino. "Work-related musculoskeletal complaints in sonologists." Occupational Environmental Medicine. 41:11 (1999), 981-988.
2. Craig, M. "Sonography: An occupational hazard?" Journal of Diagnostic Medical Sonography. 3
(1985), 121-125.
3. Smith, C.S., G.W. Wolf, G. Y. Xie, and M. D. Smith. "Musculoskeletal pain in cardiac ultrasonographers: Results of a random survey." Journal of American Society of Echocardiography. (May1997), 357-362.
4. Wihlidal, L.M. and S. Kumar. "An injury profile of practicing diagnostic medical sonographers in Alberta." International Journal of Industrial Ergonomics. 19 (1997), 205-216.
5. Habes, D.J. and S. Baron. "Health hazard report 99-0093-2749." University of Medicine and Dentistry of New Jersey. (1999).
6. Vanderpool, H.E., E.A. Friis, B.S. Smith, and K.L. Harms. "Prevalence of carpal tunnel syndrome and other work-related musculoskeletal problems in cardiac sonographers." Journal of Medicine. 35:6 (1993), 605-
610.
Positioning the system
To promote comfortable shoulder, arm, and hand postures
Use a stand to support the weight of the ultrasound system. To minimize eye and neck strain
If possible, position the system within reach. Adjust the angle of the clinical display to minimize glare.
508 Positioning the system
Chapter 9
If using a stand, adjust its height so that the display is at or slightly below eye level. When lowering the stand, do not hold the handle, but instead hold the portion of the stand close to the column pole.
Positioning yourself
To support your back during an exam
Use a chair that Supports your lower back
Adjusts to your work surface height
Promotes a natural body posture
Allows quick height adjustments
Always sit or stand upright. Avoid bending or stooping. To minimize reaching and twisting
Use a bed that is height-adjustable. Position the patient as close to you as possible. Face forward.
Avoid twisting your head or body. Move your entire body front to back, and position your scanning arm next to or slightly in front of you. To minimize reaching, stand for difficult exams. Position the ultrasound system or display directly in front of you. Provide an auxiliary monitor for patient viewing. To promote comfortable shoulder and arm postures
Keep your elbows close to your side. Relax your shoulders in a level position. Support your arm on a support cushion or pillow, or rest it on the bed. To promote comfortable hand, wrist, and finger postures
Hold the transducer lightly in your fingers. Minimize the pressure that you apply on the patient. Keep your wrist in a straight position.
FC1 User Guide
Positioning yourself 509
Taking breaks, exercising, and varying activities
To effectively allow your body to recover from physical activity and help you avoid MSDs
Minimize scanning time. Take breaks. Some ultrasound tasks may require longer or more frequent breaks. However, simply changing tasks can help some muscle groups relax while others remain or become active.
To work efficiently, use the software and hardware features correctly. Keep moving.
To avoid sustaining the same posture, vary your head, neck, body, arm, and leg positions. Do targeted exercises.
Targeted exercises can strengthen muscle groups, which may help you avoid MSDs. Contact a qualified health professional to determine stretches and exercises that are right for you.
Electrical safety
This system meets EN60601-1, Class I/internally powered equipment requirements and Type BF and Type CF isolated patient-applied parts safety requirements.
This system complies with the applicable medical equipment requirements published in the Canadian Standards Association (CSA), European Norm Harmonized Standards, and Underwriters Laboratories (UL) safety standards.
For maximum safety, observe the following warnings and cautions.
WARNING WARNING WARNING
To avoid discomfort or minor risk of patient injury, keep hot surfaces away from the patient.
Under certain circumstances, the transducer connector and back of the display enclosure can reach temperatures that exceed EN60601-1 limits for patient contact. Therefore, only the operator shall handle the system. This does not include the transducer face. If the connector exceeds the specified temperature and is exposed to the patient, it may make the patient uncomfortable or injure him or her. Do not allow patient contact with parts of the system other than the transducers or ECG leads.
To avoid the risk of injury, do not operate the system in the presence of flammable gases or anesthetics. Explosion can result.
510 Taking breaks, exercising, and varying activities
Chapter 9
WARNING WARNING
To avoid the risk of electrical shock or injury, do not open the system enclosures. All internal adjustments and replacements, except battery replacement, must be made by a qualified technician. Check all fasteners and connections to avoid injury.
To avoid the risk of electrical shock: This equipment must be connected only to a supply mains with protective
grounding.
Use only properly grounded equipment. Shock hazards exist if the power supply is not properly grounded. Grounding reliability can be achieved only when the equipment is connected to a receptacle marked "Hospital Only," "Hospital Grade," or an equivalent. The grounding wire must not be removed or disabled.
When using the system in an environment where the integrity of the protective earth conductor arrangement is in doubt, operate the system on battery power only, without using the power supply.
Do not touch any of the following, under these conditions:
The power supply and the patient at the same time
The ungrounded signal input/output connectors on the back of the ultrasound system
The system battery contacts (inside the battery compartment)
The system transducer connector, when the transducer or Triple Transducer Connect (TTC) is disconnected
The system transducer connector on the TTC, if no transducers are connected
FC1 User Guide
Electrical safety 511
WARNING
WARNING WARNING WARNING
Do not connect the system's power supply or a FC1 stand system to a multiple portable socket outlet (MPSO) or extension cord.
Before using the transducer, inspect the face of the transducer elements, housing, and cable.
Do not use the transducer if the transducer or cable is damaged.
Always disconnect the power supply from the system before cleaning the system.
Do not use any transducer that has been immersed beyond the specified cleaning or disinfection level.
See "Troubleshooting and maintenance" on page 477.
Use only accessories and peripherals recommended by FUJIFILM SonoSite, including the power supply.
Connection of accessories and peripherals not recommended by FUJIFILM SonoSite could result in electrical shock. Contact FUJIFILM SonoSite or your local representative for a list of accessories and peripherals available from or recommended by FUJIFILM SonoSite.
Use commercial-grade peripherals recommended by FUJIFILM SonoSite on battery power only. Do not connect these products to AC mains power when using the system to scan or diagnose a patient/subject.
Contact FUJIFILM SonoSite or your local representative for a list of the commercial-grade peripherals available from or recommended by FUJIFILM SonoSite.
To avoid the risk of electrical shock and fire hazard: Inspect the power supply, AC power cords, cables, and plugs on a regular basis to ensure that they are not damaged.
Use the power cord set that connects the power supply of the ultrasound system or the stand to mains power only with the power supply or FC1 stand system.
You must not use them to connect other devices to mains power.
To prevent injury to the operator or a bystander, remove the transducer from patient contact before the application of a high-voltage defibrillation pulse.
To avoid possible electrical shock or electromagnetic interference, verify proper operation and compliance with relevant safety standards for all equipment before clinical use.
Connecting additional equipment to the ultrasound system constitutes configuring a medical system.
512 Electrical safety
Chapter 9
Caution
Do not use the system if an error message appears on the image display. Instead: 1 Note the error code.
2 Call FUJIFILM SonoSite or your local representative.
3 Turn off the system by pressing and holding the power key until the system powers down.
To avoid increasing the system and transducer connector temperature, do not block the airflow to the ventilation holes on the side of the system To avoid burn injury, while using the device, do not touch the AC adapter, as it becomes hot.
FC1 User Guide
Electrical safety 513
Electrical safety classification
Table 9-1: Electrical classifications for system elements
Electrical classification System element
Class I equipment
Internally powered equipment Type BF applied parts Type CF applied parts IPX-7 (watertight equipment) IPX-8 (watertight equipment)
Non AP/APG
The ultrasound system is classified as Class I equipment when powered from the AC power supply or mounted on the stand, because the AC power supply is a Class 1 protectively grounded power supply. The stand has no protective grounding. Ground bond testing is not applicable to the ultrasound system or the stand. AC powered peripherals that may be used with the system are Class I and are individually protectively grounded. Ground bond testing may be conducted on each AC powered peripheral.
Ultrasound system not connected to the power supply (battery only)
Ultrasound transducers ECG module/ECG leads
Ultrasound transducers
Foot switch
Ultrasound system power supply, FC1 stand system, and peripherals. Equipment is not suitable for use in the presence of flammable anesthetics.
514 Electrical safety
Chapter 9
Equipment safety
To protect your ultrasound system, transducer, and accessories, follow these precautions.
Caution
Excessive bending or twisting of cables can cause a failure or intermittent operation.
Improper cleaning or disinfecting of any part of the system can cause permanent damage. For cleaning and disinfecting instructions, see "Maintenance" on page 488.
Do not submerge the transducer connector in solution. The cable is not liquidtight beyond the transducer connector/cable interface.
Do not use solvents such as thinner or benzene, or abrasive cleaners on any part of the system.
Remove the battery from the system if the system is not likely to be used for some time.
Do not spill liquid on the system.
When lowering the stand of the stand cart, do not hold the handle; instead, hold the portion of the stand close to the column pole.
Close the FC1 display before transporting the system, to avoid injury.
FC1 User Guide
Equipment safety 515
Battery safety
To prevent the battery from bursting, igniting, or emitting fumes and causing personal injury or equipment damage, observe the following precautions.
WARNING WARNING
The battery has a safety device. Do not disassemble or alter the battery.
Charge the batteries only when the ambient temperature is between 0° and 40°C (32° and 104°F).
Do not short-circuit the battery by directly connecting the positive and negative terminals with metal objects.
Do not touch battery contacts.
Do not heat the battery or discard it in a fire.
Do not expose the battery to temperatures over 60°C (140°F). Keep it away from fire and other heat sources.
Do not charge the battery near a heat source, such as a fire or heater.
Do not leave the battery in direct sunlight.
Do not pierce the battery with a sharp object, hit it, or step on it.
Do not use a damaged battery.
Do not solder a battery.
The polarity of the battery terminals is fixed and cannot be switched or reversed. Do not force the battery into the system.
Do not connect the battery to an electrical power outlet.
Do not continue recharging the battery if it does not recharge after two successive six-hour charging cycles.
Do not ship a damaged battery without instructions from FUJIFILM SonoSite Technical Support.
If the battery leaks or emits an odor, remove it from all possible flammable sources.
Periodically check to make sure that the battery charges fully. If the battery fails to charge fully, replace it.
516 Battery safety
Chapter 9
Caution
To avoid having the battery become damaged and causing equipment damage, observe the following precautions:
Do not immerse the battery in water or allow it to get wet.
Do not put the battery into a microwave oven or pressurized container.
If the battery emits an odor or heat, is deformed or discolored, or in any way appears abnormal during use, recharging or storage, immediately remove it and stop using it. If you have any questions about the battery, consult FUJIFILM SonoSite or your local representative.
Store the battery between -20°C (-4°F) and 60°C (140°F).
Use only FUJIFILM SonoSite batteries.
Do not use or charge the battery with non-FUJIFILM SonoSite equipment. Only charge the battery with the system.
FC1 User Guide
Battery safety 517
Clinical safety
WARNING
Nonmedical (commercial)-grade peripheral monitors have not been verified or validated by FUJIFILM SonoSite as being suitable for diagnosis.
To avoid the risk of a burn hazard, do not use the transducer with highfrequency surgical equipment. Such a hazard may occur in the event of a defect in the high-frequency surgical neutral electrode connection.
Do not use the system if it exhibits erratic or inconsistent behavior. Discontinuities or nonimage display in the scanning sequence indicate a hardware failure that must be corrected before use.
Some transducer sheaths contain natural rubber latex and talc, which can cause allergic reactions in some individuals. Refer to 21 CFR 801.437, User labeling, for devices that contain natural rubber. After attaching the transducer cover to the transducer, make sure that the cover is free from holes or crevices.
Perform ultrasound procedures prudently. Use the ALARA ("as low as reasonably achievable") principle and follow the prudent use information concerning the mechanical index (MI) and the thermal index (TI).
FUJIFILM SonoSite does not currently recommend a specific brand of acoustic standoff. If an acoustic standoff is used, it must have a minimum attenuation of .3dB/cm/MHz.
Some FUJIFILM SonoSite transducers are approved for intraoperative applications if a market-cleared sheath is used.
To avoid injury or reduce the risk of infection to the patient, observe the following:
Follow Universal Precautions when inserting and maintaining a medical device for interventional and intraoperative procedures.
Appropriate training in interventional and intraoperative procedures as dictated by current relevant medical practices as well as in proper operation of the ultrasound system and transducer is required. During vascular access, the potential exists for serious complications, including (without limitation) the following: pneumothorax, arterial puncture, guidewire misplacement, and risks normally associated with local or general anesthesia, surgery, and postoperative recovery.
518 Clinical safety
Chapter 9
WARNING WARNING
To avoid device damage or patient injury, do not use the P21xp needle guide bracket on patients with pacemakers or medical electronic implants. The needle guide bracket for the P21xp transducers contains a magnet that is used to ensure that the bracket is correctly oriented on the transducer. The magnetic field, in direct proximity to the pacemaker or medical electronic implant, may have an adverse effect.
The foot switch is not designed to be sterilized. Avoid using the foot switch in an environment where sterilization is required.
Hazardous materials
WARNING WARNING
Products and accessories may contain hazardous materials. Ensure that products and accessories are disposed of in an environmentally responsible manner and meet federal and local regulations for disposing of hazardous materials.
The liquid crystal display (LCD) contains mercury. Dispose of the LCD properly in accordance with local regulations.
Electromagnetic compatibility
The ultrasound system has been tested and found to comply with the electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) limits for medical devices to IEC60601-1-2:2007. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a typical medical installation.
WARNING
The FC1 ultrasound system should not be used adjacent to or stacked with other equipment. If such use occurs, verify that the FC1 ultrasound system operates normally in that configuration.
Caution
Medical electrical equipment requires special precautions regarding EMC and must be installed and operated according to these instructions. Portable and mobile RF communications equipment can affect the ultrasound system. Electromagnetic interference (EMI) from other equipment or interference sources could result in performance disruption of the ultrasound system. Evidence of disruption may include image degradation or distortion, erratic readings, equipment ceasing to operate, or other incorrect functioning. If this occurs, survey the site to determine the source of disruption, and take the following actions to eliminate the source(s):
FC1 User Guide
Hazardous materials 519
Caution Caution
Turn equipment in the vicinity off and on to isolate disruptive equipment.
Relocate or re-orient interfering equipment.
Increa se distance between the interfering equipment and your ultrasound system.
Manage use of frequencies close to ultrasound system frequencies.
Remove devices that are highly susceptible to EMI.
Lower power from internal sources within facility control (such as paging systems).
Label devices susceptible to EMI.
Educate clinical staff to recognize potential EMI-related problems.
Eliminate or reduce EMI with technical solutions (such as shielding).
Restrict use of personal communicators (cell phones, computers) in areas with devices susceptible to EMI.
Share relevant EMI information with others, particularly when evaluating new equipment purchases that may generate EMI.
Purchase medical devices that comply with IEC 60601-1-2 EMC Standards.
To avoid the risk of increased electromagnetic emissions or decreased immunity, use only accessories and peripherals recommended by FUJIFILM SonoSite. Connection of accessories and peripherals not recommended by FUJIFILM SonoSite to the ultrasound system may result in malfunction of the ultrasound system or other medical electrical devices in the area. Contact FUJIFILM SonoSite or your local representative for a list of accessories and peripherals available from or recommended by FUJIFILM SonoSite. See the FUJIFILM SonoSite accessories user guide.
The FC1 ultrasound systems contains an IEEE 802.11 transmitter that utilizes ISM frequency bands from 2.412 to 2.484 GHz and implements three different methods of transmissions:
802.11b with Direct Sequence Spread Spectrum (DSSS) at 17 dBm + 2.0 dBm @ 11 Mbps 802.11g with Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) at 14 dBm + 2 dBm @ 54 Mbps 802.11n with Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiplexing (OFDM) at 14 dBm + 2 dBm @ MCS7
520 Electromagnetic compatibility
Chapter 9
Electrostatic discharge
Caution
Electrostatic discharge (ESD), or static shock, is a naturally occurring phenomenon. ESD is common in conditions of low humidity, which can be caused by heating or air conditioning. ESD is a discharge of the electrical energy from a charged body to a lesser or noncharged body. The degree of discharge can be significant enough to cause damage to a transducer or an ultrasound system. The following precautions can help reduce ESD: antistatic spray on carpets, antistatic spray on linoleum, and antistatic mats.
WARNING
Unless following ESD precautionary procedures, do not connect to or touch (with body or hand-held tools) pins (contacts) of connectors that have the ESD Sensitive Devices label:
Pins (contacts) on transducer
Electrostatic sensitive devices label
Figure 9-1: The transducer connector is an example of an electrostatically-sensitive device.
ESD precautionary procedures include the following:
All staff involved must receive training about ESD, including the following at a minimum: an explanation of the ESD warning symbol, ESD precautionary procedures, an introduction to the physics of electrostatic charge, the voltage levels that can occur in normal practice, and the damage that can occur to electronic components if equipment is touched by an individual who is electrostatically charged (IEC 60601-1-2, section 5.2.1.2 d).
Prevent the buildup of electrostatic charge. For example, use humidification, conductive floor coverings, nonsynthetic clothing, ionizers, and minimizing insulating materials.
Discharge your body to earth. Use a wrist strap to bond yourself to the ultrasound system or to earth.
FC1 User Guide
Electrostatic discharge 521
Separation distance
Recommended separation distances between portable and mobile RF communications equipment and the FC1 ultrasound system
The FC1 ultrasound system is intended for use in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated radio frequency (RF) disturbances are controlled. The customer or the user of the FC1 ultrasound system can help prevent electromagnetic interference by maintaining a minimum distance between portable and mobile RF communications equipment (transmitters) and the FC1 ultrasound system as recommended below, according to the maximum output power of the communications equipment.
Table 9-2: Recommendations for separation distance
Rated maximum output power of transmitter (Watts)
Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter (Meters)
150 kHz to 80 MHz d=1.2
80 MHz to 800 MHz d=1.2
800 MHz to 2.5 GHz d=2.3
0.01
0.12
0.12
0.23
0.1
0.38
0.38
0.73
1
1.2
1.2
2.3
10
3.8
3.8
7.3
100
12
12
23
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation distance (d) in meters (m) can be estimated using the equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter, where P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer.
At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range applies.These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects, and people.
Compatible accessories and peripherals
FUJIFILM SonoSite has tested the FC1 ultrasound system with the following accessories and peripherals and has demonstrated compliance with the requirements of IEC60601-1-2:2007.
522 Separation distance
Chapter 9
You may use these FUJIFILM SonoSite accessories and third-party peripherals with the FC1ultrasound system.
WARNING
Use of the accessories with medical systems other than the FC1 ultrasound system may result in increased emissions or decreased immunity of the medical system.
Use of accessories other than those specified may result in increased emissions or decreased immunity of the ultrasound system.
Table 9-3: Accessories and peripherals compatible with FC1 ultrasound system
Description C11xp transducera C35xp transducera C60xf transducera HFL38xp transducera HFL50xp transducera ICTxp transducera L25xp transducera L38xp transducera P21xp Transducera AC adapter bracket Accessory Box Battery pack Barcode scanner Barcode scanner (Japan only) Black & white printer Black & white printer Color printer (Japan only) Color printer box/bracket (Japan only)
Maximum cable length 6.0 ft/1.8 m 5.5 ft/1.7 m 5.5 ft/1.7 m 5.7 ft/1.7 m 5.7 ft/1.7 m 5.7 ft/1.7 m 7.5 ft/2.3m 5.5 ft/1.7 m 6.0 ft/1.8 m -- -- -- 4.9ft/1.5m 6.3 ft/1.9 m -- -- --
--
Part number P14564 P19617 P18024 P16038 P14567 P14562 P14566 P14565 P14563 P17141 P17309 P17147 P14166 P18738 P13745 P20006 P18248
P18702
FC1 User Guide
Compatible accessories and peripherals 523
Table 9-3: Accessories and peripherals compatible with FC1 ultrasound system
Description
Maximum cable length
Part number
Digital video recorder (Japan only) --
ECG module (Japan)
5.8 ft/1.8 m
ECG module (EU)
5.8 ft/1.8 m
ECG leads
2.0 ft/0.6 m
FC1 Stand
--
Footswitch
9.8 ft/3.0 m
Magnetic card reader
5.8 ft/1.8 m
Power supply
4.9 ft/1.5 m
Triple transducer connect
--
USB keyboard
4.6ft/1.4m
USB memory
--
USB memory stick with data security functionality
--
AC power cord
7.9 ft/2.4 m
DVR brick
5.8 ft/1.8 m
HDMI cable
3.3 ft/1.0 m
LAN cable
49.2 ft/15.0 m
P18286 P15170 P15171
P17313 P14689 P18739 P18011 P18967 P11856 P16967 P21206
aFor transducers, maximum cable length is measured between the strain reliefs. The stated lengths do not include the lengths of cable in the following locations: underneath the strain reliefs, inside the transducer enclosure, or inside the transducer connector.
524 Compatible accessories and peripherals
Chapter 9
Guidance and manufacturer's declaration
WARNING
Other equipment, even equipment that complies with CISPR emission requirements, can interfere with the FC1 ultrasound system.
The FC1 ultrasound system is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified in the following tables. The customer or the user of the FC1 ultrasound system should assure that it is used in such an environment.
Table 9-4: Guidance and manufacturer's declaration - Electromagnetic emissions
Emissions test
Compliance Electromagnetic environment
RF emissions ClSPR 11
Group 1
The FC1 ultrasound system uses RF energy only for its internal function. Therefore, its RF emissions are very low and are not likely to cause any interference with nearby electronic equipment.
RF emissions ClSPR 11
Class A
Harmonic emissions
IEC 61000-3-2
Voltage fluctuations/flicker emissions
IEC 61000-3-3
Class A Complies
The FC1 ultrasound system is suitable for use in all establishments other than domestic and those directly connected to the public low-voltage power supply network that supplies buildings used for domestic purposes.
Table 9-5: Guidance and manufacturer's declaration - Electromagnetic immunity
Immunity test
Electrostatic Discharge (ESD) IEC 61000-4-2
Electrical fast Transient/burst IEC 61000-4-4
IEC 60601 test level Compliance level
±2.0KV, ±4.0KV, ± 6.0KV contact
±2.0KV, ±4.0KV, ± 8.0KV air
± 2.0KV, ±4.0KV, ±6.0KV contact
± 2.0KV, ±4.0KV, ±8.0KV air
± 2KV on the mains ± 1KV on signal lines
± 2KV on the mains ± 1KV on signal lines
Electromagnetic environment
Floors should be wood, concrete or ceramic tile. If floors are covered with synthetic material, the relative humidity should be at least 30%.
Mains power quality should be that of a typical commercial or hospital environment.
FC1 User Guide
Guidance and manufacturer's declaration 525
Table 9-5: Guidance and manufacturer's declaration - Electromagnetic immunity
Immunity test
IEC 60601 test level Compliance level
Electromagnetic environment
Surge IEC 61000-4-5
+/-1KV line(s) to line(s) +/-2KV line(s) to earth
+/-1KV line(s) to line(s) +/-2KV line(s) to earth
Mains power quality should be that of a typical commercial or hospital environment.
Voltage dips, short interruptions, and voltage variations on power supply input lines
IEC61000-4-11
<5% UT (>95% dip in UT) for 0.5 cycle
40% UT (60% dip in UT) for 5 cycles
70% UT (30% dip in UT) for 25 cycles
<5% UT (>95% dip in UT) for 5s
<5% UT (>95% dip in UT) for 0.5 cycle
40% UT (60% dip in UT) for 5 cycles
70% UT (30% dip in UT) for 25 cycles
<5% UT (>95% dip in UT) for 5s
Mains power quality should be that of a typical commercial or hospital environment. If the user of the FC1 ultrasound system requires continued operation during power mains interruptions, it is recommended that the FC1 ultrasound system be powered from an uninterruptible power supply or a battery.
Power Frequency Magnetic Field
IEC 61000-4-8
3 A/m
3 A/m
Power frequency magnetic fields should be at levels characteristic of a typical location in a typical commercial or hospital environment.
Conducted RF IEC 61000-4-6
3 Vrms 150 kHz to 80 MHz
3 Vrms
Portable and mobile RF communications equipment should be used no closer to any part of the FC1 ultrasound system, including cables, than the recommended separation distance calculated from the equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter.
Recommended separation distance:
d = 1.2 P
526 Guidance and manufacturer's declaration
Chapter 9
Table 9-5: Guidance and manufacturer's declaration - Electromagnetic immunity
Immunity test
IEC 60601 test level Compliance level
Electromagnetic environment
Radiated RF IEC 61000-4-3
3 Vim 80MHz to 2.5 GHz
3 V/m
d = 1.2 P
80 MHz to 800 MHz
d = 2.3 P
800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
Where P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer and d is the recommended separation distance in meters (m).
Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as determined by an electromagnetic site surveya,should be less than the compliance level in each frequency rangeb.
Interference may occur in the vicinity of equipment marked with the following symbol:
UT is the AC mains voltage before application of the test level.
At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects, and people.
aField strengths from fixed transmitters such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy. To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the measured field strength in the location in which the FUJIFILM SonoSite ultrasound system is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level above, the FUJIFILM SonoSite ultrasound system should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal performance is observed,
FC1 User Guide
Guidance and manufacturer's declaration 527
additional measures may be necessary, such as re-orienting or relocating the FUJIFILM SonoSite ultrasound system.
bOver the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strengths should be less than 3 V/m.
Caution
FCC: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user's authority to operate the equipment.
This device complies with part 15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions:
This device may not cause harmful interference. This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
Immunity testing requirements
The FC1 ultrasound system complies with the essential performance requirements specified in IEC 60601-1-2 and IEC 60601-2-37. Results of immunity testing show that the FC1 ultrasound system meets these requirements and is free from the following:
Noise on a waveform or artifacts or distortion in an image or error of a displayed numerical value that cannot be attributed to a physiological effect and that may alter the diagnosis
Display of incorrect numerical values associated with the diagnosis to be performed Display of incorrect safety-related indications Production of unintended or excessive ultrasound output Production of unintended or excessive transducer assembly surface temperature Production of unintended or uncontrolled motion of transducer assemblies intended for intra-corporeal
use
Labeling symbols
The following symbols are used on the products, packaging, and containers. Table 9-6: Labeling symbols
Symbol
Definition
Alternating current (AC)
528 Immunity testing requirements
Chapter 9
Table 9-6: Labeling symbols
Symbol
Definition
Class 1 device indicating manufacturer's declaration of conformance with Annex VII of 93/42/EEC
Class 1 device requiring verification by the Notified Body of sterilization or measurement features, or to a Class IIa, IIb, or III device requiring verification or auditing by the Notified Body to applicable Annex(es) of 93/42/EEC
Attention; see the User guide.
Device complies with relevant Australian regulations for electronic devices. Batch code, date code, or lot code type of control number Biological risk
Device complies with relevant Brazilian regulations for electromedical devices.
Canadian Standards Association. The "C" and "US" indicators next to this mark signify that the product has been evaluated according to the applicable CSA and ANSI/UL Standards, for use in Canada and the US, respectively.
Canadian Standards Association component certification mark.
Catalog number
Collect separately from other household waste (see European Commission Directive 93/86/EEC). Refer to local regulations for disposal.
Corrugated recycle
Dangerous voltage
FC1 User Guide
Labeling symbols 529
Table 9-6: Labeling symbols
Symbol
Definition
Date of manufacture
Manufacturer Direct current (DC) Do not get wet.
Do not stack over n high, where n represents the number on the label.
Electrostatic-sensitive devices Device complies with relevant FCC regulations for electronic devices.
Fragile
GEL
Gel
Sterilized using irradiation
Sterilized using ethylene oxide
Hot
Device emits a static (DC) magnetic field.
Nonionizing radiation
Paper recycle
530 Labeling symbols
Chapter 9
Table 9-6: Labeling symbols
Symbol
Definition
Serial number type of control number
Temperature limitation
Atmospheric pressure limitation
Humidity limitation
Submersible. Protected against the effects of temporary immersion. Watertight equipment. Protected against the effects of extended immersion.
Handle transducer with care.
Follow manufacturer's instructions for disinfecting time.
Disinfect transducer.
Type BF patient applied part (B = body, F = floating applied part) Defibrillator proof type CF patient applied part Pollution Control Logo. (Applies to all parts/products listed in the China RoHS disclosure table. May not appear on the exterior of some parts/products because of space limitations.) China Compulsory Certificate mark ("CCC Mark"). A compulsory safety mark for compliance with Chinese national standards for many products sold in the People's Republic of China.
Follow instructions for use.
FC1 User Guide
Labeling symbols 531
Table 9-6: Labeling symbols
Symbol
Definition
Total weight of equipment with its safe working load installed.
The label position on the FC1 system
Specifications
Dimensions
System
Length: 13.0 in. (33.1 cm) Width: 12.25 in. (31.1 cm) Height: 3.0 in (7.7 cm) (when the monitor is closed)
Display
Length: 9.6 in. (24.3 cm) Height: 7.33 in. (18.6 cm) Diagonal: 12.1 in. (30.6 cm)
Environmental limits
Note
The temperature, pressure, and humidity limits apply only to the ultrasound system, transducers, and battery.
Operating (system, battery, and transducer)
10 35°C (5095°F), 1595% R.H. 700 to 1060hPa (0.7 to 1.05 ATM)
532 Specifications
Chapter 9
Shipping and storage (system and transducer)
-3565°C (-31149°F), 1595% R.H. 500 to 1060hPa (0.5 to 1.05 ATM)
Shipping and storage (battery)
-2060°C (-4140°F) (1 month), -2045°C (-4113°F) (3 month), -2020°C (-468°F) (1 year), 1595% R.H. 500 to 1060hPa (0.5 to 1.05 ATM)
Operating (bracket and needle guide)
10 35°C (5095°F), 1595% R.H.
Shipping and storage (bracket and needle guide)
-3565°C (-31149°F), 1595% R.H.
Electrical specifications
Power supply: PN P18011
Input: 100-240 VAC, 2.5-1.2A , 50/60 Hz Output: +13.5VDC, 11.1A, 150W Max, Class 1, continuous operation.
FC1 stand
Input: 100-240 VAC, 50/60 Hz, 8.0-3.3 A
Battery specifications
The battery comprises twelve lithium-ion cells plus electronics, a temperature sensor, and battery contacts. Run time is up to 1 hour, depending on imaging mode and display brightness.
Standards
Electrical safety standards
IEC 60601-1: Edition 3.1 (2012-08) + Corr..1 (2012) Medical electrical equipment - Part 1: General requirement for basic safety and essential performance
FC1 User Guide
Standards 533
IEC 60601-2-37:2007 Medical Electrical Equipment Part 2-37: Particular requirements for the basic safety and essential performance of ultrasonic medical diagnostic and monitoring equipment (for use in conjunction with IEC60601-1:2005/2012)
Mains connected components shall comply with nationally recognized standards such as CAN/CSA-C22.2 No. 60601-1:08 and ANSI/AAMI ES60601-1:2005
IEC 61157:1992 Standard Means for the Reporting of the Acoustic Output of Medical Diagnostic Ultrasonic Equipment.
EMC standards classification
CISPR 11, International Electrotechnical Commission, International Special Committee on Radio Interference. Industrial, Scientific, and Medical (ISM) Equipment--Radio-Frequency Disturbance Characteristics--Limits and Methods of Measurement. Classification for the ultrasound system, FC1 Stand system, accessories, and peripherals when configured together: Group 1, Class A.
IEC 60601-1-2:2007, Medical Electrical Equipment--Part 1-2: General Requirements for Safety--Collateral Standard: Electromagnetic Compatibility--Requirements and Tests.
Acoustic standards
NEMA UD 2-2004, Acoustic Output Measurement Standard for Diagnostic Ultrasound Equipment.
NEMA UD 3-2004, Standard for Real-Time Display of Thermal and Mechanical Acoustic Output Indices on Diagnostic Ultrasound Equipment, American Institute of Ultrasound in Medicine.
534 Standards
Chapter 9
Biocompatibility standards
AAMI/ANSI/ISO 10993-1, Biological evaluation of medical devices--Part 1: Evaluation and testing (2009).
AAMI/ANSI/ISO 10993-5, Biological evaluation of medical devices--Part 5: Tests for In Vitro cytotoxicity (2009).
AAMI/ANSI/ISO 10993-10, Biological evaluation of medical devices--Part 10: Tests for irritation and delayedtype hypersensitivity (2002).
AAMI/ANSI/ISO 10993-11, Biological evaluation of medical devices--Part 11: Tests for systemic toxicity (2006).
AAMI/ANSI/ISO 10993-12, Biological evaluation of medical devices--Part 12: Sample preparation and reference materials (2007).
FC1 User Guide
Standards 535
536 Standards
Chapter 9
CHAPTER 10
Chapter 10: Acoustic Output
This chapter contains safety information required by regulatory agencies pertaining to acoustic output. The information applies to the ultrasound system, transducer, accessories, and peripherals.
ALARA principle
"As low as reasonably achievable" (ALARA) is the guiding principle for the use of diagnostic ultrasound. Sonographers and other qualified ultrasound users, using good judgment and insight, determine the exposure that is "as low as reasonably achievable." There are no set rules to determine the correct exposure for every situation. The qualified ultrasound user determines the most appropriate way to keep exposure low and bioeffects to a minimum, while obtaining a diagnostic examination.
A thorough knowledge of the imaging modes, transducer capability, system setup, and scanning technique is necessary. The imaging mode determines the nature of the ultrasound beam. A stationary beam results in a more concentrated exposure than a scanned beam, which spreads that exposure over the area of scanning. The transducer capability depends on the frequency, penetration, resolution, and field of view. The default system presets are reset with each new patient. It is the scanning technique of the qualified ultrasound user along with patient variability that determines the system settings throughout the exam.
The variables that affect the way the qualified ultrasound user implements the ALARA principle include patient body size, location of the bone relative to the focal point, attenuation in the body, and ultrasound exposure time. Exposure time is an especially useful variable, because the qualified ultrasound user can control it. The ability to limit the exposure over time supports the ALARA principle.
Applying the ALARA principle
The system imaging mode that the qualified ultrasound user selects is determined by the diagnostic information required.
2D imaging provides anatomical information.
ALARA principle 537
CPD imaging provides information about the energy or amplitude strength of the Doppler signal over time at a given anatomical location and is used for detecting the presence of blood flow.
Color imaging provides information about the energy or amplitude strength of the Doppler signal over time at a given anatomical location and is used for detecting the presence, velocity, and direction of blood flow.
Tissue Harmonic Imaging uses higher received frequencies to reduce clutter and artifact, and improve resolution on the 2D image.
Understanding the nature of the imaging mode used allows the qualified ultrasound user to apply the ALARA principle.
Prudent use of ultrasound requires that patient exposure to ultrasound be limited to the lowest ultrasound output for the shortest time necessary to achieve acceptable diagnostic results. Decisions that support prudent use are based on the type of patient, exam type, patient history, ease or difficulty of obtaining diagnostically useful information, and potential localized heating of the patient due to transducer surface temperature.
The system has been designed to ensure that temperature at the face of the transducer elements will not exceed the limits established in Section 42 of IEC 60601-2-37: Particular requirement for the safety of ultrasound medical diagnostic and monitoring equipment. See "Transducer surface temperature rise" on page 541. In the event of a device malfunction, redundant controls will limit transducer power. This is accomplished by an electrical design that limits both power supply current and voltage to the transducer.
The sonographer uses the system controls to adjust image quality and limit ultrasound output. The system controls are divided into three categories relative to output:
Controls that directly affect output
Controls that indirectly affect output
Receiver controls
Direct controls
The system does not exceed a spatial peak temporal average intensity (ISPTA) of 720 mW/cm2 for all imaging modes. The mechanical index (MI) and thermal index (TI) may exceed values greater than 1.0 on some transducers in some imaging modes. You can monitor the MI and TI values and adjust the controls to reduce these values. For more information, see "Guidelines for reducing MI and TI" on page 539. An additional way to fulfill the ALARA principle is to set the MI or TI values to a low index value and then to modify this level until a satisfactory image or Doppler mode is obtained. For more information on MI and TI, see IEC 60601-2-37:2007: Annex CC.
538 ALARA principle
Chapter 10
Indirect controls
The controls that affect imaging mode, freeze, and depth also indirectly affect output. The imaging mode determines the nature of the ultrasound beam. Tissue attenuation is directly related to transducer frequency. The higher the PRF (pulse repetition frequency), the more output pulses occur over a period of time.
Receiver controls
The receiver controls are the gain controls. Receiver controls do not affect output. They should be used, if possible, to improve image quality before using controls that directly or indirectly affect output.
Acoustic artifacts
An acoustic artifact is information, present or absent in an image, that does not properly indicate the structure or flow being imaged. Helpful artifacts aid in diagnosis; others hinder proper interpretation. Examples of artifacts include:
Shadowing Through transmission Aliasing Reverberations Comet tails For more information on detecting and interpreting acoustic artifacts, see Kremkau, Frederick W. Diagnostic ultrasound: Principles and instruments. 7th ed., W.B. Saunders Company (Oct. 17, 2005).
Guidelines for reducing MI and TI
The following are general guidelines for reducing MI or TI. If multiple parameters are given, the best results may be achieved by minimizing these parameters simultaneously. In some modes, changing these parameters does not affect MI or TI. Changes to other parameters may also result in MI and TI reductions. Please note the MI and TI values on the screen.
MI: Higher Frequency Settings
TI: Lower frame rate or shallower focus depth
FC1 User Guide
Acoustic artifacts 539
Output display
The system meets the AIUM output display standard for MI and TI (See "Related guidance documents" on page 541). MI and TI shall be displayed when either the MI or TI is greater than or equal to a value of 1.0
Note
Even when MI is less than 1.0, the system provides a continuous real-time display of MI in all imaging modes, in increments of 0.1.
The system meets the output display standard for TI and provides a continuous real-time display of TI in all imaging modes, in increments of 0.1.
The TI consists of three user-selectable indices, and only one of these is displayed at any one time. In order to display TI properly and meet the ALARA principle, the user selects an appropriate TI, based on the specific exam being performed. FUJIFILM SonoSite provides a copy of AIUM Medical Ultrasound Safety, which contains guidance on determining which TI is appropriate (see "Related guidance documents" on page 541).
MI and TI output display accuracy
The accuracy result for the MI is stated statistically. With 95% confidence, 95% of the measured MI values will be within +15% to -22% of the displayed MI value.
The accuracy result for the TI is stated statistically. With 95% confidence, 95% of the measured TI values will be within +19% to -33% of the displayed TI value. The values equate to +1dB to -3dB.
A displayed value of 0.0 for MI or TI means that the calculated estimate for the index is less than 0.05.
Factors that contribute to display uncertainty
The net uncertainty of the displayed indices is derived by combining the quantified uncertainty from three sources: measurement uncertainty, system and transducer variability, and engineering assumptions and approximations made when calculating the display values.
Measurement errors of the acoustic parameters when taking the reference data are the major source of error that contributes to the display uncertainty. Measurement error is described in "Acoustic measurement precision and uncertainty" on page 602.
The displayed MI and TI values are based on calculations using a set of acoustic output measurements that were made using a single reference ultrasound system with a single reference transducer that is representative of the population of transducers of that type. The reference system and transducer are chosen from a sample population of systems and transducers taken from early production units, and they are selected based on having an acoustic output that is representative of the nominal expected acoustic output for all transducer/ system combinations that might occur. Of course, every transducer/system combination has its own unique characteristic acoustic output, and will not match the nominal output on which the display estimates are
540 Output display
Chapter 10
based. This variability between systems and transducers introduces an error into displayed value. By testing sample acoustic output during production, the amount of error introduced by the variability is bounded. The sampling testing ensures that the acoustic output of transducers and systems being manufactured stays within a specified range of the nominal acoustic output.
Another source of error is the assumptions and approximations that are made when deriving the estimates for the display indices. Chief among these assumptions is that the acoustic output, and thus the derived display indices, are linearly correlated with the transmit drive voltage of the transducer. Generally, this assumption is very good, but it is not exact, and thus some error in the display can be attributed to the assumption of voltage linearity.
Related guidance documents
Information for Manufacturers Seeking Marketing Clearance of Diagnostic Ultrasound Systems and Transducers, FDA, 1997.
Medical Ultrasound Safety, American Institute of Ultrasound in Medicine (AIUM), 1994. (A copy is included with each system.)
Acoustic Output Measurement Standard for Diagnostic Ultrasound Equipment, NEMA UD2-2004.
Acoustic Output Measurement and Labeling Standard for Diagnostic Ultrasound Equipment, American Institute of Ultrasound in Medicine, 1993.
Standard for Real-Time Display of Thermal and Mechanical Acoustic Output Indices on Diagnostic Ultrasound Equipment, NEMA UD3-2004.
Guidance on the interpretation of TI and MI to be used to inform the operator, Annex HH, BS EN 60601-2-37 reprinted at P05699.
Transducer surface temperature rise
The following table lists the measured surface temperature rise from ambient (23°C ± 3°C) of transducers used on the ultrasound system. The temperatures were measured in accordance with EN 60601-2-37 section 42, with controls and settings positioned to give maximum temperatures.
Table 10-1: Transducer surface temperature rise, external use (°C)
Test
C60xf HFL38xp HFL50xp L25xp P21xp C35xp C11xp L38xp ICTxp
Still air
13.7 9.6
Simulated use
8.1
7.7
11.5
12.6 16.3 13.7 12.6 10.3 7.6
8.0
8.7
9.1
8.0
7.3
7.2
3.9
FC1 User Guide
Related guidance documents 541
Acoustic output measurement
Since the initial use of diagnostic ultrasound, the possible human biological effects (bioeffects) from ultrasound exposure have been studied by various scientific and medical institutions. In October 1987, the American Institute of Ultrasound in Medicine (AIUM) ratified a report from its Bioeffects Committee ("Bioeffects Considerations for the Safety of Diagnostic Ultrasound," J Ultrasound Med., Sept. 1988: Vol. 7, No. 9 Supplement). The report, sometimes referred to as the Stowe Report, reviewed available data on possible effects of ultrasound exposure. Another report, "Bioeffects and Safety of Diagnostic Ultrasound," dated January 28, 1993, provides more current information.
The acoustic output for this ultrasound system has been measured and calculated in accordance with "Acoustic Output Measurement Standard for Diagnostic Ultrasound Equipment" (NEMA UD2-2004), and "Standard for Real-Time Display of Thermal and Mechanical Acoustic Output Indices on Diagnostic Ultrasound Equipment" (NEMA UD3-2004).
In situ, derated, and water value intensities
All intensity parameters are measured in water. Since water does not absorb acoustic energy, these water measurements represent a worst-case value. Biological tissue does absorb acoustic energy. The true value of the intensity at any point depends on the amount of energy, the type of tissue, and the frequency of the ultrasound passing through the tissue. The intensity value in the tissue, In situ, has been estimated by using the following formula:
In situ = Water [e ] -(0.23alf)
where:
In situ = In situ intensity value Water = Water intensity value e = 2.7183 a = attenuation factor (dB/cm MHz) Attenuation factor (a) for various tissue types are given below:
Brain = 0.53 Heart = 0.66 Kidney = 0.79 Liver = 0.43 Muscle = 0.55 l = skinline to measurement depth in cm f = center frequency of the transducer/system/mode combination in MHz
542 Acoustic output measurement
Chapter 10
Since the ultrasonic path during the exam is likely to pass through varying lengths and types of tissue, it is difficult to estimate the true in situ intensity. An attenuation factor of 0.3 is used for general reporting purposes; therefore, the in situ value commonly reported uses the formula:
In situ (derated) = Water [e ] -(0.069lf)
Since this value is not the true in situ intensity, the term "derated" is used to qualify it.
The maximum derated and the maximum water values do not always occur at the same operating conditions. Therefore, the reported maximum water and derated values may not be related by the in situ (derated) formula. For example: Consider a multizone array transducer that has maximum water value intensities in its deepest zone, but also has the smallest derating factor in that zone. The same transducer may have its largest derated intensity in one of its shallowest focal zones.
Tissue models and equipment survey
Tissue models are necessary to estimate attenuation and acoustic exposure levels in situ from measurements of acoustic output made in water. Currently, available models may be limited in their accuracy because of varying tissue paths during diagnostic ultrasound exposures and uncertainties in the acoustic properties of soft tissues. No single tissue model is adequate for predicting exposures in all situations from measurements made in water, and continued improvement and verification of these models is necessary to make exposure assessments for specific exam types.
A homogeneous tissue model with attenuation coefficient of 0.3 dB/cm MHz throughout the beam path is commonly used when estimating exposure levels. The model is conservative in that it overestimates the in situ acoustic exposure when the path between the transducer and site of interest is composed entirely of soft tissue. When the path contains significant amounts of fluid, as in many first and second-trimester pregnancies scanned transabdominally, this model may underestimate the in situ acoustic exposure. The amount of underestimation depends on each specific situation.
Fixed-path tissue models, in which soft-tissue thickness is held constant, sometimes are used to estimate in situ acoustic exposures when the beam path is longer than 3 cm and consists largely of fluid. When this model is used to estimate maximum exposure to the fetus during transabdominal scans, a value of 1 dB/cm MHz may be used during all trimesters.
Existing tissue models that are based on linear propagation may underestimate acoustic exposures when significant saturation due to nonlinear distortion of beams in water is present during the output measurement.
The maximum acoustic output levels of diagnostic ultrasound devices extend over a broad range of values:
A survey of 1990 equipment models yielded MI values between 0.1 and 1.0 at their highest output settings. Maximum MI values of approximately 2.0 are known to occur for currently available equipment. Maximum MI values are similar for real-time 2D-mode and M-mode imaging.
FC1 User Guide
Tissue models and equipment survey 543
Computed estimates of upper limits to temperature elevations during transabdominal scans were obtained in a survey of 1988 and 1990 pulsed Doppler equipment. The vast majority of models yielded upper limits less than 1° and 4°C (1.8° and 7.2°F) for exposures of first-trimester fetal tissue and secondtrimester fetal bone, respectively. The largest values obtained were approximately 1.5°C (2.7°F) for firsttrimester fetal tissue and 7°C (12.6°F) for second-trimester fetal bone. Estimated maximum temperature elevations given here are for a "fixed path" tissue model and are for devices having ISPTA values greater than 500 mW/cm2. The temperature elevations for fetal bone and tissue were computed based on calculation procedures given in Sections 4.3.2.1-4.3.2.6 in "Bioeffects and Safety of Diagnostic Ultrasound" (AIUM, 1993).
Acoustic output tables
The tables in this section indicate the acoustic output for the system and transducer combinations with a TI or MI equal to or greater than one. These tables are organized by transducer model and imaging mode. For a definition of terms used in the tables, see "Terms used in the acoustic output tables" on page 601.
Transducer model: C60xf Operating mode: 2D (B) ..................................................................................................... 546 Transducer model: C60xf Operating mode: 2D (B)/M ............................................................................................... 547 Transducer model: C60xf Operating mode: 2D (B)/Color ........................................................................................ 548 Transducer model: C60xf Operating mode: PW Doppler ........................................................................................ 549 Transducer model: C60xf Operating mode: 2D (B)/ PW Doppler .......................................................................... 550 Transducer model: C60xf Operating mode: 2D (B)/Color/PW Doppler (Triplex) ............................................. 551 Transducer model: HFL38xp Operating mode: 2D (B) .............................................................................................. 552 Transducer model: HFL38xp Operating mode: 2D (B)/M ......................................................................................... 553 Transducer model: HFL38xp Operating mode: 2D (B)/Color .................................................................................. 554 Transducer model: HFL38xp Operating mode: PW Doppler .................................................................................. 555 Transducer model: HFL38xp Operating mode: 2D (B)/PW Doppler .................................................................... 556 Transducer model: HFL38xp Operating mode: 2D (B)/Color/PW Doppler (Triplex) ....................................... 557 Transducer model: HFL50xp Operating mode: 2D (B) .............................................................................................. 558 Transducer model: HFL50xp Operating mode: 2D (B)/M mode ............................................................................ 559 Transducer model: HFL50xp Operating mode: 2D (B)/Color .................................................................................. 560 Transducer model: HFL50xp Operating mode: PW Doppler .................................................................................. 561 Transducer model: HFL50xp Operating mode: 2D (B)/PW Doppler .................................................................... 562 Transducer model: HFL50xp Operating mode: 2D (B)/Color/PW Doppler (Triplex) ....................................... 563 Transducer model: L25xp Operating mode: 2D (B) .................................................................................................... 564 Transducer model: L25xp Operating mode: 2D (B)/M .............................................................................................. 565 Transducer model: L25xp Operating mode: 2D (B)/Color ....................................................................................... 566 Transducer model: L25xp Operating mode: PW Doppler ........................................................................................ 567 Transducer model: L25xp Operating mode: 2D (B)/PW Doppler .......................................................................... 568
544 Acoustic output tables
Chapter 10
Transducer model: L25xp Operating mode: 2D (B)/Color/PW Doppler (Triplex) ............................................ 569 Transducer model: P21xp Operating mode: 2D (B) ................................................................................................... 570 Transducer model: P21xp Operating mode: 2D (B)/M .............................................................................................. 571 Transducer model: P21xp Operating mode: 2D (B)/Color ....................................................................................... 572 Transducer model: P21xp Operating mode: PW Doppler ....................................................................................... 573 Transducer model: P21xp Operating mode: 2D (B)/PW Doppler ......................................................................... 574 Transducer model: P21xp Operating mode: 2D (B)/Color/PW Doppler (Triplex) ........................................... 575 Transducer model: P21xp Operating mode: CW Doppler ....................................................................................... 576 Transducer Model: L38xp Operating Mode: 2D .......................................................................................................... 577 Transducer Model: L38xp Operating Mode: 2D/M ..................................................................................................... 578 Transducer Model: L38xp Operating Mode: 2D/color .............................................................................................. 579 Transducer Model: L38xp Operating Mode: PW Doppler ........................................................................................ 580 Transducer Model: L38xp Operating Mode: 2D/PW Doppler ................................................................................ 581 Transducer Model: L38xp Operating Mode: 2D/color/PW Doppler (Triplex) ................................................... 582 Transducer Model: C11xp Operating Mode: 2D .......................................................................................................... 583 Transducer Model: C11xp Operating Mode: 2D/M .................................................................................................... 584 Transducer Model: C11xp Operating Mode: 2D/Color ............................................................................................. 585 Transducer Model: C11xp Operating Mode: PW Doppler ....................................................................................... 586 Transducer Model: C11xp Operating Mode: 2D/PW Doppler ................................................................................ 587 Transducer Model: C11xp Operating Mode: 2D/Color/PW Doppler (Triplex) .................................................. 588 Transducer Model: ICTxp Operating Mode: 2D ........................................................................................................... 589 Transducer Model: ICTxp Operating Mode: 2D/M ..................................................................................................... 590 Transducer Model: ICTxp Operating Mode: 2D/Color ............................................................................................... 591 Transducer Model: ICTxp Operating Mode: PW Doppler ........................................................................................ 592 Transducer Model: ICTxp Operating Mode: 2D/PW Doppler ................................................................................. 593 Transducer Model: ICTxp Operating Mode: 2D/Color/PW Doppler (Triplex) ................................................... 594 Transducer Model: C35xp Operating Mode: 2D .......................................................................................................... 595 Transducer Model: C35xp Operating Mode: 2D/M .................................................................................................... 596 Transducer Model: C35xp Operating Mode: 2D/Color ............................................................................................. 597 Transducer Model: C35xp Operating Mode: PW Doppler ....................................................................................... 598 Transducer Model: C35xp Operating Mode: 2D/PW Doppler ................................................................................ 599 Transducer Model: C35xp Operating Mode: 2D/Color/PW Doppler (Triplex) .................................................. 600
FC1 User Guide
Acoustic output tables 545
Table 10-2: Transducer model: C60xf
Index label
M.I.
Associated acoustic parameter
Global Maximum Index Value pr.3 W0 min of [W. z I z ] 3( 1), TA.3( 1) z1 Zbp Zsp z@PII.3max deq(Zsp) Fc
Dim of Aaprt
PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@Pllmax Focal Length
Other information
I @MI PA.3
max
Control 1: Frequency
Control 2: THI
Control 3:
Control 4:
Control 5:
1.0
(MPa) 1.56
(mW)
(mW)
(cm)
(cm)
(cm)
(cm) 4.7
(cm)
(MHz) 2.22
X (cm)
Y (cm)
(sec) 0.63
(Hz)
2416
(MPa) 2.14
(cm)
FLx (cm) FLy (cm) (W/cm2) 146.7
4 MHz
On
Operating control
conditions
Operating mode: 2D (B)
Scan 0.4
TIS
TIB
Nonscan
Aaprt1 -
Aaprt>1 -
Nonscan
-
TIC 1.0
34.0 -
-
125.0
-
-
-
-
-
2.59 -
-
-
2.18
5.6
-
-
-
5.7
1.3
-
-
-
1.3
-
10
-
-
13
7.1
-
-
7.1
5 MHz On
4 MHz On
546 Acoustic output tables
Chapter 10
Table 10-3: Transducer model: C60xf
Index label
M.I.
Associated acoustic parameter
Global Maximum Index Value pr.3 W0 min of [W. z I z ] 3( 1), TA.3( 1) z1 Zbp Zsp z@PII.3max deq(Zsp) Fc
Dim of Aaprt
PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@Pllmax Focal Length
Other information
I @MI PA.3
max
Control 1: Frequency
Control 2: THI
Control 3:
Control 4:
Control 5:
1.0
(MPa) 1.56
(mW)
(mW)
(cm)
(cm)
(cm)
(cm) 4.7
(cm)
(MHz) 2.22
X (cm)
Y (cm)
(sec) 0.63
(Hz)
2229
(MPa) 2.14
(cm)
FLx (cm) FLy (cm) (W/cm2) 146.7
4 MHz
On
Operating control
conditions
Operating mode: 2D (B)/M
Scan 0.4
TIS
TIB
Nonscan
Aaprt1
Aaprt>1
-
0.1
Nonscan
0.3
TIC 1.1
31.7 -
8.5
129.6
8.7
3.1
2.9
4.3
2.59 -
5.6
-
1.3
-
0.37
2.18 2.22 2.18
2.3
1.3
5.7
1.3
1.3
1.3
10
-
7.1
-
5 MHz On
0.34 13 7.1
4 MHz On
13 7.1
4 MHz On
FC1 User Guide
Acoustic output tables 547
Table 10-4: Transducer model: C60xf
Operating mode: 2D (B)/Color
TIS
TIB
Index label
Associated acoustic parameter
Global Maximum Index Value pr.3 W0 min of [W. z I z ] 3( 1), TA.3( 1) z1 Zbp Zsp z@PII.3max deq(Zsp) Fc
Dim of Aaprt
PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@Pllmax Focal Length
Other information
I @MI PA.3
max
(MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X (cm) Y (cm) (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) (W/cm2)
Control 1: 2D Frequency / THI
Control 2: Color Frequency Control 3: Color Box Size Control 4: Color PRF Control 5:
M.I.
1.0 1.56
4.7 2.22
0.63 479 2.14
146.7 4 MHz / On 3.2 MHz Narrow 3226 Hz
Scan 0.3 21.2
3.17 4.5 1.3
16 7.1 5 MHz / On 3.2 MHz Narrow 3226 Hz
Nonscan
Aaprt1 -
Aaprt>1 -
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Nonscan -
-
-
TIC 0.6 69.3
3.14 4.5 1.3
20 7.1 4 MHz / On 3.2 MHz Narrow 3226 Hz
Operating control
conditions
548 Acoustic output tables
Chapter 10
Table 10-5: Transducer model: C60xf
Operating mode: PW Doppler
Index label
M.I. Scan
Global Maximum Index Value
0.7
-
Associated acoustic parameter
pr.3
(MPa) 1.25
W0
(mW)
-
min of [W. z I z ] 3( 1), TA.3( 1)
(mW)
z1
(cm)
Zbp
(cm)
Zsp
(cm)
z@PII.3max
(cm) 1.2
deq(Zsp)
(cm)
Fc
(MHz) 3.16 -
Dim of Aaprt
X (cm)
-
Y (cm)
-
PD
(sec) 0.82
PRF
(Hz)
2000
Other information
pr@PIImax deq@Pllmax Focal Length
I @MI PA.3
max
Control 1: Frequency
(MPa) 2.06
(cm)
FLx (cm)
-
FLy (cm)
-
(W/cm2) 119.8
3.2 MHz
Control 2: PRF
2000 Hz
Control 3: Sample Volume Position 6.0 cm
Control 4:
Control 5:
TIS
TIB
Nonscan
Aaprt1
Aaprt>1
-
0.7
Nonscan
2.1
TIC 1.3
-
60.0 113.2
39.1
3.2
3.3
3.8
0.35
-
2.23 2.25 2.23
-
2.9
1.2
2.9
-
1.3
1.3
1.3
0.33
-
13
13
-
7.1
7.1
2.22 MHz 2.22 MHz 2.22 MHz 3125 Hz 9091 Hz 3125 Hz 13 cm 5.0 cm 13 cm
Operating control
conditions
FC1 User Guide
Acoustic output tables 549
Table 10-6: Transducer model: C60xf
Operating mode: 2D (B)/ PW Doppler
TIS
TIB
Index label
Associated acoustic parameter
Global Maximum Index Value pr.3 W0 min of [W. z I z ] 3( 1), TA.3( 1) z1 Zbp Zsp z@PII.3max deq(Zsp) Fc
Dim of Aaprt
PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@Pllmax Focal Length
Other information
I @MI PA.3
max
(MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X (cm) Y (cm) (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) (W/cm2)
Control 1: 2D Frequency / THI
Control 2: PW Frequency Control 3: PW PRF Control 4: PW Sample Volume Position
M.I.
1.0 1.61
4.8 2.63
0.50 500 2.28
186.3 5 MHz / On 3.2 MHz 2000 Hz 6.0 cm
Scan 0.4 35.8
2.57 5.7 1.3
16 7.1 5 MHz / On 3.2 MHz 1000 Hz 16 cm
Nonscan
Aaprt1
Aaprt>1
-
0.8
Nonscan
1.9
TIC 1.6
-
56.7 141.0
70.7
3.2
3.3
4.3
0.34
-
2.23 2.24 2.23
-
2.9
1.3
2.9
-
1.3
1.3
1.3
0.32
-
13
16
-
7.1
7.1
4 MHz / 4 MHz / 5 MHz /
Off
On
On
2.22 MHz 2.22 MHz 2.22 MHz
3125 Hz 3125 Hz 3125 Hz
13 cm 6.0 cm 16 cm
Operating control
conditions
550 Acoustic output tables
Chapter 10
Table 10-7: Transducer model: C60xf
Operating mode: 2D (B)/Color/PW Doppler (Triplex)
TIS
TIB
Index label
Associated acoustic parameter
Global Maximum Index Value pr.3 W0 min of [W. z I z ] 3( 1), TA.3( 1) z1 Zbp Zsp z@PII.3max deq(Zsp) Fc
Dim of Aaprt
PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@Pllmax Focal Length
Other information
I @MI PA.3
max
(MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X (cm) Y (cm) (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) (W/cm2)
Control 1: 2D Frequency / THI
Control 2: Color Frequency Control 3: PW Frequency Control 4: PW PRF Control 5: PW Sample Vol Position
M.I.
1.0 1.61
4.8 2.63
0.50 250 2.28
186.3 5 MHz / On 2.5 MHz 3.2 MHz 2000 Hz 6.0 cm
Scan 0.3
Nonscan
Aaprt1
Aaprt>1
-
0.8
Nonscan
1.6
TIC 1.8
19.8 -
44.9 169.4 70.7 3.2 3.3
3.8
3.15 -
4.8
-
1.3
-
0.35
2.23 2.25 2.23
2.9
1.2
2.9
1.3
1.3
1.3
20
-
7.1
-
5 MHz / On 3.2 MHz 2.22 MHz 3125 Hz 20 cm
0.35
13
16
7.1
7.1
4 MHz / 4 MHz / 5 MHz /
Off
On
On
3.2 MHz 2.5 MHz 3.2 MHz
2.22 MHz 2.22 MHz 2.22 MHz
3521 Hz 6579 Hz 3125 Hz
13 cm 5.0 cm 16 cm
Operating control
conditions
FC1 User Guide
Acoustic output tables 551
Table 10-8: Transducer model: HFL38xp
Index label
M.I.
Associated acoustic parameter
Global Maximum Index Value pr.3 W0 min of [W. z I z ] 3( 1), TA.3( 1) z1 Zbp Zsp z@PII.3max deq(Zsp) Fc
Dim of Aaprt
PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@Pllmax Focal Length
Other information
I @MI PA.3
max
Control 1: Frequency
Control 2: THI
Control 3:
Control 4:
Control 5:
0.9
(MPa) 1.98
(mW)
(mW)
(cm)
(cm)
(cm)
(cm) 1.5
(cm)
(MHz) 4.96
X (cm)
Y (cm)
(sec) 0.33
(Hz)
5000
(MPa) 2.35
(cm)
FLx (cm) FLy (cm) (W/cm2) 175.9
9 MHz
On
Operating control
conditions
Operating mode: 2D (B)
Scan 0.5
TIS
TIB
Nonscan
Aaprt1 -
Aaprt>1 -
Nonscan
-
TIC 0.8
18.3 -
-
38.9
-
-
-
-
-
5.87 -
-
-
5.44
3.0
-
-
-
3.0
0.4
-
-
-
0.4
-
5
-
-
5
2.5
-
-
2.5
10 MHz On
10 MHz On
552 Acoustic output tables
Chapter 10
Table 10-9: Transducer model: HFL38xp
Index label
M.I.
Global Maximum Index Value
0.9
Associated acoustic parameter
pr.3 W0 min of [W. z I z ] 3( 1), TA.3( 1) z1 Zbp Zsp z@PII.3max deq(Zsp) Fc
Dim of Aaprt
(MPa) 1.98 (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) 1.4 (cm) (MHz) 4.96 X (cm) Y (cm)
PD
(sec) 0.33
PRF
(Hz)
4417
Other information
pr@PIImax deq@Pllmax Focal Length
I @MI PA.3
max
Control 1: 2D Frequency
(MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) (W/cm2)
2.35
175.9 9 MHz
Control 2: THI
On
Control 3:
Control 4:
Control 5:
Operating control
conditions
Operating mode: 2D (B)/M
Scan 0.4
TIS
TIB
Nonscan
Aaprt1
Aaprt>1
0.1
-
Nonscan
0.1
TIC 0.7
16.2 1.9 -
1.9
34.4
1.4
5.87 5.87 -
3.0
0.9
-
0.4
0.4
-
0.32
5.23 5.44
0.9
3.0
0.4
0.4
5
8
-
2.5
2.5
-
10 MHz 10 MHz
On
On
0.31 5 2.5
10 MHz 10 MHz
On
On
FC1 User Guide
Acoustic output tables 553
Table 10-10: Transducer model: HFL38xp
Operating mode: 2D (B)/Color
TIS
TIB
Index label
Associated acoustic parameter
Global Maximum Index Value pr.3 W0 min of [W. z I z ] 3( 1), TA.3( 1) z1 Zbp Zsp z@PII.3max deq(Zsp) Fc
Dim of Aaprt
PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@Pllmax Focal Length
Other information
I @MI PA.3
max
(MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X (cm) Y (cm) (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) (W/cm2)
Control 1: 2D Frequency / THI
Control 2: Color Frequency Control 3: Color Box Size Control 4: Color PRF Control 5:
M.I.
0.9 1.98
Scan 0.4
Nonscan
Aaprt1 -
Aaprt>1 -
12.3 -
1.4
4.96 6.99 -
-
1.9
-
-
0.4
-
-
0.33
447
2.35
5
-
-
2.5
-
-
175.9
9 MHz / 10 MHz /
On
On
7.27 MHz 7.27 MHz
Narrow Narrow
4000 Hz 10000 Hz
Nonscan -
-
-
TIC 0.4 19.0
5.38 1.9 0.4
5 2.5 10 MHz / On 5.34 MHz Narrow 11364 Hz
Operating control
conditions
554 Acoustic output tables
Chapter 10
Table 10-11: Transducer model: HFL38xp
Operating mode: PW Doppler
Index label
M.I. Scan
Global Maximum Index Value
0.7
-
Associated acoustic parameter
pr.3
(MPa) 1.63
W0
(mW)
-
min of [W. z I z ] 3( 1), TA.3( 1)
(mW)
z1
(cm)
Zbp
(cm)
Zsp
(cm)
z@PII.3max
(cm) 1.6
deq(Zsp)
(cm)
Fc
(MHz) 5.40 -
Dim of Aaprt
X (cm)
-
Y (cm)
-
PD
(sec) 0.53
PRF
(Hz)
5000
Other information
pr@PIImax deq@Pllmax Focal Length
I @MI PA.3
max
Control 1: Frequency
(MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) (W/cm2)
2.09
154.7 5.34 MHz
Control 2: PRF
5000 Hz
Control 3: Sample Volume Position 2.5 cm
Control 4:
Control 5:
TIS
TIB
Nonscan
Aaprt1
Aaprt>1
0.6
-
Nonscan
1.3
TIC 0.9
23.3 -
16.4 23.3 1.5
5.37 -
0.8
-
0.4
-
0.16
5.44 5.37
0.6
0.8
0.4
0.4
6
-
2.5
-
5.34 MHz 8064 Hz 6.0 cm
0.15 6 2.5
5.34 MHz 5.34 MHz 13514 Hz 8064 Hz 2.5 cm 6.0 cm
Operating control
conditions
FC1 User Guide
Acoustic output tables 555
Table 10-12: Transducer model: HFL38xp
Operating mode: 2D (B)/PW Doppler
TIS
TIB
Index label
Associated acoustic parameter
Global Maximum Index Value pr.3 W0 min of [W. z I z ] 3( 1), TA.3( 1) z1 Zbp Zsp z@PII.3max deq(Zsp) Fc
Dim of Aaprt
PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@Pllmax Focal Length
Other information
I @MI PA.3
max
(MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X (cm) Y (cm) (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) (W/cm2)
Control 1: 2D Frequency / THI
Control 2: PW Frequency Control 3: PW PRF Control 4: PW Sample Volume Position Control 5:
M.I.
0.9 1.98
Scan 0.5
Nonscan
Aaprt1
Aaprt>1
0.5
-
18.3 16.4 -
1.4
4.96 5.87 7.01 -
3.0
0.8
-
0.4
0.4
-
0.33
1000
2.35
8
4
-
2.5
2.5
-
175.9
9 MHz / 10 MHz / 10 MHz /
On
On
On
5.34 MHz 7.27 MHz 7.27 MHz
5000 Hz 3125 Hz 11111 Hz
2.0 cm 8.0 cm 4.0 cm
Non-
TIC
scan
1.0
1.2
13.1 48.7
1.5
0.16
5.44 5.87
0.6
3.0
0.4
0.4
0.15 8 2.5
9 MHz / 10 MHz /
On
On
5.34 MHz 7.27 MHz
13514 Hz 3125 Hz
2.5 cm 8.0 cm
Operating control
conditions
556 Acoustic output tables
Chapter 10
Table 10-13: Transducer model: HFL38xp Operating mode: 2D (B)/Color/PW Doppler (Triplex)
TIS
TIB
Index label
Associated acoustic parameter
Global Maximum Index Value pr.3 W0 min of [W. z I z ] 3( 1), TA.3( 1) z1 Zbp Zsp z@PII.3max deq(Zsp) Fc
Dim of Aaprt
PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@Pllmax Focal Length
Other information
I @MI PA.3
max
(MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X (cm) Y (cm) (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) (W/cm2)
Control 1: 2D Frequency / THI
Control 2: Color Frequency Control 3: PW Frequency Control 4: PW PRF Control 5: PW Sample Volume Position
M.I.
0.9 1.98
Scan 0.3
Nonscan
Aaprt1
Aaprt>1
0.5
-
10.5 16.4 -
1.4
4.96 6.99 7.01 -
1.5
0.8
-
0.4
0.4
-
0.33
500
2.35
5
4
-
2.5
2.5
-
175.9
9 MHz / 10 MHz / 10 MHz /
On
On
On
7.27 MHz 7.27 MHz 7.27 MHz
5.34 MHz 7.27 MHz 7.27 MHz
5000 Hz 3125 Hz 11111 Hz
2.0 cm 5.0 cm 4.0 cm
Non-
TIC
scan
1.0
0.9
13.1 26.5
1.5
0.16
5.44 5.37
0.6
0.8
0.4
0.4
0.15 6 2.5
8 MHz / 10 MHz /
Off
On
7.27 MHz 7.27 MHz
7.27 MHz 5.34 MHz
4032 Hz 8064 Hz
2.5 cm 6.0 cm
Operating control
conditions
FC1 User Guide
Acoustic output tables 557
Table 10-14: Transducer model: HFL50xp
Operating mode: 2D (B)
Index label
Associated acoustic parameter
Global Maximum Index Value pr.3 W0 min of [W. z I z ] 3( 1), TA.3( 1) z1 Zbp Zsp z@PII.3max deq(Zsp) Fc
Dim of Aaprt
PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@Pllmax Focal Length
Other information
I @MI PA.3
max
Control 1: Frequency
Control 2: THI
Control 3:
Control 4:
Control 5:
M.I.
0.9
(MPa) 2.12
(mW)
(mW)
(cm)
(cm)
(cm)
(cm) 1.5
(cm)
(MHz) 5.62
X (cm)
Y (cm)
(sec) 0.21
(Hz)
5375
(MPa) 2.51
(cm)
FLx (cm) FLy (cm) (W/cm2) 212.9
12 MHz
On
Scan 0.3 12.5
4.89 3.8 0.4
8 2.5 10 MHz On
TIS
TIB
Nonscan
Aaprt1 -
Aaprt>1 -
Nonscan
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
TIC 0.6 36.0
4.89 3.8 0.4
8 2.5 10 MHz On
Operating control
conditions
558 Acoustic output tables
Chapter 10
Table 10-15: Transducer model: HFL50xp
Operating mode: 2D (B)/M mode
Index label
Associated acoustic parameter
Global Maximum Index Value pr.3 W0 min of [W. z I z ] 3( 1), TA.3( 1) z1 Zbp Zsp z@PII.3max deq(Zsp) Fc
Dim of Aaprt
PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@Pllmax Focal Length
Other information
I @MI PA.3
max
Control 1: Frequency
Control 2: THI
Control 3:
Control 4:
Control 5:
M.I.
0.9
(MPa) 2.12
(mW)
(mW)
(cm)
(cm)
(cm)
(cm) 1.5
(cm)
(MHz) 5.62
X (cm)
Y (cm)
(sec) 0.21
(Hz)
250
(MPa) 2.51
(cm)
FLx (cm) FLy (cm) (W/cm2) 212.9
12 MHz
On
Scan 0.4 12.3
6.69 3.8 0.4
8 2.5 7 MHz Off
TIS
TIB
Nonscan
Aaprt1
Aaprt>1
0.1
-
Nonscan
0.1
1.0
1.2
-
-
-
1.6
0.19
6.67 -
4.97
0.9
-
0.6
0.4
-
0.4
8
-
2.5
-
7 MHz Off
0.18
10 MHz On
TIC 0.7 36.4
6.69 3.8 0.4
8 2.5 7 MHz Off
Operating control
conditions
FC1 User Guide
Acoustic output tables 559
Table 10-16: Transducer model: HFL50xp
Operating mode: 2D (B)/Color
TIS
TIB
Index label
Associated acoustic parameter
Global Maximum Index Value pr.3 W0 min of [W. z I z ] 3( 1), TA.3( 1) z1 Zbp Zsp z@PII.3max deq(Zsp) Fc
Dim of Aaprt
PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@Pllmax Focal Length
Other information
I @MI PA.3
max
(MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X (cm) Y (cm) (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) (W/cm2)
Control 1: 2D Frequency / THI
Control 2: Color Frequency Control 3: Color Box Size Control 4: Color PRF Control 5:
M.I. Scan
0.9
0.4
2.20
12.0
1.5
5.95 7.46 2.2 0.4
0.43 2250 2.76
5
2.5
470.5
12 MHz / 7 MHz /
On
Off
6.15 MHz 8 MHz
Narrow Narrow
5000 Hz 7042 Hz
Nonscan
Aaprt1 -
Aaprt>1 -
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Nonscan -
-
-
TIC 0.5 21.6
7.46 2.2 0.4
5 2.5 7 MHz / Off 8 MHz Narrow 7042 Hz
Operating control
conditions
560 Acoustic output tables
Chapter 10
Table 10-17: Transducer model: HFL50xp
Operating mode: PW Doppler
Index label
M.I. Scan
Global Maximum Index Value
0.7
-
Associated acoustic parameter
pr.3 W0 min of [W. z I z ] 3( 1), TA.3( 1) z1 Zbp Zsp z@PII.3max deq(Zsp) Fc
Dim of Aaprt
(MPa) 1.70
(mW)
-
(mW)
(cm)
(cm)
(cm)
(cm) 1.7
(cm)
(MHz) 6.01 -
X (cm)
-
Y (cm)
-
PD
(sec) 0.48
PRF
(Hz)
5000
Other information
pr@PIImax deq@Pllmax Focal Length
I @MI PA.3
max
Control 1: Frequency
(MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) (W/cm2)
2.27
145.7 6.15 MHz
Control 2: PRF
5000 Hz
Control 3: Sample Volume Position 3.0 cm
Control 4:
Control 5:
TIS
TIB
Nonscan
Aaprt1
Aaprt>1
0.9
-
Nonscan
1.5
TIC 1.2
30.0 -
24.7 30.0 1.7
6.00 -
0.8
-
0.4
-
0.18
6.07 6.08
0.6
0.8
0.4
0.4
6
-
2.5
-
6.15 MHz 8064 Hz 6.0 cm
0.17 6 2.5
6.15 MHz 6.15 MHz 13514 Hz 8064 Hz 3.0 cm 6.0 cm
Operating control
conditions
FC1 User Guide
Acoustic output tables 561
Table 10-18: Transducer model: HFL50xp
Operating mode: 2D (B)/PW Doppler
TIS
TIB
Index label
Associated acoustic parameter
Global Maximum Index Value pr.3 W0 min of [W. z I z ] 3( 1), TA.3( 1) z1 Zbp Zsp z@PII.3max deq(Zsp) Fc
Dim of Aaprt
PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@Pllmax Focal Length
Other information
I @MI PA.3
max
(MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X (cm) Y (cm) (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) (W/cm2)
Control 1: 2D Frequency / THI
Control 2: PW Frequency Control 3: PW PRF Control 4: PW Sample Volume Position Control 5:
M.I.
0.9 2.18
Scan 0.5
Nonscan
Aaprt1
Aaprt>1
0.7
-
16.3 24.0 -
1.7
5.50 6.82 6.08 -
4.2
0.8
-
0.4
0.4
-
0.25
1080
2.83
8
6
-
2.5
2.5
-
250.0
12 MHz / 7 MHz / 7 MHz /
On
Off
Off
6.15 MHz 6.15 MHz 6.15 MHz
5000 Hz 3125 Hz 8064 Hz
2.5 cm 8.0 cm 6.0 cm
Non-
TIC
scan
1.1
1.1
18.7 32.8
1.7
0.19
6.04 6.00
0.6
0.8
0.4
0.4
0.18 6 2.5
7 MHz / 10 MHz /
Off
On
6.15 MHz 6.15 MHz
8064 Hz 8064 Hz
3.0 cm 6.0 cm
Operating control
conditions
562 Acoustic output tables
Chapter 10
Table 10-19: Transducer model: HFL50xp Operating mode: 2D (B)/Color/PW Doppler (Triplex)
TIS
TIB
Index label
Associated acoustic parameter
Global Maximum Index Value pr.3 W0 min of [W. z I z ] 3( 1), TA.3( 1) z1 Zbp Zsp z@PII.3max deq(Zsp) Fc
Dim of Aaprt
PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@Pllmax Focal Length
Other information
I @MI PA.3
max
(MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X (cm) Y (cm) (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) (W/cm2)
Control 1: 2D Frequency / THI
Control 2: Color Frequency Control 3: PW Frequency Control 4: PW PRF Control 5: PW Sample Volume Position
M.I.
0.9 2.18
Scan 0.3
Nonscan
Aaprt1
Aaprt>1
0.7
-
8.6
24.0
-
-
-
1.7
5.50 6.82 6.08 -
4.2
0.8
-
0.4
0.4
-
0.25
540
2.83
8
6
-
2.5
2.5
-
250.0
12 MHz / 7 MHz / 7 MHz /
On
Off
Off
6.15 MHz 6.15 MHz 6.15 MHz
6.15 MHz 6.15 MHz 6.15 MHz
5000 Hz 3125 Hz 5000 Hz
2.5 cm 8.0 cm 6.0 cm
Non-
TIC
scan
1.0
1.2
24.0 35.3
1.3
0.31
6.08 6.08
0.8
0.8
0.4
0.4
0.29 6 2.5
10 MHz / 10 MHz /
On
On
6.15 MHz 6.15 MHz
6.15 MHz 6.15 MHz
5000 Hz 8064 Hz
6.0 cm 6.0 cm
Operating control
conditions
FC1 User Guide
Acoustic output tables 563
Table 10-20: Transducer model: L25xp
Index label
M.I.
Associated acoustic parameter
Global Maximum Index Value pr.3 W0 min of [W. z I z ] 3( 1), TA.3( 1) z1 Zbp Zsp z@PII.3max deq(Zsp) Fc
Dim of Aaprt
PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@Pllmax Focal Length
Other information
I @MI PA.3
max
Control 1: Frequency
Control 2: THI
Control 3:
Control 4:
Control 5:
0.7
(MPa) 1.90
(mW)
(mW)
(cm)
(cm)
(cm)
(cm) 1.2
(cm)
(MHz) 6.86
X (cm)
Y (cm)
(sec) 0.21
(Hz)
5882
(MPa) 2.36
(cm)
FLx (cm) FLy (cm) (W/cm2) 352.9
8 MHz
Off
Operating control
conditions
Operating mode: 2D (B)
Scan 0.3
TIS
TIB
Nonscan
Aaprt1 -
Aaprt>1 -
Nonscan
-
TIC 0.5
9.9
-
-
18.9
-
-
-
-
-
6.15 -
-
-
6.15
2.6
-
-
-
2.6
0.3
-
-
-
0.3
-
5
-
-
5
2.7
-
-
2.7
12 MHz On
12 MHz On
564 Acoustic output tables
Chapter 10
Table 10-21: Transducer model: L25xp
Index label
M.I.
Associated acoustic parameter
Global Maximum Index Value pr.3 W0 min of [W. z I z ] 3( 1), TA.3( 1) z1 Zbp Zsp z@PII.3max deq(Zsp) Fc
Dim of Aaprt
PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@Pllmax Focal Length
Other information
I @MI PA.3
max
Control 1: Frequency
Control 2: THI
Control 3:
Control 4:
Control 5:
0.7
(MPa) 1.90
(mW)
(mW)
(cm)
(cm)
(cm)
(cm) 1.2
(cm)
(MHz) 6.86
X (cm)
Y (cm)
(sec) 0.21
(Hz)
250
(MPa) 2.36
(cm)
FLx (cm) FLy (cm) (W/cm2) 352.9
8 MHz
Off
Operating control
conditions
Operating mode: 2D (B)/M
Scan 0.3
TIS
TIB
Nonscan
Aaprt1
Aaprt>1
0.1
-
Nonscan
0.1
TIC 0.5
9.5
1.1
-
-
-
0.8
19.4
1.2
6.15 6.15 -
2.6
0.8
-
0.3
0.3
-
0.17
6.18 6.15
0.5
2.6
0.3
0.3
5
5
-
2.7
2.7
-
12 MHz 12 MHz
On
On
0.16 5 2.7
12 MHz 12 MHz
On
On
FC1 User Guide
Acoustic output tables 565
Table 10-22: Transducer model: L25xp
Operating mode: 2D (B)/Color
TIS
TIB
Index label
Associated acoustic parameter
Global Maximum Index Value pr.3 W0 min of [W. z I z ] 3( 1), TA.3( 1) z1 Zbp Zsp z@PII.3max deq(Zsp) Fc
Dim of Aaprt
PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@Pllmax Focal Length
Other information
I @MI PA.3
max
(MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X (cm) Y (cm) (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) (W/cm2)
Control 1: 2D Frequency / THI
Control 2: Color Frequency Control 3: Color Box Size Control 4: Color PRF Control 5:
M.I.
0.7 1.90
Scan 0.4
Nonscan
Aaprt1 -
Aaprt>1 -
11.8 -
1.2
6.86 7.17 -
-
1.2
-
-
0.3
-
-
0.21
961
2.36
5
-
-
2.7
-
-
352.9
8 MHz / 12 MHz /
Off
On
7.27 MHz 7.27 MHz
Narrow Narrow
4000 Hz 4000 Hz
Nonscan -
-
-
TIC 0.5 13.9
7.17 1.2 0.3
5 2.7 12 MHz / On 7.27 MHz Narrow 4000 Hz
Operating control
conditions
566 Acoustic output tables
Chapter 10
Table 10-23: Transducer model: L25xp
Operating mode: PW Doppler
Index label
M.I. Scan
Global Maximum Index Value
0.7
-
Associated acoustic parameter
pr.3
(MPa) 1.90
W0
(mW)
-
min of [W. z I z ] 3( 1), TA.3( 1)
(mW)
z1
(cm)
Zbp
(cm)
Zsp
(cm)
z@PII.3max
(cm) 1.2
deq(Zsp)
(cm)
Fc
(MHz) 7.16 -
Dim of Aaprt
X (cm)
-
Y (cm)
-
PD
(sec) 0.40
PRF
(Hz)
3125
Other information
pr@PIImax deq@Pllmax Focal Length
I @MI PA.3
max
Control 1: Frequency
(MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) (W/cm2)
2.32
177.3 7.27 MHz
Control 2: PRF
3125 Hz
Control 3: Sample Volume Position 2.0 cm
Control 4:
Control 5:
TIS
TIB
Nonscan
Aaprt1
Aaprt>1
0.4
-
Nonscan
0.7
TIC 0.6
11.9 -
8.0
11.9
1.2
7.22 -
0.6
-
0.3
-
0.15
7.27 7.16
0.4
0.6
0.3
0.3
6
-
2.7
-
7.27 MHz 7042 Hz 6.0 cm
0.14 6 2.7
7.27 MHz 7.27 MHz 11111 Hz 7042 Hz 2.0 cm 6.0 cm
Operating control
conditions
FC1 User Guide
Acoustic output tables 567
Table 10-24: Transducer model: L25xp
Operating mode: 2D (B)/PW Doppler
TIS
TIB
Index label
Associated acoustic parameter
Global Maximum Index Value pr.3 W0 min of [W. z I z ] 3( 1), TA.3( 1) z1 Zbp Zsp z@PII.3max deq(Zsp) Fc
Dim of Aaprt
PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@Pllmax Focal Length
Other information
I @MI PA.3
max
(MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X (cm) Y (cm) (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) (W/cm2)
Control 1: 2D Frequency / THI
Control 2: PW Frequency Control 3: PW PRF Control 4: PW Sample Volume Position Control 5:
M.I.
0.8 2.04
Scan 0.3
Nonscan
Aaprt1
Aaprt>1
0.4
-
9.8
11.0
-
-
-
1.0
6.50 6.30 7.14 -
2.5
0.6
-
0.3
0.3
-
0.21
920
2.32
8
6
-
2.7
2.7
-
177.4
13 MHz / 12 MHz / 12 MHz /
On
On
On
7.27 MHz 8.8 MHz 7.27 MHz
3125 Hz 2000 Hz 3125 Hz
1.5 cm 8.0 cm 6.0 cm
Non-
TIC
scan
0.6
0.6
7.4
13.0
1.1
0.16
7.16 7.22
0.4
0.6
0.3
0.3
0.15 6 2.7
12 MHz / 12 MHz /
On
On
7.27 MHz 7.27 MHz
3125 Hz 7042 Hz
2.0 cm 6.0 cm
Operating control
conditions
568 Acoustic output tables
Chapter 10
Table 10-25: Transducer model: L25xp
Operating mode: 2D (B)/Color/PW Doppler (Triplex)
TIS
TIB
Index label
Associated acoustic parameter
Global Maximum Index Value pr.3 W0 min of [W. z I z ] 3( 1), TA.3( 1) z1 Zbp Zsp z@PII.3max deq(Zsp) Fc
Dim of Aaprt
PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@Pllmax Focal Length
Othe r information
I @MI PA.3
max
(MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X (cm) Y (cm) (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) (W/cm2)
Control 1: 2D Frequency / THI
Control 2: Color Frequency Control 3: PW Frequency Control 4: PW PRF Control 5: PW Sample Volume Position
M.I.
0.8 2.04
Scan 0.1
Nonscan
Aaprt1
Aaprt>1
0.3
-
3.3
9.5
-
-
-
1.0
6.50 8.45 7.22 -
1.3
0.6
-
0.3
0.3
-
0.21
460
2.32
8
6
-
2.7
2.7
-
177.4
13 MHz / 12 MHz / 12 MHz /
On
On
On
7.27 MHz 8.8 MHz 7.27 MHz
7.27 MHz 7.27 MHz 7.27 MHz
3125 Hz 7042 Hz 5000 Hz
1.5 cm 8.0 cm 6.0 cm
Non-
TIC
scan
0.6
0.6
6.4
13.4
1.2
0.15
7.27 7.22
0.4
0.6
0.3
0.3
0.14 6 2.7
12 MHz / 12 MHz /
On
On
7.27 MHz 7.27 MHz
7.27 MHz 7.27 MHz
5000 Hz 7042 Hz
2.0 cm 6.0 cm
Operating control
conditions
FC1 User Guide
Acoustic output tables 569
Table 10-26: Transducer model: P21xp
Operating mode: 2D (B)
Index label
Associated acoustic parameter
Global Maximum Index Value pr.3 W0 min of [W. z I z ] 3( 1), TA.3( 1) z1 Zbp Zsp z@PII.3max deq(Zsp) Fc
Dim of Aaprt
PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@Pllmax Focal Length
Other information
I @MI PA.3
max
Control 1: Frequency
Control 2: THI
Control 3:
Control 4:
Control 5:
TIS
TIB
(MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X (cm) Y (cm) (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) (W/cm2)
M.I. 0.9 1.37
4.5 2.12
0.82 4311 1.82
154.6 2.0 MHz Off
Scan 0.9 75.8
2.49 2.1 1.3
13 9 3.0 MHz On
Nonscan
Aaprt1 -
Aaprt>1 -
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
-
Nonscan -
-
-
TIC 2.4 181.5
2.08 2.1 1.3
13 9 2.0 MHz Off
Operating control
conditions
570 Acoustic output tables
Chapter 10
Table 10-27: Transducer model: P21xp
Operating mode: 2D (B)/M
Index label
Associated acoustic parameter
Global Maximum Index Value pr.3 W0 min of [W. z I z ] 3( 1), TA.3( 1) z1 Zbp Zsp z@PII.3max deq(Zsp) Fc
Dim of Aaprt
PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@Pllmax Focal Length
Other Information
I @MI PA.3
max
Control 1: Frequency
Control 2: THI
Control 3:
Control 4:
Control 5:
TIS
TIB
(MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X (cm) Y (cm) (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) (W/cm2)
M.I. 0.9 1.37
4.5 2.12
0.82 250 1.82
154.6 2.0 MHz Off
Scan 0.9 74.7
2.49 2.1 1.3
13 9 3.0 MHz Off
Nonscan
Aaprt1
Aaprt>1
-
0.1
9.3 2.6 2.7
-
1.69
-
2.0
-
1.3
-
10
-
9
2.0 MHz Off
Nonscan 0.3 12.6
5.8 0.51 1.69 2.0 1.3
0.48
2.0 MHz Off
TIC 2.5 189.4
2.08 2.1 1.3
13 9 2.0 MHz On
Operating control
conditions
FC1 User Guide
Acoustic output tables 571
Table 10-28: Transducer model: P21xp
Operating mode: 2D (B)/Color
TIS
TIB
Index label
Associated acoustic parameter
Global Maximum Index Value pr.3 W0 min of [W. z I z ] 3( 1), TA.3( 1) z1 Zbp Zsp z@PII.3max deq(Zsp) Fc
Dim of Aaprt
PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@Pllmax Focal Length
Other information
I @MI PA.3
max
(MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) (MHz) X (cm) Y (cm) (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) (W/cm2)
Control 1: 2D Frequency / THI
Control 2: Color Frequency Control 3: Color Box Size Control 4: Color PRF Control 5:
M.I.
0.9 1.37
Scan 1.1
Nonscan
Aaprt1 -
Aaprt>1 -
107.6 -
4.5
2.12 1.99 -
-
1.2
-
-
1.3
-
-
0.82
646
1.82
6
-
-
9
-
-
154.6
2.0 MHz / 3.0 MHz /
Off
Off
2.0 MHz 2.0 MHz
Narrow Narrow
4808 Hz 13158 Hz
Nonscan -
-
-
TIC 2.4 150.2
1.99 1.2 1.3
6 9 3.0 MHz / Off 2.0 MHz Narrow 13158 Hz
Operating control
conditions
572 Acoustic output tables
Chapter 10
Table 10-29: Transducer model: P21xp
Operating mode: PW Doppler
Index label
M.I. Scan
Global Maximum Index Value
0.7
-
Associated acoustic parameter
pr.3
(MPa) 1.05
W0
(mW)
-
min of [W. z I z ] 3( 1), TA.3( 1)
(mW)
z1
(cm)
Zbp
(cm)
Zsp
(cm)
z@PII.3max
(cm) 4.2
deq(Zsp)
(cm)
Fc
(MHz) 2.00 -
Dim of Aaprt
X (cm)
-
Y (cm)
-
PD
(sec) 1.30
PRF
(Hz)
3125
Other information
pr@PIImax deq@Pllmax Focal Length
I @MI PA.3
max
Control 1: Frequency
(MPa) 1.41
(cm)
FLx (cm)
-
FLy (cm)
-
(W/cm2) 64.7
2.0 MHz
Control 2: PRF
3125 Hz
Control 3: Sample Volume Position 6.0 cm
Control 4:
Control 5:
TIS
TIB
Nonscan
Aaprt1
Aaprt>1
-
0.7
Nonscan
2.4
TIC 1.8
-
82.2 82.2
53.0
1.6
1.7
1.4
0.62
-
2.83 1.99 1.99
-
0.8
0.8
0.8
-
1.3
1.3
1.3
0.47
-
4
4
-
9
9
2.96 MHz 2.0 MHz 2.0 MHz 11111 Hz 11111 Hz 11111 Hz 4.0 cm 4.0 cm 4.0 cm
Operating control
conditions
FC1 User Guide
Acoustic output tables 573
Table 10-30: Transducer model: P21xp
Operating mode: 2D (B)/PW Doppler
TIS
TIB
Index label
M.I.
Scan
Nonscan
Aaprt1
Aaprt>1
Nonscan
TIC
Global Maximum Index Value
0.9
0.9
-
0.6
2.2
2.7
pr.3
(MPa) 1.27
W0
(mW)
72.6 -
79.0 204.5
min of [W. z I z ] 3( 1), TA.3( 1)
(mW)
63.5
Associated acoustic parameter
z1
(cm)
3.4
Zbp
(cm)
2.8
Zsp z@PII.3max deq(Zsp) Fc
Dim of Aaprt
(cm)
(cm) 5.4
(cm)
(MHz) 2.14 2.49 -
X (cm)
2.1
-
Y (cm)
1.3
-
5.0
0.41
1.99 2.01 2.10
2.1
1.6
2.1
1.3
1.3
1.3
PD
(sec) 0.81
PRF
(Hz)
860
Other information
pr@PIImax deq@Pllmax Focal Length
I @MI PA.3
max
(MPa) 1.90
(cm)
FLx (cm)
16
-
FLy (cm)
9
-
(W/cm2) 151.7
0.38
20
20
9
9
Control 1: 2D Frequency / THI
2.0 MHz / 3.0 MHz /
Off
Off
3.0 MHz / 3.0 MHz / 2.0 MHz /
Off
Off
Off
Control 2: PW Frequency
2.0 MHz 2.96 MHz
2.0 MHz 2.0 MHz 2.0 MHz
Control 3: PW PRF
3125 Hz 1000 Hz
3125 Hz 2000 Hz 1000 Hz
Control 4: PW Sample Volume Position
8.0 cm 16 cm
20 cm 8.0 cm 20 cm
Control 5:
Operating control
conditions
574 Acoustic output tables
Chapter 10
Table 10-31: Transducer model: P21xp
Operating mode: 2D (B)/Color/PW Doppler (Triplex)
TIS
TIB
Index label
M.I.
Scan
Nonscan
Aaprt1
Aaprt>1
Nonscan
TIC
Global Maximum Index Value
0.9
0.6
-
0.5
1.9
1.9
pr.3
(MPa) 1.27
W0
(mW)
55.1 -
59.8 132.3
min of [W. z I z ] 3( 1), TA.3( 1)
(mW)
40.1
Associated acoustic parameter
z1
(cm)
1.8
Zbp
(cm)
2.5
Zsp z@PII.3max deq(Zsp) Fc
Dim of Aaprt
(cm)
(cm) 5.4
(cm)
(MHz) 2.14 2.10 -
X (cm)
2.1
-
Y (cm)
1.3
-
3.8
0.41
2.82 2.00 2.82
1.6
1.2
1.6
1.3
1.3
1.3
PD
(sec) 0.81
PRF
(Hz)
430
Other information
pr@PIImax deq@Pllmax Focal Length
I @MI PA.3
max
(MPa) 1.90
(cm)
FLx (cm)
20
-
FLy (cm)
9
-
(W/cm2) 151.7
0.38
8
8
9
9
Control 1: 2D Frequency / THI
2.0 MHz / 2.0 MHz /
Off
Off
3.0 MHz / 2.0 MHz / 3.0 MHz /
On
Off
On
Control 2: Color Frequency
2.0 MHz 2.96 MHz
2.0 MHz 2.0 MHz 2.0 MHz
Control 3: PW Frequency
2.0 MHz 2.0 MHz
2.96 MHz 2.0 MHz 2.96 MHz
Control 4: PW PRF
3125 Hz 1000 Hz
6250 Hz 3125 Hz 6250 Hz
Control 5: PW Sample Volume Position
8.0 cm 20 cm
8.0 cm 6.0 cm 8.0 cm
Operating control
conditions
FC1 User Guide
Acoustic output tables 575
Table 10-32: Transducer model: P21xp
Index label
M.I.
Global Maximum Index Value
0.1
Associated acoustic parameter
pr.3 W0 min of [W. z I z ] 3( 1), TA.3( 1) z1 Zbp Zsp z@PII.3max deq(Zsp) Fc
Dim of Aaprt
(MPa) 0.10 (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm) (cm) 3.6 (cm) (MHz) 2.00 X (cm) Y (cm)
PD
(sec) N/A
PRF
(Hz)
N/A
Other information
pr@PIImax
(MPa)
deq@Pllmax
(cm)
Focal Length
FLx (cm)
FLy (cm)
I @MI PA.3
max
(W/cm2)
Control 1: Sample Volume Position
0.13
0.4 6 cm
Control 2:
Control 3:
Control 4:
Control 5:
Operating control
conditions
Operating mode: CW Doppler
Scan -
TIS
TIB
Nonscan
Aaprt1 1.1
Aaprt>1
Nonscan
3.1
TIC 2.5
-
110.4
111.6 112.8
-
2.00
-
0.8
-
1.3
3.4
0.50
2.00 2.00
0.8
0.8
1.3
1.3
-
10
-
9
10 cm
0.48 6 cm
10 9
16 cm
576 Acoustic output tables
Chapter 10
Table 10-33: Transducer Model: L38xp
Index label
M.I.
Other Information
Associated Acoustic Parameter
Global Maximum Index Value pr.3 W0 min of [W.3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] z1 zbp zsp z@Pll.3max deq(zsp) fc
Dim of Aaprt
PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@Pllmax
Focal Length
IPA.3@MImax Control 1: Frequency Control 2: THI Control 3: Depth Control 4: Control 5: Needle Vision
(MPa) (mW) (mW) (cm) (cm) (cm)
(cm) (MHz) X (cm) Y (cm) (sec) (Hz) (MPa) (cm) FLx (cm) FLy (cm) (W/cm2)
1.1 2.44
1.1 4.62
0.30 9950 2.63
265.4 9 MHz On
Operating Contro l
Conditions
Operating Mode: 2D
Scan 0.7
TIS
TIB
Non-scan Aaprt1 Aaprt>1
Nonscan
--
--
--
TIC 1.8
29.9 --
--
101.2
--
--
--
--
--
5.15 --
--
--
5.15
3.8
--
--
--
3.8
0.4
--
--
--
0.4
--
8
--
--
8
2.5
--
--
2.5
6.5 MHz Off
9 MHz On
FC1 User Guide
Acoustic output tables 577
Table 10-34: Transducer Model: L38xp
Index Label
M.I.
Other Information
Associated Acoustic Parameter
Global Maximum Index Value pr.3 W0 min of [W.3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] z1 zbp zsp z@Pll.3max deq(zsp) fc
Dim of Aaprt
PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@Pllmax
Focal Length
IPA.3@MImax Control 1: Frequency Control 2: THI Control 3: Control 4: Control 5:
1.1
(MPa) 2.44
(mW)
(mW)
(cm)
(cm)
(cm)
1.1
(cm)
(MHz) 4.62
X (cm) Y (cm) (sec) (Hz)
0.30 9084
(MPa) 2.63
(cm)
FLx (cm) FLy (cm)
(W/cm2) 265.4
9 MHz On
Operating Contro l
Conditions
Operating Mode: 2D/M
Scan 0.5
TIS
TIB
Non-scan Aaprt1 Aaprt>1
Nonscan
--
0.1
0.1
TIC 1.2
18.2 --
3.6
64.7
2.6
1.0
1.3
1.0
6.03
3.8
--
0.4
--
0.47
4.64 4.64 4.64
1.4
1.4
3.8
0.4
0.4
0.4
8
--
2.5
--
6.5 MHz Off
0.46
8
8
2.5
2.5
9 MHz 9 MHz 9 MHz
On
On
On
578 Acoustic output tables
Chapter 10
Table 10-35: Transducer Model: L38xp
Operating Mode: 2D/color
TIS
TIB
Index Label
M.I.
Scan
Non-scan Aaprt1 Aaprt>1
Nonscan
Global Maximum Index Value
1.1
0.6
--
--
--
Associated Acoustic Parameter
pr.3
(MPa) 2.44
W0
(mW)
20.7 --
--
min of [W.3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] (mW)
--
z1
(cm)
--
zbp
(cm)
--
zsp
(cm)
--
z@Pll.3max
1.1
deq(zsp)
(cm)
--
fc
(MHz) 4.62 6.29 --
--
--
Dim of Aaprt
X (cm) Y (cm)
2.9
--
--
--
0.4
--
--
--
PD
(sec) 0.30
PRF
(Hz)
2554
Other Information
pr@PIImax
(MPa) 2.63
deq@Pllmax
(cm)
--
Focal Length
FLx (cm) FLy (cm)
8
--
--
2.5
--
--
IPA.3@MImax
(W/cm2) 265.4
Control 1: 2D Frequency /THI
9 MHz / 6.5 MHz /
On
Off
Control 2: Color Frequency
4.45 MHz 6.67 MHz
Control 3: Color Box Size
Narrow Narrow
Control 4: Color PRF
3226 Hz 3226 Hz
Control 5:
TIC 1.0 50.6
4.56 2.9 0.4
8 2.5 5 MHz / Off 4.45 MHz Narrow 8064 Hz
Operating Contro l
Conditions
FC1 User Guide
Acoustic output tables 579
Table 10-36: Transducer Model: L38xp
Index Label
M.I. Scan
Global Maximum Index Value
0.8
--
pr.3
(MPa) 1.62
W0
(mW)
--
min of [W.3(z1),ITA.3(z1)]
(mW)
Associated Acoustic Parameter
z1
(cm)
zbp
(cm)
zsp
(cm)
z@Pll.3max
1.1
deq(zsp)
(cm)
fc
(MHz) 4.57
--
Dim of Aaprt
X (cm)
--
Y (cm)
--
PD
(sec) 0.64
PRF
(Hz) 4000
Other Information
pr@PIImax
(MPa) 1.84
deq@Pllmax
(cm)
Focal Length
FLx (cm)
--
FLy (cm)
--
IPA.3@MImax
(W/cm2) 117.6
Control 1: Frequency
4.45 MHz
Control 2: PRF
4000 Hz
Control 3: Sample Volume Position 2.0 cm
Control 4:
Control 5:
Operating Contro l
Conditions
Operating Mode: PW Doppler
TIS
TIB
Non-scan
Non-
TIC
Aaprt1 Aaprt>1 scan
--
0.6
1.1
1.0
--
14.5 34.3
20.2
1.2
1.3
1.5
0.15
--
6.40 6.41 6.40
--
1.4
0.5
1.4
--
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.15
--
8
8
--
2.5
2.5
6.67 MHz 6.67 MHz 4.45 MHz 5000 Hz 9091 Hz 9091 Hz 8.0 cm 2.5 cm 8.0 cm
580 Acoustic output tables
Chapter 10
Table 10-37: Transducer Model: L38xp
Operating Mode: 2D/PW Doppler
TIS
TIB
Index Label
M.I.
Scan
Non-scan Aaprt1 Aaprt>1
Nonscan
TIC
Global Maximum Index Value
1.1
0.6
--
0.5
0.9
1.9
Associated Acoustic Parameter
pr.3
(MPa) 2.37
W0
(mW)
19.7
--
11.6 94.8
min of [W.3(z1),ITA.3(z1)]
(mW)
16.1
z1
(cm)
1.2
zbp
(cm)
1.3
zsp
(cm)
1.5
z@Pll.3max
1.1
deq(zsp)
(cm)
0.15
fc
(MHz) 4.61 6.13
--
6.40 6.41 5.12
Dim of Aaprt
X (cm) Y (cm)
3.8
--
1.4
0.5
3.8
0.4
--
0.4
0.4
0.4
PD
(sec) 0.30
PRF
(Hz) 1000
Other Information
pr@PIImax
(MPa) 2.60
deq@Pllmax
(cm)
Focal Length
FLx (cm) FLy (cm)
8
--
2.5
--
IPA.3@MImax
(W/cm2) 231.5
Control 1: 2D Frequency/THI
9 MHz / 6.5 MHz /
On
Off
0.15
8
8
2.5
2.5
9 MHz / 9 MHz / 5 MHz /
On
On
Off
Control 2: PW Frequency
4.45 MHz 6.67 MHz
6.67 MHz 6.67 MHz 4.45 MHz
Control 3: PW PRF
4000 Hz 3125 Hz
5000 Hz 9091 Hz 3125 Hz
Control 4: PW Sample Volume Position
2.0 cm 8.0 cm
8.0 cm 2.5 cm 8.0 cm
Control 5: Needle Vision
Operating Control
Conditions
FC1 User Guide
Acoustic output tables 581
Table 10-38: Transducer Model: L38xp
Operating Mode: 2D/color/PW Doppler (Triplex)
TIS
TIB
Index Label
M.I.
Scan
Non-scan Aaprt1 Aaprt>1
Nonscan
TIC
Global Maximum Index Value
1.1
0.3
--
0.5
0.9
1.2
Associated Acoustic Parameter
pr.3
(MPa) 2.37
W0
(mW)
11.6
--
11.6 48.0
min of [W.3(z1),ITA.3(z1)]
(mW)
16.1
z1
(cm)
1.2
zbp
(cm)
1.3
zsp
(cm)
1.5
z@Pll.3max
1.1
deq(zsp)
(cm)
0.15
fc
(MHz) 4.61 5.12
--
6.40 6.41 6.40
Dim of Aaprt
X (cm) Y (cm)
3.8
--
1.4
0.5
1.4
0.4
--
0.4
0.4
0.4
PD
(sec) 0.30
PRF
(Hz) 500
Other Information
pr@PIImax
(MPa) 2.60
deq@Pllmax
(cm)
0.15
Focal Length
FLx (cm)
8
--
8
8
FLy (cm)
2.5
--
2.5
2.5
IPA.3@MImax
(W/cm2) 231.5
Control 1: 2D Frequency/THI
9 MHz/ 5 MHz/
On
Off
9 MHz/ 9 MHz/ 5 MHz/
On
On
Off
Control 2: Color Frequency
4.45 MHz 4.45 MHz
4.45 MHz 4.45 MHz 4.45 MHz
Control 3: PW Frequency
4.45 MHz 4.45 MHz
4.45 MHz 4.45 MHz 6.67 MHz
Control 4: PW PRF
4000 Hz 3125 Hz
5000 Hz 9091 Hz 5000 Hz
Control 5: PW Sample Volume Position
2.0 cm 8.0 cm
8.0 cm 2.5 cm 8.0 cm
Operating Control
Conditions
582 Acoustic output tables
Chapter 10
Table 10-39: Transducer Model: C11xp
Index Label
M.I.
Other Information
Associated Acoustic Parameter
Global Maximum Index Value pr.3 W0 min of [W.3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] z1 zbp zsp z@Pll.3max deq(zsp) fc
Dim of Aaprt
PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@Pllmax
Focal Length
IPA.3@MImax Control 1: Frequency Control 2: THI Control 3: Control 4: Control 5:
0.8 (MPa) 1.68
(mW)
(mW)
(cm)
(cm)
(cm)
1.6
(cm)
(MHz) 4.49
X (cm) Y (cm)
(sec) (Hz)
(MPa)
0.29 5398 1.83
(cm)
FLx (cm) FLy (cm) (W/cm2)
118.4
9 MHz On
Operating Control
Conditions
Scan 0.4
Operating Mode: 2D
TIS
Non-scan
Aaprt1 Aaprt>1
--
--
TIB
Nonscan
--
17.6
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
5.08
--
--
--
1.6
--
--
--
0.5
--
--
--
--
8
--
--
4.5
--
--
5 MHz Off
TIC 0.6 22.6
5.08 1.6 0.5
8 4.5 5 MHz Off
FC1 User Guide
Acoustic output tables 583
Table 10-40: Transducer Model: C11xp
Index Label
M.I.
Other Information
Associated Acoustic Parameter
Global Maximum Index Value pr.3 W0 min of [W.3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] z1 zbp zsp z@Pll.3max deq(zsp) fc
Dim of Aaprt
PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@Pllmax
Focal Length
IPA.3@MImax Control 1: Frequency Control 2: THI Control 3: Control 4: Control 5:
0.8 (MPa) 1.61
(mW)
(mW)
(cm)
(cm)
(cm)
1.7
(cm)
(MHz) 4.49
X (cm) Y (cm)
(sec) (Hz)
(MPa)
0.29 5334 1.89
(cm)
FLx (cm) FLy (cm) (W/cm2)
121.0
9 MHz On
Operating Control
Conditions
Scan 0.4
Operating Mode: 2D/M
TIS
Non-scan
Aaprt1 Aaprt>1
--
0.2
TIB
Nonscan 0.1
14.5
--
0.8
1.1
1.3
1.4
1.6
0.20
5.12
--
4.71 4.63
1.6
--
1.3
0.6
0.5
--
0.5
0.5
0.20
8
--
8
4.5
--
4.5
9 MHz On
9 MHz 9 MHz
On
On
TIC 0.5 19.7
5.12 1.6 0.5
8 4.5 5 MHz Off
584 Acoustic output tables
Chapter 10
Table 10-41: Transducer Model: C11xp
Operating Mode: 2D/Color
TIS
Index Label
M.I.
Global Maximum Index Value
0.7
pr.3
(MPa) 1.58
W0
(mW)
min of [W.3(z1),ITA.3(z1)]
(mW)
Associated Acoustic Parameter
z1
(cm)
zbp
(cm)
zsp
(cm)
z@Pll.3max
1.7
deq(zsp)
(cm)
fc
(MHz) 4.48
Dim of Aaprt
X (cm) Y (cm)
PD
(sec) 0.29
PRF
(Hz) 6024
Other Information
pr@PIImax
(MPa) 1.87
deq@Pllmax
(cm)
Focal Length
FLx (cm) FLy (cm)
IPA.3@MImax
(W/cm2) 119.5
Control 1: 2D Frequency/THI
9 MHz / On
Control 2: Color Frequency
4.2 MHz
Control 3: Color Box Size
Narrow
Control 4: Color PRF
6024 Hz
Control 5:
Scan 0.3 14.0
4.29 1.1 0.5
5 4.5 9 MHz / On 4.2 MHz Narrow 6024 Hz
Non-scan
Aaprt1 Aaprt>1
--
--
-- -- -- --
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
TIB Nonscan
-- --
-- -- -- -- --
--
TIC 0.4 16.0
4.29 1.1 0.5
5 4.5 9 MHz / On 4.2 MHz Narrow 6024 Hz
Operating Control
Conditions
FC1 User Guide
Acoustic output tables 585
Table 10-42: Transducer Model: C11xp
Index Label
M.I.
Global Maximum Index Value
0.4
pr.3
(MPa) 0.92
W0
(mW)
min of [W.3(z1),ITA.3(z1)]
(mW)
Associated Acoustic Parameter
z1
(cm)
zbp
(cm)
zsp
(cm)
z@Pll.3max
1.6
deq(zsp)
(cm)
fc
(MHz) 4.24
Dim of Aaprt
X (cm) Y (cm)
PD
(sec) 1.06
PRF
(Hz) 7042
Other Information
pr@PIImax
(MPa) 1.15
deq@Pllmax
(cm)
Focal Length
FLx (cm) FLy (cm)
IPA.3@MImax
(W/cm2) 39.6
Control 1: Frequency
4.2 MHz
Control 2: PRF
7042 Hz
Control 3: Sample Volume Position 2.0 cm
Control 4:
Control 5:
Operating Control
Conditions
Scan -- --
-- -- --
-- --
Operating Mode: PW Doppler
TIS
TIB
Non-scan
Non-
TIC
Aaprt1 Aaprt>1 scan
--
0.4
1.0
0.8
--
13.9 28.4
19.5
1.3
1.4
1.5
0.19
--
4.22 4.24 4.22
--
1.3
0.6
1.3
--
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.19
--
8
8
--
4.5
4.5
4.2 MHz 4.2 MHz 4.2 MHz 7042 Hz 7042 Hz 7042 Hz 8.0 cm 2.0 cm 8.0 cm
586 Acoustic output tables
Chapter 10
Table 10-43: Transducer Model: C11xp
Operating Mode: 2D/PW Doppler
TIS
TIB
Index Label
M.I.
Global Maximum Index Value
0.7
pr.3
(MPa) 1.56
W0
(mW)
min of [W.3(z1),ITA.3(z1)]
(mW)
Associated Acoustic Parameter
z1
(cm)
zbp
(cm)
zsp
(cm)
z@Pll.3max
1.7
deq(zsp)
(cm)
fc
(MHz) 4.5
Dim of Aaprt
X (cm) Y (cm)
PD
(sec) 0.29
PRF
(Hz) 530
Other Information
pr@PIImax
(MPa) 1.86
deq@Pllmax
(cm)
Focal Length
FLx (cm) FLy (cm)
IPA.3@MImax
(W/cm2) 105.5
Control 1: Frequency/THI
9 MHZ/ On
Control 2: PW Frequency
4.2 MHz
Control 3: PW PRF
7042 Hz
Control 4: PW Sample Volume Position
2.0 cm
Control 5:
Scan 0.1 5.7
5.11 1.6 0.5
8 4.5 5 MHz / Off 4.2 MHz 2000 Hz 8.0 cm
Non-scan
Aaprt1 Aaprt>1
--
0.3
-- 15.6 1.3 1.4
--
4.22
--
1.3
--
0.5
--
8
--
4.5
5 MHz / Off
4.2 MHz 7042 Hz
8.0 cm
Nonscan 0.8 11.1
1.5 0.19 4.24 0.6 0.5
0.19
9 MHZ/ On
4.2 MHz 7042 Hz 2.0 cm
TIC 0.7 27.0
4.25 1.3 0.5
8 4.5 5 MHz / Off 4.2 MHz 7042 Hz 8.0 cm
Operating Control
Conditions
FC1 User Guide
Acoustic output tables 587
Table 10-44: Transducer Model: C11xp
Operating Mode: 2D/Color/PW Doppler (Triplex)
TIS
TIB
Index Label
M.I.
Global Maximum Index Value
0.7
pr.3
(MPa) 1.56
W0
(mW)
min of [W.3(z1),ITA.3(z1)]
(mW)
Associated Acoustic Parameter
z1
(cm)
zbp
(cm)
zsp
(cm)
z@Pll.3max
1.7
deq(zsp)
(cm)
fc
(MHz) 4.50
Dim of Aaprt
X (cm) Y (cm)
PD
(sec) 0.29
PRF
(Hz) 260
Other Information
pr@PIImax
(MPa) 1.86
deq@Pllmax
(cm)
Focal Length
FLx (cm) FLy (cm)
IPA.3@MImax
(W/cm2) 101.5
Control 1: 2D Frequency / THI
9 MHz / On
Control 2: Color Frequency
4.2 MHz
Control 3: PW Frequency
4.2 MHz
Control 4: PW PRF
7042 Hz
Control 5: PW Sample Volume Position
2.0 cm
Scan 0.1 4.4
5.11 1.6 0.5
8 4.5 5 MHz / Off 6.1 MHz 4.2 MHz 2000 Hz 8.0 cm
Non-scan
Aaprt1 Aaprt>1
--
0.3
-- 15.6 1.3 1.4
--
4.25
--
1.3
--
0.5
--
8
--
4.5
5 MHz / Off
6.1 MHz 6.1 MHz 7042 Hz
8.0 cm
Nonscan 0.8 11.1
1.5
0.19 4.24 0.6 0.5
0.19
9 MHz / On
4.2 MHz 4.2 MHz 7042 Hz 2.0 cm
TIC 0.8 27.8
4.25 1.3 0.5
8 4.5 5 MHz / Off 6.1 MHz 4.2 MHz 7042 Hz 8.0 cm
Operating Control
Conditions
588 Acoustic output tables
Chapter 10
Table 10-45: Transducer Model: ICTxp
Index Label
M.I.
Other Information
Associated Acoustic Parameter
Global Maximum Index Value pr.3 W0 min of [W.3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] z1 zbp zsp z@Pll.3max deq(zsp) fc
Dim of Aaprt
PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@Pllmax
Focal Length
IPA.3@MImax Control 1: Frequency Control 2: THI Control 3: Control 4: Control 5:
0.7 (MPa) 1.43
(mW)
(mW)
(cm)
(cm)
(cm)
1.7
(cm)
(MHz) 4.63
X (cm) Y (cm)
(sec) (Hz)
(MPa)
0.29 8000 1.70
(cm)
FLx (cm) FLy (cm) (W/cm2) 88.8
9 MHz On
Operating Control
Conditions
Scan 0.3
Operating Mode: 2D
TIS
Non-scan
Aaprt1 Aaprt>1
--
--
TIB
Nonscan
--
15.9
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
4.56
--
--
--
1.1
--
--
--
0.5
--
--
--
--
8
--
--
4.4
--
--
9 MHz On
TIC 0.5 16.3
4.56 1.1 0.5
8 4.4 9 MHz On
FC1 User Guide
Acoustic output tables 589
Table 10-46: Transducer Model: ICTxp
Index Label
M.I.
Other Information
Associated Acoustic Parameter
Global Maximum Index Value pr.3 W0 min of [W.3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] z1 zbp zsp z@Pll.3max deq(zsp) fc
Dim of Aaprt
PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@Pllmax
Focal Length
IPA.3@MImax Control 1: Frequency Control 2: THI Control 3: Control 4: Control 5:
0.7 (MPa) 1.43
(mW)
(mW)
(cm)
(cm)
(cm)
1.7
(cm)
(MHz) 4.63
X (cm) Y (cm)
(sec) (Hz)
(MPa)
0.29 7986 1.70
(cm)
FLx (cm) FLy (cm) (W/cm2) 88.8
9 MHz On
Operating Control
Conditions
Scan 0.3
Operating Mode: 2D/M
TIS
Non-scan
Aaprt1 Aaprt>1
0.1
--
TIB
Nonscan 0.1
15.8
1.0
0.8
--
--
--
1.9
0.21
4.56 4.56
--
4.65
1.1
0.9
--
0.7
0.5
0.5
--
0.5
0.20
8
8
--
4.4
4.4
--
9 MHz 9 MHz
On
On
9 MHz On
TIC 0.5 17.3
4.56 1.1 0.5
8 4.4 9 MHz On
590 Acoustic output tables
Chapter 10
Table 10-47: Transducer Model: ICTxp
Operating Mode: 2D/Color
TIS
Index Label
M.I.
Non-scan
Scan Aaprt1 Aaprt>1
Global Maximum Index Value
0.7
0.3
--
--
Associated Acoustic Parameter
pr.3
(MPa) 1.43
W0
(mW)
13.4
--
min of [W.3(z1),ITA.3(z1)]
(mW)
--
z1
(cm)
--
zbp
(cm)
--
zsp
(cm)
z@Pll.3max
1.7
deq(zsp)
(cm)
fc
(MHz) 4.63 5.85
--
--
Dim of Aaprt
X (cm) Y (cm)
0.9
--
--
0.5
--
--
PD
(sec) 0.29
PRF
(Hz) 2222
Other Information
pr@PIImax
(MPa) 1.70
deq@Pllmax
(cm)
Focal Length
FLx (cm) FLy (cm)
8
--
--
4.4
--
--
IPA.3@MImax
(W/cm2) 88.8
Control 1: Frequency / THI
9 MHz / 9 MHz /
On
On
Control 2: Color Frequency
6.15 MHz 6.15 MHz
Control 3: Color Box Size
Narrow Narrow
Control 4: Color PRF
4000 Hz 4000 Hz
Control 5:
TIB
Non-
TIC
scan
--
0.4
--
13.5
--
--
--
5.85
--
0.9
--
0.5
-- 8 4.4
9 MHz / On
6.15 MHz Narrow 4000 Hz
Operating Control
Conditions
FC1 User Guide
Acoustic output tables 591
Table 10-48: Transducer Model: ICTxp
Operating Mode: PW Doppler
Index Label
M.I.
Global Maximum Index Value
0.5
pr.3
(MPa) 1.24
W0
(mW)
min of [W.3(z1),ITA.3(z1)]
(mW)
Associated Acoustic Parameter
z1
(cm)
zbp
(cm)
zsp
(cm)
z@Pll.3max
1.2
deq(zsp)
(cm)
fc
(MHz) 5.93
Dim of Aaprt
X (cm) Y (cm)
PD
(sec) 0.45
PRF
(Hz) 4000
Other Information
pr@PIImax
(MPa) 1.94
deq@Pllmax
(cm)
Focal Length
FLx (cm) FLy (cm)
IPA.3@MImax
(W/cm2) 89.4
Control 1: Frequency
6.15 MHz
Control 2: PRF
4000 Hz
Control 3: Sample Volume Position 4.0 cm
Control 4:
Control 5:
Scan -- --
-- -- --
-- --
TIS
TIB
Non-scan
Non-
TIC
Aaprt1 Aaprt>1 scan
0.3
--
0.8
0.5
15.2
13.0 15.2
--
--
--
1.9
0.20
4.48
--
4.47 4.48
0.9
--
0.7
0.9
0.5
--
0.5
0.5
0.19
8
--
8
4.4
--
4.4
4.45 MHz 7042 Hz 8.0 cm
4.45 MHz 4.45 MHz 7042 Hz 7042 Hz 4.0 cm 8.0 cm
Operating Control
Conditions
592 Acoustic output tables
Chapter 10
Table 10-49: Transducer Model: ICTxp
Operating Mode: 2D/PW Doppler
TIS
TIB
Index Label
M.I.
Scan
Non-scan Aaprt1 Aaprt>1
Nonscan
TIC
Global Maximum Index Value
0.6
0.2
0.3
--
0.7
0.5
Associated Acoustic Parameter
pr.3
(MPa) 1.39
W0
(mW)
7.7
12.1
10.4 15.0
min of [W.3(z1),ITA.3(z1)]
(mW)
--
z1
(cm)
--
zbp
(cm)
--
zsp
(cm)
1.9
z@Pll.3max
1.6
deq(zsp)
(cm)
0.20
fc
(MHz) 4.65
5.41
4.48
--
4.48 4.48
Dim of Aaprt
X (cm) Y (cm)
2.4
0.9
--
0.7
0.9
0.5
0.5
--
0.5
0.5
PD
(sec) 0.29
PRF
(Hz) 800
Other Information
pr@PIImax
(MPa) 1.77
deq@Pllmax
(cm)
0.19
Focal Length
FLx (cm)
5.0
8
--
8
FLy (cm)
4.4
4.4
--
4.4
IPA.3@MImax
(W/cm2) 82.1
Control 1: 2D Frequency/THI
9 MHz/ 5.5 MHz / 9 MHz /
On
Off
On
9 MHz/ 9 MHz /
On
On
Control 2: PW Frequency
6.15 MHz 6.15 MHz 4.45 MHz
4.45 MHz 4.45 MHz
Control 3: PW PRF
4000 Hz 2000 Hz 7042 Hz
7042 Hz 7042 Hz
Control 4: PW Sample Volume Position
3.0 cm 5.0 cm 8.0 cm
4.0 cm 8.0 cm
Control 5:
Operating Control
Conditions
FC1 User Guide
Acoustic output tables 593
Table 10-50: Transducer Model: ICTxp
Operating Mode: 2D/Color/PW Doppler (Triplex)
TIS
TIB
Index Label
M.I.
Scan
Non-scan Aaprt1 Aaprt>1
Nonscan
TIC
Global Maximum Index Value
0.6
0.3
0.3
--
0.7
0.5
Associated Acoustic Parameter
pr.3
(MPa) 1.39
W0
(mW)
9.6
12.1
10.4 15.1
min of [W.3(z1),ITA.3(z1)]
(mW)
--
z1
(cm)
--
zbp
(cm)
--
zsp
(cm)
1.9
z@Pll.3max
1.6
deq(zsp)
(cm)
0.20
fc
(MHz) 4.65
5.89
4.48
--
4.48 4.48
Dim of Aaprt
X (cm) Y (cm)
1.4
0.9
--
0.7
0.9
0.5
0.5
--
0.5
0.5
PD
(sec) 0.29
PRF
(Hz) 400
Other Information
pr@PIImax
(MPa) 1.77
deq@Pllmax
(cm)
0.19
Focal Length
FLx (cm)
8
8
--
8
FLy (cm)
4.4
4.4
--
4.4
IPA.3@MImax
(W/cm2) 82.1
Control 1: 2D Frequency / THI
9 MHz / 5.5 MHz / 9 MHz /
On
Off
On
9 MHz / 9 MHz /
On
On
Control 2: Color Frequency
6.15 MHz 4.45 MHz 6.15 MHz
4.45 MHz 6.15 MHz
Control 3: PW Frequency
6.15 MHz 6.15 MHz 4.45 MHz
4.45 MHz 4.45 MHz
Control 4: PW PRF
4000 Hz 2000 Hz 7042 Hz
4032 Hz 7042 Hz
Control 5: PW Sample Volume Position
3.0 cm 8.0 m 8.0 cm
4.0 cm 8.0 cm
Operating Control
Conditions
594 Acoustic output tables
Chapter 10
Table 10-51: Transducer Model: C35xp
Index Label
M.I.
Other Information
Associated Acoustic Parameter
Global Maximum Index Value pr.3 W0 min of [W.3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] z1 zbp zsp z@Pll.3max deq(zsp) fc
Dim of Aaprt
PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@Pllmax
Focal Length
IPA.3@MImax Control 1: Frequency Control 2: THI Control 3: Control 4: Control 5:
1.0 (MPa) 1.89
(mW)
(mW)
(cm)
(cm)
(cm)
3.3
(cm)
(MHz) 3.54
X (cm) Y (cm)
(sec) (Hz)
(MPa)
0.37 5730 2.67
(cm)
FLx (cm) FLy (cm) (W/cm2)
242.7
8 MHz On
Operating Control
Conditions
Scan 0.8
Operating Mode: 2D
TIS
Non-scan
Aaprt1 Aaprt>1
--
--
TIB
Nonscan
--
33.9
--
--
--
--
--
--
--
5.10
--
--
--
3.8
--
--
--
0.8
--
--
--
--
10
--
--
5
--
--
6 MHz Off
TIC 1.0 84.0
3.37 4.1 0.8
10 5 8 MHz On
FC1 User Guide
Acoustic output tables 595
Table 10-52: Transducer Model: C35xp
Index Label
M.I.
Other Information
Associated Acoustic Parameter
Global Maximum Index Value pr.3 W0 min of [W.3(z1),ITA.3(z1)] z1 zbp zsp z@Pll.3max deq(zsp) fc
Dim of Aaprt
PD PRF pr@PIImax deq@Pllmax
Focal Length
IPA.3@MImax Control 1: Frequency Control 2: THI Control 3: Control 4: Control 5:
1.0 (MPa) 1.89
(mW)
(mW)
(cm)
(cm)
(cm)
3.3
(cm)
(MHz) 3.57
X (cm) Y (cm)
(sec) 0.37 (Hz) 250
(MPa) 2.64
(cm)
FLx (cm) FLy (cm) (W/cm2)
239.3
8 MHz On
Operating Control
Conditions
Scan 0.6
Operating Mode: 2D/M
TIS
Non-scan
Aaprt1 Aaprt>1
--
0.1
TIB
Nonscan 0.2
25.3
--
3.9
4.3
2.1
2.2
3.1
0.25
5.39
--
3.42 3.57
3.7
--
2.0
1.0
0.8
--
0.8
0.8
0.24
10
--
10
5
--
5
8 MHz Off
8 MHz 8 MHz
On
On
TIC 1.1 85.0
3.38 4.1 0.8
10 5 8 MHz On
596 Acoustic output tables
Chapter 10
Table 10-53: Transducer Model: C35xp
Operating Mode: 2D/Color
TIS
Index Label
M.I.
Non-scan
Scan Aaprt1 Aaprt>1
Global Maximum Index Value
1.0
0.9
--
--
Associated Acoustic Parameter
pr.3
(MPa) 1.82
W0
(mW)
45.2
--
min of [W.3(z1),ITA.3(z1)]
(mW)
--
z1
(cm)
--
zbp
(cm)
--
zsp
(cm)
z@Pll.3max
3.3
deq(zsp)
(cm)
fc
(MHz) 3.58 4.56
--
--
Dim of Aaprt
X (cm) Y (cm)
2.7
--
--
0.8
--
--
PD
(sec) 0.37
PRF
(Hz) 2500
Other Information
pr@PIImax
(MPa) 2.68
deq@Pllmax
(cm)
Focal Length
FLx (cm) FLy (cm)
10
--
--
5
--
--
IPA.3@MImax
(W/cm2) 234.7
Control 1: 2D Frequency/THI
8 MHz / 8 MHz /
On
On
Control 2: Color Frequency
3.64 MHz 4.71 MHz
Control 3: Color Box Size
Narrow Narrow
Control 4: Color PRF
2500 Hz 13158 Hz
Control 5:
TIB
Non-
TIC
scan
--
1.4
--
100.6
--
--
--
4.56
--
2.7
--
0.8
-- 10 5
8 MHz / On
4.71 MHz Narrow 13158 Hz
Operating Control
Conditions
FC1 User Guide
Acoustic output tables 597
Table 10-54: Transducer Model: C35xp
Index Label
M.I. Scan
Global Maximum Index Value
0.7
--
pr.3
(MPa) 1.52
W0
(mW)
--
min of [W.3(z1),ITA.3(z1)]
(mW)
Associated Acoustic Parameter
z1
(cm)
zbp
(cm)
zsp
(cm)
z@Pll.3max
3.0
deq(zsp)
(cm)
fc
(MHz) 4.58
--
Dim of Aaprt
X (cm)
--
Y (cm)
--
PD
(sec) 0.64
PRF
(Hz) 3125
Other Information
pr@PIImax
(MPa) 2.30
deq@Pllmax
(cm)
Focal Length
FLx (cm)
--
FLy (cm)
--
IPA.3@MImax
(W/cm2) 132.9
Control 1: Frequency
4.71 MHz
Control 2: PRF
3125 Hz
Control 3: Sample Volume Position 4.0 cm
Control 4:
Control 5:
Operating Control
Conditions
Operating Mode: PW Doppler
TIS
TIB
Non-scan
Non-
TIC
Aaprt1 Aaprt>1 scan
--
0.7
1.5
1.4
--
41.7 80.0
34.3
1.9
1.8
3.1
0.23
--
4.52 4.66 4.61
--
1.5
0.8
2.0
--
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.22
--
7
10
--
5
5
4.71 MHz 4.71 MHz 4.71 MHz 5000 Hz 9091 Hz 5000 Hz 7.0 cm 4.0 cm 10 cm
598 Acoustic output tables
Chapter 10
Table 10-55: Transducer Model: C35xp
Operating Mode: 2D/PW Doppler
TIS
TIB
Index Label
M.I.
Scan
Non-scan Aaprt1 Aaprt>1
Nonscan
TIC
Global Maximum Index Value
0.9
0.7
--
0.6
1.5
1.3
Associated Acoustic Parameter
pr.3
(MPa) 1.75
W0
(mW)
27.2
--
40.4 75.9
min of [W.3(z1),ITA.3(z1)]
(mW)
27.5
z1
(cm)
1.9
zbp
(cm)
1.8
zsp
(cm)
3.4
z@Pll.3max
3.3
deq(zsp)
(cm)
0.25
fc
(MHz) 3.65 5.43
--
4.52 3.63 4.61
Dim of Aaprt
X (cm) Y (cm)
3.6
--
1.5
1.1
2.0
0.8
--
0.8
0.8
0.8
PD
(sec) 0.38
PRF
(Hz) 474
Other Information
pr@PIImax
(MPa) 1.93
deq@Pllmax
(cm)
0.24
Focal Length
FLx (cm)
9
--
7
10
FLy (cm)
5
--
5
5
IPA.3@MImax
(W/cm2) 193.4
Control 1: 2D Frequency / THI
8 MHz / 6 MHZ /
On
Off
6 MHz / 8 MHz / 8 MHz /
Off
On
Off
Control 2: PW Frequency
4.71 MHz 3.64 MHz
4.71 MHz 3.64 MHz 4.71 MHz
Control 3: PW PRF
3125 Hz 2000 Hz
5000 Hz 3125 Hz 5000 Hz
Control 4: PW Sample Volume Position
4.0 cm 9.0 cm
7.0 cm 5.0 cm 10 cm
Control 5:
Operating Control
Conditions
FC1 User Guide
Acoustic output tables 599
Table 10-56: Transducer Model: C35xp
Operating Mode: 2D/Color/PW Doppler (Triplex)
TIS
TIB
Index Label
M.I.
Scan
Non-scan Aaprt1 Aaprt>1
Nonscan
TIC
Global Maximum Index Value
0.9
0.3
--
0.6
1.2
1.5
Associated Acoustic Parameter
pr.3
(MPa) 1.75
W0
(mW)
12.6
--
32.6 90.3
min of [W.3(z1),ITA.3(z1)]
(mW)
27.5
z1
(cm)
1.9
zbp
(cm)
1.8
zsp
(cm)
3.1
z@Pll.3max
3.3
deq(zsp)
(cm)
0.23
fc
(MHz) 3.65 4.59
--
4.52 4.66 4.61
Dim of Aaprt
X (cm) Y (cm)
2.7
--
1.5
0.8
2.0
0.8
--
0.8
0.8
0.8
PD
(sec) 0.38
PRF
(Hz) 290
Other Information
pr@PIImax
(MPa) 1.93
deq@Pllmax
(cm)
0.22
Focal Length
FLx (cm)
10
--
7
10
FLy (cm)
5
--
5
5
IPA.3@MImax
(W/cm2) 193.4
Control 1: 2D Frequency / THI
8 MHZ / 8 MHz /
On
Off
6 MHz / 8 MHz / 8 MHz /
Off
On
Off
Control 2: Color Frequency
3.64 MHz 4.71 MHz
3.64 MHz 3.64 MHz 4.71 MHz
Control 3: PW Frequency
4.71 MHz 4.71 MHz
3.64 MHz 3.64 MHz 4.71 MHz
Control 4: PW PRF
3125 Hz 5000 Hz
5000 Hz 9091 Hz 5000 Hz
Control 5: PW Sample Volume Position
4.0 cm 10 cm
7.0 cm 4.0 cm 10 cm
Operating Control
Conditions
600 Acoustic output tables
Chapter 10
Terms used in the acoustic output tables
Table 10-57: Acoustic output terms and definitions
Term
Definition
Ispta.3 TI type
Derated spatial peak, temporal average intensity in units of milliwatts/cm2. Applicable thermal index for the transducer, imaging mode, and exam type.
TI value Thermal index value for the transducer, imaging mode, and exam type.
MI
Ipa.3@MIm ax
Mechanical index. Derated pulse average intensity at the maximum MI in units of W/cm2.
(Soft-tissue thermal index) is a thermal index related to soft tissues. TIS scan is the soft-tissue
TIS
thermal index in an auto-scanning mode. TIS non-scan is the soft-tissue thermal index in the
non-autoscanning mode.
(Bone thermal index) is a thermal index for applications in which the ultrasound beam
TIB
passes through soft tissue, and a focal region is in the immediate vicinity of bone. TIB non-
scan is the bone thermal index in the non-autoscanning mode.
TIC
(Cranial bone thermal index) is the thermal index for applications in which the ultrasound beam passes through bone near the beam entrance into the body.
Aaprt
Area of the active aperture measured in cm2.
Pr.3
Derated peak rarefactional pressure associated with the transmit pattern, giving rise to the value reported under MI (megapascals).
Wo
Ultrasonic power, except for TISscan, in which case it is the ultrasonic power passing through a one-centimeter window in units of milliwatts.
W.3(z1) ISPTA.3(z1)
Derated ultrasonic power at axial distance z1 in units of milliwatts.
Derated spatial-peak temporal-average intensity at axial distance z1 (milliwatts per square centimeter).
z1
Axial distance corresponding to the location of maximum [min(W.3(z), ITA.3(z) x 1 cm2)], where z > zbp in centimeters.
zbp
1.69
in centimeters.
zsp
For MI, the axial distance at which pr.3 is measured. For TIB, the axial distance at which TIB is a global maximum (for example, zsp = zb.3) in centimeters.
FC1 User Guide
Terms used in the acoustic output tables 601
Table 10-57: Acoustic output terms and definitions
Term
Definition
deq(z) fc Dim. of Aaprt PD
PRF
pr@PIImax
deq@PIImax
FL
Equivalent beam diameter as a function of axial distance z, and equal to
,
where ITA(z) is the temporal-average intensity as a function of z in centimeters.
Center frequency in MHz.
Active aperture dimensions for the azimuthal (x) and elevational (y) planes in centimeters.
Pulse duration (microseconds) associated with the transmit pattern, giving rise to the reported value of MI.
Pulse repetition frequency associated with the transmit pattern, giving rise to the reported value of MI in Hertz.
Peak rarefactional pressure at the point where the free-field, spatial-peak pulse intensity integral is a maximum in megapascals.
Equivalent beam diameter at the point where the free-field, spatial-peak pulse intensity integral is a maximum in centimeters.
Focal length, or azimuthal (x) and elevational (y) lengths; if different, measured in centimeters.
Acoustic measurement precision and uncertainty
All table entries have been obtained at the same operating conditions that give rise to the maximum index value in the first column of the table. Measurement precision and uncertainty for power, pressure, intensity, and other quantities that are used to derive the values in the acoustic output table are shown in the table below. In accordance with Section 6.4 of the Output Display Standard, the following measurement precision and uncertainty values are determined by making repeated measurements and stating the standard deviation as a percentage.
Table 10-58: Acoustic measurement precision and uncertainty
Quantity
Pr Pr.3 Wo fc
Precision (% of standard deviation)
1.9% 1.9% 3.4% 0.1%
Uncertainty (95% confidence)
+11.2% +12.2% +10% +4.7%
602 Acoustic measurement precision and uncertainty
Chapter 10
Table 10-58: Acoustic measurement precision and uncertainty
Quantity
PII PII.3
Precision (% of standard deviation)
3.2% 3.2%
Uncertainty (95% confidence)
+12.5 to -16.8% +13.47 to -17.5%
Terms
For ultrasound terms not included in this glossary, see Recommended ultrasound terminology, Third Edition, published in 2011 by the American Institute of Ultrasound in Medicine (AIUM).
Table 10-59: Terms and definitions
Terms
Definitions
as low as reasonably achievable (ALARA)
The guiding principle of ultrasound use, which states that you should keep patient exposure to ultrasound energy as low as is reasonably achievable for diagnostic results.
caliper
One of the points used to define a measurement.
curved array transducer
Identified by the letter C (curved or curvilinear) and a number (60). The number corresponds to the radius of curvature of the array expressed in millimeters. The transducer elements are electrically configured to control the characteristics and direction of the acoustic beam. For example, C60xf.
depth in situ LCD
Refers to the depth of the display. A constant speed of sound of 1530 meters/ second is assumed in the calculation of echo position in the image.
In the natural or original position.
Liquid crystal display.
linear array transducer
Identified by the letter L (linear) and a number (38). The number corresponds to the radius of width of the array, expressed in millimeters. The transducer elements are electrically configured to control the characteristics and direction of the acoustic beam. For example, L38xp.
mechanical index (MI)
An indication of the likelihood of mechanical bioeffects occurring: the higher the MI, the greater the likelihood of mechanical bioeffects.
MI/TI NTSC
See mechanical index (MI) above and Thermal index (TI) below in this list.
National Television Standards Committee. A video format setting. See also PAL below in this list.
FC1 User Guide
Terms 603
Table 10-59: Terms and definitions
Terms
Definitions
PAL
Phase Alternating Line. A video format setting. See also NTSC above in this list.
phased array
A transducer designed primarily for cardiac scanning. Forms a sector image by electronically steering the beam direction and focus.
skinline
A depth on the display that corresponds to the skin/transducer interface.
Tissue Doppler Imaging A pulsed-wave Doppler technique used to detect myocardial motion.
thermal index (TI)
The ratio of total acoustic power to the acoustic power required to raise tissue temperature by 1°C under defined assumptions.
A thermal index for applications in which the ultrasound beam passes through
TIB (bone thermal index)
soft tissue and a focal region is in the immediate vicinity of bone.
TIC (cranial bone thermal index)
A thermal index for applications in which the ultrasound beam passes through bone near the beam entrance into the body.
TIS (soft tissue thermal index)
A thermal index related to soft tissues.
Tissue Harmonic Imaging
Transmits at one frequency and receives at a higher harmonic frequency to reduce noise and clutter and improve resolution.
transducer
A device that transforms one form of energy into another form of energy. Ultrasound transducers contain piezoelectric elements, which when excited electrically, emit acoustic energy. When the acoustic energy is transmitted into the body, it travels until it encounters an interface, or change in tissue properties. At the interface, an echo is formed that returns to the transducer, where this acoustic energy is transformed into electrical energy, processed, and displayed as anatomical information.
variance
Displays a variation in Color Doppler flow imaging within a given sample. Variance is mapped to the color green and is used to detect turbulence.
604 Terms
Chapter 10
Abbreviations
Table 10-60: Abbreviations in user interface
Abbreviation Definition
+/× A A PG A2Cd A2Cs A4Cd A4Cs AAA AAo Abd abs AC ACA ACC ACO ACoA Adur AFI AI AI PHT AL Ann D ANT F ANT N
"+" Caliper/"×" Caliper Ratio "A" Wave Peak Velocity "A" Wave Peak Pressure Gradient Apical 2 Chamber diastolic Apical 2 Chamber systolic Apical 4 Chamber diastolic Apical 4 Chamber systolic Abdominal Aortic Aneurysm Ascending Aorta Abdomen absolute value Abdominal Circumference Anterior Cerebral Artery Acceleration Index Automatic Cardiac Output Anterior Communicating Artery "A" wave duration Amniotic Fluid Index Aortic Insufficiency Aortic Insufficiency Pressure Half Time Atlas Loop Annulus Diameter Anterior Far Anterior Near
FC1 User Guide
Abbreviations 605
Table 10-60: Abbreviations in user interface
Abbreviation Ao AoD Apical APTD AT
AUA
AV AV Area AVA BA Bifur BP BPD BPM Bre BSA CCA CI CM CO CPD Crd CRL
Definition Aorta Aortic Root Diameter Apical View Anteroposterior Trunk Diameter Acceleration (Deceleration) Time Average Ultrasound Age Calculated by averaging the individual ultrasound ages for the fetal biometry measurements performed during the exam. The measurements used to determine the AUA are based on the selected OB calculation authors. Aortic Valve Aortic Valve Area Aortic Valve Area Basilar Artery Bifurcation Blood Pressure Biparietal Diameter Beats per Minute Breast Body Surface Area Common Carotid Artery Cardiac Index Cisterna Magna Cardiac Output Color Power Doppler Cardiac Crown Rump Length
606 Abbreviations
Chapter 10
Table 10-60: Abbreviations in user interface
Abbreviation CW CxLen D DCCA DECA DICA Dist dP/dt E E PG E/A E/e' ECA ECG ECICA ECVA EDD
EDD by AUA
EDD by LMP
EDV EF EF slope
Definition Continuous Wave Doppler Cervix Length Diameter Distal Common Carotid Artery Distal External Carotid Artery Distal Internal Carotid Artery Distal Delta Pressure: Delta Time "E" Wave Peak Velocity "E" Wave Peak Pressure Gradient E:A Ratio E velocity = Mitral Valve E velocity divided by the annular e' velocity External Carotid Artery Electrocardiogram Extracranial Internal Carotid Artery Extracranial Vertebral Artery Estimated Date of Delivery Estimated Date of Delivery by Average Ultrasound Age The estimated date of delivery calculated from the measurements performed during the exam. Estimated Date of Delivery by Last Menstrual Period The due date calculated from the user-entered LMP. End Diastolic Velocity Ejection Fraction E-F Slope
FC1 User Guide
Abbreviations 607
Table 10-60: Abbreviations in user interface
Abbreviation
EFW
Endo Epi EPSS
Estab. DD
ET FH FHR FL FM (Right and Left) FTA GA GA by LMP
GA by LMPd
Gate GS Gyn HC HL
Definition
Estimated Fetal Weight Calculated from the measurements performed during the exam. The measurements used to determine EFW are defined by the currently selected EFW calculation author. Endocardial Epicardial "E" Point Septal Separation Established Due Date A user-entered due date based on previous exam data or other available information. The LMP is derived from the Established Due Date and is listed in the patient report as LMPd. Elapsed Time Femoral Head Fetal Heart Rate Femur Length
Foramen Magnum (same as SO)
Fetal Trunk Area Gestational Age Gestational Age by Last Menstrual Period The fetal age calculated using the date of the Last Menstrual Period (LMP). Gestational Age by derived Last Menstrual Period The fetal age calculated using the Last Menstrual Period (LMPd) derived from the Estab. DD. Depth of Doppler Gate Gestational Sac Gynecology Head Circumference Humerus Length
608 Abbreviations
Chapter 10
Table 10-60: Abbreviations in user interface
Abbreviation HR ICA IMT IVRT IVS IVSd IVSFT IVSs LA LA/Ao LAT F LAT N Lat V
LMP
LMPd
LV LV Area LV mass LV Volume LVd LVD LVDd LVDFS LVDs
Definition Heart Rate Internal Carotid Artery Intima Media Thickness Iso Volumic Relaxation Time Interventricular Septum Interventricular Septum Thickness, End Diastole Interventricular Septum Fractional Thickening Interventricular Septum Thickness, End Systole Left Atrium Left Atrium/Aorta Ratio Lateral Far Lateral Near Lateral Ventricle Last Menstrual Period The first day of the last menstrual period. Used to calculate gestational age and EDD. derived Last Menstrual Period Calculated from the user-entered Estab. DD. Left Ventricular Left Ventricular Area Left Ventricular mass Left Ventricular Volume Left Ventricular diastolic Left Ventricular Dimension Left Ventricular Dimension, End Diastole Left Ventricular Dimension Fractional Shortening Left Ventricular Dimension, End Systole
FC1 User Guide
Abbreviations 609
Table 10-60: Abbreviations in user interface
Abbreviation LVEDV LVESV LVET LVO LVOT LVOT Area LVOT D LVOT VTI LVPW LVPWd LVPWFT LVPWs LVs MCA MCCA MECA MI MICA Mid MM MR PISA MR/VTI Msk MV MV Area
Definition Left Ventricular End Diastolic Volume Left Ventricular End Systolic Volume Left Ventricular Ejection Time Left Ventricular Opacification Left Ventricular Outflow Tract Left Ventricular Outflow Tract Area Left Ventricular Outflow Tract Diameter Left Ventricular Outflow Tract Velocity Time Integral Left Ventricular Posterior Wall Left Ventricular Posterior Wall Thickness, End Diastole Left Ventricular Posterior Wall Fractional Thickening Left Ventricular Posterior Wall Thickness, End Systole Left Ventricular systolic Middle Cerebral Artery Mid Common Carotid Artery Mid External Carotid Artery Mechanical Index Mid Internal Carotid Artery Middle M Mode Mitral Regurgitation Proximal Iso Velocity Surface Area Mitral Regurgitation/Velocity Time Integral Musculoskeletal Mitral Valve Mitral Valve Area
610 Abbreviations
Chapter 10
Table 10-60: Abbreviations in user interface
Abbreviation Definition
MV Regurgitant Fraction
Mitral Valve Regurgitant Fraction
MV Regurgitant Volume
Mitral Valve Regurgitant Volume
MV/VTI
Mitral Valve/Velocity Time Integral
MVA
Mitral Valve Area
MV ERO
Mitral Valve Effective Regurgitant Orifice
MV PISA Area Mitral Valve Proximal Iso Velocity Surface Area
MV Rate
Mitral Valve Rate
Neo
Neonatal
Nrv
Nerve
NST
Non-stress test
NTSC
National Television Standards Committee
OB
Obstetrical
OFD
Occipital Frontal Diameter
PAL
Phase Alternating Line
PCAp
Posterior Cerebral Artery Peak
PCCA
Proximal Common Carotid Artery
PCoA
Posterior Communicating Artery
PECA
Proximal External Carotid Artery
PGmax
Maximum Pressure Gradient
PGmean
Mean Pressure Gradient
PGr
Pressure Gradient
PHT
Pressure Half Time
PI
Pulsatility Index
PICA
Proximal Internal Carotid Artery
FC1 User Guide
Abbreviations 611
Table 10-60: Abbreviations in user interface
Abbreviation PISA Plaq POST F POST N PRF Prox PSV PV P. Vein PW Qp/Qs RA RI RVD RVDd RVDs RVOT D RVOT VTI RVSP RVW RVWd RVWs S/D SFV SI
Definition Proximal Isovelocity Surface Area Plaque Posterior Far Posterior Near Pulse Repetition Frequency Proximal Peak Systolic Velocity Pulmonic Valve Pulmonary Vein Pulsed Wave Doppler Pulmonary blood flow divided by systemic blood flow Right Atrial (pressure) Resistance Index Right Ventricular Dimension Right Ventricular Diameter, Diastole Right Ventricular Diameter, Systole Right Ventricular Outflow Tract Diameter Right Ventricular Outflow Tract Velocity Time Integral Right Ventricular Systolic Pressure Right Ventricular Free Wall Right Ventricular Free Wall, Diastole Right Ventricular Free Wall, Systole Systolic/Diastolic Ratio Superficial Femoral Vein Stroke Index
612 Abbreviations
Chapter 10
Table 10-60: Abbreviations in user interface
Abbreviation Siphon SM SmP SO Sup SV TAM TAP
TCD
TDI THI TI TICA TRmax TT TTD TV TVA
UA
Umb A VA Vert A Vas Ven
Definition Siphon (internal carotid artery) Submandibular Small Parts Suboccipital Superficial Stroke Volume Time Average Mean Time Average Peak Trans-cerebellum Diameter (OB measurement) Transcranial Doppler (exam type) Tissue Doppler Imaging Tissue Harmonic Imaging Thermal Index Terminal Internal Carotid Artery Tricuspid Regurgitation (peak velocity) Transtemporal Transverse Trunk Diameter Tricuspid Valve Tricuspid Valve Area Ultrasound Age Calculated on the mean measurements taken for a particular fetal biometry Umbilical Artery Vertebral Artery Vertebral Artery Vascular Venous
FC1 User Guide
Abbreviations 613
Table 10-60: Abbreviations in user interface
Abbreviation VF Vmax Vmean Vol VTI YS
Definition Volume Flow Peak Velocity Mean Velocity Volume Velocity Time Integral Yolk Sac
614 Abbreviations
Chapter 10
CHAPTER 11
Chapter 11: IT network
Functions
This device can be connected to an IT network to perform the following functions. The examination data (still images, clips) acquired with this device can be stored in PACS
(Picture Archiving and Communication System) by DICOM communication. This device can receive examination orders from HIS (Hospital Information System)/RIS
(Radiology Information System) by DICOM communication and start them. The time of this device can be set correctly by checking the NTP server that is based on
NTP (Network Time Protocol).
Network for connecting the device
To ensure safety, use an IT network that is isolated from the external environment by a firewall.
Specification for the connection
Hardware specification
Specification: 100BASE-TX/10BASE-T Connector: RJ45 Connection cable: UTP type, straight LAN cable, Category 5/5e (CAT 5/5E)
Software specification
This device is connected to PACS and HIS/RIS by DICOM standard. Refer to the DICOM Conformance Statement of this device for details.
This device is connected to NTP server by NTP (RFC 5905). The time acquisition from NTP server is done every time at startup of this device.
Functions 615
Security
This device uses the following ports in the application level (the seventh layer of OSI model). All other ports are closed.
Port for DICOM communication
It is the port number specified in the system setting by user.
Port for the device maintenance
TCP/22222, TCP/50100 and TPC/55555. How to use these ports is undisclosed and inadvertent access from the outside is prevented by use of ID/Password/Special-protocol.
This device prevents users from loading software and executing it. Software that is not within the specification of this device, such as Web browser and e-mail is not installed in this device. The anti-virus software is not installed in this device.
Data flow
1 DICOM
HIS/RIS -----------------------> FC1 --------------------------> PACS
Study order
Study data
(DICOM MWL)
(DICOM Storage)
*Please refer to the DICOM Conformance Statement for FC1 for details.
2 NTP
Time inquiry ---------------------> FC1 <--------------------Time Response
NTP Server
616 Data flow
Chapter 11
Measures when failures occur in IT networks
Connection to an IT Network may become at times unreliable, and this may lead to failure to perform the functions described in section 21.1. As a result, the following hazardous situations may occur:
Table 11-1: Network failure risks and mitigation
Failure of the ITNetwork
Impact on the equipment
Hazardous Situation
Countermeasures of FC1 (for your reference)
IT-Network has become unstable.
IT-Network has become unstable.
IT-Network has become unstable.
Unable to transmit exam data to a PACS.
Delay of transmission of exam data to a PACS.
Delay of diagnosis.
Incorrect data to a PACS.
Misdiagnosis
Unable to get order data from a HIS/RIS.
Delay of getting order data from a HIS/RIS.
Delay of exam.
Incorrect data from a HIS/RIS.
Incorrect exam.
Unable to get the time from an NTP server.
Incorrect exam data
Incorrect time data.
FC1 has internal memory and exam data is stored in it. After IT-Network has returned to stable, FC1 will start to transmit exam data automatically.
FC1 uses TCP/IP and DICOM Protocol. Integrity of the data is ensured by them.
FC1 has capability of entering order data by itself.
FC1 uses TCP/IP and DICOM Protocol. Integrity of the data is ensured by them.
FC1 has capability of entering data and time by itself.
FC1 always indicates the date and the time on the main screen.
FC1 User Guide
Measures when failures occur in IT networks 617
Table 11-1: Network failure risks and mitigation
Failure of the ITNetwork
Firewall has broken down.
Impact on the equipment
Attack via network. Infection by computer viruses.
Hazardous Situation
Manipulation of exam data. Leak of exam data.
Countermeasures of FC1 (for your reference)
FC1 closes unnecessary network ports.
FC1 protects network ports for device maintenance purpose by dedicated network protocol, ID and password.
FC1 prevent a user from loading software and executing it.
Warnings and cautions for IT networks
WARNING WARNING
Connection of equipment to an IT network that includes other systems, could result in previously unidentified risks to patients, operators or third parties. Before connecting the equipment to an uncontrolled IT Network, make sure that all potential risks resulting from such connections, were identified and evaluated, and suitable countermeasures were put in place. IEC 80001-1:2010 provides guidance for addressing these risks.
When the setting of the IT network to which this device is connected has been changed, check that the change does not affect this device and take measures if necessary. Changes to the IT network include: Changes in network configuration (IP address, router, etc.)
Connection of additional items
Disconnection of items
Update of equipment
Upgrade of equipment
Any changes to the IT network could introduce new risks requiring additional evaluation to be performed.
618 Warnings and cautions for IT networks
Chapter 11
FC1 User Guide
Warnings and cautions for IT networks 619
P18536-07
*P18536-07*
Acrobat Distiller 9.5.5 (Windows)